Omron Varispeed G7 Inverter Instruction Manual

Manual No.
TOE-S616-60.2
VARISPEED G7
General purpose inverter (Advanced Vector Control)
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
YASKAWA
Varispeed G7
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GENERAL PURPOSE INVERTER (ADVANCED VECTOR CONTROL)
MODEL: CIMR-G7C
200V CLASS 0.4 to 110kW (1.2 to 160kVA)
400V CLASS 0.4 to 300kW (1.2 to 460kVA)
Upon receipt of the product and prior to initial operation, read these instructions
thoroughly, and retain for future reference.
YASKAWA
MANUAL NO. TOE-S616-60.2
Preface
This manual is designed to ensure correct and suitable
application of Varispeed G7-Series Inverters. Read
this manual before attempting to install, operate, maintain, or inspect an Inverter and keep it in a safe, convenient location for future reference. Before you
understand all precautions and safety information
before attempting application.
General Precautions
• The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details.
Be sure to restore covers or shields before operating the Units and run the Units according to the
instructions described in this manual.
• Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only
and may not apply to all products to which this manual is applicable.
• The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the
manual may be changed without notice to improve the product and/or the manual.
• When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office and provide the manual number shown on the front
cover.
• If nameplates become warn or damaged, order new ones from your Yaskawa representatives or
the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
i
Safety Information
The following conventions are used to indicate precautions in this manual. Failure to heed precautions provided in this manual can result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or damage to
the products or to related equipment and systems.
Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury.
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor injury, damage
to the product, or faulty operation.
Failure to heed a precaution classified as a caution can result in serious consequences depending
on the situation.
Indicates important information that should be memorized.
IMPORTANT
ii
Safety Precautions
Confirmations upon Delivery
CAUTION
• Never install an Inverter that is damaged or missing components.
Doing so can result in injury.
Installation
CAUTION
• Always hold the case when carrying the Inverter.
If the Inverter is held by the front cover, the main body of the Inverter may fall, possibly resulting in injury.
• Attach the Inverter to a metal or other noncombustible material.
Fire can result if the Inverter is attached to a combustible material.
• Install a cooling fan or other cooling device when installing more than one Inverter in the same
enclosure so that the temperature of the air entering the Inverters is below 45°C.
Overheating can result in fires or other accidents.
Wiring
WARNING
• Always turn OFF the input power supply before wiring terminals.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
• Wiring must be performed by an authorized person qualified in electrical work.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
• Be sure to ground the ground terminal. (200 V class: Ground to 100 Ω or less, 400 V class: Ground
to 10 Ω or less)
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
• Always check the operation of any emergency stop circuits after they are wired.
Otherwise, there is the possibility of injury. (Wiring is the responsibility of the user.)
• Never touch the output terminals directly with your hands or allow the output lines to come into contact with the Inverter case. Never short the output circuits.
Otherwise, an electric shock or ground short can occur.
CAUTION
• Check to be sure that the voltage of the main AC power supply satisfies the rated voltage of the
Inverter.
Injury or fire can occur if the voltage is not correct.
• Do not perform voltage withstand tests on the Inverter.
Otherwise, semiconductor elements and other devices can be damaged.
• Connect braking resistors, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units as shown in the I/O wiring
examples.
Otherwise, a fire can occur.
• Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Otherwise, a fire may occur.
• Do not connect AC power to output terminals U, V, and W.
The interior parts of the Inverter will be damaged if voltage is applied to the output terminals.
• Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits.
The Inverter can be damaged or internal parts burnt if these devices are connected.
iii
CAUTION
• Do not connect electromagnetic switches or contactors to the output circuits.
If a load is connected while the Inverter is operating, surge current will cause the overcurrent protection circuit inside the
Inverter to operate.
Setting User Constants
CAUTION
• Disconnect the load (machine, device) from the motor before performing rotational autotuning.
The motor may turn, possibly resulting in injury or damage to equipment. Also, motor constants cannot be correctly set
with the motor attached to a load.
• Stay clear of the motor during rotational autotuning.
The motor may start operating suddenly when stopped, possibly resulting in injury.
Trial Operation
WARNING
• Check to be sure that the front cover is attached before turning ON the power supply.
An electric shock may occur.
• Do not come close to the machine when the fault reset function is used. If the alarmed is cleared,
the machine may start moving suddenly.
Also, design the machine so that human safety is ensured even when it is restarted.
Injury may occur.
• Provide a separate emergency stop switch; the Digital Operator STOP Key is valid only when its
function is set.
Injury may occur.
• Reset alarms only after confirming that the RUN signal is OFF.
Injury may occur.
CAUTION
• Don't touch the radiation fins (heatsink), braking resistor, or Braking Resistor Unit. These can
become very hot.
Otherwise, a burn injury may occur.
• Be sure that the motor and machine is within the applicable ranges before starting operation.
Otherwise, an injury may occur.
• Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
Always construct the external sequence to confirm that the holding brake is activated in the event
of an emergency, a power failure, or an abnormality in the Inverter.
Failure to observe this caution can result in injury.
• If using an Inverter with an elevator, take safety measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator
from dropping.
Failure to observe this caution can result in injury.
• Don't check signals while the Inverter is running.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
• Be careful when changing Inverter settings. The Inverter is factory set to suitable settings.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
iv
Maintenance and Inspection
WARNING
• Do not touch the Inverter terminals. Some of the terminals carry high voltages and are extremely
dangerous.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
• Always have the protective cover in place when power is being supplied to the Inverter. When
attaching the cover, always turn OFF power to the Inverter through the MCCB.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
• After turning OFF the main circuit power supply, wait until the CHARGE indicator light goes out
before performance maintenance or inspections.
The capacitor will remain charged and is dangerous.
• Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel.
Remove all metal objects, such as watches and rings, before starting work. Always use grounded tools.
Failure to heed these warning can result in electric shock.
CAUTION
• A CMOS IC is used in the control board. Handle the control board and CMOS IC carefully. The
CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly.
The CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly.
• Do not change the wiring, or remove connectors or the Digital Operator, during operation.
Doing so can result in personal injury.
Other
WARNING
• Do not attempt to modify or alter the Inverter.
Doing so can result in electrical shock or injury.
v
Warning Information and Position
There is warning information on the Inverter in the position shown in the following illustration.
Always heed the warnings.
Warning
information
position
Warning
information
position
Illustration shows the CIMR-G7C2018
Illustration shows the CIMR-G7C20P4
Warning Information
! WARNING
Risk of electric shock.
ŸRead manual before installing.
ŸWait 5 minutes for capacitor discharge
after disconnecting power supply.
! AVERTISSEMENT
'
'
Risque de decharge electrique.
ŸLire le manuel avant l' installation.
'
ŸAttendre 5 minutes apres
la coupure
l' allmentation.
Pour permettre la
'
decharge des condensateurs.
!
vi
de
Registered Trademarks
The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.
• DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association,
Inc.).
• InterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co.
• ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.
• LONworks is a registered trademark of the Echolon.
vii
viii
Contents
1
Handling Inverters .................................................................. 1-1
Varispeed G7 Introduction ............................................................................1-2
Varispeed G7 Models ..................................................................................................... 1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery ........................................................................1-3
Checks............................................................................................................................ 1-3
Nameplate Information ................................................................................................... 1-3
Component Names......................................................................................................... 1-5
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions...............................................................1-7
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00) ....................................................................................... 1-7
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1 Type 1) ....................................................... 1-7
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ..............................................1-9
Installation Site ............................................................................................................... 1-9
Controlling the Ambient Temperature ............................................................................. 1-9
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter.................................................................... 1-9
Installation Orientation and Space..............................................................1-10
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............................................. 1-11
Removing the Terminal Cover ...................................................................................... 1-11
Attaching the Terminal Cover........................................................................................ 1-11
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover ........................1-12
Inverters of 15 kW or Less............................................................................................1-12
Inverters of 18.5 kW or More ........................................................................................1-15
2
Wiring....................................................................................... 2-1
Connections to Peripheral Devices ..............................................................2-2
Connection Diagram .....................................................................................2-3
Terminal Block Configuration........................................................................2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals .......................................................................2-6
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors ...................................................... 2-6
Main Circuit Terminal Functions ...................................................................................2-11
Main Circuit Configurations...........................................................................................2-12
Standard Connection Diagrams.................................................................................... 2-13
Wiring the Main Circuits................................................................................................2-14
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals .................................................................2-20
Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors ......................................................................2-20
Control Circuit Terminal Functions ...............................................................................2-22
Control Circuit Terminal Connections ...........................................................................2-26
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions................................................................................2-27
ix
Wiring Check.............................................................................................. 2-28
Checks ......................................................................................................................... 2-28
Installing and Wiring Option Cards............................................................. 2-29
3
Option Card Models and Specifications ....................................................................... 2-29
Installation .................................................................................................................... 2-29
PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications................................................. 2-30
Wiring ........................................................................................................................... 2-32
Wiring Terminal Blocks................................................................................................. 2-36
Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses ............................................................ 2-37
Digital Operator and Modes....................................................3-1
Digital Operator ............................................................................................ 3-2
Digital Operator Display ................................................................................................. 3-2
Digital Operator Keys ..................................................................................................... 3-2
Modes .......................................................................................................... 3-4
4
Inverter Modes ............................................................................................................... 3-4
Switching Modes ............................................................................................................ 3-5
Drive Mode ..................................................................................................................... 3-6
Quick Programming Mode.............................................................................................. 3-7
Advanced Programming Mode....................................................................................... 3-9
Verify Mode .................................................................................................................. 3-12
Autotuning Mode .......................................................................................................... 3-13
Trial Operation .........................................................................4-1
Trial Operation Procedure ............................................................................ 4-2
Trial Operation Procedures .......................................................................... 4-3
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 55 kW or Higher) 4-3
Power ON....................................................................................................................... 4-3
Checking the Display Status .......................................................................................... 4-4
Basic Settings................................................................................................................. 4-5
Settings for the Control Methods.................................................................................... 4-7
Autotuning ...................................................................................................................... 4-9
Application Settings ...................................................................................................... 4-14
No-load Operation ........................................................................................................ 4-14
Loaded Operation......................................................................................................... 4-14
Check and Recording User Constants ......................................................................... 4-15
Adjustment Suggestions ............................................................................ 4-16
5
User Constants ........................................................................5-1
User Constant Descriptions.......................................................................... 5-2
Description of User Constant Tables .............................................................................. 5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels........................................... 5-3
User Constants Settable in Quick Programming Mode.................................................. 5-4
x
User Constant Tables ...................................................................................5-8
6
A: Setup Settings ............................................................................................................ 5-8
Application Constants: b ............................................................................................... 5-10
Autotuning Constants: C............................................................................................... 5-20
Reference Constants: d ................................................................................................5-26
Motor Constant Constants: E........................................................................................5-32
Option Constants: F......................................................................................................5-38
Terminal Function Constants: H ...................................................................................5-45
Protection Function Constants: L..................................................................................5-57
N: Special Adjustments.................................................................................................5-67
Digital Operator Constants: o........................................................................................5-70
T: Motor Autotuning ......................................................................................................5-74
U: Monitor Constants ....................................................................................................5-75
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02) ...................................5-83
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04) ................................. 5-86
Constant Settings by Function.............................................. 6-1
Frequency Reference ...................................................................................6-2
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source ................................................................... 6-2
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation ................................................................................. 6-5
Run Command .............................................................................................6-7
Selecting the Run Command Source ............................................................................. 6-7
Stopping Methods.........................................................................................6-9
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Sent..................................... 6-9
Using the DC Injection Brake........................................................................................6-13
Using an Emergency Stop ............................................................................................6-14
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics...........................................6-15
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times ...............................................................6-15
Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function).....................................6-19
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration (Stall Prevention During
Acceleration Function) ..................................................................................................6-20
Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration (Stall Prevention During Deceleration
Function).......................................................................................................................6-22
Adjusting Frequency References ...............................................................6-24
Adjusting Analog Frequency References .....................................................................6-24
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function) ....................................... 6-27
Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs ...........................................6-29
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) ...................................6-30
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency ...........................................................................6-30
Limiting Minimum Frequency........................................................................................6-30
Improved Operating Efficiency ...................................................................6-32
Reducing Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function) ..............................6-32
Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Startup and Low-speed Operation
(Torque Compensation) ................................................................................................6-34
Hunting-prevention Function......................................................................................... 6-36
xi
Stabilizing Speed (Speed Feedback Detection Function) ............................................ 6-37
Machine Protection .................................................................................... 6-38
Reducing Noise and Leakage Current ......................................................................... 6-38
Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function) ............................................................ 6-41
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation ................................................................. 6-43
Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input .................. 6-44
Detecting Motor Torque ................................................................................................ 6-44
Changing Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Analog Input ....... 6-48
Motor Overload Protection ........................................................................................... 6-49
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time ..................................................................... 6-51
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs ....................................... 6-52
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction ................................................................................. 6-54
Continuing Operation ................................................................................. 6-55
Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored........................................................ 6-55
Speed Search............................................................................................................... 6-56
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost ........... 6-62
Restarting Operation After Transient Error (Auto Restart Function) ............................ 6-63
Inverter Protection ...................................................................................... 6-64
Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors............................. 6-64
Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels ......................................... 6-65
Input Terminal Functions ............................................................................ 6-66
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control Circuit
Terminals ...................................................................................................................... 6-66
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands)...................................................... 6-67
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold) ....... 6-68
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/DOWN) .... 6-69
Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Frequencies in the Analog References
(+/- Speed) ................................................................................................................... 6-72
Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing ........................................................... 6-73
Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card and Control Circuit
Terminals ...................................................................................................................... 6-73
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands (FJOG/RJOG) . 6-74
Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the Inverter
(External Fault Function) .............................................................................................. 6-75
Monitor Constants ...................................................................................... 6-76
Using the Analog Monitor Constants ............................................................................ 6-76
Using Pulse Train Monitor Contents............................................................................. 6-79
Individual Functions ................................................................................... 6-81
xii
Using MEMOBUS Communications............................................................................. 6-81
Using the Timer Function ............................................................................................. 6-93
Using PID Control......................................................................................................... 6-94
Energy-saving ............................................................................................................ 6-103
Setting Motor Constants............................................................................................. 6-105
Setting the V/f Pattern ................................................................................................ 6-107
Torque Control ........................................................................................................... 6-114
Speed Control (ASR) Structure .................................................................................. 6-122
Droop Control Function...............................................................................................6-127
Zero-servo Function....................................................................................................6-128
Digital Operator Functions ........................................................................6-132
Setting Digital Operator Functions..............................................................................6-132
Copying Constants .....................................................................................................6-135
Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator .............................................6-139
Setting a Password.....................................................................................................6-140
Displaying User-set Constants Only ...........................................................................6-141
Options .....................................................................................................6-142
7
Performing Speed Control with PG.............................................................................6-142
Using Digital Output Cards .........................................................................................6-146
Using an Analog Reference Card ...............................................................................6-148
Using a Digital Reference Card .................................................................................. 6-149
Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 7-1
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ............................................................7-2
Fault Detection................................................................................................................7-2
Alarm Detection .............................................................................................................. 7-9
Operation Errors ...........................................................................................................7-13
Errors During Autotuning .............................................................................................7-15
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function................................................7-16
Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................7-17
If Constant Constants Cannot Be Set ...........................................................................7-17
If the Motor Does Not Operate......................................................................................7-18
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed ........................................................ 7-19
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow ..................................7-20
If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference .......................................................7-20
If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision......................................7-20
If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in Open-loop Vector
Control Mode ................................................................................................................ 7-21
8
If Motor Deceleration is Slow ........................................................................................7-21
If the Motor Overheats ..................................................................................................7-22
If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio...........................7-22
If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run..............................7-23
If There is Mechanical Oscillation .................................................................................7-23
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped........................................7-24
If 0 V is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls.............................................7-24
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference ......................................7-24
Maintenance and Inspection.................................................. 8-1
Maintenance and Inspection.........................................................................8-2
Outline of Maintenance................................................................................................... 8-2
Daily Inspection .............................................................................................................. 8-2
Periodic Inspection ......................................................................................................... 8-2
xiii
Periodic Maintenance of Parts ....................................................................................... 8-3
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline ................................................................................. 8-4
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card........................................... 8-6
9
Specifications ..........................................................................9-1
Standard Inverter Specifications .................................................................. 9-2
Specifications by Model.................................................................................................. 9-2
Common Specifications.................................................................................................. 9-4
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices ....................................... 9-5
10
Appendix ................................................................................10-1
Varispeed G7 Control Modes ..................................................................... 10-2
Control Modes and Features........................................................................................ 10-2
Control Modes and Applications................................................................................... 10-5
Inverter Application Precautions ................................................................ 10-7
Selection....................................................................................................................... 10-7
Installation .................................................................................................................... 10-8
Settings ........................................................................................................................ 10-8
Handling ....................................................................................................................... 10-9
Motor Application Precautions ................................................................. 10-10
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor...................................................... 10-10
Using the Inverter for Special Motors ......................................................................... 10-11
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains) ................... 10-11
Conformance to CE Markings .................................................................. 10-12
CE Markings ............................................................................................................... 10-12
Requirements for Conformance to CE Markings........................................................ 10-12
User Constants......................................................................................... 10-19
xiv
Handling Inverters
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter.
Varispeed G7 Introduction ........................................... 1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery........................................1-3
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions ..............................1-7
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site .............1-9
Installation Orientation and Space .............................1-10
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............ 1-11
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator
and Front Cover..........................................................1-12
Varispeed G7 Introduction
Varispeed G7 Models
The Varispeed-G7 Series of Inverters included two Inverters in two voltage classes: 200 V and 400 V. Maximum
motor capacities vary from 0.4 to 300 kW (41 models).
Table 1.1 Varispeed G7 Models
Voltage
Class
200 V class
400 V class
1-2
Maximum
Motor
Capacity
kW
Varispeed G7
Output
Capacity
kVA
Basic Model Number
Specifications
(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Open Chassis
(IEC IP00)
CIMR-G7
Enclosed Wall-mounted
(IEC IP20, NEMA 1)
CIMR-G7C
0.4
1.2
CIMR-G7C20P4
20P41
0.75
2.3
CIMR-G7C20P7
20P71
1.5
3.0
CIMR-G7C21P5
21P51
2.2
4.6
CIMR-G7C22P2
3.7
6.9
CIMR-G7C23P7
5.5
10
CIMR-G7C25P5
7.5
13
CIMR-G7C27P5
11
19
CIMR-G7C2011
2011
15
25
CIMR-G7C2015
20151
18.5
30
CIMR-G7C2018
22
37
CIMR-G7C2022
20220
20221
30
50
CIMR-G7C2030
20300
20301
37
61
CIMR-G7C2037
20370
20371
45
70
CIMR-G7C2045
20450
20451
55
85
CIMR-G7C2055
20550
20551
75
110
CIMR-G7C2075
20750
20751
90
140
CIMR-G7C2090
20900
-
110
160
CIMR-G7C2110
21100
0.4
1.4
CIMR-G7C40P4
40P41
Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed Wallmounted model.
22P21
23P71
25P51
27P51
20181
-
0.75
2.6
CIMR-G7C40P7
40P71
1.5
3.7
CIMR-G7C41P5
41P51
2.2
4.7
CIMR-G7C42P2
3.7
6.9
CIMR-G7C43P7
5.5
11
CIMR-G7C45P5
7.5
16
CIMR-G7C47P5
11
21
CIMR-G7C4011
40111
15
26
CIMR-G7C4015
40151
18.5
32
CIMR-G7C4018
22
40
CIMR-G7C4022
40220
40221
30
50
CIMR-G7C4030
40300
40301
37
61
CIMR-G7C4037
40370
40371
45
74
CIMR-G7C4045
40450
40451
55
98
CIMR-G7C4055
40550
40551
75
130
CIMR-G7C4075
40750
40751
90
150
CIMR-G7C4090
40900
40901
110
180
CIMR-G7C4110
41100
41101
132
210
CIMR-G7C4132
41320
41321
160
230
CIMR-G7C4160
41600
41601
185
280
CIMR-G7C4185
41850
-
220
340
CIMR-G7C4220
42200
-
300
460
CIMR-G7C4300
43000
-
Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed Wallmount model.
42P21
43P71
45P51
47P51
40181
Confirmations upon Delivery
Confirmations upon Delivery
Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.
Table 1.2 Checks
Item
Method
Has the correct model of Inverter been
delivered?
Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter.
Is the Inverter damaged in any way?
Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or
other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components
loose?
Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or
your Yaskawa representative immediately.
Nameplate Information
There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter. The nameplate shows the model number, specifications, lot number, serial number, and other information on the Inverter.
Example Nameplate
The following nameplate is an example for a European standard Inverter: 3-phase, 200 VAC, 0.4 kW, IEC
IP20 and NEMA 1 standards
Inverter model
Inverter
specifications
G C
Input specifications
Output
specifications
Mass
Lot number
Serial number
Fig 1.1 Nameplate
1-3
Inverter Model Numbers
The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class, and maximum
motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
CIMR - G7 C 2 0P4
Inverter
Varispeed G7
No.
C
No.
2
4
Specification
No.
0P4
0P7
to
300
European standard
Voltage Class
AC input, 3-phase, 200 V
Max. Motor Capacity
0.4 kW
0.75 kW
to
300 kW *
"P" indicates the decimal point.
AC input, 3-phase, 400 V
Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers
Inverter Specifications
The Inverter specifications (“SPEC”) on the nameplate indicate the voltage class, maximum motor capacity,
the protective structure, and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
2 0P4 1
Voltage Class
No.
2
4
AC input, 3-phase, 200 V
No.
0P4
0P7
to
300
Max. Motor Capacity
0.4 kW
0.75 kW
to
300 kW *
AC input, 3-phase, 400 V
No.
0
1
Protective Structure
Open chassis (IEC IP00)
Enclosed wall-mounted (IEC IP20,
NEMA 1 Type 1)
"P" indicates the decimal point.
Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications
Open Chassis Type (IEC IP00)
Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the
Inverter is mounted in a control panel.
TERMS
Enclosed Wall-mounted Type (IEC IP20, NEMA 1 Type 1)
The Inverter is structured so that the Inverter is shielded from the exterior, and can thus be mounted to the
interior wall of a standard building (not necessarily enclosed in a control panel). The protective structure conforms to the standards of NEMA 1 in the USA.
Top protective cover must be installed to conform with IEC IP20 and NEMA 1 Type 1 requirements. Refer to
Fig. 1.4 for details.
1-4
Confirmations upon Delivery
Component Names
Inverters of 15 kW or Less
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.4. The Inverter with the terminal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.5.
Top protective cover
Mounting hole
Front cover
Digital Operator
Diecast case
Terminal cover
Nameplate
Bottom protective cover
Fig 1.4 Inverter Appearance (15 kW or Less)
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
CAUTION
NPJT31278-1-0
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (15 kW or Less)
1-5
Inverters of 18.5 kW or More
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.6. The Inverter with the terminal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.7.
Mounting holes
Inverter cover
Cooling fan
Front cover
Digital Operator
Nameplate
Terminal cover
Fig 1.6 Inverter Appearance (18.5 kW or More)
Charge indicator
Control circuit
terminals
Main circuit
terminals
Ground terminal
Terminal Arrangement(18.5kW or More)
Fig 1.7 Terminal Arrangement (18.5 kW or More)
1-6
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)
Exterior diagrams of the Open Chassis Inverters are shown below.
4-d
W1
H
H1
H1
4-d
H
W1
H2
t1
D1
(5)
W
H2
t1
W
(5)
(5)
D
D1
3
D
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 15 kW
200 V Class Inverters of 18.5 or 22 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 30 to 45 kW
Fig 1.8 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1 Type 1)
Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters (NEMA1 Type 1) are shown below.
H
H3
Max.10
H1
H2
H
H0
4-d
H0
W1
4-d
H1
W1
4
H3
W
H2
t1
D1
(5)
W
(5)
t1
D1
(5)
D
Grommet
3
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 15 kW
D
200 V Class Inverters of 18.5 or 22 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 30 to 45 kW
Fig 1.9 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters
1-7
Table 1.3 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)
Max.
AppliVoltage cable
Class Motor
Output W
[kW]
Heat Generation (W)
Dimensions (mm)
Open Chassis (IP00)
H
D
W1 H1
H2
D1
Enclosed Wall-mounted (NEMA1)
t1
Approx.
Mass
W
H
D
W1 H0
H1
H2
H3
D1
t1
Approx.
Mass
Mounting
Holes
d*
0.4
0.75
1.5
157
140 280
2.2
5.5
11
15
200 V
(3-phase) 18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
8
240 350 207 216 335
250 400
275 450
375 600
258
300
330
5
195 385
4
6
7
2.3
7.5
100
220 435
100
250 575
13
3.2
130
350
254 535
24
279 615
87
15
140
4.5
7
380
380 890
8
300
330
195 400 385
7.5
220 450 435
7.5
11
15
18.5
400 V
(3-phase)
22
250 600 575
75
90
110
132
160
210
305
100
100
130
3.2
7
177
5
8
240 350 207 216 335
275 450 258 220 435
6
78
7.5
100
10
2.3
21
325 550 283 260 535
105
36
450 725 350 325 700
13
3.2
130
102
500 850 360 370 820
15
575 925 380 445 895
4.5
140
89
120
126 280 266
7
129
186
6
164
84
248
7
219 113 332
11
M6
300
* Same for Open Chassis and Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters.
429 183 612
501 211 712
27
586 274 860
62
865 352 1217
68
94
M10
Natural
374 170 544
24
Fan
1015 411 1426
1266 505 1771
1588 619 2207
3
5
177
200 300 197 186 300 285
59
8
M5
4
65.5
240 350 207 216 350 335
279 535 258 220 450 435
329
635
6
78
7.5
100
24
305
3.2
48
84
59
56
115
80
68
148
127
82
209
326 172 498
466 259 725
40
784 360 1144
96
1203 495 1698
4.5
400 140
97
M10
122
395
15
Under development
36
901 415 1316
130
505 1245 360 370 850 820
53 Natu58 ral
678 317 995
105
13
41
M6 426 208 634
165
455 1100 350 325 725 700
39
17
193 114 307
10
2.3
14
252 158 410
85
283 260 550 535
160 580 1325 380 445 925 895
220
100
59
95
39
715
88
50
M12 2437 997 3434
157
4
65.5
69
50
74
0
200 300 197 186 285
59
2733 1242 3975
140 280
59
42
70
---
185
1-8
135
2.3
39
27
112
4
65.5
78
M5
20
2019 838 2857
3
45
55
30
13
455 1100 350 325 725 700
30
37
10
165
3.7
5.5
0
0
207 216 350 335
258
5
59
197 186 300 285
150
39
126 266
300
310
21
86
126 280 266
3
108
157
140 280
200
240
63
39
177
11
57
500 850 360 370 820
575 885 380 445 855
157
140 280
65.5
78
450 725 350 325 700
0.75
2.2
7
3
59
200 300 197 186 285
0.4
1.5
126 266
177
3.7
7.5
39
Total Cooling
Heat
Method
Exter InterGennal
nal
eration
130
170
1399 575 1974
1614 671 2285
M12
2097 853 2950
2388 1002 3390
2791 1147 3938
Fan
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.
Installation Site
Install the Inverter under the following conditions.
Table 1.4 Installation Site
Type
Ambient Operating Temperature
Humidity
Enclosed wall-mounted
-10 to + 40 °C
95% RH or less (no condensation)
Open chassis
-10 to + 45 °C
95% RH or less (no condensation)
Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers
before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 15 kW or less in a panel.
Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter.
• Install the Inverter in a clean location free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally enclosed
panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
• When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or other
foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
• Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
• Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.
• Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.
Controlling the Ambient Temperature
To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme
temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box, use a cooling fan
or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45°C.
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter
Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling.
Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be
reduced, causing the Inverter to overheat.
1-9
Installation Orientation and Space
Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always
provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.
120 mm min.
Air
30 mm min.
30 mm min.
120 mm min.
Air
Horizontal Space
Vertical Space
Fig 1.10 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space
IMPORTANT
1-10
1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis (IP00) and Enclosed Wallmounted (IP20, NEMA 1 Type 1) Inverters.
2. Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of
15 kW or less in a panel.
Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200 or
400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or more in a panel.
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.
Removing the Terminal Cover
Inverters of 15 kW or Less
Loosen the screws at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the directions of arrows 1, and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
1
2
1
Fig 1.11 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-G7C23P7 Shown Above)
Inverters of 18.5 kW or More
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
1
2
Fig 1.12 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-G7C2018 Shown Above)
Attaching the Terminal Cover
When wiring the terminal block has been completed, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure.
For Inverters with an output of 15 kW or less, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the grove on
the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.
1-11
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and
Front Cover
The methods of removing and attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover are described in this section.
Inverters of 15 kW or Less
To attach optional cards or change the terminal card connector, remove the Digital Operator and front cover in
addition to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing the
terminal cover.
The removal and attachment procedures are given below.
Removing the Digital Operator
Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator
and lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the following illustration.
2
1
Fig 1.13 Removing the Digital Operator (Model CIMR-G7C43P7 Shown Above)
1-12
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
Removing the Front Cover
Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in
the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.
1
1
2
Fig 1.14 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-G7C43P7 Shown Above)
Mounting the Front Cover
After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing in reverse order to the steps to
remove the front cover.
1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover; otherwise, Digital
Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of
the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.
Mounting the Digital Operator
After attaching the terminal cover, mount the Digital Operator onto the Inverting using the following procedure.
1. Hook the Digital Operator at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in
the following illustration.
2. Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).
1-13
A
1
B
2
Fig 1.15 Mounting the Digital Operator
IMPORTANT
1-14
1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than
those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover. Imperfect
contact can result.
Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator to the front
cover.
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
Inverters of 18.5 kW or More
For Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or more, remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator and main cover.
Removing the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
Removing the Front Cover
Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card in the direction of arrow 2.
2
1
Fig 1.16 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-G7C2018 Shown Above)
Attaching the Front Cover
After completing required work, such as mounting an optional card or setting the terminal card, attach the
front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1. Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if the cover is
attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it.
2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it
clicks into place on the Inverter.
Attaching the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 15 kW or less.
1-15
1-16
Wiring
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit terminal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.
Connections to Peripheral Devices..............................2-2
Connection Diagram ....................................................2-3
Terminal Block Configuration .......................................2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals ......................................2-6
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ................................ 2-20
Wiring Check .............................................................2-28
Installing and Wiring Option Cards ............................2-29
Connections to Peripheral Devices
Examples of connections between the Inverter and typical peripheral devices are shown in Fig 2.1.
Power supply
Molded-case
circuit breaker
or ground fault
interrupter
Magnetic contactor (MC)
AC reactor for power
factor improvement
Braking resistor
Input noise filter
DC reactor for power
factor improvement
Inverter
Ground
Output noise filter
Motor
Ground
Fig 2.1 Example Connections to Peripheral Devices
2-2
Connection Diagram
Connection Diagram
The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in Fig 2.2.
When using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.
Thermal switch contact
Braking Unit
3
(optional)
+1
MC
S/L2
CIMR-G7C2018
OFF
ON
MC
1
2
Thermal relay trip contact
for motor cooling fan
Forward Run/Stop
S1
Reverse Run/Stop
S2
PG-X2
(optional)
Thermal switch contact
for Braking Unit
THRX
IM
External fault
SA
TA1
2
C
H
B
G
A
F
3
3
4
5
6
S3
4
7
Fault reset
TA3
S4
TA2
Multi-step speed reference 1
(Main speed switching) g))
SA
Multi-step speed
reference 2
Fault contact
Multi-function
contact inputs
Factory
settings
D
S6
Jog frequency
selection
S7
External
baseblock command
S8
MP
Multi-step speed
reference 3
S9
AC
Multi-step speed
reference 4
S10
Acc/dec time 1
S11
Pulse monitor output
Pulse A
3
MA
4
Pulse B
Wiring distance:
d
:
100 m max.
Pulse train output
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
Default: Output
frequency
Ammeter adjustment
20 kΩ
Multi-function analog output 2
-10 to 10 V, 2 mA/4 to 20 mA
AM
S12
Emergency stop (NO)
+24V 8mA
SC
(Note 3)
Ammeter adjustment
20 kΩ
FM
AC
+24V
E (G)
Pulse train input
RP
Frequency setting
2 k Ω adjustment
3
2kΩ
0 to 10 V
2
1
4 to 20 mA P
0 to 10 V
Shield wire
connection terminal
Master speed
pulse train
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
+V
Frequency setting power
+15 V, 20 mA
A1
Master speed reference
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
[0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) input]
A2
P
A3
P
AC
Multi-function anlog input
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
0V
Factory setting:
Auxiliary frequency
command
MA
M1
M2
M3
M4
M6
((Note 1)
R+
R-
P3
S+
C3
S-
P4
IG
Factory setting: Output frequency
0 to +10 V
Error contact output
250 VAC, 1 A max.
30 VAC, 1 A max.
MCC
Multi-function contact output
250 VAC, 1 A max.
30 VAC, 1 A max.
Factory setting: Running
signal
Terminating
resistance
MEMOBUS
communications
RS-485/422
MA
MB
M5
-V (15V 20mA)
FM
(Note 7)
Multi-function analog output 1
-10 to 10 V, 2 mA/4 to 20 mA
E(G)
MC
Frequency
setter
Factory setting: Outputt current
0 to +10 V
AM
CN5 (NPN setting)
PG
(Note 1) Shieded twisted-pair
wires
1
S5
2
TRX
External
frequency
references
IM
W
W/T3
TRX
MCC
Cooling fan
(Ground to 100 max.)
SA
2
MC
V
V/T2
MC
Motor
U
U/T1
T/L3
Thermal relay trip contact
for Braking Resistor Unit
1
Inverter
R/L1
B
Braking Resistor Unit
(optional)
FU
R1
FV
S1
FW
T1
-
+3
2
P
-0
-
3-phase power R
200 to 240 V
S
50/60 Hz
T
2MCCB THRX
1
+0
Level
detector
R1
S1
T1
1MCCB
4
+
2MCCB
Thermal relay
trip contact
C4
Multi-function
contact oputput 2
Factory setting:
Zero speed
Multi-function
contact oputput
Factory setting:
Frequency
agree signal
Open collector 3
Multi-function
open-collector outputs
48 VDC, 50 mA max.
Factory setting:
Inverter operation
ready
Open collector 4
Factory setting:
FOUT frequency
detection 2
Fig 2.2 Connection Diagram (Model CIMR-G7C2018 Shown Above)
2-3
1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.
IMPORTANT
E(G)
S11 S12
S+
SR+
RC4
P4
C3
P3
S9 S10
AC
RP
A3
MP
-V
AC
+V
A2
SN
SP
A1
SC
AM
IG
FM
AC
S8
S7
S6
S5
S1
S3
S4
S2
M5
M6
MA
MB
M3
M4
M1
MC
M2
E(G)
2. The output current capacity of the +V terminal is 20 mA.
3. Disable the stall prevention during deceleration (set constant L3-04 to 0) when using a Braking Resistor
Unit. If this user constant is not changed to disable stall prevention, the system may not stop during deceleration.
4. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single
circles.
5. The wiring for a motor with a cooling fan is not required for self-cooling motors.
6. PG circuit wiring (i.e., wiring to the PG-B2 Card) is not required for open-loop vector control.
7. Sequence input signals S1 to S12 are labeled for sequence connections (0 V common and sinking mode)
for no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors. These are the default settings.
For PNP transistor sequence connections (+24V common and sourcing mode) or to provide a 24-V external power supply, refer toTable 2.13.
8. The master speed frequency reference can set to input either a voltage (terminal A1) or current (terminal
A2) by changing the setting of parameter H3-13. The default setting is for a voltage reference input.
9. The multi-function analog output is a dedicated meter output for an analog frequency meter, ammeter, voltmeter, wattmeter, etc. Do not use this output for feedback control or for any other control purpose.
10.DC reactors to improve the input power factor built into 200 V Class Inverters for 18.5 to 110 kW and 400
V Class Inverters for 18.5 to 300 kW. A DC reactor is thus an option only for Inverters for 15 kW or less.
11.Set parameter L8-01 to 1 when using a breaking resistor (ERF). When using a Braking Resistor Unit, a
shutoff sequence for the power supply must be made using a thermal relay trip.
2-4
Terminal Block Configuration
Terminal Block Configuration
The terminal arrangement for 200 V Class Inverters are shown in Fig 2.3 and Fig 2.4.
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
CAUTION
NPJT31278-1-0
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 2.3 Terminal Arrangement (200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW Shown Above)
Charge indicator
Control circuit
terminals
Main circuit
terminals
Ground terminal
Terminal Arrangement(18.5kW or More)
Fig 2.4 Terminal Arrangement (200 V Class Inverter for 18.5 kW Shown Above)
2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 2.1 to Table 2.3. Refer to instruction manual
TOE-C726-2 for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units.
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7C20P4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7C20P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7C21P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7C22P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7C23P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7C25P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7C27P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
V/T2, W/T3
,
G7C2011
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
,
1,
2-6
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
3.5
(12)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
5.5
(10)
M5
2.5
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
8
(8)
M5
2.5
14
(6)
14
(6)
M6
4.0 to 5.0
22
(4)
M5
2.5
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M5
2.5
22 to 30
(4 to 3)
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
22
(4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
22
(4)
30 to 60
(3 to 1)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
50 to 60
(1 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
60 to 100
(2/0 to 4/0)
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
30 to 60
(2 to 2/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
2, B1, B2,
2, U/T1,
2, U/T1,
3
/ 2
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2, B1, B2,
3
r/ 1,
1.2 to 1.5
2, B1, B2,
B1, B2
3
M4
2, B1, B2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7C2030
2
(14)
2, B1, B2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7C2022
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
M4
2, B1, B2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7C2018
1.2 to 1.5
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
2, B1, B2,
B1, B2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
V/T2, W/T3
G7C2015
1,
mm2(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
Terminal
Screws
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
Possible
Wire Sizes
22
(4)
30
(3)
22
(4)
30
(3)
22
(4)
50
(1)
22
(4)
60
(2/0)
30
(2)
1.25
(16)
Wire Type
Power cables,
e.g., 600 V
vinyl power
cables
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7C2037
3
r/ 1,
/ 2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
, 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7C2045
3
r/ 1,
,
/ 2
1
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7C2055
3
r/ 1,
/ 2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21,
T1/L31
G7C2075
3
r/ 1,
/ 2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
G7C2090
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21,
T1/L31
3
r/ 1,
/ 2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
G7C2110
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/
L31
3
r/ 1,
/ 2
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2(AWG)
80 to 125
(3/0 to 250)
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
38 to 60
(1 to 2/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
30 to 60
(3 to 4/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 125
(3/0 to 250)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
80 to 200
(2/0 to 400)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
150 to 200
(250 to 350)
100 to 150
(4/0 to 300)
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
60 to 150
(2/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
200 to 325
(350 to 600)
M12
31.4 to 39.2
150 to 325
(300 to 600)
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
200 to 325
(350 to 600)
M12
31.4 to 39.2
150 to 325
(300 to 600)
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
150
(300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
150
(300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
Wire Type
80
(3/0)
38
(1)
1.25
(16)
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
50
(1/0)
1.25
(16)
80 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
80 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
80
(2/0)
1.25
(16)
150 × 2P
(250 × 2P)
100 × 2P
(4/0 × 2P)
60 × 2P
(2/0 × 2P)
1.25
(16)
200 × 2P, or
50 × 4P
(350 × 2P,
or 1/0 × 4P)
150 × 2P, or
50 × 4P
(300 × 2P,
or 1/0 × 4P)
Power cables,
e.g., 600 V
vinyl power
cables
150 × 2P
(300 × 2P)
1.25
(16)
200 × 2P, or
50 × 4P
(350 × 2P,
or 1/0 × 4P)
150 × 2P, or
50 × 4P
(300 × 2P,
or 1/0 × 4P)
150 × 2P
(300 × 2P)
1.25
(16)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C
2-7
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7C40P4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7C40P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7C41P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7C42P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7C43P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7C45P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7C47P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7C4011
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
V/T2, W/T3
G7C4015
G7C4018
G7C4022
,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
3.5
(12)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
3.5 to 5.5
(12 to 10)
5.5
(10)
M5
2.5
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
8
(8)
M5
2.5
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
8
(8)
M5
(M6)
2.5
(4.0 to 5.0)
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
5.5
(10)
M5
4.0 to 5.0
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
8
(8)
M5
2.5
M5
(M6)
4.0 to 5.0
8
(8)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
8
(8)
8
(8)
M6
4.0 to 5.0
14 to 22
(6 to 4)
14
(6)
M8
9.0 to 10.0
14 to 38
(6 to 2)
14
(6)
M6
4.0 to 5.0
22
(4)
22
(4)
M8
9.0 to 10.0
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
22
(4)
M8
9.0 to 10.0
22 to 60
(4 to 1/0)
38
(2)
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, U/T1,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1,
3, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1,
3, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
M8
2-8
Possible
Wire Sizes
2, B1, B2,
B1, B2
3
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
M4
2, B1, B2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7C4037
1.2 to 1.5
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
2, B1, B2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7C4030
mm2 (AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
Terminal
Screws
9.0 to 10.0
Wire Type
3.5
(12)
2
(14)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
22
(4)
30 to 60
(2 to 1/0)
38
(2)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
22
(4)
-
-
Power cables,
e.g., 600 V
vinyl power
cables
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7C4045
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7C4055
3
r/ 1,
200/ 2200,
400/ 2400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7C4075
3
r/ 1,
200/ 2200,
400/ 2400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
G7C4090
3
r/ 1,
200/ 2200,
400/ 2400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
G7C4110
3
r/ 1,
200/ 2200,
400/ 2400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7C4132
3
r/ 1,
200/ 2200,
400/ 2400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7C4160
3
r/ 1,
200/ 2200,
400/ 2400
G7C4185
G7C4220
G7C4300
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
mm2 (AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
50 to 60
(1 to 1/0)
50
(1)
Possible
Wire Sizes
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
22
(4)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
50
(1/0)
-
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
38 to 60
(2 to 2/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
38
(2)
1.25
(16)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
100
(4/0)
-
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
50 to 100
(1 to 4/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
50
(1)
1.25
(16)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
-
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
60 to 150
(2/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
60
(2/0)
1.25
(16)
60 to 100
(2/0 to 4/0)
80 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
-
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
100 to 150
(4/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
100
(4/0)
1.25
(16)
80 to 200
(3/0 to 400)
80 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P)
Power cables,
e.g., 600 V
vinyl power
cables
-
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
50 to 150
(1/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
1.25
(16)
100 to 200
(4/0 to 400)
100 × 2P
(4/0 × 2P)
80 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
50 to 150
(1/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
Wire Type
-
50 × 2P
(1/0 × 2P)
1.25
(16)
Under development
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C.
2-9
Table 2.3 Closed-loop Connector Sizes (JIS C2805) (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Wire Thickness (mm2)
Terminal Screws
Size
M3.5
1.25 to 3.5
M4
1.25 to 4
M3.5
1.25 to 3.5
M4
1.25 to 4
M3.5
1.25 to 3.5
M4
1.25 to 4
M3.5
2 to 3.5
M4
2 to 4
M5
2 to 5
M6
2 to 6
M8
2 to 8
M4
5.5 to 4
M5
5.5 to 5
M6
5.5 to 6
M8
5.5 to 8
M5
8 to 5
M6
8 to 6
M8
8 to 8
M6
14 to 6
M8
14 to 8
M6
22 to 6
M8
22 to 8
M8
38 to 8
M8
60 to 8
M10
60 to 10
0.5
0.75
1.25
2
3.5/5.5
8
14
22
30/38
50/60
80
M10
100
100
100 to 10
100 to 12
150
M12
200
325
80 to 10
150 to 12
200 to 12
M12 x 2
325 to 12
M16
325 to 16
Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line
voltage drop is calculated as follows:
IMPORTANT
2-10
Line voltage drop (V) =
3 x wire resistance (W/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10-3
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2.4. Wire the terminals
correctly for the desired purposes.
Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Purpose
Main circuit power input
Inverter outputs
DC power input
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4160
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
2018 to 2110
4018 to 4160
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4160
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4160
20P4 to 27P5
40P4 to 4015
20P4 to 2015
40P4 to 4015
2018 to 2110
4018 to 4160
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4160
1,
Braking Resistor Unit connecB1, B2
tion
DC reactor connection
1,
Braking Unit connection
3,
Ground
Model: CIMR-G7C
200 V Class
400 V Class
2
2-11
Main Circuit Configurations
The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in Fig 2.5.
Table 2.5 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations
200 V Class
400 V Class
CIMRG7C40P4 to 4015
CIMR-G7C20P4 to 2015
B1 B2
B1 B2
+1
+1
+2
U/T1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
V/T2
W/T3
+2
U/T1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
V/T2
W/T3
−
−
Power
supply
Control
circuits
Power
supply
CIMR-G7C2018, 2022
CIMR-G7C4018 to 4045
+3
+3
+1
+1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
−
Power
supply
R/L1
V/T2
W/T3
Power
supply
Control
circuits
Control
circuits
CIMR-G7C4055 to 4300
+3
+3
+1
+1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
−
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
r/ l 1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
−
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
r/ l 1
Power
supply
Control
circuits
Note Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12-phase rectification.
2-12
U/T1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
−
CIMR-G7C2030 to 2110
/l2
Control
circuits
200/ l 2200
400/ l 2400
Power
supply
Control
circuits
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Standard Connection Diagrams
Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2.5. These are the same for both 200 V Class and
400 V Class Inverters. The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.
CIMR-G7C20P4 to 2015 and 40P4 to
4015
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
DC reactor
(optional)
3-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
CIMR-G7C2018, 2022, and 4018 to 4045
− + 1 + 2 B1 B2
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
Braking Unit
(optional)
IM
3-phase 200
VAC (200 VAC)
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC
reactor.
CIMR-G7C2030 to 2110
3-phase
200 VAC
+1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
+1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
+3 −
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
IM
The DC reactor is built in.
CIMR-G7C4055 to 4300
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
+3 −
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
IM
3-phase
400 VAC
r/l1
/l2
+1
+3 −
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
r/l1
200/l2200
400/l2400
IM
Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Inverter models.
Fig 2.5 Main Circuit Terminal Connections
2-13
Wiring the Main Circuits
This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.
Wiring Main Circuit Inputs
Observe the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input.
Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker
Always connect the power input terminals (R, S, and T) and power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker
(MCCB) suitable for the Inverter.
• Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times the Inverter's rated current.
• For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the Inverter's overload protection (one minute at
150% of the rated output current).
• If the same MCCB is to be used for more than one Inverter, or other devices, set up a sequence so that the
power supply will be turned OFF by a fault output, as shown in Fig 2.6.
Inverter
Power
supply
R/L1
20P4 to 2030:
3-phase,
200 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
2037 to 2110:
3-phase,
200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
40P4 to 4300:
3-phase,
380 to 460 VAC, 50/60 Hz
S/L2
T/L3
Fault output
(NC)
* For 400 V class Inverters, connect a 400/200 V transformer.
Fig 2.6 MCCB Installation
Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter
Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. Therefore, at the
Inverter primary side, use a ground fault interrupter to detect only the leakage current in the frequency range
that is hazardous to humans and exclude high-frequency leakage current.
• For the special-purpose ground fault interrupter for Inverters, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sen-
sitivity amperage of at least 30 mA per Inverter.
• When using a general ground fault interrupter, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amper-
age of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.
2-14
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Installing a Magnetic Contactor
If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off during a sequence, a magnetic contactor can be used.
When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to forcibly stop the Inverter,
however, the regenerative braking does not work and the Inverter will coast to a stop.
• The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.
Start and stop the Inverter at most once every 30 minutes.
• When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after
recovery from a power interruption.
• If the Braking Resistor Unit is used, program the sequence so that the magnetic contactor is turned OFF by
the contact of the Unit's thermal overload relay.
Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block
Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of
input power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence.
Installing an AC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or the phase advancing
capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the converter unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reactor connection terminals.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.
Installing a Surge Absorber
Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.
Installing a Noise Filter on Power Supply Side
Install a noise filter to eliminate noise transmitted between the power line and the Inverter.
• Correct Noise Filter Installation
Power
supply
MCCB
Noise
filter
MCCB
Inverter
IM
Other
controllers
Use a special-purpose noise filter for Inverters.
Fig 2.7 Correct Power supply Noise Filter Installation
2-15
• Incorrect Noise Filter Installation
Power
supply
MCCB
Inverter
MCCB
Power
supply
Generalpurpose
noise filter
IM
Other
controllers
MCCB
Generalpurpose
noise filter
MCCB
Inverter
Other
controllers
IM
Do not use general-purpose noise filters. No generalpurpose noise filter can effectively suppress noise
generated from the Inverter.
Fig 2.8 Incorrect Power supply Noise Filter Installation
Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit
Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.
Connecting the Inverter and Motor
Connect output terminals U, V, and W to motor lead wires U, V, and W, respectively.
Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward run command. Switch over any two of the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward run command.
Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals
Never connect a power supply to output terminals U, V, and W. If voltage is applied to the output terminals,
the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.
Never Short or Ground Output Terminals
If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter casing, an electric shock or grounding will occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.
Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter
Never connect a phase advancing capacitor or LC/RC noise filter to an output circuit. The high-frequency
components of the Inverter output may result in overheating or damage to these part or may result in damage
to the Inverter or cause other parts to burn.
Do Not Use an Electromagnetic Switch
Never connect an electromagnetic switch (MC) between the Inverter and motor and turn it ON or OFF during
operation. If the MC is turned ON while the Inverter is operating, a large inrush current will be created and the
overcurrent protection in the Inverter will operate.
2-16
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
When using an MC to switch to a commercial power supply, stop the Inverter and motor before operating the
MC. Use the speed search function if the MC is operated during operation. If measures for momentary power
interrupts are required, use a delayed release MC.
Installing a Thermal Overload Relay
This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If, however,
more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or a multi-polar motor is used, always install a thermal
relay (THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set L1-01 to 0 (no motor protection). The sequence
should be designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contactor on the
main circuit inputs.
Installing a Noise Filter on Output Side
Connect a noise filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce radio noise and inductive noise.
Power
supply
MCCB
Noise
filter
Inverter
IM
Radio noise
Signal line
Inductive
noise
AM radio
Controller
Inductive Noise:
Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line, causing the controller to malfunction.
Radio Noise:
Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting radio receiver to make
noise.
Fig 2.9 Installing a Noise Filter on the Output Side
Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise
As described previously, a noise filter can be used to prevent inductive noise from being generated on the output side. Alternatively, cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent inductive noise. Keeping the metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line considerably reduces inductive noise.
Power
supply
Metal pipe
MCCB
Inverter
IM
30 cm min.
Signal line
Controller
Fig 2.10 Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise
2-17
Countermeasures Against Radio Interference
Radio noise is generated from the Inverter as well as from the input and output lines. To reduce radio noise,
install noise filters on both input and output sides, and also install the Inverter in a totally enclosed steel box.
The cable between the Inverter and the motor should be as short as possible.
Power
supply
Steel box
Metal pipe
MCCB
Noise
filter
Inverter
Noise
filter
IM
Fig 2.11 Countermeasures Against Radio Interference
Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, causing the Inverter output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, adjust
the carrier frequency (set in C6-01, C6-02) as shown in Table 2.6. (For details, refer to Chapter 5 User Constants.)
Table 2.6 Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
Cable length
50 m max.
100 m max.
More than 100 m
Carrier frequency
15 kHz max.
10 kHz max.
5 kHz max.
Ground Wiring
Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.
• Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω and that
of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 Ω.
• Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
• Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the
length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the
ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.
• When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
OK
NO
Fig 2.12 Ground Wiring
2-18
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Connecting the Braking Resistor (ERF)
A Braking Resistor that mounts to the Inverter can be used with 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with outputs
from 0.4 to 3.7 kW.
Connect the braking resistor as shown in Fig 2.13.
Table 2.7
L8-01 (Protect selection for internal DB resistor)
1 (Enables overheat protection)
L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration)
(Select either one of them.)
0 (Disables stall prevention function)
3 (Enables stall prevention function with braking resistor)
Inverter
Braking resistor
Fig 2.13 Connecting the Braking Resistor
The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect to any other terminals. Connecting
to any terminals other than B1 or B2 can cause the resistor to overheat, resulting in damage to the equipment.
IMPORTANT
Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit (LKEB) and Braking Unit (CDBR)
Use the following settings when using a Braking Resistor Unit. Refer to User Constants on page 10-19 for connection methods for a Braking Resistor Unit.
A Braking Resistor that mounts to the Inverter can also be used with Inverters with outputs from 0.4 to
3.7 kW.
Table 2.8
L8-01 (Protect selection for internal DB resistor)
0 (Disables overheat protection)
L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration)
(Select either one of them.)
0 (Disables stall prevention function)
3 (Enables stall prevention function with braking resistor)
L8-01 is used when a braking resistor without thermal overload relay trip contacts (ERF type mounted to
Inverter) is connected.
The Braking Resistor Unit cannot be used and the deceleration time cannot be shortened by the Inverter if L304 is set to 1 (i.e., if stall prevention is enabled for deceleration).
2-19
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Digital Operator or operation signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less, and separate the lines from high-power lines (main circuits or
relay sequence circuits) to reduce induction from peripheral devices.
When setting frequencies from an external frequency setter (and not from a Digital Operator), used shielded
twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E (G), as shown in the following diagram.
Shield ter-
Speed setting power supply, +15 V 20 mA
2 kΩ
Master speed reference, -10 to 10 V
2 kΩ
Master speed reference, 4 to 20 mA
2 kΩ
2 kΩ
Auxiliary reference
Pulse
input,
32
kHz
Analog common
Fig 2.14
Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2.9.
Table 2.9 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models)
Terminals
FM, AC, AM, M3, M4,
SC, A1, A2, A3, +V, -V,
S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6,
S7, S8, MA, MB, MC,
M1, M2, P3, C3, P4, C4,
MP, RP, R+, R-, S9, S10,
S11, S12, S+, S-, IG, SN,
SP
E (G)
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Phoenix
0.5 to 0.6
type
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
Possible Wire
Sizes
mm2(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2(AWG)
Single wire*3:
0.14 to 2.5
Stranded wire:
0.14 to 1.5
(26 to 14)
0.75
(18)
0.5 to 2*2
(20 to 14)
1.25
(12)
* 1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external frequency reference.
* 2. Refer to Table 2.3 Close-loop Connector Sizes for suitable closed-loop crimp terminal sizes for the wires.
* 3. We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
2-20
Wire Type
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire*1
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electrical Wire or equivalent)
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines
Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal are shown in the following table.
Table 2.10 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Model
d1
d2
L
0.25 (24)
AI 0.25 - 8YE
0.8
2
12.5
0.5 (20)
AI 0.5 - 8WH
1.1
2.5
14
0.75 (18)
AI 0.75 - 8GY
1.3
2.8
14
1.25 (16)
AI 1.5 - 8BK
1.8
3.4
14
2 (14)
AI 2.5 - 8BU
2.3
4.2
14
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
L
Wire Size mm2 (AWG)
Fig 2.15 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Wiring Method
Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.
Thin-slot screwdriver
Blade of screwdriver
Control
circuit
terminal block
Strip the end for
7 mm if no solderless terminal is
used.
Solderless terminal or wire
without soldering
Wires
3.5 mm max.
Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.
Fig 2.16 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block
2-21
Control Circuit Terminal Functions
The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2.11. Use the appropriate terminals for the
correct purposes.
Table 2.11 Control Circuit Terminals
Type
Sequence
input
signals
Analog
input
signals
No.
Function
Signal Level
S1
Forward run/stop command
Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S2
Reverse run/stop command
Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S3
Multi-function input 1*1
Factory setting: External fault when ON.
S4
Multi-function input 2*1
Factory setting: Fault reset when ON.
S5
Multi-function input 3*1
Factory setting: Multi-speed speed reference
1 effective when ON.
S6
Multi-function input 4*1
Factory setting: Multi-speed speed reference
2 effective when ON.
S7
Multi-function input 5*1
S8
Multi-function input 6*1
S9
Multi-function input 7*1
Factory setting: Multi-speed speed reference
3 effective when ON.
S10
Multi-function input 8*1
Factory setting: Multi-speed speed reference
4 effective when ON.
S11
Multi-function input 9*1
Factory setting: Acceleration/deceleration
time selected when ON.
S12
Multi-function input 10*1
Factory setting: Emergency stop (NO contact) when ON.
SC
Sequence input common
+V
+15 V power output
+15 V power supply for analog references
+15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
-V
-15 V power output
-15 V power supply for analog references
-15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
A1
Master speed frequency reference
-10 to +10 V/-100 to 100%
0 to +10 V/100%
-10 to +10 V, 0 to +10 V
(Input impedance:
20 kΩ)
Multi-function analog input
4 to 20 mA/100%, -10 to +10 V/-100 to
+100%, 0 to +10 V/100%
Factory setting: Added to terminal A1
(H3-09 = 0)
A3
Multi-function analog input
4 to 20 mA/100%, -10 to +10 V/-100 to
+100%, 0 to +10 V/100%
Factory setting: Analog speed 2
(H3-05 = 2)
AC
Analog reference common
0V
A2
E(G)
2-22
Signal Name
Shield wire, optional ground
line connection point
Factory setting: Jog frequency selected when
ON.
24 VDC, 8 mA
Photocoupler isolation
Factory setting: External baseblock when
ON.
-
4 to 20 mA (Input impedance: 250 Ω)
4 to 20 mA (Input impedance: 250 Ω)
-
-
-
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Table 2.11 Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
Type
No.
P3
Photocoupler
outputs
C3
P4
C4
MA
MB
MC
Relay
outputs
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
Analog
monitor outputs
Pulse
I/O
RS485/
422
Signal Name
Multi-function PHC output 3
Function
Signal Level
Factory setting: Ready for operation when
ON.
50 mA max. at 48 VDC*2
Factory setting: FOUT frequency detected
Multi-function PHC output 4
when ON.
Fault output signal (NO contact)
Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC
Fault output signal (NC con- Fault when OPEN across MB and MC
tact)
Relay contact output common
-
Multi-function contact output Factory setting: Operating
(NO contact)
Operating when ON across M1 and M2.
Dry contacts
Contact capacity:
1 A max. at 250 VAC
1 A max. at 30 VDC
Multi-function contact output Factory setting: Zero speed
2
Zero speed level (b2-01) or below when ON.
Factory setting: Frequency agreement detecMulti-function contact output tion
3
Frequency within 2 Hz of set frequency
when ON.
FM
Multi-function analog monitor 1
Factory setting: Output frequency
0 to 10 V/100% frequency
AM
Multi-function analog monitor 2
Factory setting: Current monitor
5 V/Inverter's rated current
AC
Analog common
RP
Multi-function pulse input*3
Factory setting: Frequency reference input
(H6-01 = 0)
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
MP
Multi-function pulse monitor
Factory setting: Output frequency
(H6-06 = 2)
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
R+
MEMOBUS communications input
RS+
S-
MEMOBUS communications output
IG
Communications shield wire
0 to +10 VDC ±5%
2 mA max.
-
For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and S+ as well
as R- and S-.
-
Differential input, PHC
isolation
Differential output, PHC
isolation
-
* 1. For a 3-wire sequence, the default settings are a 3-wire sequence for S5, multi-step speed setting 1 for S6 and multi-step speed setting 2 for S7.
* 2. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Fig 2.17.
* 3. Pulse input specifications are given in the following table.
Low level voltage
0.0 to 0.8 V
High level voltage
3.5 to 13.2 V
H duty
30% to 70%
Pulse frequency
0 to 32 kHz
2-23
Flywheel diode
External power:
48 V max.
The rating of the flywheel diode
must be at least as high as the
circuit voltage.
Coil
50 mA max.
Fig 2.17 Flywheel Diode Connection
Shunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1
The shunt connector CN 5 and DIP switch S1 are described in this section.
Analog output switch**
Voltage output
Current output
Terminating resistance*
Analog input switch
Factory settings
OFF ON
*Note: Refer to Table 2.12 for S1 functions and
to Table 2.13 for Sinking/Sourcing Mode
and Input Signals.
**Note:CN15 is not available at the standard terminal board. An optional terminal board
with CN15 Shunt Connector is available.
The standard setting is voltage output.
Fig 2.18 Shunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1
The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in the following table.
Table 2.12 DIP Switch S1
Name
Function
Setting
S1-1
RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resistance
OFF: No terminating resistance
ON: Terminating resistance of 110 Ω
S1-2
Input method for analog input A2
OFF: 0 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 kΩ)
ON: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250 Ω)
Sinking/Sourcing Mode
The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0-V common) and sourcing mode (+24-V
common) by using the terminals SN, SC, and SP. An external 24-V power supply is also supported, providing
more freedom in signal input methods.
2-24
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Table 2.13 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals
Sinking
Mode
Internal Power Supply
External Power Supply
S1
S1
S2
S2
SN
SN
SC
SC
IP24V(+24V)
SP
Sourcing
Mode
External +24V
IP24V(+24V)
SP
S1
S1
S2
S2
SN
External +24V
SC
SN
SC
IP24V(+24V)
SP
IP24V(+24V)
SP
2-25
Control Circuit Terminal Connections
Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2.19.
Inverter
CIMR-G7C2018
S1
Forward Run/Stop
S2
Reverse Run/Stop
Thermal switch contact
for Braking Unit
External fault
3
4
S3
Fault reset
S4
Multi-step speed reference 1
(Main speed switching)
Multi-function
contact input
Factory
settings
S5
Multi-step speed
reference 2
S6
Jog frequency
selection
S7
External
baseblock command
S8
MP
Multi-step speed
reference 3
S9
AC
Multi-step speed
reference 4
S10
Acc/dec time 1
S11
Emergency stop (NO)
Pulse train output
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
Factory setting: Output
frequency
Ammeter adjustment
AM
20 kΩ
S12
−
+24V 8mA
SN
Multi-function analog output 2
-10 to 10 V, 2 mA/4 to 20 mA
AM
+
Factory setting: Output current
0 to +10 V
Ammeter adjustment
FM
20 kΩ
SC
−
AC
Multi-function analog output 1
FM
+
-10 to 10 V, 2 mA/4 to 20 mA
+24V
E(G)
Pulse train input
E(G)
Shield wire
connection terminal
Master speed pulse train
RP
Frequency setting
2 kΩ adjustment
Frequency
setter
External
frequency
references
2 kΩ
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V
input
MC
Master speed reference
A1
2
1
MB
+15 V 20 mA
0 to 10 V
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
4 to 20 mA P
A2
Master speed reference
A3
Multi-function anlog input
P
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
AC
-V
0V
Factory setting:
Auxiliary frequency
command
(−15V 20mA)
Terminating
resistance
MEMOBUS
communications
RS-485/422
M1
M2
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
[0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) input]
P
0 to 10 V
MA
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
M3
M4
M5
M6
P3
S+
C3
S-
P4
C4
Fig 2.19 Control Circuit Terminal Connections
2-26
Error contact output
250 VAC, 1 A max.
30 VDC, 1 A max.
MC
Multi-function contact output 1
250 VAC, 1 A max.
30 DC, 1 A max.
Factory setting: Running
signal
R+
R-
IG
MA
Frequency setting power
+V
3
Factory setting: Output current
0 to +10 V
Multi-function
contact output2
Factory setting:
Zero speed
Multi-function
contact output
Factory setting:
Frequency
agree signal
Open collector 3
Factory setting:
Inverter operation
ready
Open collector 4
Factory setting:
FOUT frequency
detection 2
Multi-function
open-collector outputs
48 VDC, 50 mA
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.
• Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3,
,
1,
2, and
3) and other high-power lines.
• Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, and M2 (contact outputs) from wiring to
other control circuit terminals.
• Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults. Process
cable ends as shown in Fig 2.20.
• Connect the shield wire to terminal E (G).
• Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.
Shield sheath
Armor
Do not connect here.
Connect to shield sheath terminal at Inverter (terminal E Insulate with tape
(G))
Fig 2.20 Processing the Ends of Twisted-pair Cables
2-27
Wiring Check
Checks
Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform a buzzer check on control circuits. Perform
the following checks on the wiring.
• Is all wiring correct?
• Have any wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?
• Are all screws tight?
• Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?
2-28
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Option Card Models and Specifications
Up to three Option Cards can be mounted in the Inverter. You can mount up one Card into each of the three
places on the controller card (A, C, and D) shown in Fig 2.21.
Table 2.14 lists the type of Option Cards and their specifications.
Table 2.14 Option Card Specifications
Card
Model
Specifications
Mounting Location
PG-A2
Serial open-collector/complimentary inputs
A
PG-B2
Phase A/B complimentary inputs
A
PG-D2
Single line-driver inputs
A
PG-X2
Phase A/B line-driver inputs
A
AI-14U
Input signal levels
0 to 10 V DC (20 kΩ), 1 channel
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 1 channel
Input resolution: 14-bit
C
AI-14B
Input signal levels
0 to 10 V DC (20 kΩ)
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 3 channels
Input resolution: 13-bit with sign bit
C
DI-08
8-bit digital speed reference setting
C
DI-16H2
16-bit digital speed reference setting
C
DeviceNet Communications
Card
SI-N
DeviceNet communications support
C
Profibus-DP Communications Card
SI-P
Profibus-DP communications support
C
InterBus-S Communications
Card
SI-R
InterBus-S communications support
C
AO-08
8-bit analog outputs, 2 channels
D
AO-12
12-bit analog outputs, 2 channels
D
DO-08
Six photocoupler outputs and 2 relay outputs
D
DO-02C
2 relay outputs
D
PG Speed Control Cards
Speed Reference Cards
Analog Monitor Card
Digital Output Card
Installation
Before mounting an Option Card, remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the
Inverter is not lit. After confirming that the charge indicator is not lit, remove the Digital Operator and front
cover and then mount the Option Card.
Refer to documentation provided with the Option Card for actual mounting instructions for option slots A, C,
and D.
2-29
Preventing C and D Option Card Connectors from Rising
After installing an Option Card into slot C or D, insert an Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector
from rising. The Option Clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the Clip and
pulling it out.
Remove the Option Clip before installing an Option Card into slot C or D. The Option Card can not be
installed completely and may not function properly if it is installed with the Option Clip attached.
A Option Card mounting spacer hole
4CN
A Option Card connector
2CN
C Option Card connector
A Option Card mounting spacer
(Provided with A Option Card.)
C Option Card mounting spacer
C Option Card
Option Clip
(To prevent raising of
C and D Option Cards)
D Option Card
3CN
D Option Card connector
D Option Card mounting spacer
A Option Card
A Option Card mounting spacer
Fig 2.21 Mounting Option Cards
PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications
The terminal specifications for the PG Speed Control Cards are given in the following tables.
PG-A2
The terminal specifications for the PG-A2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.15 PG-A2 Terminal Specifications
Terminal
No.
1
2
3
TA1
4
5
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
+12 V/open collector switching terminal
Pulse input terminal
6
7
8
TA2
2-30
(E)
Specifications
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
Terminal for switching between12 V voltage input
and open collector input. For open collector input,
short across 3 and 4.
H: +4 to 12 V; L: +1 V max. (Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
Pulse input common
Pulse motor output terminal
Shield connection terminal
12 VDC (±10%), 20 mA max.
Pulse monitor output common
-
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
PG-B2
The terminal specifications for the PG-B2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.16 PG-B2 Terminal Specifications
Terminal
No.
1
2
3
TA1
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
A-phase pulse input terminal
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
H: +8 to 12 V
L: +1 V max.
(Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
Pulse input common
5
H: +8 to 12 V
L: +1 V max.
(Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
1
2
3
4
TA3
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.
4
B-phase pulse input terminal
6
TA2
Specifications
(E)
Pulse input common
A-phase monitor output terminal
B-phase monitor output terminal
Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
A-phase monitor output common
Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
B-phase monitor output common
Shield connection terminal
-
PG-D2
The terminal specifications for the PG-D2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.17 PG-D2 Terminal Specifications
Terminal
No.
Contents
1
2
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
Power supply for pulse generator
3
TA1
TA2
Specifications
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
5 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
4
Pulse input + terminal
5
Pulse input - terminal
Line driver input (RS-422 level input)
Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz
6
Common terminal
-
7
Pulse monitor output + terminal
8
Pulse monitor output - terminal
(E)
Shield connection terminal
Line driver output (RS-422 level output)
-
* 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.
2-31
PG-X2
The terminal specifications for the PG-X2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.18 PG-X2 Terminal Specifications
Terminal
No.
Contents
Specifications
1
2
12 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
Power supply for pulse generator
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
3
TA1
TA2
TA3
5 VDC (±5%), 200 mA max.*
4
A-phase + input terminal
5
A-phase - input terminal
6
B-phase + input terminal
7
B-phase - input terminal
8
Z-phase + input terminal
9
Z-phase - input terminal
10
Common terminal
1
A-phase + output terminal
2
A-phase - output terminal
3
B-phase + output terminal
4
B-phase - output terminal
5
Z-phase + output terminal
6
Z-phase - output terminal
7
Control circuit common
(E)
Line driver input (RS-422 level input)
Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
Line driver output (RS-422 level output)
Control circuit GND
Shield connection terminal
-
* 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.
Wiring
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the Control Cards.
Wiring the PG-A2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-A2.
Three-phase, 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
R/L1 U/T1
V/T2 V/T2
W/T3 W/T3
PC-A2
+12 V power supply
4CN
1
2
4CN
TA1
E
E
TA2 (E)
3
4
5
6
7
8
0 V power supply
12 V voltage input (A/B phase)
Pulse 0 V
Pulse monitor output
Fig 2.22 Wiring a 12 V Voltage Input
2-32
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Three-phase,
200 VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
R/L1 U/T1
V/T2 V/T2
W/T3 W/T3
PC-A2
1
2
4CN
4CN
+12 V power supply
0 V power supply
3
TA1
E
4
5
6
E
TA2 (E)
7
8
Open collector output (A/B phase)
Pulse 0 V
Pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
Fig 2.23 Wiring an Open-collector Input
PG power
supply
+12 V
Pulse input
Short for
open-collector
input
Pulse
monitor
output
Pulse
input
Fig 2.24 I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-A2
2-33
Wiring the PG-B2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-B2.
Three-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
A-phase pulse output (+)
A-phase pulse output (-)
B-phase pulse output (+)
B-phase pulse output (-)
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user constant F1-05. The factory preset if for forward
rotation, A-phase advancement.
Fig 2.25 PG-B2 Wiring
A-phase pulse
input
B-phase pulse
input
A-phase
pulses
Division rate circuit
PG power
supply +12 V
A-phase pulse
monitor output
B-phase pulse
monitor output
B-phase
pulses
• When connecting to a voltage-output-type PG (encoder), select a PG that has an output impedance with
a current of at least 12 mA to the input circuit photocoupler (diode).
• The pulse monitor dividing ratio can be changed using constant F1-06.
A-phase pulses
B-phase pulses
Fig 2.26 I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-B2
2-34
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Wiring the PG-D2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-D2.
Inverter
Three-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
Power supply +5 V
Pulse input + (A/B phase)
Pulse input - (A/B phase)
Pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
Fig 2.27 PG-D2 Wiring
Wiring the PG-X2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-X2.
Three-phase
200 VAC (400
VAC)
Inverter
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
Power supply +5 V
A-phase pulse input (+)
A-phase pulse input (-)
B-phase pulse input (+)
B-phase pulse input (-)
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
Z-phase pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user constant F1-05 (PG Rotation). The factory preset if
for motor forward rotation, A-phase advancement.
Fig 2.28 PG-X2 Wiring
2-35
Wiring Terminal Blocks
Use no more than 100 meters of wiring for PG (encoder) signal lines, and keep them separate from power
lines.
Use shielded, twisted-pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monitor wires, and connect the shield to the
shield connection terminal.
Wire Sizes (Same for All Models)
Terminal wire sizes are shown in Table 2.19.
Table 2.19 Wire Sizes
Terminal
Pulse generator power supply
Pulse input terminal
Pulse monitor output terminal
Shield connection terminal
Terminal
Screws
Wire Thickness (mm2)
-
Stranded wire: 0.5 to 1.25
Single wire: 0.5 to 1.25
M3.5
0.5 to 2
Wire Type
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl
sheath cable
(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electric Wire or
equivalent)
Straight Solderless Terminals for Control Circuit Terminals
We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
Refer to Table 2.10 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes for specifications.
Closed-loop Connector Sizes and Tightening Torque
The closed-loop connectors and tightening torques for various wire sizes are shown in Table 2.20.
Table 2.20 Closed-loop Connectors and Tightening Torques
Wire Thickness [mm2]
Terminal
Screws
0.5
0.75
1.25
Crimp Terminal Size
Tightening Torque (N • m)
1.25 - 3.5
M3.5
2
1.25 - 3.5
1.25 - 3.5
0.8
2 - 3.5
Wiring Method and Precautions
The wiring method is the same as the one used for straight solderless terminals. Refer to page 2-2-21. Observe
the following precautions when wiring.
• Separate the control signal lines for the PG Speed Control Card from main circuit lines and power lines.
• Connect the shield when connecting to a PG. The shield must be connected to prevent operational errors
caused by noise. Also, do not use any lines that are more than 100 m long. Refer to Fig 2.20 for details on
connecting the shield.
• Connect the shield to the shield terminal (E).
• Do not solder the ends of wires. Doing so may cause contact faults.
• When not using straight solderless terminals, strip the wires to a length of approximately 5.5 mm.
2-36
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses
The setting for the number of PG pulses depends on the model of PG Speed Control Card being used. Set the
correct number for your model.
PG-A2/PG-B2
The maximum response frequency is 32,767 Hz.
Use a PG that outputs a maximum frequency of approximately 20 kHz for the rotational speed of the motor.
Motor speed at maximum frequency output (min−1)
× PG rating (p/rev) = 20,000 Hz
60
Some examples of PG output frequency (number of pulses) for the maximum frequency output are shown in
Table 2.21.
Table 2.21 PG Pulse Selection Examples
Motor's Maximum Speed (min−1)
PG Rating
(p/rev)
PG Output Frequency for Maximum Frequency Output (Hz)
1800
600
18,000
1500
800
20,000
1200
1000
20,000
900
1200
18,000
Note 1. The motor speed at maximum frequency output is expressed as the sync rotation speed.
2. The PG power supply is 12 V.
3. A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a
backup capacitor or other method.)
PG power supply
Capacitor for momentary
power loss
Signals
Fig 2.29 PG-B2 Connection Example
2-37
PG-D2/PG-X2
There are 5 V and 12 V PG power supplies.
Check the PG power supply specifications before connecting.
The maximum response frequency is 300 kHz.
Use the following equation to computer the output frequency of the PG (fPG).
fPG (Hz) =
Motor speed at maximum frequency output (min−1)
× PG rating (p/rev)
60
A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA. (If momentary
power loss must be handled, use a backup capacitor or other method.)
PG-X2
PG power
supply
TA1
AC
IP12 1
2
IG
IP5
3
A (+) 4
A (-)
5
B (+) 6
B (-) 7
0V +12V
0V
Capacitor for
momentary
power loss
+12 V
+
+
-
PG
+
-
Z (+) 8
Z (-)
IG
9
10
TA3
Fig 2.30 PG-X2 Connection Example (for 12 V PG power supply)
2-38
Digital Operator and Modes
This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of
operating modes and switching between modes.
Digital Operator............................................................3-2
Modes ..........................................................................3-4
Digital Operator
This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator.
Digital Operator Display
The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below.
Drive Mode Indicators
FWD: Lit when there is a forward run command input.
REV: Lit when there is a reverse run command input.
SEQ: Lit when the run command from the control
circuit terminal is enabled.
REF:
Lit when the frequency reference from control
circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.
ALARM: Lit when an error or alarm has occurred.
Frequency Ref
Data Display
Displays monitor data, constant numbers, and settings.
Mode Display (Displayed at upper left of data display.)
DRIVE: Lit in Drive Mode.
QUICK: Lit in Quick Programming Mode.
ADV:
Lit in Advanced Programming Mode.
VERIFY: Lit in Verify Mode.
A. TUNE: Lit in Autotuning Mode.
Keys
Execute operations such as setting user constants,
monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.
Fig 3.1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
Digital Operator Keys
The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1 Key Functions
Key
3-2
Name
Function
LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and
control circuit terminal operation (REMOTE).
This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting user constant o2-01.
MENU Key
Selects menu items (modes).
ESC Key
Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER Key was pressed.
JOG Key
Enables jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the
Digital Operator.
Digital Operator
Table 3.1 Key Functions (Continued)
Key
Name
Function
FWD/REV Key
Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being
operated from the Digital Operator.
Shift/RESET Key
Sets the number of digits for user constant settings.
Also acts as the Reset Key when a fault has occurred.
Increment Key
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and increments set
values.
Used to move to the next item or data.
Decrement Key
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and decrements set
values.
Used to move to the previous item or data.
DATA/ENTER Key
Pressed to enter menu items, user constants, and set values.
Also used to switch from one display to another.
RUN Key
Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by
the Digital Operator.
STOP Key
Stops Inverter operation.
This Key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control
circuit terminal by setting user constant o2-02.
Note Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to using the Key names listed in the above table.
There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP Keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators
will light and flash to indicate operating status.
The RUN Key indicator will flash and the STOP Key indicator will light during initial excitation of the
dynamic brake. The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP Keys and the Inverter status is
shown in the Fig 3.2.
Inverter output frequency
RUN
STOP
STOP
Frequency setting
RUN
STOP
: Lit
: Blinking
: Not lit
Fig 3.2 RUN and STOP Indicators
3-3
Modes
This section describes the Inverter's modes and switching between modes.
Inverter Modes
The Inverter's user constants and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it easier to read and set user constants.The Inverter is equipped with 5 modes.
The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the Table 3.2.
Table 3.2 Modes
Mode
Primary function(s)
Drive mode
The Inverter can be run in this mode.
Use this mode when monitoring values such as frequency references or output current, displaying fault information, or displaying the fault history.
Quick programming mode
Use this mode to reference and set the minimum user constants to operate the
Inverter (e.g., the operating environment of the Inverter and Digital Operator).
Advanced programming mode
Use this mode to reference and set all user constants.
Verify mode
Use this mode to read/set user constants that have been changed from their factoryset values.
Autotuning mode*
Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor constants in the vector
control mode. The motor constants are calculated and set automatically.
This mode can also be used to measure only the motor line-to-line resistance.
* Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating using vector control. Autotuning mode will not be displayed during operation or when an error
has occurred. The default setting of the Inverter is for open-loop vector control 1 (A1-02 = 2).
3-4
Modes
Switching Modes
The mode selection display will appear when the MENU Key is pressed from a monitor or setting display.
Press the MENU Key from the mode selection display to switch between the modes.
Press the DATA/ENTER Key from the mode selection key to monitor data and from a monitor display to
access the setting display.
Display at Startup
Rdy
-DRIVE-
Frequency Ref
U1- 01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
Mode Selection
Display
MENU
Monitor Display
Setting Display
DATA
ENTER
-DRIVE-
DATA
ENTER
-DRIVE-
Monitor
** Main Menu **
Operation
Rdy
RESET
Rdy
-DRIVE-
Reference Source
U1 - 01=60.00Hz
U1- 01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Rdy
-DRIVE-
Frequency Ref
U1- 01=060.00Hz
ESC
MENU
DATA
ENTER
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
DATA
ENTER
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02=2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
Quick Setting
ESC
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02= 2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
ESC
MENU
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
RESET
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Initialization
Programming
A1 - 00=1
-ADV-
ESC
-ADV-
Select Language
A1- 00= 0 *1*
English
Select Language
A1- 00 =0 *1*
English
Select Language
ESC
DATA
ENTER
ESC
MENU
DATA
ENTER
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
-VERIFY-
None Modified
Modified Consts
The constant number will be displayed if a
constant has been changed. Press the
DATA/ENTER Key to enable the change.
ESC
MENU
DATA
ENTER
-A.TUNE-
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
T1- 01=0 1 *0*
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
DATA
ENTER
Tuning Mode Sel
T1- 01= 0 *0*
Standard Tuning
"0"
Standard Tuning
"0"
ESC
-A.TUNE-
ESC
Fig 3.3 Mode Transitions
IMPORTANT
When running the Inverter after using Digital Operator, press the MENU Key to select the drive mode (displayed on the LCD screen) and then press the DATA/ENTER Key from the drive mode display to bring up the
monitor display. Run commands can't be received from any other display. (Monitor display in the drive mode
will appear when the power is turned ON.)
3-5
Drive Mode
Drive mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated. The following monitor displays are possible in
drive mode: The frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output voltage, as well as fault
information and the fault history.
When b1-01 (Reference selection) is set to 0, the frequency can be changed from the frequency setting display.
Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user constant will be
written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the
setting.
Example Operations
Key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure.
Display at Startup
-DRIVE-
Rdy
Frequency Ref
U1- 01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
Mode Selection
Display
MENU
Monitor Display
DATA
ENTER
-DRIVE-
A
B
-DRIVE-
Monitor
** Main Menu **
1
Rdy
RESET
U1 - 01=60.00Hz
Operation
DATA
ENTER
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
Frequency Setting Display
2
Rdy
-DRIVE-
DATA
ENTER
Frequency Ref
ESC
-DRIVE-
Rdy
Frequency Ref
U1- 01=60.00Hz
U1- 01= 060.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
ESC
MENU
ESC
-DRIVE-
-QUICK-
Monitor
Rdy
-DRIVERESET
** Main Menu **
U1 - 02=60.00Hz
Quick Setting
U1-03=10.05A
U1-04= 2
Output Freq
The Frequency Setting
Display will not be
displayed when using an
analog reference.
Rdy
U1- 02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
U1-04= 2
ESC
MENU
-DRIVE-
Monitor
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
Rdy
RESET
U1 - 40 = 10H
U1-01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
Rdy
-DRIVE-
FAN Elapsed Time
U1- 40 = 10H
ESC
MENU
U1-01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
1
2
3
4
The fault name will be
displayed if the DATA/ENTER
Key is pressed while a constant
is being displayed for which a
fault code is being displayed.
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
-DRIVE-
Fault Trace
Rdy
RESET
-DRIVE-
Current Fault
U2 - 01=OC
Rdy
U2-02=OV
U2-03=60.00Hz
ESC
Fault Trace
Rdy
U2 - 01= OC
Over Current
U2 - 01 = OC
U2-02= OV
U2-03=60.00Hz
-DRIVE-
DATA
ENTER
RESET
ESC
-DRIVE-
Last Fault
Rdy
DATA
ENTER
U2 - 02 = OV
U2 - 02 = OV
U3-03=60.00Hz
U3-04=60.00Hz
U3-03=60.00Hz
U3-04=60.00Hz
ESC
3
4
5
6
Rdy
U2 - 02= OV
DC Bus Overvolt
ESC
DATA
ENTER
-DRIVE-
Fault History
Rdy
RESET
-DRIVE-
Last Fault
Rdy
U3-02= OV
U3-03= OH
U3-02=OV
U3-03=OH
ESC
Rdy
U3 - 02 = OV
ESC
U3-03= OH
U3-04= UV
6
B
Fig 3.4 Operations in Drive Mode
3-6
DATA
ENTER
Fault Message 2
5
A
Rdy
-DRIVE-
U3 - 02 = OV
U3-03= OH
U3-04= UV
ESC
RESET
Fault Message 2
Rdy
U3 - 01= OC
Over Current
U3 - 01 = OC
U3 - 01= OC
-DRIVE-
DATA
ENTER
ESC
Rdy
U3 - 02= OV
DC Bus Overvolt
Modes
Note When changing the display with the Increment and Decrement Keys, the next display after the one for the last parameter number will be the one for the
first parameter number and vise versa. For example, the next display after the one for U1-01 will be U1-40. This is indicated in the figures by the letters
A and B and the numbers 1 to 6.
The display for the first monitor constant (frequency reference) will be displayed when power is turned ON.
The monitor item displayed at startup can be set in o1-02 (Monitor Selection after Power Up).
Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display.
IMPORTANT
Quick Programming Mode
In quick programming mode, the constants required for Inverter trial operation can be monitored and set.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to
change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the
DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants displayed in quick programming mode.
Example Operations
Key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure.
3-7
Mode Selection Display
Frequency Setting Display
Monitor Display
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
A
B
MENU
DATA
ENTER
-QUICK-
DATA
ENTER
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02=2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
ESC
ESC
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02= 2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
MENU
DATA
ENTER
-QUICK-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Reference Source
b1-01=1 *1*
Terminals
ESC
Programming
-QUICKMENU
-VERIFY-
Run Source
b1-02=1 *1*
Terminals
DATA
ENTER
-QUICK-
Reference Source
b1-01= 1 *1*
Terminals
-QUICK-
Run Source
b1-02= 1 *1*
Terminals
ESC
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
-QUICKMENU
Terminal AM Gain
DATA
ENTER
H4-05=0.50
-QUICK-
Terminal AM Gain
H4-05= 0 .50
-A.TUNEESC
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
-QUICK-
MOL Fault Select
L1-01=1 *1*
Std Fan Cooled
DATA
ENTER
-QUICK-
MOL Fault Select
L1-01= 1 *1*
Std Fan Cooled
ESC
-QUICK-
StallP Decel Sel
L3-04=1 *1*
Enabled
DATA
ENTER
ESC
A
B
Fig 3.5 Operations in Quick Programming Mode
3-8
-QUICK-
StallP Decel Sel
L3-04= 1 *1*
Enabled
Modes
Advanced Programming Mode
In advanced programming mode, all Inverter constants can be monitored and set.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to
change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the
DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants.
Example Operations
Key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display
Monitor Display
A
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
1
B
Initialization
Select Language
ESC
-ADV-
-ADV-
Select Language
A1- 00= 0 *1*
English
Select Language
A1- 00 =0 *1*
English
A1-00=1
Programming
2
DATA
ENTER
RESET
-ADV-
Setting Display
ESC
ESC
MENU
RESET
-ADV-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
Initialization
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
Control Method
A1- 02 =2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
A1- 02 =2
Control Method
ESC
-ADV-
Control Method
A1- 02= 2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
ESC
MENU
-A.TUNE-
1
2
3
4
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
RESET
-ADV-
PID Control
MENU
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
PID Mode
b5-01=0
PID Mode
b5- 01 =0 *0*
b5-01= 0 *0*
Disabled
PID Mode
-ADV-
Disabled
ESC
ESC
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
RESET
-ADV-
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
-ADV-
PID Control
Fb los Det Time
Fb los Det Time
b5 - 14= 1.0Sec
b5- 14= 1.0Sec
b5-14=01.0Sec
Fb los Det Time
ESC
ESC
-QUICK-
3
4
5
6
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
RESET
-ADV-
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
Fwd Torque Limit
Torque Limit
Fwd Torque Limit
L7- 01= 200%
L7-01=200%
-ADV-
L7-01= 2 00%
Fwd Torque Limit
ESC
ESC
RESET
-ADV-
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
Torque Limit
Fwd Torque Limit
L7- 04= 200%
L7- 04= 200%
Fwd Torque Limit
-ADV-
Torq Lmt Rev Rgn
L7-04= 2 00%
ESC
ESC
A
B
5
6
Fig 3.6 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode
3-9
Setting User Constants
Here, the procedure is shown to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10 s to 20 s.
Table 3.3 Setting User Constants in Advanced Programming Mode
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
-DRIVE-
Description
Rdy
Frequency Ref
1
U1- 01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
Power supply turned ON.
-DRIVE-
2
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU Key pressed to enter drive mode.
-QUICK-
3
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU Key pressed to enter quick programming mode.
-ADV-
4
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU Key pressed to enter advanced programming mode.
-ADV-
5
Initialization
A1-00=1
DATA/ENTER pressed to access monitor display.
Select Language
-ADV-
6
Accel Time 1
C1-00= 10.0Sec
(0.0
6000.0)
10.0Sec
Increment or Decrement Key pressed to display C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
-ADV-
7
Accel Time 1
C1-01= 0 010.0Sec
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to access setting display. The setting of C1-01
(10.00) is displayed.
-ADV-
8
Accel Time 1
C1-01= 0 010.0Sec
Shift/RESET Key pressed to move the flashing digit to the right.
-ADV-
9
Accel Time 1
C1-01= 00 10.0Sec
Increment Key pressed to change set value to 20.00 s.
-ADV-
10
Accel Time 1
C1-01= 00 20.0Sec
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to enter the set data.
-ADV-
11
Entry Accepted
“Entry Accepted” is displayed for 1.0 s after the data setting has been confirmed with the DATA/ENTER Key.
-ADV-
12
3-10
Accel Time 1
C1- 01= 20.0Sec
The monitor display for C1-01 returns.
Modes
External Fault Setting Procedure
Examples of the Digital Operator displays that appear when setting an eternal error for a multi-function contact input in Advanced Programming Mode are shown in the following diagram.
Mode Selection Display
A
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
Monitor Display
** Main Menu **
1
B
H1-01=24
Terminal S3 Sel
ESC
3
4
-ADV-
-ADV-
Terminal S3 Sel
H1- 01 =24 *24*
External Fault
Digital Inputs
Programming
2
DATA
ENTER
RESET
-ADV-
Setting Display
"24"
ESC
ESC
Terminal S3 Sel
H1- 01= 24 *24*
NO/Always Det
Coast to Stop
MENU
RESET
-ADV-
Digital Inputs
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
-ADV-
-ADV-
Terminal S4 Sel
H1- 02 =14 *14*
Fault Reset
H1- 02 =14
Terminal S4 Sel
"14"
Terminal S3 Sel
H1- 01= 25 *24*
NC/Always Det
Coast to Stop
ESC
MENU
RESET
-ADV-
Digital Inputs
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
-ADV-
-ADV-
Terminal S8 Sel
H1- 08 =08*08*
Ext BaseBlk N.O.
H1- 08 =08
Terminal S8 Sel
"08"
ESC
MENU
-ADV-
1
-DRIVE-
2
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Operation
Terminal S3 Sel
H1- 01= 26 *24*
NO/During RUN
Coast to Stop
Digital Inputs
Terminal S3 Sel
H1- 01= 27 *24*
NC/During RUN
Coast to Stop
H2-01= 0
Term M1-M2 Sel
MENU
-ADV-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
Pulse I/O Setup
H6-01= 0
Pulse Input Sel
-ADV-
MENU
A
B
Terminal S3 Sel
H1- 01= 2F *24*
NC/During RUN
Alarm Only
3
4
Fig 3.7 External Fault Function Setting Example
3-11
Verify Mode
Verify mode is used to display any constants that have been changed from their default settings in a programming mode or by autotuning. “None” will be displayed if no settings have been changed.
Of the environment mode settings, only A1-02 will be displayed if it has been changed. Other environment
modes settings will not be displayed even if they have been changed from their default settings.
Even in verify mode, the same procedures can be used to change settings as are used in the programming
modes. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user constant will
be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing
the setting.
Example Operations
An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their
default settings: b1-01 (Reference Selection), C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1), E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting), and
E2-01 (Motor Rated Current).
Mode Selection Display
Monitor Display
Setting Display
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
A
B
MENU
DATA
ENTER
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
-VERIFY-
Reference Source
b1-01=0 *0*
Terminals
Modified Consts
"1"
DATA
ENTER
-VERIFY-
Reference Source
b1-01= 0 *0*
Terminals
"1"
ESC
ESC
MENU
-VERIFY-
Accel Time 1
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
C1-01=200.0Sec
Auto-Tuning
MENU
DATA
ENTER
-VERIFY-
Accel Time 1
C1-01=0200.0Sec
ESC
-VERIFY-
Input Voltage
DATA
ENTER
E1-01=200VAC
-VERIFY-
Input Voltage
E1-01= 200VAC
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
ESC
-VERIFY-
Motor Rated FLA
MENU
DATA
ENTER
E2-01=2.00A
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
A
B
MENU
Fig 3.8 Operations in Verify Mode
3-12
Motor Rated FLA
E2-01= 2.00A
ESC
-QUICK-
-VERIFY-
Modes
Autotuning Mode
Autotuning automatically tunes and sets the required motor constants when operating in the vector control
modes. Always perform autotuning before starting operation.
When V/f control has been selected, stationary autotuning for only line-to-line resistance can be selected.
When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, perform stationary autotuning. Contact your Yaskawa
representatives to set motor constants by calculation.
The Inverter's autotuning function automatically determines the motor constants, while a servo system's autotuning function determines the size of a load, so these autotuning functions are fundamentally different. The
default setting of the Inverter is for open-loop vector control 1.
Example of Operation
Set the motor output power (in kW), rated voltage, rated current, rated frequency, rated speed, and number of
poles specified on the nameplate on the motor and then press the RUN Key. The motor is automatically run
and the motor constants measured based on these settings and autotuning will be set.
Always set the above items. Autotuning cannot be started otherwise, e.g., it cannot be started from the motor
rated voltage display.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to
change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the
DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
The following example shows autotuning for open-loop vector control while operating the motor without
switching to motor 2.
3-13
Mode Selection Display
Monitor Display
Setting Display
DATA
ENTER
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
A
MENU
DATA
ENTER
-A.TUNE-
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
T1- 01 =0 *0*
Standard Tuning
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
DATA
ENTER
"0"
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
01 = 0 *0*
Standard Tuning
"0"
ESC
ESC
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
-A.TUNE-
DATA
ENTER
-A.TUNE-
DATA
ENTER
Rated Frequency
T1- 05 = 60.0Hz
Operation
MENU
-A.TUNE-
Rated Frequency
T1- 05 = 0 60.0Hz
ESC
Number of Poles
T1- 06 = 4
-A.TUNE-
Number of Poles
T1- 06 = 04
-A.TUNE-
Tune Proceeding
48.0Hz/10.5A
START
-QUICK-
Quick Setting
-A.TUNE-
Auto-Tuning
MENU
Rdy
RUN
0.0Hz/0.0A
Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
MENU
A
The display will
automatically
change depending
on the status of
autotuning.
-A.TUNE-
Tune Proceeding
Tune Proceeding
48.0Hz/10.5A
START
-ADV-
Programming
GOAL
ESC
** Main Menu **
GOAL
Tune Successful
STOP
-A.TUNE-
Tune Aborted
-A.TUNE-
Tune Successful
STOP key
* TUn10 will be displayed during rotational autotuning and TUn11 will be displayed during stationary autotuning. The DRIVE indicator will light when
autotuning starts.
Fig 3.9 Operation in Autotuning Mode
The setting displays in for autotuning depend on the control mode (V/f, V/f with PG, open-loop vector 1, openloop vector 2, or flux vector). If a fault occurs during autotuning, refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting.
IMPORTANT
3-14
Trial Operation
This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the Inverter and provides an example
of trial operation.
Trial Operation Procedure............................................4-2
Trial Operation Procedures..........................................4-3
Adjustment Suggestions ............................................4-16
Trial Operation Procedure
Perform trial operation according to the following flowchart.
START
Installation
Wiring
Set power supply voltage. *1
Turn ON power.
Confirm status.
Select operating
method.
Basic settings
(Quick programming mode)
Vector (A1-02 = 2, 3, or 4)*5
V/f control?
YES
V/f
(Default: A1-02 = 0)
V/f with PG
(A1-02 = 1)
PG?
Set E1-03.
V/f default: 200 V/60 Hz(400 V/60 Hz)
Set E1-03, E2-04, and F1-01.
*2
V/f default: 200 V/60 Hz (400 V/60 Hz)
Settings according
to control mode
Motor cable over
50 m or heavy load possibly
causing motor to stall or
overload?
YES
OK to operate
*3
motor during autotuning?
NO
YES
NO
Stationary autotuning for *4
line-to-line resistance only
Rotational autotuning
*6
Stationary autotuning
Application settings
(Advanced programming mode)
*1 Set for 400 V Class Inverter for 55 kW or more.
No-load operation
*2 If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set
the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 in advanced
programming mode.
Loaded operation
*3 Use rotational autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy
whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated.
Optimum adjustments and
constant settings
Check/record constants.
END
*4 If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual
installation, perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line
resistance only on-site.
*5 The default control mode is open-loop vector control 2
(A1-02 = 2).
*6 If the maximum output frequency and base frequency
are different, set the maximum output frequency (E104) after autotuning.
Fig 4.1 Trial Operation Flowchart
4-2
*6
Trial Operation Procedures
Trial Operation Procedures
The procedure for the trial operate is described in order in this section.
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 55 kW
or Higher)
Set the power supply voltage jumper after setting E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting) for 400 V Class Inverters
of 55 kW or higher. Insert the jumper into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply
voltage.
The jumper is factory-set to 440 V when shipped. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the
following procedure to change the setting.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes.
2. Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out.
3. Remove the terminal cover.
4. Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter (see Fig 4.2).
5. Return the terminal cover to its original position.
Power tab
Jumper (factory-set position)
200 V class power supply
400V class power supply
Power supply input terminals
CHARGE indicator
Fig 4.2 Power Supply Voltage Jumper
Power ON
Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply.
• Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage.
200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 VDC, 50/60 Hz
400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 VDC, 50/60 Hz
• Make sure that the motor output terminals (U, V, W) and the motor are connected correctly.
• Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly.
• Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to OFF.
• When using a PG Speed Control Card, make sure that it is wired correctly.
• Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system (no-load status)
4-3
Checking the Display Status
If the Digital Operator's display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:
-DRIVE-DRIVE-
Display for normal operation
Rdy
Frequency
RefRef
Frequency
U1- 01
01= 60.0 0Hz
U1-01= 0 0 0.0 0Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
The frequency reference monitor is displayed in the data display section.
When an fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case,
refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting. The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation.
-DRIVE-
Display for fault operation
Frequency
UV Ref
DC Bus Undervolt
4-4
The display will differ depending on the
type of fault.
A low voltage alarm is shown at left.
Trial Operation Procedures
Basic Settings
Switch to the quick programming mode (“QUICK” will be displayed on the LCD screen) and then set the following user constants. Refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes for Digital Operator operating procedures and to Chapter 5 User Constants and Chapter 6 Constant Settings by Function for details on the user
constants.
Constants that must be set are listed in Table 4.1 and those that are set according to the application are listed in
Table 4.2.
Table 4.1 Constants that Must Be Set
Constant
Number
A1-02
Name
Control method
selection
Description
Set the control method for the Inverter.
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open-loop vector control 1
3: Flux vector
4: Open-loop vector control 2
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Page
0 to 4
2
5-8
1
5-10
6-6
6-60
6-75
0 to 3
1
5-10
6-11
6-60
6-75
Reference selection
Set the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
b1-02
Operation
method selection
Set the run command input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
C1-01
Acceleration time Set the acceleration time in seconds for the output
1
frequency to climb from 0% to 100%.
0.0 to 6000.0
10.0 s
5-18
6-18
C1-02
Deceleration time Set the deceleration time in seconds for the output
1
frequency to fall from 100% to 0%.
0.0 to 6000.0
10.0 s
5-18
6-18
Input voltage setSet the Inverter's nominal input voltage in volts.
ting
155 to 255 V
(200 V class)
310 to 510 V
(400 V class)
200 V
(200 V
class)
400 V
(400 V
class)
5-28
6-99
Motor rated current
Set the motor rated current.
Setting for
generalpurpose
10% to 200%
of Inverter's
motor of
rated current
same
capacity
as Inverter
Motor protection
selection
Set to enable or disable the motor overload protection function using the electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: General motor protection
2: Inverter motor protection
3: Vector motor protection
b1-01
E1-01
E2-01
L1-01
0 to 4
0 to 3
1
5-30
6-45
6-97
5-48
6-45
4-5
Table 4.2 Constants that Are Set as Required
Constant
Number
b1-03
C6-02
C6-11
Name
Stopping method
selection
Description
Select stopping method when stop command is
sent.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop
3: Coast to stop with timer
Carrier frequency selection
Carrier frequency selection
for open-loop
vector control 2
L3-04
4-6
FM and AM ter- Adjust when an instrument is connected to the FM
minal output gain or AM terminal.
Stall prevention
selection during
deceleration
Factory
Setting
Page
0 to 3
0
5-10
6-13
1 to F
Depends
on capacity, voltage, and
control
mode.
5-23
1 to 4
Depends
on kVA
setting.
5-25
0 to 400.00 Hz
d1-01 to
d1-04:
0.00 Hz
d1-17:
6.00 Hz
5-24
6-9
0.00 to 2.50
H4-02:
1.00
H4-05:
0.50
5-45
0 to 3
1
5-52
6-23
The carrier frequency is set low if the motor cable
is 50 m or longer or to reduce radio noise or leakage current.
Frequency referd1-01 to
ences 1 to 4 and Set the required speed references for multi-step
d1-04 and
jog frequency ref- speed operation or jogging.
d1-17
erence
H4-02
and H405
Setting
Range
If using the dynamic brake option (braking resistor, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units), be
sure to set constant L3-04 to 0 (disabled) or 3
(enabled with braking resistor).
Trial Operation Procedures
Settings for the Control Methods
Autotuning methods depend on the control method set for the Inverter. Make the settings required by the control method.
Overview of Settings
Make the required settings in quick programming mode and autotuning mode according to the following flowchart.
START
NO
Vector (A1-02 = 2, 3, or 4)*3
V/f control?
YES
V/f
(A1-02 = 0 or 1)
Control mode selection
PG?
YES
(A1-02 = 1)
NO
(Default: A1-02 = 0)
Set E1-03.
V/f default: 200 V/60 Hz(400 V/60 Hz)
Set E1-03, E2-04, and F1-01.
V/f default: 200 V/60 Hz(400 V/60 Hz)
*2
Motor cable over
50 m or heavy load possibly
causing motor to stall
or overload?
YES
OK to operate
motor during autotuning?*1
NO
YES
NO
Stationary autotuning for
line-to-line resistance only
Rotational autotuning*4
Stationary autotuning*4
END
Note If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual installation, perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only on-site.
* 1. Use rotational autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated. Always perform rotational autotuning when
using open-loop vector control 2.
* 2. If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13.
* 3. The default setting of the Inverter is for open-loop vector control 1 (A1-02 = 2).
* 4. If the maximum output frequency and base frequency are different, set the maximum output frequency (E1-04) after autotuning.
Fig 4.3 Settings According to the Control Method
4-7
Setting the Control Method
Any of the following five control methods can be set.
Control Mode
Constant Setting
Basic Control
Main Applications
V/f control
A1-02 = 0
Voltage/frequency ratio fixed control
Variable speed control, particularly
control of multiple motors with one
Inverter and replacing existing inverters
V/f control with PG
A1-02 = 1
Voltage/frequency ratio fixed control
with speed compensation using a PG
Applications requiring high-precision
speed control using a PG on the
machine side
A1-02 = 2
(factory setting)
Current vector control without a PG
Variable speed control, applications
requiring speed and torque accuracy
using vector control without a PG
A1-02 = 3
Flux vector control
Very high-performance control with a
PG (simple servo drives, high-precision speed control, torque control, and
torque limiting)
A1-02 = 4
Current vector control without a PG
with an ASR (speed controller)
(Always perform rotational autotuning.)
Very high-performance control without a PG (torque control without a PG,
torque limiting, applications requiring
a 1:200 speed control range without a
PG)
Open-loop vector
control 1
Flux vector control
Open-loop vector
control 2
Note With vector control, the motor and Inverter must be connected 1:1. The motor capacity for which stable control is possible is 50% to 100% of the capacity of the Inverter.
PG Control without PG (A1-02 = 0)
• Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to E) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a
user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced programming mode.
Simple operation of a general-purpose
motor at 50 Hz:
E1-03 = 0
Simple operation of a general-purpose
motor at 60 Hz:
E1-03 = F (default) or 1
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from
E1-04 to E1-13 are for 60 Hz
• Perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for
the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling. Refer to the following section on
Autotuning for details on stationary autotuning.
V/f Control with PG (A1-02=1)
• Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to E) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a
user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced programming mode.
Simple operation of a general-purpose
motor at 50 Hz:
E1-03 = 0
Simple operation of a general-purpose
motor at 60 Hz:
E1-03 = F (default) or 1
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from
E1-04 to E1-13 are for 60 Hz
• Set the number of motor poles in E2-04 (Number of Motor Poles)
• Set the number of rotations per pulse in F1-01 (PG Constant). If there is a reduction gear between the
motor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 in advanced programming mode.
4-8
Trial Operation Procedures
• Perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for
the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling. Refer to the following section on
Autotuning for details on stationary autotuning.
Open-loop Vector Control 1 (A1-02 = 2)
Perform autotuning. If the motor can be operated, perform rotational autotuning. If the motor cannot be operated, perform stationary autotuning. Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on autotuning.
Flux Vector Control (A1-02 = 3)
Perform autotuning. If the motor can be operated, perform rotational autotuning. If the motor cannot be operated, perform stationary autotuning. Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on autotuning.
Open-loop Vector Control 2 (A1-02 = 4)
Perform autotuning. Be sure to perform rotational autotuning. Refer to the following section on Autotuning for
details on autotuning.
Autotuning
Use the following procedure to perform autotuning to automatically set motor constants when using the vector
control method, when the cable length is long, etc.
Setting the Autotuning Mode
One of the following three autotuning modes can be set.
• Rotational autotuning
• Stationary autotuning
• Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
Always confirm the precautions before autotuning before performing autotuning.
Rotational Autotuning (T1-01 = 0)
Rotational autotuning is used only for open-vector control. Set T1-01 to 0, input the data from the nameplate,
and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will stop the motor for approximately
1 minute and then set the required motor constants automatically while operating the motor for approximately
1 minute.
Stationary Autotuning (T1-01 = 1)
Stationary autotuning is used for open-vector control or flux vector control. Set T1-01 to 1, input the data from
the nameplate, and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power to the stationary motor for approximately 1 minute and some of the motor constants will be set automatically. The
remaining motor constants will be set automatically the first time operation is started in drive mode.
4-9
Stationary Autotuning for Line-to-Line Resistance Only (T1-01 = 2)
Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only can be used in any control method. This is the only autotuning possible for V/f control and V/f control with PG modes.
Autotuning can be used to prevent control errors when the motor cable is long (50 m or longer) or the cable
length has changed since installation or when the motor and Inverter have different capacities.
Set T1-01 to 2 for open-loop vector control, and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter
will supply power to the stationary motor for approximately 20 seconds and the Motor Line-to-Line Resistance (E2-05) and cable resistance will be automatically measured.
Precautions Before Using Autotuning
Read the following precautions before using autotuning.
• Autotuning the Inverter is fundamentally different from autotuning the servo system. Inverter autotuning
automatically adjusts parameters according to detected motor constants, whereas servo system autotuning
adjusts parameters according to the detected size of the load.
• When speed precision or torque precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher),
use a motor with a rated voltage that is 20 V less than the input power supply voltage of the Inverter for
200V-class Inverters and 40 V less for 400V-class Inverters. If the rated voltage of the motor is the same as
the input power supply voltage, the voltage output from the Inverter will be unstable at high speeds and
sufficient performance will not be possible.
• Use stationary autotuning whenever performing autotuning for a motor that is connected to a load.
• Use rotational autotuning whenever performing autotuning for a motor that has fixed output characteris-
tics, when high precision is required, or for a motor that is not connected to a load.
• If rotational autotuning is performed for a motor connected to a load, the motor constants will not be found
accurately and the motor may exhibit abnormal operation. Never perform rotational autotuning for a motor
connected to a load.
• If the wiring between the Inverter and motor changes by 50 m or more between autotuning and motor
installation, perform stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only.
• If the motor cable is long (50 m or longer), perform stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
even when using V/f control.
• The status of the multi-function inputs and multi-function outputs will be as shown in the following table
during autotuning. When performing autotuning with the motor connected to a load, be sure that the holding brake is not applied during autotuning, especially for conveyor systems or similar equipment.
Tuning Mode
Multi-function Inputs
Multi-function Outputs
Rotational autotuning
Do not function.
Same as during normal
operation
Stationary autotuning
Do not function.
Maintain same status as
when autotuning is started.
Stationary autotuning for lineto-line resistance only
Do not function.
Maintain same status as
when autotuning is started.
• To cancel autotuning, always use the STOP Key on the Digital Operator.
IMPORTANT
4-10
1. Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning is performed even though the motor
will not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.
2. When performing stationary autotuning connected to a conveyor or other machine, ensure that the
holding brake is not activated during autotuning.
Trial Operation Procedures
Precautions for Rotational and Stationary Autotuning
Lower the base voltage based on Fig 4.4 to prevent saturation of the Inverter’s output voltage when the rated
voltage of the motor is higher than the voltage of the power supply to the Inverter. Use the following procedure to perform autotuning.
1. Input the voltage of the input power supply to T1-03 (Motor rated voltage).
2. Input the results of the following formula to T1-05 (Motor base frequency):
(Base frequency from the motor’s nameplate × setting of T1-03)/(Rated voltage from motor’s nameplate)
3. Perform autotuning.
After completing autotuning, set E1-04 (Max. output frequency) to the base frequency from the motor’s nameplate.
Output voltage
Rated voltage from
motor nameplate
T1-03
0
Base frequency
from motor nameplate
×T1-03
Output frequency
Base frequency
from motor nameplate
Rated voltage from motor nameplate
Fig 4.4 Motor Base Frequency and Inverter Input Voltage Setting
IMPORTANT
1. When speed precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), set T1-03 (Motor
rated voltage) to the input power supply voltage × 0.9.
2. When operating at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), the output current will increase as
the input power supply voltage is reduced. Be sure to provide sufficient margin in the Inverter current.
Precautions after Rotational and Stationary Autotuning
If the maximum output frequency and base frequency are different, set the maximum output frequency (E104) after autotuning.
4-11
Constant Settings for Autotuning
The following constants must be set before autotuning.
Table 4.3 Constant Settings before Autotuning
Constant
Number
Name
Display
Display
Motor 1/2 When switching to motor 2 is
selection*1 selected, set the motor for
which autotuning is to be performed. (This constant is
T1-00
ignored if motor 2 is not
Select
selected.)
Motor
1: Motor 1
2: Motor 2
T1-01
Autotuning mode
selection
Tuning
Mode Sel
Motor output power
T1-02
Mtr Rated
Power
Motor
rated voltage
T1-03
Rated
Voltage
Motor
rated curT1-04 rent
Rated Current
Motor
base freT1-05 quency
Rated Frequency
Set the autotuning mode.
0: Rotational autotuning
1: Stationary autotuning
2: Stationary autotuning for
line-to-line resistance only
4-12
Factory
Setting
1 or 2
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 to 2
2 (V/f)
0 (Vector)*4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0.00 to
650.00 kW
Set the rated voltage of the
motor in volts.*5 *6
0 to
255.0 V
(200 V
class)
0 to
510.0 V
(400 V
class)
200.0 V
(200 V
class)
400.0 V
(400 V
class)
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Set the rated current of the
motor in amps.*5 *7
0.32 to
6.40 A*3
1.90 A*2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Set the base frequency of the
motor in hertz.*3 *4 *5 *6
0 to
400.0 Hz
60.0 Hz
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
2 to 48
poles
4 poles
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Set the number of motor poles.
Number of
Poles
Setting
Range
Set the output power of the
motor in kilowatts.*5 *7
Number of
motor
poles
T1-06
Data Displays during Autotuning
Open
Open
V/f
Flux
-loop
-loop
V/f
with
VecVecVecPG
tor
tor 1
tor 2
0.40 kW
*2
Trial Operation Procedures
Table 4.3 Constant Settings before Autotuning(Continued)
Constant
Number
Name
Display
Data Displays during Autotuning
Open
Open
V/f
Flux
-loop
-loop
with
VecV/f
VecVecPG
tor
tor 1
tor 2
Display
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Set the base speed of the motor
in min−1.*3 *5
0 to 24000
1750
min−1
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 to 60000
600
-
Yes
-
Yes
-
Motor
base speed
T1-07
Rated
Speed
Number of
PG pulses
when turn- Set the number of pulses for the
PG (pulse generator or
ing
T1-08
encoder). Set the number of
pulses per motor revolution
PG Pulses/ without a multiplication factor.
Rev
*
*
*
*
*
*
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Not normally displayed. Displayed only when a motor switch command is set for a multi-function digital input (one of H1-01 to H1-05 set to 16).
The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. Values are given for a 200 V class, 0.4 kW Inverter.
The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter capacity.
For V/f control, the only setting that is possible is 2 (stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only).
For fixed output motors, set the base speed value.
For inverter motors or for specialized vector motors, the voltage or frequency may be lower than for general-purpose motors. Always confirm the information on the nameplate or in test reports. If the no-load values are known, input the no-load voltage in T1-03 and the no-load current in T1-05 to
ensure accuracy.
* 7. The settings that will ensure stable vector control are between 50% and 100% of the Inverter rating.
Refer to page 3-14 for Digital Operator displays during autotuning.
4-13
Application Settings
User constants are set as required in advanced programming mode (“ADV” will be displayed on the LCD
screen). All the constants that can be set in quick programming mode can also be displayed and set in
advanced programming mode.
Setting Examples
The following are examples of settings for applications.
• When using an Inverter-mounted braking resistor (ERF), set L8-01 to 1 to enable ERF braking resistor
overheating protection.
• To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse, set b1-04 to 1 to disable reverse operation.
• To increase the speed of a 60 Hz motor by 10%, set E1-04 to 66.0 Hz.
• To use a 0 to 10-V analog signal for a 60 Hz motor for variable-speed operation between 0 and 54 Hz (0%
to 90% speed deduction), set H3-02 to 90.0%.
• To control speed between 20% and 80% to ensure smooth gear operation and limit the maximum speed of
the machine, set d2-01 to 80.0% and set d2-02 to 20.0%.
No-load Operation
To being no-load operation (without connecting the machine and the motor), press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key
on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode (the SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator
should be OFF).
Always confirm safety around the motor and machine before starting Inverter operation from the Digital
Operator. Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Inverter.
Jog Frequency Reference (d1-17, default: 6.00 Hz) can be started and stopped by pressing and releasing the
JOG Key on the Digital Operator. If the external sequence prevent operation from the Digital Operator, confirm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning, and then start operation in
REMOTE mode (i.e., with a signal from the control signal terminals). The safety precautions must always be
taken before starting the Inverter with the motor connected to the machine.
Both a RUN command (forward or reverse) and a frequency reference (or multi-step speed reference) must
be provided to start Inverter operation.
Input these commands and reference regardless of the operation method (i.e., LOCAL of REMOTE).
INFO
Loaded Operation
Connect the machine to the motor and then start operation as described for no-load operation (i.e., from the
Digital Operator or by using control circuit terminal signals).
Connecting the Load
• After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.
• Be sure to tighten all the screws when securing the motor shaft to the mechanical system.
4-14
Trial Operation Procedures
Operation using the Digital Operator
• Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no-load operation.
• If fault occurs during operation, make sure the STOP Key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible.
• At first, set the frequency reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed.
Checking Operating Status
• Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow
speed, increase the frequency reference.
• After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnor-
mal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that U1-03 (Output Current) is not too
high.
• Refer to Adjustment Suggestions on page 4-16 if hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the
control system occur.
Check and Recording User Constants
Use verify mode (“VERIFY” will be displayed on the LCD screen) to check user constants that have been
changed for trial operation and record them in a user constant table.
Any user constants that have been change by autotuning will also be displayed in verify mode.
If required, the copy function in constants o3-01 and o3-02 displayed in advanced programming mode can be
used to copy the changed settings from the Inverter to a recording area in the Digital Operator. If changed settings are saved in the Digital Operator, they can be easily copied back to the Inverter to speed up system
recovery if for any reason the Inverter has to be replaced.
The following functions can also be used to manage user constants.
• Recording user constants
• Setting access levels for user constants
• Setting a password
Recording User Constants (o2-03)
If o2-03 is set to 1 after completing trial operation, the settings of user constants will be saved in a separate
memory area in the Inverter. Later, after Inverter settings have been changed, the user constants can be initialized to the settings saved in the separate memory area when o2-03 was set to 1 by setting A1-03 (Initialize) to
1110.
User Constant Access Levels (A1-01)
A1-01 can be set to 0 (monitoring-only) to prevent user constants from being changed. A1-01 can also be set
to 1 (User-specified Constants) and used along with A2 constants to display only constants required by the
machine or application in a programming mode.
Password (A1-04 and A1-05)
When the access level is set to monitoring-only (A1-01 = 0), a password can be set so that user constants will
be displayed only when the correct password is input.
4-15
Adjustment Suggestions
If hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the control system occur during trial operation,
adjust the constants listed in the following table according to the control method. This table lists only the
most commonly used user constants.
Table 4.4 Adjusted User Constants
Control
Method
V/f control
(A1-02 = 0
or 1)
Name (Constant
Number)
Performance
Factory
Setting
0.50 to 2.00
• Reduce the setting if
torque is insufficient for
heavy loads.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for
light loads.
0 to
default
• Increase the setting if
motor magnetic noise is
high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at
low to middle-range
speeds.
200 to 1000
ms
• Reduce the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
Hunting-prevention
gain (N1-02)
Carrier frequency
selection
(C6-02)
• Reducing motor
magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting
and vibration at low
speeds
Depends
on capacity
Torque compensation
primary delay time
constant (C4-02)
• Increasing torque
and speed response
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
Depends
on capacity
Torque compensation
gain (C4-01)
• Improving torque at
low speeds (10 Hz
or lower)
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
1.00
0.50 to 1.50
• Increase the setting if
torque is insufficient at
low speeds.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for
light loads.
Middle output frequency voltage
(E1-08)
Minimum output frequency voltage
(E1-10)
• Improving torque at
low speeds
• Controlling shock at
startup
Depends
on capacity and
voltage
Default to
Default + 3
to 5 V*
• Increase the setting if
torque is insufficient at
low speeds.
• Reduce the setting if shock
at startup is large.
0.50 to 2.00
• Reduce the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
20 to
100 ms
• Reduce the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
100 to
500 ms
• Reduce the setting if speed
response is slow.
• Increase the setting if the
speed is not stable.
0.5 to 1.5
• Increase the setting if
speed response is slow.
• Reduce the setting if the
speed is too fast.
Torque compensation
primary delay time
constant (C4-02)
• Increasing torque
and speed response
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
20 ms
• Increasing speed
Slip compensation priresponse
mary delay time (C3200 ms
• Improving speed sta02)
bility
Slip compensation
gain (C3-01)
4-16
Adjustment Method
Controlling hunting
and vibration in mid1.00
dle-range speeds (10 to
40 Hz)
• Increasing torque
Speed feedback detecand speed response
tion control (AFR)
• Controlling hunting
1.00
gain
and vibration in mid(N2-01)
dle-range speeds (10
to 40 Hz)
Open-loop
vector control
(A1-02 = 2)
Recommended
Setting
• Improving speed
accuracy
1.0
Adjustment Suggestions
Table 4.4 Adjusted User Constants (Continued)
Control
Method
Name (Constant
Number)
Carrier frequency
selection (C6-02)
Open-loop
vector control 1
Middle output fre(A1-02 = 2) quency voltage
(E1-08)
Minimum output frequency voltage
(E1-10)
Performance
Recommended
Setting
Adjustment Method
• Reducing motor
magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting
and vibration at low
speeds (10 Hz or
less)
Depends
on capacity
0 to
default
• Increase the setting if
motor magnetic noise is
high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at
low speeds.
• Improving torque at
low speeds
• Controlling shock at
startup
Depends
on capacity and
voltage
Default to
Default + 1
or 2 V*
• Increase the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Reduce the setting if shock
at startup is large.
10.00 to
50.00
• Increase the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
0.300 to
1.000 s
• Reduce the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
ASR proportional gain • Torque and speed
1 (C5-01) and
response
ASR proportional gain • Controlling hunting
2 (C5-03)
and vibration
ASR integral time 1
(high-speed) (C5-02)
and
ASR integral time 2
(low-speed) (C5-04)
Factory
Setting
• Torque and speed
response
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
20.00
0.500 s
Flux vector
ASR switching frecontrol
quency (C5-07)
(A1-02 = 3)
Switching the ASR
proportional gain and
integral time according to the output frequency
0.0 Hz
0.0 to max.
output frequency
Set the output frequency at
which to change the ASR
proportional gain and integral time when the same values cannot be used for both
high-speed and low-speed
operation.
ASR primary delay
time (C5-06)
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
0.004 s
0.004 to
0.020
Increase the setting if
machine rigidity is low and
the system vibrates easily.
Carrier frequency
selection (C6-02)
• Reducing motor
magnetic noise
Depends
• Controlling hunting on the
and vibration at low capacity.
speeds (3 Hz or less)
2.0 kHz to
default
• Increase the setting if
motor magnetic noise is
high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at
low to middle-range
speeds.
4-17
Table 4.4 Adjusted User Constants (Continued)
Control
Method
Name (Constant
Number)
Performance
ASR proportional gain • Torque and speed
response
1 (C5-01) and
ASR proportional gain • Controlling hunting
2 (C5-03)
and vibration
ASR integral time 1
(high-speed) (C5-02)
and
ASR integral time 2
(low-speed) (C5-04)
• Torque and speed
response
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
Factory
Setting
10.00
0.500 s
Recommended
Setting
Adjustment Method
10.00 to
50.00
• Increase the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
0.300 to
1.000 s
• Reduce the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
Set the output frequency at
which to change the ASR
proportional gain and integral time when the same values cannot be used for both
high-speed and low-speed
operation.
Open-loop
vector con- ASR switching fretrol 2
quency (C5-07)
(A1-02 = 4)
Switching the ASR
proportional gain and
integral time according to the output frequency
0.0 Hz
0.0 to max.
output frequency
ASR primary delay
time (C5-06)
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
0.010 s
Increase the setting if
0.04 to 0.020 machine rigidity is low and
the system vibrates easily.
Carrier frequency
selection (C6-11)
• Reducing motor
Depends
magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting on the
and vibration at low capacity.
speeds (3 Hz or less)
Default
value
• Increase the setting if
motor magnetic noise is
high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at
low to middle-range
speeds.
* The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters. Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters.
• Do not change the Torque Compensation Gain (C4-01) from its default setting of 1.00 when using open-
loop vector control 1.
• If speeds are inaccurate during regeneration in open-loop vector control 1, enable Slip Compensation Dur-
ing Regeneration (C3-04 = 1).
• Use slip compensation to improve speed precision during V/f control (A1-02 = 0).
Set the Motor Rated Current (E2-01), Motor Rated Slip (E2-02), and Motor No-load Current (E2-03), and
then adjust the Slip Compensation Gain (C3-01) to between 0.5 and 1.5. The default setting for V/f control
is C3-01 = 0.0 (slip compensation disabled).
• To improve speed response and stability in V/f control with a PG (A1-02 = 1), set the ASR constants (C5-
01 to C5-05) to between 0.5 and 1.5 times the default. (It is not normally necessary to adjust this setting.)
ASR for V/f control with a PG will only control the output frequency; a high gain, such as is possible for
open-loop vector control 2 or flux vector control, cannot be set.
The following user constants will also indirectly affect the control system.
Table 4.5 Constants Indirectly Affecting Control and Applications
Name (Constant Number)
4-18
Application
Dwell function (b6-01 to b6-04)
Used for heavy loads or large machine backlashes.
Droop function (b7-01 to b7-02)
Used to soften the torque or to balance the load between two motors. Can
be used when the control mode (A1-02) is set to 3 or 4.
Acceleration/deceleration times
(C1-01 to C1-11)
Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration.
S-curve characteristics (C2-01 to C2-04)
Used to prevent shock when completing acceleration.
Adjustment Suggestions
Table 4.5 Constants Indirectly Affecting Control and Applications(Continued)
Name (Constant Number)
Application
Jump frequencies (d3-01 to d3-04)
Used to avoid resonance points during operation.
Analog input filter time constant (H3-12)
Used to prevent fluctuations in analog input signals caused by noise.
Stall prevention (L3-01 to L3-06)
Used to prevent 0 V (overvoltage errors) and motor stalling for heavy
loads or rapid acceleration/deceleration. Stall prevention is enabled by
default and the setting does not normally need to be changed. When using
a braking resistor, however, disable stall prevention during deceleration
by setting L3-04 to 0.
Torque limits (L7-01 to L7-04)
Set the maximum torque during vector control. If a setting is increased,
use a motor with higher capacity than the Inverter. If a setting is reduced,
stalling can occur under heavy loads.
Feed forward control (N5-01 to N5-03)
Used to increase response for acceleration/deceleration or to reduce overshooting when there is low machine rigidity and the gain of the speed
controller (ASR) cannot be increased. The inertia ratio between the load
and motor and the acceleration time of the motor running alone must be
set.
4-19
4-20
User Constants
This chapter describes all user constants that can be set in the Inverter.
User Constant Descriptions .........................................5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ..........5-3
User Constant Tables ..................................................5-8
User Constant Descriptions
This section describes the contents of the user constant tables.
Description of User Constant Tables
User constant tables are structured as shown below. Here, b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as an
example.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Reference
selection
b1-01
Reference
Source
Setting
Range
Description
Set the frequency reference
input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
1
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
-loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Q
Q
Q
Q
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
Q
180H
-
• Constant Number:
The number of the user constant.
• Name:
The name of the user constant.
• Description:
Details on the function or settings of the user constant.
• Setting Range:
The setting range for the user constant.
• Factory Setting:
The factory setting (each control method has its own factory setting.
Therefore the factory setting changes when the control method is
changed.)
Refer to page 5-83 for factory settings by control method.
• Change during Operation:
Indicates whether or not the constant can be changed while the
Inverter is in operation.
Yes: Changes possible during operation.
No:
• Control Methods:
5-2
Changes not possible during operation.
Indicates the control methods in which the user constant can be monitored or set.
Q:
Items which can be monitored and set in either quick programming mode or advanced programming mode.
A:
Items which can be monitored and set only in advanced programming mode.
No:
Items which cannot be monitored or set for the control method.
• MEMOBUS Register:
The register number used for MEMOBUS communications.
• Page:
Reference page for more detailed information on the constant.
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter.
MENU
Drive Mode
Inverter can be operated and
its status can be displayed.
Quick Programming Mode
Minimum constants required
for operation can be monitored
or set.
Advanced Programming Mode
All constants can be monitored
or set.
Verify Mode
Constants changed from the
default settings can be monitored or set.
Autotuning Mode
Automatically sets motor constants if autotuning data (from
motor nameplate) is input for
open-loop vector control or to
measure the line-to-line resistance for V/f control.
No.
Function
Display
Page
U1
Status Monitor Constants
Monitor
5-75
U2
Fault Trace
Fault Trace
5-80
U3
Fault History
Fault History
5-82
5-8
A1
Initialize Mode
Initialization
A2
User-specified Setting Mode
User
Parameters
5-9
b1
Operation Mode Selections
Sequence
5-10
b2
DC Injection Braking
DC Braking
5-12
b3
Speed Search
Speed
Search
5-13
b4
Timer Function
Delay Timers
5-14
b5
PID Control
PID Control
5-14
b6
Dwell Functions
PID Control
5-16
b7
Droop Control
5-17
b8
Energy Saving
Droop Control
Energy Saving
b9
Zero Servo
Zero Servo
5-19
C1
Acceleration/Deceleration
Accel/Decel
5-20
C2
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration
5-21
C3
Motor Slip Compensation
C4
Torque Compensation
S-Curve Acc/
Dcc
Motor-Slip
Comp
Torque
Comp
C5
Speed Control (ASR)
ASR Tuning
5-24
C6
Carrier Frequency
Carrier Freq
5-25
d1
Preset Reference
5-26
d2
Reference Limits
d3
Jump Frequencies
Preset Reference
Reference
Limits
Jump Frequencies
d4
Reference Frequency Hold
Sequence
5-28
d5
Torque Control
Torque Control
5-29
d6
Field Control
Field-weakening
5-30
E1
V/f Pattern
V/f Pattern
5-32
E2
Motor Setup
Motor
Setup
5-33
E3
Motor 2 V/f Pattern
V/f Pattern 2
5-35
E4
Motor 2 Setup
5-37
F1
PG Option Setup
Motor Setup
2
PG Option
Setup
F2
Analog Reference Card
AI-14 Setup
5-40
F3
Digital Reference Card
5-41
F4
Analog Monitor Cards
F5
Digital Output Card
F6
Communications Option Card
DI-08, 16
Setup
AO-08, 12
Setup
DO-02,08
Setup
CP-916
Setup
H1
Multi-function Contact Inputs
Digital
Inputs
5-45
H2
Multi-function Contact Outputs
Digital Outputs
5-48
H3
Analog Inputs
Analog
Inputs
5-50
H4
Multi-function Analog Outputs
5-53
H5
MEMOBUS Communications
H6
Pulse Train
L1
Motor Overload
L2
Power Loss Ridethrough
L3
Stall Prevention
L4
Reference Detection
Analog Outputs
Serial Com
Setup
Pulse I/O
Setup
Motor Overload
PwrLoss
Ridethru
Stall Prevention
Ref Detection
L5
Fault Restart
Fault Restart
5-62
L6
Torque Detection
Torque
Detection
5-63
L7
Torque Limits
Torque Limit
5-64
L8
Hardware Protection
Hdwe Protection
5-65
N1
Hunting Prevention Function
Hunting Prev
5-67
N2
Speed Feedback Protection Control
AFR
5-68
N3
High-slip Braking
High Slip
5-68
N4
Speed Estimation
Observer
5-69
N5
Feed Forward
5-70
o1
Monitor Select
o2
Multi-function Selections
o3
Copy Function
Feedfoward
Cont
Monitor
Select
Key Selections
COPY Function
T
Motor Autotuning
Auto-Tuning
5-74
5-18
5-22
5-23
5-27
5-28
5-38
5-40
5-43
5-44
5-54
5-56
5-57
5-58
5-60
5-61
5-70
5-72
5-73
5-3
User Constants Settable in Quick Programming Mode
The minimum user constants required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming
mode. The user constants displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and
all other user constants, are also displayed in advanced programming mode.
Refer to the overview of modes on page 3-4 for an overview of quick programming mode.
Name
Constant
Number
A1-02
Display
Control
method
selection
Control
Method
Reference
selection
b1-01
b1-02
Reference
Source
Operation
method
selection
Run
Source
Stopping
method
selection
b1-03
Stopping
Method
C1-01
C1-02
C6-02
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Set the control method for the Inverter.
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open-loop vector control 1
3: Flux vector control
4: Open-loop vector control 2
0 to 4
2
Set the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog
input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4
Set the run command input method
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence
input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Select stopping method when stop
command is sent.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop (Stops faster than
coast to stop, without regenerative
operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run
commands are disregarded during
deceleration time.)
Acceleration time 1 Set the acceleration time in seconds
for the output frequency to climb from
Accel
0% to 100%.
Time 1
Deceleration time 1 Set the deceleration time in seconds
for the output frequency to fall from
Decel
100% to 0%.
Time 1
Carrier frequency
Select carrier wave fixed pattern.
selection
Select F to enable detailed settings
using constants C6-03 to C6-05.
Carrier
Freq Sel
5-4
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
-loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
102H
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
180H
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
181H
0 to 3
0
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
182H
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
200H
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
201H
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
224H
0.0 to
6000.0
10.0 s
*1
1 to F
6
*2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Name
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1 to 4
4*2
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
-loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
No
No
Q
22DH
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
280H
d1-02
Frequency
reference 2 Frequency reference when multi-step
speed reference 1 is ON for a multiReference function input.
2
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
281H
d1-03
Frequency
reference 3 Frequency reference when multi-step
speed reference 2 is ON for a multiReference function input.
3
0 to
400.00 0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
282H
Frequency
reference 4 Frequency reference when multi-step
speed reference 1 and 2 are ON for a
Reference multi-function input.
4
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
283H
6.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
292H
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
300H
No
Q
Q
No
No
No
302H
Constant
Number
C6-11
d1-01
Display
Description
Carrier frequency for Select carrier frequency when openopen-loop loop vector control 2 is used.
vector con- 1: 2.0kHz
2: 4.0kHz
trol 2
3: 6.0kHz
Carrier
4: 8.0kHz
Freq Sel
Frequency
reference 1 Set the frequency reference in the unit
Reference specified in o1-03.
1
d1-04
d1-17
Jog
frequency
reference
Jog
Reference
E1-01
E1-03
Frequency reference when Jog Frequency Selection, FJOG command, or
RJOG command is ON for a multifunction input.
Input voltage setting
Set the Inverter input voltage in 1 volt.
This set value will be the basis for the
Input Volt- protection functions.
age
V/f pattern
selection
V/F Selection
*9
0 to E: Select from 15 preset patterns.
F: Custom user-set patterns (Applicable for setting E1-04 to E1-10).
155 to
255
*3
0 to F
200 V
*3
F
5-5
Name
Constant
Number
E1-04
Display
Control Methods
Description
Max.
output
frequency
(FMAX)
Change
during
Operation
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
-loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
303H
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
304H
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
305H
No
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
308H
No
A
A
Q
Q
Q
30CH
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
30EH
No
No
Q
No
Q
Q
311H
0.00 to 0.40*10
650.000
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
318H
0 to
60000
600
No
No
Q
No
Q
No
380H
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
41EH
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
40.0 to 60.0 Hz
400.0*9
*4
0.0 to
255.0
200.0
V
*3
*3*4
0.0 to
60.0 Hz
Max
Frequency
E1-05
Max.
voltage
(VMAX)
Max
Voltage
E1-06
Base frequency
(FA)
Base Frequency
E1-09
Min. output frequency
(FMIN)
To set V/f characteristics in a straight
line, set the same values for E1-07 and
E1-09. In this case, the setting for E108 will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07
(FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
400.0*9
0.0 to
400.0*9
*4
0.5 Hz
*4
Min Frequency
E1-13
Base
voltage
(VBASE)
Base
Voltage
E2-01
E2-04
Change this setting only when making
advanced adjustments for V/f in the
fixed outputs area. Normally, there is
no need to make these settings.
Motor
rated current
Set the motor rated current in amps.
This set value becomes the base value
for motor protection, torque limit, and
torque control. It is set automatically
Motor
Rated FLA when using autotuning.
Number of
motor
Set the number of motor poles. The
poles
value is set automatically during autoNumber of tuning.
0.0 to
255.0
*3
0.32 to
6.40
*7
2 to 48
0.0 V
*5
1.90 A
*6
4
Poles
E2-11
Motor
rated
output
Mtr Rated
Power
F1-01
PG constant
Set the number of pulses per rotation
for the PG (pulse generator or
PG Pulses/ encoder) being used. (Do not set as a
multiple.)
Rev
Gain (terminal FM)
H4-02
5-6
Set the output of the motor in units of
0.01kW. This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
Terminal
FM Gain
Set the voltage level gain for multifunction analog output 1.
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to
be output as the 100% output for the
monitor items. Voltage output from the
terminals, however, have a 10 V max.
meter calibration function.
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Name
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
H4-05
Gain (ter- Set the voltage level gain for multiminal AM) function analog output 2.
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to
be output as the 100% output for the
Terminal
monitor items. Voltage output from the
AM Gain
terminals, however, have a 10 V max.
meter calibration function.
0.00 to
2.50
0.50
L1-01
Motor pro- Set to enable or disable the motor
tection
overload protection function using the
selection
electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor protection
2: Inverter motor protection
3: Vector motor protection
In some applications when the
Inverter power supply is turned off,
MOL Fault
the thermal value is reset, so even if
Select
this constant is set to 1, protection
may not be effective.
When several motors are connected to
one Inverter, set to 0 and ensure that
each motor is installed with a protection device.
0 to 3
Constant
Number
Display
Stall prevention
selection
during
deceleration
L3-04
StallP
Decel Sel
Description
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If
deceleration time is too short, a
main circuit overvoltage may
result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is stopped
when the main circuit voltage
exceeds the overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts when voltage
is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration mode
(Deceleration rate is automatically
adjusted so that in Inverter can
decelerate in the shortest possible
time. Set deceleration time is
disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking Resistor
0 to 3
*11
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
-loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
421H
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
480H
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
492H
Unit) *8
When a braking option (Braking
Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, Braking Unit) is used, always set to 0 or 3.
* 1. The setting ranges for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C1-10 (Acceleration/deceleration Time Setting Unit). If C1-10 is set to
0, the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).
* 2. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity.
* 3. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 4. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.)
* 5. After autotuning, E1-13 will contain the same value as E1-05.
* 6. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 7. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
* 8. L3-04 cannot be set to 3 for flux vector control or open-loop vector control 2.
* 9. The setting range is 0 to 66.0 for open-loop vector control 2.
* 10.The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the constants.
* 11.The setting range is 0 to 2 for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 2.
5-7
User Constant Tables
A: Setup Settings
The following settings are made with the environment constants (A constants): Language displayed on the
Digital Operator, access level, control method, initialization of constants.
Initialize Mode: A1
User constants for the environment modes are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Language
selection for
Digital
Operator
display
A1-00
Select Language
Constant
access level
A1-01
Access
Level
Control
method
selection
A1-02
Control
Method
5-8
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
Control Methods
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
100H
-
2
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
101H
6139
6141
2
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
102H
4-5
4-7
4-16
Description
Setting
Range
Used to select the language
displayed on the Digital
Operator (LCD).
0: English
1: Japanese
2: German
3: French
4: Italian
5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
This constant is not initialized
by the initialize operation.
0 to 6
1
Used to set the constant
access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only
(Monitoring drive mode
and setting A1-01 and A104.)
1: Used to select user
constant
(Only constants set in A201 to A2-32 can be read
and set.)
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read
and set in both quick
programming mode and
advanced programming
(A) mode.)
0 to 2
Used to select the control
method for the Inverter
0: V/f control
1: V/f with PG feedback
2: Open-loop vector control
1
3: Flux vector
4: Open-loop vector control
2
This constant is not initialized
by the initialize operation.
0 to 4
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Initialize
A1-03
Init Parameters
Password
A1-04
Enter Password
Password
setting
A1-05
Select Password
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
Control Methods
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
103H
-
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
104H
6140
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
105H
6140
Description
Setting
Range
Used to initialize the constants using the specified
method.
0:
No initializing
1110: Initializes using the
User constants
2220: Initializes using a
two-wire sequence.
(Initializes to the
factory setting.)
3330: Initializes using a
three-wire sequence.
0 to
3330
0
Password input when a password has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects
some constants of the initialize mode.
If the password is changed,
A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to
A2-32 constants can no
longer be changed. (Programming mode constants can be
changed.)
0 to
9999
Used to set a four digit number as the password.
This constant is not usually
displayed. When the Password (A1-04) is displayed,
hold down the RESET Key
and press the Menu Key and
the password will be displayed.
0 to
9999
User-set Constants: A2
The constants set by the user are listed in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Control Methods
Description
Factory
Setting
b1-01
to
o3-02
-
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
User setting
constants
A2-01
to
A2-32
Used to set the constant numbers that can be set/read.
Maximum 32.
Effective when the Constant
Access Level (A1-01) is set to
User Param 1 User Program (1). Constants
to 32
set in constants A2-01 to A232 can be set/read in programming mode.
Setting
Range
Change
during
Operation
A
106H
to
125H
6141
5-9
Application Constants: b
The following settings are made with the application constants (B constants): Operation method selection, DC
injection braking, speed searching, timer functions, dwell functions, and energy saving functions.
Operation Mode Selections: b1
User constants for operation mode selection are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Reference
selection
b1-01
Reference
Source
Operation
method
selection
b1-02
Run Source
Stopping
method
selection
b1-03
Stopping
Method
b1-04
Prohibition
of reverse
operation
Reverse
Oper
5-10
Description
Setting
Range
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
Set the frequency reference
input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
180H
4-5
6-2
6-66
6-83
Set the run command input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
181H
4-5
6-7
6-66
6-83
Used to set the stopping
method used when a stop command is input.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC injection braking stop
(Stops faster than coast to
stop, no regenerative
operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer
(Run commands are
disregarded during
deceleration.)
0 to 3*
0
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
182H
4-6
6-9
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
183H
6-54
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
V/f
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
No
A
No
184H
6-9
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
185H
-
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
186H
-
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
187H
-
Used to set the method of
operation when the frequency reference input is less
than the minimum output frequency (E1-09).
0: Run at frequency reference
(E1-09 not effective).
1: STOP (Frequencies below
E1-09 in the coast to stop
state.)
2: Run at min. frequency.
(E1-09)
3: Run at zero speed (Frequencies below E1-09 are
zero)
0 to 3
0
Used to set the responsiveness
of the control inputs (forward/
reverse and multi-function
inputs.)
0: Two scans every 2 ms (Use
for fast responses.)
1: Two scans every 5 ms (Use
for possible malfunction
due to noise.)
0 or 1
Used to set the operation mode
by switching to the Remote
mode using the Local/Remote
Key.
0: Run signals that are input
during mode switching are
disregarded. (Input Run
signals after switching the
mode.)
1: Run signals become
effective immediately after
switching to the Remote
mode.
Run comUsed to set an operation intermand selec- lock in programming modes.
tion in
0: Cannot operate.
program1: Can operate (Disabled
ming modes
when Digital Operator is
set to select run command
RUN CMD
(when b1-02 = 0).
at PRG
b1-05
Zero-Speed
Oper
Read
sequence
input twice
b1-06
Cntl Input
Scans
Operation
selection
after
switching to
remote
mode
b1-07
LOC/REM
RUN Sel
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Setting
Range
Display
Control Methods
V/f
with
PG
Description
Operation
selection
for setting
E1-09 or
less
b1-08
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
* The setting range is 0 or 1 for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 2.
5-11
DC Injection Braking: b2
User constants for injection braking are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
b2-01
Display
Zero speed
level (DC
injection
braking starting frequency)
DCInj Start
Freq
b2-02
DC injection
braking current
DCInj Current
DC injection
braking time
at start
b2-03
DCInj
Time@Start
DC injection
braking time
at stop
b2-04
DCInj
Time@Stop
b2-08
5-12
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Used to set the frequency
which starts DC injection
braking in units of Hz when
deceleration to stop is
selected.
When b2-01 is less than E109, E1-09 becomes the DC
injection braking starting frequency.
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 Hz
Sets the DC injection braking
current as a percentage of the
Inverter rated current.
0 to
100
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at
start in units of 1 second.
Used to stop coasting motor
and restart it. When the set
value is 0, DC injection braking at start is not performed.
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at
stop in units of 1 second.
Used to prevent coasting after
the stop command is input.
When the set value is 0.00,
DC injection braking at stop
is not performed.
Magnetic flux
Sets the magnetic flux comcompensapensation as a percentage of
tion volume
the no-load current.
Field Comp
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
189H
6-9
50%
No
A
A
A
No
No
18AH
6-9
6-13
0.00
to
10.00
0.00 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
18BH
6-13
0.00
to
10.00
0.50 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
18CH
6-9
0 to
1000
0%
No
No
No
A
No
No
190H
-
User Constant Tables
Speed Search: b3
User constants for the speed search are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Speed
search
selection
(current
detection or
speed calculation)
b3-01
SpdSrch at
Start
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3
2*
Sets the speed search operation
current as a percentage, taking
the Inverter rated current as
100%.
Not usually necessary to set.
When restarting is not possible
with the factory settings,
reduce the value.
0 to
200
Sets the output frequency
deceleration time during speed
search in 1-second units.
Set the time for deceleration
from the maximum output frequency to the minimum output
frequency.
Sets the contactor operating
delay time when there is a contactor on the output side of the
Inverter. When a speed search
is performed after recovering
from a momentary power loss,
the search operation is delayed
by the time set here.
Description
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
No
A
191H
6-56
100%*
No
A
No
A
No
A
192H
6-56
0.1 to
10.0
2.0 s
No
A
No
A
No
No
193H
6-56
0.0 to
20.0
0.2 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
195H
6-56
Enables/disables the speed
search function for the run
command and sets the speed
search method.
0: Disabled, speed calculation
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
3: Enabled, current detection
Speed Calculation:
When the search is started, the
motor speed is calculated and
acceleration/deceleration is
performed from the calculated
speed to the specified
frequency (motor direction is
also searched).
Current Detection:
The speed search is started
from the frequency when
power was momentarily lost
and the maximum frequency,
and the speed is detected at
the search current level.
b3-02
Speed
search operating current
(current
detection)
SpdSrch
Current
b3-03
Speed
search
deceleration time
(current
detection)
SpdSrch
Dec Time
b3-05
Speed
search wait
time (current detection or
speed calculation)
Search
Delay
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.)
5-13
Timer Function: b4
User constants for timer functions are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Timer function ONdelay time
b4-01
Delay-ON
Timer
Timer function OFFdelay time
b4-02
Delay-OFF
Timer
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the timer function output ON-delay time (dead
band) for the timer function
input, in 1-second units.
Enabled when a timer function is set in H1- or H2.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s
Sets the timer function output OFF-delay time (dead
band) for the timer function
input, in 1-second units.
Enabled when a timer function is set in H1- or H2.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s
Description
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
1A3H
6-93
No
A
A
A
A
A
1A4H
6-93
PID Control: b5
User constants for PID control are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
PID control
mode selection
b5-01
PID Mode
b5-02
Proportional
gain (P)
PID Gain
b5-03
Integral (I)
time
PID I Time
b5-04
Integral (I)
limit
PID I Limit
b5-05
Derivative
(D) time
PID D Time
5-14
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Deviation is Dcontrolled.)
2: Enabled (Feedback value
is D-controlled.)
3: PID control enabled
(frequency reference +
PID output, D control of
deviation)
4: PID control enabled
(frequency reference +
PID output, D control of
feedback value).
0 to 4
0
Sets P-control proportional
gain as a percentage.
P-control is not performed
when the setting is 0.00.
0.00
to
25.00
Sets I-control integral time in
1-second units.
I-control is not performed
when the setting is 0.0.
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
1A5H
6-95
1.00
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1A6H
6-95
0.0 to
360.0
1.0 s
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1A7H
6-95
Sets the I-control limit as a
percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1A8H
6-95
Sets D-control derivative time
in 1-second units.
D-control is not performed
when the setting is 0.00.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1A9H
6-95
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
b5-07
b5-10
Sets the limit after PID-control as a percentage of the
maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Sets the offset after PID-control as a percentage of the
maximum output frequency.
-100.0
to
+100.0
Sets the time constant for low
pass filter for PID-control
outputs in 1-second units.
Not usually necessary to set.
V/f
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1AAH 6-95
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1ABH 6-95
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1ACH 6-95
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
1ADH 6-95
Output Level
Sel
Select forward/reverse for
PID output.
0: PID output is forward.
1: PID output is reverse
(highlights the output
code)
PID output
gain
Sets output gain.
0.0 to
25.0
1.0
No
A
A
A
A
A
1AEH
6-95
0: 0 limit when PID output is
negative.
1: Reverses when PID output
is negative.
0 limit when reverse prohibit
is selected using b1-04.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
1AFH
6-95
0: No detection of loss of
PID feedback.
1: Detection of loss of PID
feedback.
Operation continues
during detection, with the
malfunctioning contact
not operating.
2: Detection of loss of PID
feedback.
Coasts to stop during
detection, and fault
contact operates.
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B0H
6-96
Sets the PID feedback loss
detection level as a percent
units, with the maximum output frequency at 100%.
0 to
100
0%
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B1H
6-96
0.0 to
25.5
1.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B2H
6-96
Display
PID Limit
PID offset
adjustment
PID primary
delay time
constant
PID output
characteristics selection
Description
Output Gain
b5-11
PID reverse
output selection
Output Rev
Sel
Selection of
PID feedback command loss
detection
b5-12
Fb los Det Sel
b5-13
PID feedback command loss
detection
level
Fb los Det
Lvl
b5-14
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
Flux
Vector
PID Delay
Time
b5-09
Factory
Setting
Open
Loop
Vector
1
PID Offset
b5-08
Setting
Range
V/f
with
PG
PID limit
b5-06
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
PID feedback command loss
detection
time
Sets the PID feedback loss
detection level in s units.
Fb los Det
Time
5-15
Name
Constant
Number
b5-15
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the PID sleep function
start level as a frequency.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
Set the delay time until the
PID sleep function starts in
seconds.
0.0 to
25.5
Set the accel/decel time for
PID reference in seconds.
0.0 to
25.5
Description
Display
PID sleep
function
operation
level
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B3H
6-96
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B4H
6-96
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B5H
6-96
PID Sleep
Level
b5-16
PID sleep
operation
delay time
PID Sleep
Time
b5-17
Accel/decel
time for PID
reference
PID SFS
Time
Dwell Functions: b6
User constants for dwell functions are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
b6-01
Name
Display
Control Methods
Description
Dwell frequency at
start
Dwell Ref
@Start
Dwell time
at start
b6-02
b6-03
Dwell
Time
@Start
Dwell frequency at
stop
Dwell Ref
@Stop
Dwell time
at stop
b6-04
5-16
Dwell
Time
@Stop
Run command ON
OFF
Output frequency
b6-01 b6-03
b6-02
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MEMO
BUS
Page
Register
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B6H 6-19
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B7H 6-19
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B8H 6-19
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B9H 6-19
Time
b6-04
The dwell function is used to output
frequency temporarily when driving
a motor with a heavy load.
User Constant Tables
DROOP Control: b7
User constants for droop functions are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
b7-01
b7-02
Display
Control Methods
Description
Droop control Sets the slip as a percentage
gain
of maximum frequency when
the maximum output frequency is specified and the
rated torque occurs.
Droop Quan- Droop-control is not pertity
formed when the setting is
0.0.
Droop control Droop control responsivedelay time
ness constant
Droop Delay When hunting or oscillation
occurs, increase the value.
Time
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 to
100.0
0.0%
0.03 to
2.00
0.05 s
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
No
No
No
A
A
1CAH
4-18
6127
No
A
A
A
A
A
1A4H
4-18
6127
5-17
Energy Saving: b8
User constants for energy-saving control functions are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
b8-01
Display
Energy-saving mode
selection
Energy Save
Sel
b8-02
b8-03
Energy-saving gain
Energy Save
Gain
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Select whether to enable or
disable energy-saving control.
0: Disable
1: Enable
0 or 1
0
Set the energy-saving gain
with the open-loop vector
control method.
0.0 to
10.0
0.7
0.00 to
10.0
0.50 s
0.0 to
Description
Energy-saving filter time Set the energy-saving filter
constant
time constant with the openEnergy Save loop vector control method.
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
1CCH
-
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
1CDH
-
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
1CEH
-
*3
*4
No
A
A
No
No
No
1CFH
-
0 to
2000
20 ms
No
A
A
No
No
No
1D0H
-
0 to
100
0%
No
A
A
No
No
No
1D1H
-
*1
*2
F.T
Energy-saving coefficient
b8-04
Energy Save
COEF
b8-05
Power detection filter
time constant
kW Filter
Time
b8-06
Set the maximum motor efficiency value.
Set the motor rated capacity
in E2-11, and adjust the value
by 5% at a time until output
power reaches a minimum
value.
Set the time constant for output power detection.
Search opera- Set the limit value of the volttion voltage
age control range during
limiter
search operation.
Perform search operation to
optimize operations using
minute variations in voltage
Search V
using energy-saving control.
Limit
Set to 0 to disable the search
operation. 100% is the motor
base voltage.
655.00
* 1. The factory setting is 1.0 when using V/f control with PG.
* 2. The factory setting is 2.00 s when Inverter capacity is 55 kW min. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.)
* 3. The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the constants.
* 4. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
5-18
User Constant Tables
Zero Servo: b9
User constants for dwell functions are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Zero-servo
gain
b9-01
Zero Servo
Gain
Zero-servo
completion
width
b9-02
Zero Servo
Count
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Adjust the strength of the
zero-servo lock.
Enabled when the “zero-servo
command” is set for the
multi-function input. When
the zero-servo command has
been input and the frequency
reference drop below excitation level (b2-01), a position
control loop is created and the
motor stops. Increasing the
zero-servo gain in turn
increases the strength of the
lock. Increasing it by too
much will cause oscillation.
0 to
100
5
Sets the output width of the
P-lock completion signal.
Enabled when the “zero-servo
completion (end)” is set for a
multi-function input. The
zero-servo completion signal
is ON when the current position is within the range (the
zero-servo position + zeroservo completion width.)
Set the allowable position displacement from the zeroservo position to 4 times the
pulse rate of the PG (pulse
generator, encoder) in use.
0 to
16383
10
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
No
A
No
1DAH
No
No
No
No
A
No
1DBH
5-19
Autotuning Constants: C
The following settings are made with the autotuning constants (C constants): Acceleration/deceleration times,
s-curve characteristics, slip compensation, torque compensation, speed control, and carrier frequency functions.
Acceleration/Deceleration: C1
User constants for acceleration and deceleration times are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05
C1-06
Display
Acceleration time 1
Accel Time
1
Deceleration time 1
Decel Time
1
Acceleration time 2
Accel Time
2
Deceleration time 2
Decel Time
2
Acceleration time 3
Accel Time
3
Deceleration time 3
Decel Time
3
Acceleration time 4
C1-07
Accel Time
4
Deceleration time 4
C1-08
Decel Time
4
Emergency
stop time
C1-09
5-20
Fast Stop
Time
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop Flux Loop
Page
Vec- Vect Vec- Register
tor
tor
or
1
2
Sets the acceleration time to
accelerate from 0 to the maximum output frequency, in 1second units.
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
200H
4-5
6-15
Sets the deceleration time to
decelerate from the maximum
output frequency to 0, in 1second units.
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
201H
4-5
6-15
The acceleration time when
the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 1” is set to
ON.
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
202H
6-15
The deceleration time when
the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 1” is set to
ON.
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
203H
6-15
No
A
A
A
A
A
204H
6-15
The deceleration time when
the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 2” is set to
ON.
No
A
A
A
A
A
205H
6-15
The acceleration time when
the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 1” and
“accel/decel time 2” are set to
ON.
No
A
A
A
A
A
206H
6-15
The deceleration time when
the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 1” and
“accel/decel time 2” are set to
ON.
No
A
A
A
A
A
207H
6-15
The deceleration time when
the multi-function input
“Emergency (fast) stop” is set
to ON.
This function can be used a
stopped method when a fault
has been detected.
No
A
A
A
A
A
208H
6-14
The acceleration time when
the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 2” is set to
ON.
0.0 to
6000.0
10.0 s
*
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
C1-10
Display
Accel/decel
time setting
unit
Acc/Dec
Units
Control Methods
Description
0: 0.01-second units
1: 0.1-second units
Factory
Setting
0 or 1
1
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
Open
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop Flux Loop
Page
Vec- Vect Vec- Register
tor
tor
or
1
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
No
A
A
A
A
A
209H
6-15
No
A
A
A
A
A
20AH
-
Accel/decel
time switching frequency
C1-11
Sets the frequency for automatic acceleration/deceleration switching.
Below set frequency: Accel/
decel time 4
Above set frequency: Accel/
decel time 1
Acc/Dec SW The multi-function input
Freq
“accel/decel time 1” or
“accel/decel time 2” take priority.
Setting
Range
Change
during
Operation
* The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times will depends on the setting for C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the setting range for acceleration/deceleration times becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds.
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
User constants for S-curve characteristics are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
Control Methods
Description
Display
S-curve
characteristic time at
C2-01 acceleration start
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
0.00 to
2.50
Open
Loop Flux
Vec- Vec
tor
tor
1
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MEMO
BUS
Page
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
No
A
A
A
A
A
20BH
-
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
20CH
-
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
20DH
-
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
20EH
-
SCrv Acc
@ Start
S-curve
characteristic time at
C2-02 acceleration end
SCrv Acc
@ End
S-curve
characteristic time at
C2-03 deceleration start
All sections of the S-curve characteristic time are set in seconds units.
When the S-curve characteristic time is
set, the accel/decel times will increase
by only half of the S-curve characteristic times at start and end.
Run command
Output frequency ON
C2-02
C2-01
OFF
C2-03
C2-04
Time
SCrv Dec
@ Start
S-curve
characteristic time at
C2-04 deceleration end
SCrv Dec
@ End
5-21
Motor Slip Compensation: C3
User constants for slip compensation are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Slip compensation gain
C3-01
Slip Comp
Gain
Slip compensation primary delay
time
C3-02
Slip Comp
Time
C3-03
Slip compensation limit
Slip Comp
Limit
Slip compensation selection during
regeneration
C3-04
Slip Comp
Regen
C3-05
Output voltage limit
operation
selection
Output V
limit
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Used to improve speed accuracy when operating with a
load.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust this constant at the following times.
• When actual speed is low,
increase the set value.
• When actual speed is high,
decrease the set value.
0.0 to
2.5
1.0*
Slip compensation primary
delay time is set in ms units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust this constant at the following times.
• Reduce the setting when
slip compensation responsive is slow.
• When speed is not stabilized, increase the setting.
0 to
10000
Sets the slip compensation
limit as a percentage of motor
rated slip.
0 to
250
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When the slip compensation
during regeneration function
has been activated, as regeneration capacity increases
momentarily, it may be necessary to use a braking option
(braking resistor, Braking
Resistor Unit or Braking
Unit.)
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (The motor flux
will be lowered automatically when the output
voltage become saturated.)
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
A
No
A
A
A
20FH
4-16
6-32
No
A
No
A
No
No
210H
4-16
6-32
200%
No
A
No
A
No
No
211H
6-32
0 or 1
0
No
A
No
A
No
No
212H
6-32
0 or 1
0
No
No
No
A
A
A
213H
6-32
200 ms
*
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.)
5-22
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
with
PG
User Constant Tables
Torque Compensation: C4
User constants for are torque compensation shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
C4-01
Display
C4-02
Torq Comp
Time
C4-04
C4-05
Description
Setting
Range
Torque com- Sets torque compensation
pensation
gain as a ratio.
gain
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
• When the cable is long;
increase the set value.
• When the motor capacity is
smaller than the Inverter
capacity (Max. applicable
motor capacity), increase
the set values.
0.00 to
• When the motor is oscillat2.50
Torq Comp
ing, decrease the set valGain
ues.
Adjust the output current
range at minimum speed rotation so that it does not exceed
the Inverter rated output current.
Do not alter the torque compensation gain from its
default (1.00) when using the
open-loop vector control
method.
Torque compensation
primary
delay time
constant
C4-03
Control Methods
Forward
starting
torque
F
TorqCmp@
start
Reverse
starting
torque
R
TorqCmp@
start
Starting
torque time
constant
TorqCmp
DelayT
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1.00
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
A
A
A
No
No
215H
4-16
6-35
No
A
A
A
No
No
216H
4-16
6-35
The torque compensation
delay time is set in ms units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
• When the motor is oscillating, increase the set values.
• When the responsiveness
of the motor is low,
decrease the set values.
0 to
10000
Sets the forward starting
torque as a percentage of the
motor rated torque.
0.0 to
200.0
0.0%
No
No
No
A
No
No
217H
-
Sets the reverse starting
torque as a percentage of the
motor rated torque.
-200.0
to 0.0
0.0%
No
No
No
A
No
No
218H
-
Sets the delay time in ms for
starting torque. The filter is
disabled if the time is set to 0
to 4 ms.
0 to
200
10 ms
No
No
No
A
No
No
219H
-
20 ms
*
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.)
5-23
Speed Control (ASR): C5
User constants for speed control are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Open
Loop Flux
Vec- Vec
tor
tor
1
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MEMO
BUS
Page
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Yes
No
A
No
A
A
21BH
-
0.000
0.500
to
s*
10.000
Yes
No
A
No
A
A
21CH
-
0.00 to
Usually setting is not necessary.
300.00 0.20*
Set to change the rotational speed gain.
*2
Yes
No
A
No
A
A
21DH
-
0.000
0.500
to
s*
10.000
Yes
No
A
No
A
A
21EH
-
Sets the upper limit for the compensation frequency for the speed control
loop (ASR) to a percentage of the
maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
20.0
No
No
A
No
No
No
21FH
-
Sets the filter time constant; the time
from the speed loop to the torque comC5-06
mand output, in units of 1-second.
ASR Delay Usually setting is not necessary.
Time
0.000
to
0.500
No
No
No
No
A
A*
220H
-
C5-01
Display
ASR proportional
gain 1
ASR P
Gain 1
C5-02
ASR integral (I)
time 1
ASR I
Time 1
C5-03
ASR proportional
gain 2
ASR P
Gain 2
C5-04
ASR integral (I)
time 2
Sets the proportional gain of the speed
loop (ASR.)
Sets the integral time of the speed loop
(ASR) in 1-second units.
C5-05
ASR Limit
P=C5-01
I=C5-02
P=C5-03
I=C5-04
0
E1-04
Motor speed (Hz)
ASR primary delay
time
C5-07
ASR
switching
frequency
ASR Gain
SW Freq
C5-08
ASR integral (I)
limit
ASR I
Limit
*2
P, I
ASR I
Time 2
ASR limit
0.00 to
300.00 0.20*
5.0%
0.004
*
Set the frequency for switching
between Proportion Gain 1, 2 and Integral Time 1, 2 in Hz units.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0
No
No
No
No
A
A
221H
-
Set to a small value to prevent any radical load change. Set to 100% of the
maximum output frequency.
0 to
400
400
No
No
No
No
A
A
222H
-
* 1. When the control method is changed, the Inverter reverts to factory settings. (The flux vector control factory settings will be displayed.)
* 2. The setting range is 1.00 to 3.00 for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 2.
5-24
User Constant Tables
Carrier Frequency: C6
User constants for the carrier frequency are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Name
Display
Description
Carrier frequency
Select carrier wave fixed pattern.
C6-02 selection
Select F to enable detailed settings
using constants C6-03 to C6-05.
Carrier
Setting
Range
1 to F
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
6
*2
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
Page
224H
4-6
4-16
6-38
No
225H
-
No
No
226H
-
No
No
No
227H
-
No No
No
No
*5
*5
*5
Q
22DH
-
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
Q
Q
Q
A
No
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
No
A
A
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
*5
Freq Sel
Carrier
Set the carrier frequency upper limit and
frequency lower limit in kHz units.
C6-03 upper limit The carrier frequency gain is set as follows:
Carrier
With the vector control method, the
Freq Max
upper limit of the carrier frequency is
fixed in C6-03.
Carrier
frequency
C6-04 lower limit
Carrier
Freq Min
Carrier frequency
proportional gain
C6-05
Carrier
Freq Gain
C6-11
Carrier frequency
selection
for openloop vector control
2
Carrier
Freq Sel
*
*
*
*
*
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Carrier frequency
Output frequency x (C6-05) x K
Output
frequency
(Max. output frequency)
K is a coefficient that depends on the
setting of C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K = 2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
Select the carrier frequency when openloop vector control 2 is used.
1: 2 kHz
2: 4 kHz
3: 6 kHz
4: 8 kHz
2.0 to
15.0
15.0
kHz
*3 *4
*2
0.4 to
15.0
15.0
kHz
*3 *4
*2
00 to
99
00
No
4*2
No
*4
1 to 4
*5
The setting range depends on the control method of the Inverter.
The factory setting depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
This constant can be monitored or set only when 1 is set for C6-01 and F is set for C6-02.
Displayed in Quick Programming Mode when motor 2 is set for a multi-function input.
5-25
Reference Constants: d
The following settings are made with the reference constants (d constants): Frequency references.
Preset Reference: d1
User constants for frequency references are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
d1-01
Display
Frequency
reference 1
Reference 1
d1-02
Frequency
reference 2
Reference 2
d1-03
Frequency
reference 3
Reference 3
d1-04
Frequency
reference 4
Reference 4
d1-05
Frequency
reference 5
Reference 5
d1-06
Frequency
reference 6
Reference 6
d1-07
Frequency
reference 7
Reference 7
d1-08
Frequency
reference 8
Reference 8
d1-09
Frequency
reference 9
Reference 9
d1-10
Frequency
reference 10
Reference 10
d1-11
Frequency
reference 11
Reference 11
5-26
Control Methods
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the frequency reference
in the units used in o1-03.
0.00 Hz
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference 1 is ON for a multi-function input.
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
280H
4-6
6-5
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
281H
4-6
6-5
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference 2 is ON for a multi-function input.
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
282H
4-6
6-5
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 1 and 2 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
283H
4-6
6-5
The frequency when multistep speed reference 3 is ON
for a multi-function input.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
284H
6-5
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 1 and 3 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0 to
400.00 0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
285H
6-5
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 2 and 3 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
286H
6-5
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 1, 2, and 3 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
287H
6-5
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference 4 is ON for a multi-function input.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
288H
-
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 1 and 4 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
28BH
-
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 2 and 4 are ON for a
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
28CH
-
Description
Setting
Range
*
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
d1-12
Frequency
reference 12
Frequency
reference 13
Reference 13
d1-14
Frequency
reference 14
Reference 14
d1-15
Frequency
reference 15
Reference 15
d1-16
Frequency
reference 16
Reference 16
d1-17
Factory
Setting
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 1, 2, and 4 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 3 and 4 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 1, 3, and 4 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
Description
Display
Reference 12
d1-13
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 2, 3, and 4 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
Setting
Range
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
28DH
-
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
28EH
-
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
28FH
-
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
290H
-
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
291H
-
6.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
292H
4-6
6-74
0 to
400.00
*
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 1, 2, 3, and 4 are ON
for multi-function inputs.
Jog frequency The frequency reference
reference
when the jog frequency reference selection, FJOG comJog
mand, or RJOG command is
Reference
ON.
Note The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor). The default for o1-03 is 0 (increments of 0.01 Hz).
* The setting range is 0 to 66.0 for open-loop vector control 2.
Reference Limits: d2
User constants for frequency reference limits are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
d2-01
Display
Frequency
reference
upper limit
Ref Upper
Limit
d2-02
Frequency
reference
lower limit
Ref Lower
Limit
d2-03
Master speed
reference
lower limit
Ref1 Lower
Limit
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the output frequency
upper limit as a percent, taking the max. output frequency
to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0%
Sets the output frequency
lower limit as a percentage of
the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
Set the master speed reference lower limit as a percent,
taking the max. output frequency to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
289H
6-30
6-69
0.0%
No
A
A
A
A
A
28AH
6-30
6-69
0.0%
No
A
A
A
A
A
293H
6-30
6-69
5-27
Jump Frequencies: d3
User constants for jump frequencies are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
d3-01
Display
Jump frequency 1
Jump Freq 1
d3-02
Jump frequency 2
Jump Freq 2
d3-03
Jump frequency 3
Jump Freq 3
d3-04
Control Methods
Description
Set the center values of the
jump frequencies in Hz.
This function is disabled by
setting the jump frequency to
0 Hz. Always ensure that the
following applies:
d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03
Operation in the jump frequency range is prohibited
but during acceleration and
deceleration, speed changes
smoothly without jump.
Jump freSets the jump frequency
quency width bandwidth in Hz.
The jump frequency will be
Jump Bandthe jump frequency ± d3-04.
width
Setting
Range
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
20.0
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 Hz
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
294H
6-27
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
295H
6-27
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
296H
6-27
1.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
297H
6-27
Reference Frequency Hold: d4
User constants for the reference frequency hold function are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Frequency
reference
hold function
selection
d4-01
MOP Ref
Memory
+ - Speed
limits
d4-02
5-28
Trim Control
Lvl
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets whether or not frequencies on hold will be recorded.
0: Disabled (when operation
is stopped or the power is
turned on again starts at
0.)
1: Enabled (when operation
is stopped or the power is
turned on again starts at
the previous hold
frequency.)
This function is available
when the multi-function
inputs “accel/decel Ramp
Hold” or “up/down” commands are set.
0 or 1
0
Set the frequency to be add to
or subtracted from the analog
frequency reference as a percent, taking the maximum
output frequency to be 100%.
Enabled when the increase
(+) speed command or
decrease (-) speed command
is set for a multi-function
input.
0 to
100
10%
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
298H
6-68
No
A
A
A
A
A
299H
6-72
User Constant Tables
Torque Control: d5
User constants for the torque control are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Torque control selection
d5-01
Torq Control
Sel
Torque
reference
delay time
d5-02
Torq Ref
Filter
Speed limit
selection
d5-03
Speed Limit
Sel
Speed limit
d5-04
Speed Lmt
Value
Speed limit
bias
d5-05
Speed Lmt
Bias
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Speed control (C5-01 to
C5-07)
1: Torque control
This function is only available in flux vector control
mode. To use the function for
switching between speed and
torque control, set to 0 and set
the multi-function input to
“speed/torque control
change.”
0 or 1
0
Set the torque reference delay
time in ms units.
This function can be used to
adjust the noise of the torque
control signal or the responsiveness with the host controller. When oscillation
occurs during torque control,
increase the set value.
0 to
1000
Set the speed limit command
method for the torque control
mode.
1: The analog input limit
from a frequency reference
2: Limited by d5-04 constant
setting values.
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
No
A
A
29AH
-
0 ms*
No
No
No
No
A
A
29BH
-
1 or 2
1
No
No
No
No
A
A
29CH
-
Set the speed limit during
torque control as a percentage
of the maximum output frequency.
This function is enabled when
d5-03 is set to 2. Directions
are as follows.
+: run command direction
-: run command opposite
direction
-120 to
+120
0%
No
No
No
No
A
A
29DH
-
Set the speed limit bias as a
percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
Bias is given to the specified
speed limit. It can be used to
adjust the margin for the
speed limit.
0 to
120
10%
No
No
No
No
A
A
29EH
-
5-29
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Speed/torque
control
switching
timer
d5-06
Ref Hold
Time
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the delay time from inputting the multi-function input
“speed/torque control
change” (from On to OFF or
OFF to ON) until the control
is actually changed, in ms
units.
This function is enabled when
the multi-function input
“speed/torque control
change” is set. In the speed/
torque control switching
timer, the analog inputs hold
the values of when the
“speed/torque control
change” changes. Always be
sure to allow time for this
process to finish completely.
0 to
1000
0 ms
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
A
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
A
29FH
-
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed.
Field Control: d6
User constants for the field weakening command are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Field weakening level
d6-01
Field-Weak
Lvl
Field
frequency
d6-02
d6-03
Field-Weak
Freq
Field forcing
function
selection
Field Force
Sel
5-30
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the Inverter output voltage when the field weakening
command is input.
It is enabled when the field
weakening command is set
for a multi-function input.
Set the level as a percentage
taking the voltage set in the
V/f pattern as 100%.
0 to
100
80%
Set the lower limit in hertz of
the frequency range where
field control is valid.
The field weakening command is valid only at frequencies above this setting and
only when the speed is in
agreement with the current
speed reference.
0.0 to
400.0
Set the field forcing function.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
No
No
No
2A0H
-
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
No
No
No
2A1H
-
0
No
No
No
No
A
A
2A2H
-
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
Display
AφR time
constant
d6-05
A PHI R
Filter
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the factor to multiple
times the secondary circuit
time constant of the motor to
achieve the AφR time
constant.
AφR time constant =
Secondary circuit time
constant x d6-05
AφR will not function when
d6-05 is 0. If d6-05 is not 0,
the lower limit of the value
will be internally adjusted to
200 ms in the Inverter.
0.00 to
10.00
1.00
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
No
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
A
2A4H
-
5-31
Motor Constant Constants: E
The following settings are made with the motor constant constants (E constants): V/f characteristics and motor
constants.
V/f Pattern: E1
User constants for V/f characteristics are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
E1-01
Name
Display
Input voltage setting
Input Voltage
V/f pattern
selection
E1-03
E1-04
V/F Selection
Control Methods
Description
Set the Inverter input voltage in 1
volt.
This setting is used as a reference
value in protection functions.
0 to E: Select from the 15 preset
patterns.
F: Custom user-set patterns
(Applicable for settings E1-04
to E1-10.)
Max.
output
frequency
Max
Frequency
E1-05
E1-06
Max.
voltage
Max
Voltage
Base
frequency
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
Mid
Frequency
A
Min. output
frequency
voltage
Min
Voltage
5-32
155 to
255
200 V
*1
*1
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
RegisVecter
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
300H
4-5
6107
Page
0 to F
F
No
Q
Q
No
No
No
302H
6107
40.0 to
400.0
60.0
Hz
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
303H
*5
*2
6107
0.0 to
255.0
200.0
V
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
304H
*1
*1*2
6107
0.0 to
400.0
60.0
Hz
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
305H
6107
No
A
A
A
No
No
306H
6107
No
A
A
A
No
No
307H
4-17
6107
No
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
308H
6107
309H
4-16
4-17
6107
*5
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/f characteristics in a
straight line, set the same values for
E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the
Mid. output setting for E1-08 will be disrefrequency garded.
voltage
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following
Mid
manner:
Voltage A
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1Min. output 07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
frequency
Min
Frequency
Factory
Setting
Output voltage (V)
Base
Frequency
Mid. output
frequency
Setting
Range
Change
during
Operation
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 to
400.0
*2
3.0 Hz
*2
11.0 V
*1 *2
0.5 Hz
*5
*2
0.0 to
255.0
2.0 V
*1
*1 *2
No
A
A
A
No
No
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
Name
Display
Control Methods
Description
Mid. output
frequency 2
E1-11
E1-12
E1-13
*
*
*
*
*
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mid
Frequency
B
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
*3
*5
Mid. output
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the
frequency
output range. Normally, this setting
voltage 2
is not required.
Mid
Voltage B
Base
voltage
0.0 to
255.0
0.0 to
255.0
Base
Voltage
0.0 V
*3
*1
0.0 V
*4
*1
Change
during
Operation
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
RegisVecter
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
30AH
6107
No
A
A
A
A
A
30BH
6107
No
A
A
Q
Q
Q
30CH
6107
Page
These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.)
E1-11 and E1-12 are disregarded when set to 0.0.
E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
The setting range is 0 to 66.0 for open-loop vector control 2.
Motor Setup: E2
User constants for motor 1 are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Motor rated
current
E2-01
Motor Rated
FLA
Motor rated
slip
E2-02
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
Motor Rated
Slip
Motor noload current
No-Load
Current
Number of
motor poles
Number of
Poles
Motor lineto-line resistance
Term Resistance
Control Methods
Description
Sets the motor rated current in
1 A units.
These set values will become
the reference values for motor
protection, torque limits and
torque control.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
Sets the motor rated slip in
Hz units.
These set values will become
the reference values for slip
compensation.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
Sets the motor no-load current in 1 A units.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.32 to
6.40
1.90 A
*2
*1
0.00 to 2.90 Hz
*1
20.00
0.00 to
1.89
*3
1.20 A
*1
Change
during
Operation
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
30EH
6-49
6105
No
A
A
A
A
A
30FH
6103
6105
No
A
A
A
A
A
310H
6105
Sets the number of motor
poles.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
2 to 48
4 poles
No
No
Q
No
Q
Q
311H
6105
Sets the motor phase-to-phase
resistance in Ω units.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
0.000
to
65.000
9.842
Ω
No
A
A
A
A
A
312H
6105
*1
5-33
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Motor leak
inductance
E2-06
E2-07
Leak Inductance
Motor iron
saturation
coefficient 1
Saturation
Comp1
E2-08
Motor iron
saturation
coefficient 2
Saturation
Comp2
Motor
mechanical
loss
E2-09
Mechanical
Loss
E2-10
Motor iron
loss for
torque compensation
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
A
A
A
313H
6105
0.50
No
No
No
A
A
A
314H
6105
0.00 to
0.75
0.75
No
No
No
A
A
A
315H
6105
Sets motor mechanical loss as
a percentage of motor rated
output (W).
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
• When torque loss is large
due to motor bearing.
• When the torque loss in the
pump or fan is large.
The set mechanical loss will
compensate for torque.
0.0 to
10.0
0.0
No
No
No
No
A
A
316H
Sets motor iron loss in W
units.
0 to
65535
14 W
No
A
A
No
No
No
317H
6105
Set the rated output of the
motor in units of 0.01 kW.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
0.00 to
650.00
0.40
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
318H
-
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Sets the voltage drop due to
motor leakage inductance as a
percentage of the motor rated
voltage.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
0.0 to
40.0
18.2%
Sets the motor iron saturation
coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
0.00 to
0.50
Sets the motor iron saturation
coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
*1
*1
Tcomp Iron
Loss
E2-11
*
*
*
*
5-34
1.
2.
3.
4.
Motor rated
output
Mtr Rated
Power
*4
The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the constants.
User Constant Tables
Motor 2 V/f Pattern: E3
User constants for motor 2 V/f characteristics are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
E3-01
Name
Display
Motor 2
control
method
selection
Control
Method
Control Methods
Description
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open-loop vector control
3: Flux vector control
4: Open-loop vector control 2
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 4
2
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
RegisVecter
tor
2
A
319H
-
5-35
Constant
Number
E3-02
Name
Display
Control Methods
Description
Motor 2
max. output frequency
(FMAX)
Setting
Range
40.0 to
400.0
*3
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
60.0
Hz
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
31AH
-
No
A
A
A
A
A
31BH
-
No
A
A
A
A
A
31CH
-
No
A
A
A
No
No
31DH
-
No
A
A
A
No
No
31EH
-
No
A
A
A
A
A
31FH
-
No
A
A
A
No
No
320H
-
Max Frequency
E3-03
Motor 2
max. voltage
(VMAX)
Max Voltage
E3-04
Motor 2
max. voltage frequency
(FA)
Output voltage (V)
0.0 to
255.0
200.0
V
*1
*2
0.0 to
400.0
60.0
Hz
0.0 to
400.0
3.0 Hz
Base Frequency
E3-05
Motor 2
mid. output frequency 1
(FB)
Mid Frequency
E3-06
Motor 2
mid. output frequency
voltage 1
(VC)
Mid Voltage
E3-07
Motor 2
min. output frequency
(FMIN)
*2
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/f characteristics in a
straight line, set the same values for
E3-05 and E3-07.
In this case, the setting for E3-06
will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner:
E3-02 (FMAX) ≥ E3-04 (FA) > E305 (FB) > E3-07 (FMIN)
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 to
400.0
11.0 V
*1
0.5 Hz
*2
Min Frequency
E3-08
Motor 2
min. output frequency
voltage
(VMIN)
0.0 to
255.0
*1
2.0 V
*1
Min Voltage
* 1. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (V/f control factory settings are given.)
* 3. The setting range is 0 to 66.0 for open-loop vector control 2.
5-36
User Constant Tables
Motor 2 Setup: E4
User constants for motor 2 are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
E4-01
E4-02
E4-03
E4-04
Display
Control Methods
Description
Motor 2 rated Sets the motor rated current in
current
1 A units.
These set values will become
the reference values for motor
Motor Rated protection, torque limits and
torque control.
FLA
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
Motor 2 rated Sets the motor rated slip in
slip
Hz units.
These set values will become
the reference values for slip
Motor Rated compensation.
Slip
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
Motor 2 noload current
No-Load
Current
Sets the motor no-load current in 1 A units.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
Motor 2 number of poles
Sets the number of motor
(number of
poles.
poles)
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
Number of
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.32
to 6.40
1.90 A
*2
*1
0.00 to 2.90 Hz
*1
20.00
0.00 to
1.89
*3
1.20 A
*1
Change
during
Operation
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
321H
6-49
No
A
A
A
A
A
322H
-
No
A
A
A
A
A
323H
-
2 to 48
4 poles
No
No
A
No
A
A
324H
-
Sets the motor phase-to-phase
resistance in Ω units.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
0.000
to
65.000
9.842
Ω
No
A
A
A
A
A
325H
-
Sets the voltage drop due to
motor leakage inductance as a
percentage of the motor rated
voltage.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
0.0 to
40.0
18.2%
No
No
No
A
A
A
326H
-
Motor 2 rated Set the rated output of the
capacity
motor in units of 0.01 kW.
This constant is automatically
Mtr Rated
set during autotuning.
Power
0.00 to
650.00
0.40
No
A
A
A
A
A
327H
-
Poles
E4-05
Motor 2 lineto-line resistance
Term Resistance
Motor 2 leak
inductance
E4-06
E4-07
Leak Inductance
*1
*1
*4
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The values for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 3. If a multi-function input is set for motor 2 (H1- = 16), the factory setting will depend upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class
Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 4. The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the constants.
5-37
Option Constants: F
The following settings are made with the option constants (F constants): Settings for Option Cards
PG Option Setup: F1
User constants for the PG Speed Control Card are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
PG constant
F1-01
PG Pulses/
Rev
Operation
selection at
PG open circuit (PGO)
F1-02
PG Fdbk
Loss Sel
Operation
selection at
overspeed
(OS)
F1-03
PG Overspeed Sel
Operation
selection at
deviation
F1-04
PG Deviation Sel
5-38
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the number of PG (pulse
generator or encoder) pulses.
Sets the number of pulses per
motor revolution.
0 to
60000
600
Sets the PG disconnection
stopping method.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C102.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
using the deceleration
time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To
protect the motor or
machinery, do not
normally make this
setting.)
0 to 3
Sets the stopping method
when an overspeed (OS) fault
occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C102.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
using the deceleration
time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To
protect the motor or
machinery, do not
normally make this
setting.)
Sets the stopping method
when a speed deviation
(DEV) fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C102.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
using the deceleration
time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV
is displayed and operation
continued.)
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
Q
No
Q
No
380H
6142
1
No
No
A
No
A
No
381H
6142
0 to 3
1
No
No
A
No
A
A
382H
6142
0 to 3
3
No
No
A
No
A
A
383H
6142
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
Display
PG rotation
F1-05
PG Rotation
Sel
PG division
rate (PG
pulse monitor)
Control Methods
Description
0: Phase A leads with
forward run command.
(Phase B leads with
reverse run command.)
1: Phase B leads with
forward run command.
(Phase A leads with
reverse run command.)
Sets the division ratio for the
PG speed control card pulse
output.
Division ratio = (1+ n) /m
(n=0 or 1 m=1 to 32)
F1-06
PG Output
Ratio
F1-07
F1-08
PG Overspd
Level
F1-09
Overspeed
detection
delay time
PG Overspd
Time
F1-10
Excessive
speed deviation detection level
PG Deviate
Level
F1-11
Excessive
speed deviation detection delay
time
PG Deviate
Time
Factory
Setting
0 or 1
0
1 to
132
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
A
No
A
No
384H
6142
1
No
No
A
No
A
No
385H
6143
0 or 1
0
No
No
A
No
No
No
386H
6143
0 to
120
115%
No
No
A
No
A
A
387H
6143
0.0 to
2.0
0.0 s*
No
No
A
No
A
A
388H
6143
10%
No
No
A
No
A
A
389H
6143
0.5 s
No
No
A
No
A
A
38AH
6143
This constant is only effective
when a PG-B2 is used.
The possible division ratio
settings are: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤ 1.
Integral value Sets integral control during
during accel/ acceleration/deceleration to
decel enable/ either enabled or disabled.
disable
0: Disabled (The integral
function isn't used while
accelerating or
decelerating; it is used at
PG Ramp PI/I
constant speeds.)
Sel
1: Enabled (The integral
function is used at all
times.)
Overspeed
detection
level
Setting
Range
Change
during
Operation
Sets the overspeed detection
method.
Frequencies above that set for
F1-08 (set as a percentage of
the maximum output frequency) that continue to
exceed this frequency for the
time set in F1-09 are detected
as overspeed faults.
Sets the speed deviation
detection method.
0 to 50
Any speed deviation above
the F1-10 set level (set as a
percentage of the maximum
output frequency) that continues for the time set in F1-11 is
detected as a speed deviation.
Speed deviation is the differ0.0 to
ence between actual motor
10.0
speed and the reference command speed.
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Flux vector control factory settings are given.)
5-39
Name
Constant
Number
F1-12
Display
Control Methods
Description
Number of
PG gear teeth Sets the number of teeth on
the gears if there are gears
1
between the PG and the
PG # Gear
motor.
Teeth1
F1-13
Number of
PG gear teeth
A gear ratio of 1 will be used
2
if either of these constants is
PG # Gear
set to 0.
Teeth2
F1-14
PG open-cir- Used to set the PG disconneccuit detection tion detection time. PGO will
time
be detected if the detection
time continues beyond the set
PGO Detect
time.
Time
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
A
No
No
No
38BH
6143
0
No
No
A
No
No
No
38CH
6143
2.0 s
No
No
A
No
A
No
38DH
6143
0 to
1000
0.0 to
10.0
Analog Reference Card: F2
User constants for the Analog Reference Card are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Bi-polar or
uni-polar
input selection
F2-01
AI-14 Input
Sel
5-40
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the functions for channel
1 to 3 which are effective
when the AI-14B Analog
Reference Card is used.
0: 3-channel individual
(Channel 1: terminal A1,
Channel 2: terminal A2,
Channel 3: terminal A3)
1: 3-channel addition (Addition values are the frequency reference)
When set to 0, select 1 for b101. In this case the multifunction input “Option/
Inverter selection” cannot be
used.
0 or 1
0
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
A
38FH
6149
User Constant Tables
Digital Reference Card: F3
User constants for the Digital Reference Card are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Digital input
option
F3-01
DI Input
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the Digital Reference
Card input method.
0: BCD 1% unit
1: BCD 0.1% unit
2: BCD 0.01% unit
3: BCD 1 Hz unit
4: BCD 0.1 Hz unit
5: BCD 0.01 Hz unit
6: BCD special setting (5digit input)
7: Binary input
6 is only effective when the
DI-16H2 is used.
When o1-03 is set to 2 or
higher, the input will be BCD,
and the units will change to
the o1-03 setting.
0 to 7
0
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
A
390H
6149
5-41
Analog Monitor Cards: F4
User constants for the Analog Monitor Card are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
F4-01
F4-02
F4-03
F4-04
F4-05
Display
Channel 2
output monitor bias
AO Ch2 Bias
F4-07
Analog output signal
level for
channel 1
Factory
Setting
1 to 45
2
0.00 to
2.50
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
391H
6-77
1.00
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
392H
6-77
1 to 45
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
393H
6-77
0.00 to
2.50
0.50
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
394H
6-77
Sets the channel 1 item bias
to 100%/10 V when the analog monitor card is used.
-10.0 to
10.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
395H
6-77
Sets the channel 2 item bias
to 100%/10 V when the analog monitor card is used.
-10.0 to
10.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
396H
6-77
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to +10 V
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
397H
-
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to +10 V
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
398H
6-77
Effective when the Analog
Monitor Card is used.
Monitor selection:
Set the number of the monitor
AO Ch1
item to be output. (U1-)
Select
Gain:
Set the multiple of 10 V for
Channel 1
outputting monitor items.
gain
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40
AO Ch1 Gain cannot be set. 29 to 31 and 41
are not used. When the AOChannel 2
12 Analog Monitor Card is
monitor
used, outputs of ± 10 V are
selection
possible. To output ± 10 V, set
AO Ch2
F4-07 or F4-08 to 1. When
Select
the AO-08 Analog Monitor
Card is used, only outputs of
Channel 2
0 to +10 V are possible.
gain
A meter calibration function
AO Ch2 Gain is available.
Channel 1
output monitor bias
Setting
Range
V/f
with
PG
Description
Channel 1
monitor
selection
AO Ch1 Bias
F4-06
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
AO Opt
Level Sel
F4-08
Analog output signal
level for
channel 2
AO Opt
Level Sel
5-42
User Constant Tables
Digital Output Card (DO-02 and DO-08): F5
User constants for the Digital Output Card are shown in the following table.
Name
Effective when a Digital Output Card (DO-02 or DO-08)
is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 37
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
A
A
A
399H
6146
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
39AH
6146
0 to 37
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
39BH
6146
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 37
4
No
A
A
A
A
A
39CH
6146
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 37
6
No
A
A
A
A
A
39DH
6146
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 37
37
No
A
A
A
A
A
39EH
6147
0 to 37
0F
No
A
A
A
A
A
39FH
6147
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 37
0F
No
A
A
A
A
A
3A0H
6147
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Card is used.
Set the output mode.
0: 8-channel individual outputs
DO-08 Selec- 1: Binary code output
tion
2: Output according to
F5-01 to F5-08 settings.
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
3A1H
6147
Channel 2
output selection
Channel 3
output selection
Channel 4
output selection
DO Ch4
Select
Channel 5
output selection
DO Ch5
Select
Channel 6
output selection
DO Ch6
Select
Channel 7
output selection
DO Ch7
Select
F5-08
0
A
DO Ch3
Select
F5-07
0 to 37
A
DO Ch2
Select
F5-06
Effective when a Digital Output Card (DO-02 or DO-08)
is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
No
DO Ch1
Select
F5-05
Factory
Setting
V/f
F5-01
F5-04
Setting
Range
Flux
Vector
Channel 1
output selection
F5-03
Description
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Display
F5-02
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
V/f
with
PG
Constant
Number
Channel 8
output selection
DO Ch8
Select
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
DO-08 output mode
selection
F5-09
5-43
Communications Option Cards: F6
User constants for a Communications Option Card are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
F6-01
F6-02
Display
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3
1
0: Always detect
1: Detect during operation
0 or 1
0: Deceleration stop using
deceleration time in C102
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using
deceleration time in C109
3: Continue operation
-
Description
Operation
Set the stopping method for
selection after communications errors.
communica0: Deceleration stop using
tions error
deceleration time in C102
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using
BUS Fault
deceleration time in C1Sel
09
3: Continue operation
Input level of
external fault
from Communications
Option Card
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
3A2H
-
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
3A3H
-
0 to 3
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
3A4H
-
0 to
60000
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
3A5H
-
0 or 1
1
No
No
No
No
A
A
3A7H
-
EF0 Detection
F6-03
Stopping
method for
external fault
from Communications
Option Card
EF0 Fault
Action
F6-04
Trace sampling from
Communications Option
Card
Trace Sample Tim
F6-06
Torque reference/torque
limit selection from
optical option
Torq Ref/Lmt
Sel
5-44
0: Torque reference/torque
limit from transmission
disabled.
1: Torque reference/torque
limit from transmission
enabled.
User Constant Tables
Terminal Function Constants: H
The following settings are made with the terminal function constants (H constants): Settings for external terminal functions.
Multi-function Contact Inputs: H1
User constants for multi-function contact inputs are shown in the following tables.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
H1-01
Terminal S3
function selection
Terminal S3
Sel
H1-02
Terminal S4
function selection
Terminal S4
Sel
H1-03
Terminal S5
function selection
Terminal S5
Sel
H1-04
Terminal S6
function selection
Terminal S6
Sel
H1-05
Terminal S7
function selection
Terminal S7
Sel
H1-06
Terminal S8
function selection
Terminal S8
Sel
H1-07
Terminal S9
function selection
Terminal S9
Sel
H1-08
Terminal S10
function selection
Terminal S10
Sel
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Multi-function contact input
1
0 to 78
24
Multi-function contact input
2
0 to 78
Multi-function contact input
3
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
400H
-
14
No
A
A
A
A
A
401H
-
0 to 78
3 (0)*
No
A
A
A
A
A
402H
-
Multi-function contact input
4
0 to 78
4 (3)*
No
A
A
A
A
A
403H
-
Multi-function contact input
5
0 to 78
6 (4)*
No
A
A
A
A
A
404H
-
Multi-function contact input
6
0 to 78
8 (6)
No
A
A
A
A
A
405H
-
Multi-function contact input
7
0 to 78
5
No
A
A
A
A
A
406H
-
Multi-function contact input
8
0 to 78
32
No
A
A
A
A
A
407H
-
5-45
Name
Constant
Number
Display
H1-09
Terminal S11
function selection
Terminal S11
Sel
H1-10
Terminal S12
function selection
Terminal S12
Sel
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Multi-function contact input
9
0 to 78
7
Multi-function contact input
10
0 to 78
15
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
408H
-
No
A
A
A
A
A
409H
-
* The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
Multi-function Contact Input Functions
Control Methods
Setting
Value
5-46
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop Page
Vector
2
0
3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse Run command)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-8
1
Local/Remote selection (ON: Operator, OFF: Constant setting)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-66
2
Option/Inverter selection (ON: Option Card)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-73
3
Multi-step speed reference 1
When H3-05 is set to 2, this function is combined with the master/auxiliary speed
switch.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-5
4
Multi-step speed reference 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-5
5
Multi-step speed reference 3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-5
6
Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-5
7
Accel/decel time 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-16
8
External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-67
9
External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-67
A
Acceleration/deceleration ramp hold (ON: Acceleration/deceleration stopped, frequency on hold)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-68
B
OH2 alarm signal input (ON: OH2 will be displayed)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
C
Multi-function analog input selection (ON: Enable)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
D
No V/f control with PG (ON: Speed feedback control disabled,) (normal V/f control)
No
Yes
No
No
No
-
E
Speed control integral reset (ON: Integral control disabled)
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
-
F
Not used (Set when a terminal is not used)
-
-
-
-
-
-
10
Up command (Always set with the down command)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-69
11
Down command (Always set with the up command)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-69
12
FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-74
13
RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-74
14
Fault reset (Reset when turned ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
7-2
15
Emergency stop. (Normally open condition: Deceleration to stop in deceleration
time set in C1-09 when ON.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-14
16
Motor switch command (Motor 2 selection)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
User Constant Tables
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
17
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop Page
Vector
2
Emergency stop (Normally closed condition: Deceleration to stop in deceleration
time set in C1-09 when OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-14
18
Timer function input (Functions are set in b4-01 and b4-02 and the timer function
outputs are set in H1- and H2-.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-93
19
PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-97
1A
Accel/Decel time 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-16
1B
Constants write enable (ON: All constants can be written-in. OFF: All constants
other than frequency monitor are write protected.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6139
1C
Trim control increase (ON: d4-02 frequency is added to analog frequency reference.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-72
1D
Trim control decrease (ON: d4-02 frequency is subtracted from analog frequency
reference.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-72
1E
Analog frequency reference sample/hold
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-73
20 to
2F
External fault (Desired settings possible)
Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-75
30
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped
during PID control)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-97
31
PID control integral hold (ON: Hold)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-97
32
Multi-step speed reference 4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
34
PID soft starter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-97
35
PID input characteristics switch
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-97
60
DC injection braking command (ON: Performs DC injection braking)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-13
61
External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
6-57
62
External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
6-57
63
Field weakening command (ON: Field weakening control set for d6-01 and d6-02)
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
-
64
External speed search command 3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
65
KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
66
KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
67
Communications test mode (“Pass” is displayed when the communications test is
passed.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-92
68
High-slip braking (HSB)
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
-
71
Speed/torque control change (ON: Torque control)
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
-
72
Zero-servo command (ON: Zero-servo)
No
No
No
Yes
No
-
77
Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (ON: C5-03)
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
-
78
Polarity reversing command for external torque reference
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
-
5-47
Multi-function Contact Outputs: H2
User constants for multi-function outputs are shown in the following tables.
Name
Constant
Number
H2-01
Display
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 37
0
0 to 37
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
40BH
-
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
40CH
-
0 to 37
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
40DH
-
Multi-function contact output
3
0 to 37
6
No
A
A
A
A
A
40EH
-
Multi-function contact output
4
0 to 37
10
No
A
A
A
A
A
40FH
-
Description
Terminal M1M2 function
selection
Multi-function contact output
(contact)
Term M1-M2
Sel
H2-02
Terminal M3M4 function
selection
(open collec- Multi-function contact output
1
tor)
Term M3-M4
Sel
H2-03
Terminal M5M6 function
selection
(open collec- Multi-function contact output
2
tor)
Term M5-M6
Sel
H2-04
Terminal P3
function
selection
(open collector)
Term P3 Sel
H2-05
Terminal P4
function
selection
(open collector)
Term P4 Sel
5-48
User Constant Tables
Multi-function Contact Output Functions
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop Page
Vector
2
0
During run (ON: run command is ON or voltage is being output)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
1
Zero-speed
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
2
Frequency agree 1 (L4-02 used.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
3
Desired frequency agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = ±L4-01, L4-02 used and during frequency agree)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
4
Frequency (FOUT) detection 1 (ON: +L4-01 ≥ output frequency ≥ -L4-01, L4-02
used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
5
Frequency (FOUT) detection 2 (ON: Output frequency ≥ +L4-01 or output frequency ≤ -L4-01, L4-02 used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
6
Inverter operation ready
READY: After initialization, no faults
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
7
During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
8
During baseblock (ON: during baseblock)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
9
Frequency reference selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
A
Run command selection status (ON: Run command from Operator)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
B
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Overtorque/undertorque
detection at ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-46
C
Loss of frequency reference (Effective when 1 is set for L4-05)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-62
D
Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-64
E
Fault (ON: Digital Operator communications error or fault other than CPF00 and
CPF01 has occurred.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
F
Not used. (Set when the terminals are not used.)
-
-
-
-
-
-
10
Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
11
Fault reset command active
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
12
Timer function output
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-93
13
Frequency agree 2 (L4-04 used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
14
Desired frequency agree 2 (ON: Output frequency = L4-03, L4-04 used, and during frequency agree)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
15
Frequency detection 3 (ON: Output frequency ≤ -L4-03, L4-04 used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
16
Frequency detection 4 (ON: Output frequency ≥ -L4-03, L4-04 used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
17
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-46
18
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact: Torque detection at ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-46
19
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-46
1A
During reverse run (ON: During reverse run)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
1B
During baseblock 2 (OFF: During baseblock)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
1C
Motor selection (Motor 2 selected)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
1D
During regenerative operation (ON: During regenerative operation)
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
-
1E
Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-63
1F
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-49
20
Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-02 setting)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
30
During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During torque limit)
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
5-49
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop Page
Vector
2
31
During speed limit (ON: During speed limit)
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
-
32
Speed control circuit operating for torque control (except when stopped).
The external torque reference will be limited if torque control is selected (internal
torque reference < external torque reference).
Output when the motor is rotating at the speed limit.
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
6116
33
Zero-servo end (ON: Zero-servo function completed)
No
No
No
Yes
No
-
37
During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection braking, initial excitation, operation stop)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Analog Inputs: H3
User constants for analog inputs are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
H3-01
Signal level
selection (terminal A1)
Term A1 Signal
H3-02
H3-03
H3-04
Gain (terminal A1)
Terminal A1
Gain
Bias (terminal A1)
Terminal A1
Bias
Signal level
selection (terminal A3)
Term A3 Signal
H3-05
Multi-function analog
input (terminal A3)
Terminal A3
Sel
H3-06
H3-07
5-50
Gain (terminal A3)
Terminal A3
Gain
Bias (terminal A3)
Terminal A3
Bias
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: 0 to ±10V
[11-bit + polarity (positive/negative) input]
1: 0 to ±10V
0 or 1
0
Sets the frequency when 10 V
is input, as a percentage of the
maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
1000.0
Sets the frequency when 0 V
is input, as a percentage of the
maximum frequency.
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
410H
6-24
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
411H
6-24
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
412H
6-24
0: 0 to ±10V
[11-bit + polarity (positive/negative) input]
1: 0 to ±10V
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
413H
6-24
Select from the functions
listed in the following table.
Refer to the next page.
0 to 1F
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
414H
6-24
Sets the input gain (level)
when terminal 16 is 10V.
Set according to the 100%
value selected from H3-05.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
415H
6-24
Sets the input gain (level)
when terminal 16 is 10V.
Set according to the 100%
value selected from H3-05.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
416H
6-24
Description
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
H3-08
H3-09
Display
Control Methods
Description
Multi-function analog
input terminal
A2 signal
level selection
0: Limit negative frequency
settings for gain and bias
settings to 0.
1: Do not limit negative
frequency settings for
gain and bias settings to 0
(i.e., allow reverse
operation).
Term A2 Sig- 2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
Switch current and voltage
nal
input using the switch on the
control panel.
Multi-function analog
input terminal Select multi-function analog
A2 function
input function for terminal
selection
A2. Refer to the next table.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 2
2
0 to 1F
0
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
417H
6-24
No
A
A
A
A
A
418H
6-25
Terminal A2
Sel
Gain (terminal A2)
H3-10
Terminal A2
Gain
Bias (terminal A2)
H3-11
H3-12
Terminal A2
Bias
Analog input
filter time
constant
Filter Avg
Time
Sets the input gain (level)
when terminal 14 is 10 V (20
mA).
Set according to the 100%
value for the function set for
H3-09.
0.0 to
100.0%
1000.0
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
419H
6-25
Sets the input gain (level)
when terminal 14 is 0 V (4
mA).
Set according to the 100%
value for the function set for
H3-09.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
41AH
6-25
Sets primary delay filter time
constant in seconds for the
two analog input terminal (A1
and A2).
Effective for noise control
etc.
0.00 to
2.00
0.03
s
No
A
A
A
A
A
41BH
6-25
5-51
H3-05,H3-09 Settings
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Contents (100%)
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Page
0
Add to terminal A1
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-26
1
Frequency gain
Frequency reference (voltage) command
value
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-26
2
Auxiliary frequency reference (2nd
Maximum output frequency
step analog)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-26
3
Auxiliary frequency reference 2
(3rd step analog)
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-26
4
Voltage bias
Motor rated voltage (E1-05)
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
-
5
Accel/decel change (reduction
coefficient)
Set acceleration and deceleration times (C101 to C1-08)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-17
6
DC injection braking current
Inverter rated output current
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
6-14
7
Overtorque/undertorque detection
level
Motor rated torque for vector control
Inverter rated output current for V/f control
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-48
8
Stall prevention level during run
Inverter rated output current
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
6-44
9
Frequency reference lower limit
level
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-31
A
Jump frequency
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-28
B
PID feedback
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-97
C
PID target value
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-97
E
Motor temperature input
10 V = 100%
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-53
10
Positive torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-38
11
Negative torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-38
12
Regenerative torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-38
13
Torque reference/torque limit at
speed control
Motor’s rated torque
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
6116
14
Torque compensation
Motor’s rated torque
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
6116
15
Positive/negative torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-38
1F
Analog input not used.
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-6
Not used
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
13, 14,
16 to 1E
5-52
Function
User Constant Tables
Multi-function Analog Outputs: H4
User constants for multi-function analog outputs are shown in the following table.
Name
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the number of the monitor
item to be output (U1-)
from terminal FM.
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40
cannot be set. 29 to 31 and 41
are not used.
1 to 45
2
Sets the multi-function analog
output 1 voltage level gain.
Sets whether the monitor item
output will be output in multiples of 10 V.
The maximum output from the
terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
41DH
6-76
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
(0 to (100%)
1000.0)
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
41EH
4-6
6-76
-10.0 to
+10.0
(-100.0
to
100.0)
0.0%
(0.0%)
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
41FH
4-6
Sets the number of the monitor
item to be output (U1-)
from terminal AM.
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40
cannot be set. 29 to 31 and 41
are not used.
1 to 45
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
420H
4-6
6-76
Set the voltage level gain for
multi-function analog output 2.
Set the number of multiples of
10 V to be output as the 100%
output for the monitor items.
The maximum output from the
terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
0.00 to
2.50
0.50
(0 to (200%)
1000.0)
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
421H
4-6
6-76
H4-06
Bias (termi- Sets the multi-function analog
nal AM)
output 2 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/
down parallel movement as a
percentage of 10 V.
Terminal
The maximum output from the
AM Bias
terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
-10.0 to
+10.0
(0 to
1000.0)
0.0%
(0.0%)
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
422H
-
H4-07
Analog output 1 signal Sets the signal output level for
level selec- multi-function output 1 (terminal FM)
tion
0: 0 to +10 V output
AO Level
1: 0 to ±10 V output
Select1
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
423H
-
Constant
Number
H4-01
Display
Monitor
selection
(terminal
FM)
Terminal
FM Sel
Gain (terminal FM)
H4-02
H4-03
H4-04
Terminal
FM Gain
Bias (termi- Sets the multi-function analog
nal FM)
output 1 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/
down parallel movement as a
percentage of 10 V.
Terminal
The maximum output from the
FM Bias
terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
Monitor
selection
(terminal
AM)
Terminal
AM Sel
Gain (terminal AM)
H4-05
Terminal
AM Gain
5-53
Name
Constant
Number
H4-08
Display
Control Methods
Description
Analog output 2 signal Sets the signal output level for
level selec- multi-function output 2 (terminal AM)
tion
0: 0 to +10 V output
AO Level
1: 0 to ±10 V output
Select2
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
A
424H
-
MEMOBUS Communications: H5
User constants for MEMOBUS communications are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
H5-01
Display
Station
address
Serial
Comm Adr
Description
Set the Inverter's node address.
Setting
Range
0 to 20
*
Factory
Setting
1F
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
425H
6-83
H5-02
Communi- Set the baud rate for 6CN
cation
MEMOBUS communications.
speed selec- 0: 1200 bps
tion
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
Serial Baud 3: 9600 bps
Rate
4: 19200 bps
0 to 4
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
426H
6-83
H5-03
Communi- Set the parity for 6CN MEMOcation par- BUS communications.
ity selection 0: No parity
1: Even parity
Serial Com
2: Odd parity
Sel
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
427H
6-83
Set the stopping method for
communications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using
deceleration time in C1-02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using
deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
0 to 3
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
428H
6-83
Set whether or not a communications timeout is to be
detected as a communications
error.
0: Do not detect.
1: Detect
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
429H
6-83
Set the time from the Inverter
receiving data to when the
Inverter starts to send.
5 to 65
5 ms
No
A
A
A
A
A
42AH
6-83
H5-04
Stopping
method
after communication
error
Serial Fault
Sel
H5-05
Communication error
detection
selection
Serial Flt
Dtct
H5-06
5-54
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
Send wait
time
Transmit
WaitTIM
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
H5-07
Display
RTS control ON/
OFF
RTS Control Sel
Control Methods
Description
Select to enable or disable
RTS control.
0: Disabled (RTS is always
ON)
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON
only when sending)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
1
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
A
42BH
6-83
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
5-55
Pulse Train I/O: H6
User constants for pulse I/O are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
H6-01
Pulse train
input function selection
Pulse Input
Sel
H6-02
Pulse train
input scaling
PI Scaling
H6-03
H6-04
H6-05
Pulse train
input gain
Pulse Input
Gain
Pulse train
input bias
Pulse Input
Bias
Pulse train
input filter
time
PI Filter
Time
H6-06
Pulse train
monitor
selection
Pulse Output Sel
H6-07
Pulse train
monitor
scaling
PO Scaling
5-56
Control Methods
Description
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
Set the number of pulses in
hertz, taking the reference to be
100%.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 2
0
1000 to
32000
Set the input gain level as a per0.0 to
cent when the pulse train set in
1000.0
H6-02 is input.
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
42CH
6-2
6-29
6-96
1440
Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
42DH
6-2
6-29
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
42EH
6-29
Set the input bias when the
pulse train is 0.
-100.0
to
100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
42FH
6-29
Set the pulse train input primary delay filter time constant
in seconds.
0.00 to
2.00
0.10
s
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
430H
6-29
Select the pulse train monitor
output items (value of the part of U1-).
There are two types of monitor
items: Speed-related items and
PID-related items.
1, 2, 5,
20, 24,
36
2
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
431H
6-79
Set the number of pulses output
when speed is 100% in hertz.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0,
to make the pulse train monitor
output synchronously to the
output frequency.
0 to
32000
1440
Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
432H
6-79
User Constant Tables
Protection Function Constants: L
The following settings are made with the protection function constants (L constants): Motor selection function, power loss ridethrough function, stall prevention function, frequency detection, torque limits, and hardware protection.
Motor Overload: L1
User constants for motor overloads are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Sets whether the motor overload function is enabled or disabled at electric thermal
overload relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor
protection
2: Inverter motor protection
3: Vector motor protection
In some applications when the
Inverter power supply is
turned off, the thermal value is
reset, so even if this constant is
set to 1, protection may not be
effective.
When several motors are connected to one Inverter, set to 0
and ensure that each motor is
installed with a protection
device.
0 to 3
1
Motor pro- Sets the electric thermal detectection time tion time in seconds units.
constant
Usually setting is not necessary.
The factory setting is 150%
overload for one minute.
When the motor's overload
MOL Time resistance is known, also set the
Const
overload resistance protection
time for when the motor is hot
started.
0.1 to
5.0
0 to 3
Display
Motor protection
selection
L1-01
MOL Fault
Select
L1-02
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
Alarm operation selection during
motor overheating
L1-03
MOL Thm
Input
Set H3-09 to E and select the
operation when the input motor
temperature (thermistor) input
exceeds the alarm detection
level (1.17 V).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09.
3: Continue operation (H3 on
the Operator flashes).
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
480H
4-5
6-49
1.0 min
No
A
A
A
A
A
481H
6-49
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
482H
6-52
5-57
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Motor overheating
operation
selection
L1-04
MOL Filter
Time
L1-05
Motor temperature
input filter
time constant
MOL Filter
Time
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set H3-09 to E and select the
operation when the motor temperature (thermistor) input
exceeds the operation detection level (2.34 V).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09.
0 to 2
1
Set H3-09 to E and set the primary delay time constant for
motor temperature (thermistor)
inputs in seconds.
0.00 to
10.00
0.20 s
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
483H
6-52
No
A
A
A
A
A
484H
6-52
Power Loss Ridethrough: L2
User constants for power loss ridethroughs are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Momentary
power loss
detection
L2-01
PwrL
Selection
L2-02
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (main circuit
undervoltage (UV)
detection)
1: Enabled (Restarted when
the power returns within the
time for L2-02. When L202 is exceeded, main circuit
undervoltage detection.)
2: Enabled while CPU is
operating. (Restarts when
power returns during
control operations. Does not
detect main circuit
undervoltage.)
0 to 2
0
0 to
25.5
0.1 s
0.1 to
5.0
0.2 s
Momentary
power loss
ridethru
time
Ridethrough time, when
Momentary Power Loss Selection (L2-01) is set to 1, in units
PwrL Ride- of seconds.
thru t
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
485H
6-55
No
A
A
A
A
A
486H
6-55
No
A
A
A
A
A
487H
6-55
6-57
Min. baseblock time
L2-03
5-58
Sets the Inverter's minimum
baseblock time in units of one
second, when the Inverter is
restarted after power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately
PwrL Base- 0.7 times the motor secondary
circuit time constant.
block t
When an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs when starting a
speed search or DC injection
braking, increase the set values.
*
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
with
PG
*1
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Voltage
recovery
time
L2-04
PwrL V/F
Ramp t
Undervoltage detection level
L2-05
PUV Det
Level
L2-06
L2-07
L2-08
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Sets the time required to return
the Inverter output voltage to
normal voltage at the completion of a speed search, in units
of one second.
Sets the time required to
recover from 0 V to the maximum voltage.
0.0 to
5.0
0.3 s
Sets the main circuit undervoltage (UV) detection level (main
circuit DC voltage) in V units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Insert an AC reactor in the
Inverter input side to lower the
main circuit undervoltage
detection level.
KEB decel- Sets in seconds the time
eration time required to decelerate from the
speed where the deceleration at
momentary power loss comKEB Fremand (KEB) is input to zero
quency
speed.
Momentary
recovery
time
UV
RETURN
TIME
Frequency
reduction
gain at KEB
start
KEB Decel
Time
150 to
210
*2
0.0 to
200.0
Set in seconds the time to
accelerate to the set speed after
recovery from a momentary
power loss.
0.0 to
25.5
Sets as a percent the about to
reduce the output frequency at
the beginning of deceleration at
momentary power loss (KEB).
Reduction = slip frequency
before KEB operation × L2-08
×2
0 to
300
*1
190 V
*2
0.0 s
0.0 s
*3
100%
Change
during
Operation
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
488H
6-55
6-56
No
A
A
A
A
A
489H
6-56
No
A
A
A
A
A
48AH
-
No
A
A
A
A
A
48BH
-
No
A
A
A
A
A
48CH
-
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Value for a 400 V class Inverter is double.
* 3. If the setting is 0, the axis will accelerate to the specified speed over the specified acceleration time (C1-01 to C1-08).
5-59
Stall Prevention: L3
User constants for the stall prevention function are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Stall prevention
selection
during accel
L3-01
StallP
Accel Sel
L3-02
Stall prevention
level during accel
StallP
Accel Lvl
L3-03
Stall prevention
limit during accel
StallP CHP
Lvl
Stall prevention
selection
during
decel
L3-04
StallP
Decel Sel
5-60
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (Acceleration as
set. With a heavy load, the
motor may stall.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration
stopped when L3-02 level is
exceeded. Acceleration
starts again when the
current is returned.)
2: Intelligent acceleration
mode (Using the L3-02
level as a basis, acceleration
is automatically adjusted.
Set acceleration time is
disregarded.)
0 to 2
1
Effective when L3-01 is set to 1
or 2.
Set as a percentage of Inverter
rated current.
Usually setting is not necessary.
The factory setting reduces the
set values when the motor
stalls.
0 to
200
Sets the lower limit for stall
prevention during acceleration,
as a percentage of the Inverter
rated current, when operation is
in the frequency range above
E1-06.
Usually setting is not necessary.
0: Disabled (Deceleration as
set. If deceleration time is
too short, a main circuit
overvoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is
stopped when the main
circuit voltage exceeds the
overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts when
voltage is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration
mode (Deceleration rate is
automatically adjusted so
that in Inverter can
decelerate in the shortest
possible time. Set
deceleration time is
disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking
Resistor Unit)
When a braking option (Braking Resistor, Braking Resistor
Unit, Braking Unit) is used,
always set to 0 or 3.
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
No
No
48FH
6-20
150%
No
A
A
A
No
No
490H
6-20
0 to
100
50%
No
A
A
A
No
No
491H
6-20
0 to 3*
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
492H
4-6
6-22
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Stall prevention
selection
during running
L3-05
StallP Run
Sel
L3-06
Stall prevention
level during running
StallP Run
Level
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (Runs as set. With
a heavy load, the motor may
stall.)
1: Deceleration time 1 (the
deceleration time for the
stall prevention function is
C1-02.)
2: Deceleration time 2 (the
deceleration time for the
stall prevention function is
C1-04.)
0 to 2
1
Effective when L3-05 is 1 or 2.
Set as a percentage of the
Inverter rated current.
Usually setting is not necessary.
The factory setting reduces the
set values when the motor
stalls.
30 to
200
160%
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
No
No
No
493H
6-43
No
A
A
No
No
No
494H
6-43
* The setting range is 0 to 2 for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 2.
Reference Detection: L4
User constants for the reference detection function are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
L4-01
Display
Speed
agreement
detection
level
Spd Agree
Level
L4-02
Speed
agreement
detection
width
Spd Agree
Width
Speed
agreement
detection
level (+/-)
L4-03
Spd Agree
Lvl+-
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Effective when “Desired frequency (ref/setting) agree 1,”
“Frequency detection 1,” or
“Frequency detection 2" is set
for a multi-function output.
Frequencies to be detected are
set in Hz units.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
Effective when “Frequency
(speed) agree 1,” “Desired frequency (speed) agree 1,” or
“Frequency (FOUT) detection
1,” is set for a multi-function
output.
Sets the frequency detection
width in Hz units.
0.0 to
20.0
Effective when “Desired frequency (speed) agree 2,”
“Desired frequency (speed)
agree 1" “Frequency (FOUT)
detection 3,” or “Frequency
(FOUT) detection 4" is set for a
multi-function output.
Frequency detection width is
set in Hz units.
-400.0
to
+400.0
Description
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
499H
-
2.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
49AH
-
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
49BH
-
5-61
Name
Constant
Number
L4-04
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Effective when “Frequency
(speed) agree 2,” “Desired frequency (speed) agree 1,” or
“Frequency detection 4" is set
for a multi-function output.
Frequency detection width is
set in Hz units.
0.0 to
20.0
2.0 Hz
0: Stop (Operation follows the
frequency reference.)
1: Operation at 80% speed
continues. (At 80% of speed
before the frequency
reference was lost)
Frequency reference is lost:
Frequency reference dropped
over 90% in 400 ms.
0 or 1
0
Display
Speed
agreement
detection
width (+/-)
Spd Agree
Wdth+-
L4-05
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
Operation
when frequency reference is
missing
Ref Loss
Sel
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
49CH
-
No
A
A
A
A
A
49DH
6-62
Fault Restart: L5
User constants for restarting faults are shown in the following table.
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Sets the number of auto restart
attempts.
Automatically restarts after a
fault and conducts a speed
search from the run frequency.
0 to 10
0
Auto restart Sets whether a fault contact
operation
output is activated during fault
selection
restart.
0: Not output (Fault contact is
not activated.)
Restart Sel
1: Output (Fault contact is
activated.)
0 or 1
0
Display
L5-01
Number of
auto restart
attempts
Num of
Restarts
L5-02
5-62
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
Constant
Number
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
49EH
6-63
No
A
A
A
A
A
49FH
6-63
User Constant Tables
Torque Detection: L6
User constants for the torque detection function are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Torque
detection
selection 1
L6-01
Torq Det 1
Sel
L6-02
Torque
detection
level 1
Torq Det 1
Lvl
L6-03
Torque
detection
time 1
Torq Det 1
Time
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Overtorque/undertorque
detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection only
with speed agreement;
operation continues after
overtorque (warning).
2: Overtorque detected
continuously during
operation; operation
continues after overtorque
(warning).
3: Overtorque detection only
with speed agreement;
output stopped upon
detection (protected
operation).
4: Overtorque detected
continuously during
operation; output stopped
upon detection (protected
operation).
5: Undertorque detection only
with speed agreement;
operation continues after
overtorque (warning).
6: Undertorque detected
continuously during
operation; operation
continues after overtorque
(warning).
7: Undertorque detection only
with speed agreement;
output stopped upon
detection (protected
operation).
8: Undertorque detected
continuously during
operation; output stopped
upon detection (protected
operation).
0 to 8
0
Open-loop vector control:
Motor rated torque is set as
100%.
V/f control: Inverter rated current is set as 100%.
0 to
300
Sets the overtorque/undertorque detection time in 1-second units.
0.0 to
10.0
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A1H
6-45
150%
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A2H
6-45
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A3H
6-45
5-63
Name
Constant
Number
L6-04
Torque
detection
selection 2
Torque
detection
level 2
Torq Det 2
Lvl
L6-06
Description
Display
Torq Det 2
Sel
L6-05
Control Methods
Torque
detection
time 2
Multi-function output for overtorque detection 1 is output to
multi-function contact output
when overtorque detection 1
NO or overtorque detection 1
NC is selected. Multi-function
output for overtorque detection
2 is output to multi-function
contact output when overtorque
detection 2 NO or overtorque
detection 2 NC is selected.
Torq Det 2
Time
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 8
0
0 to
300
0.0 to
10.0
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A4H
6-45
150%
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A5H
6-45
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A6H
6-45
Torque Limits: L7
User constants for torque limits are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Control Methods
Name
Description
Forward
drive
torque
L7-01 limit
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MEMO
BUS
Page
Register
0 to
300
200%
No
No
No
A
A
A
4A7H 6-38
0 to
300
200%
No
No
No
A
A
A
4A8H 6-38
0 to
300
200%
No
No
No
A
A
A
4A9H 6-38
0 to
300
200%
No
No
No
A
A
A
4AA
H
Torq Limit
Fwd
Reverse
drive
torque
L7-02 limit
Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque.
Four individual regions can be set.
Torq Limit
Rev
Forward
regenerative torque
L7-03 limit
Torq Lmt
Fwd Rgn
Reverse
regenerative torque
L7-04 limit
Torq Lmt
Rev Rgn
5-64
Output torque
Positive torque
Reverse
No. of
motor
rotations
Regenerative
state
Regenerative
state
Forward
Negative torque
6-38
User Constant Tables
Hardware Protection: L8
User constants for hardware protection functions are shown in the following table.
Name
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (no overheating
protection)
1: Enabled (overheating
protection)
0 or 1
0
L8-02
Overheat pre- Sets the detection temperature
alarm level
for the Inverter overheat
detection pre-alarm in °C.
The pre-alarm detects when
OH Prethe cooling fin temperature
Alarm Lvl
reaches the set value.
50 to
130
L8-03
Operation
Sets the operation for when
selection after the Inverter overheat preoverheat pre- alarm goes ON.
alarm
0: Decelerate to stop in
deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time
C1-09.
OH Pre3: Continue operation
Alarm Sel
(Monitor display only.)
A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor fault
will be given in setting 3.
Constant
Number
L8-01
Display
Protect selection for internal DB
resistor (Type
ERF)
DB Resistor
Prot
Input openphase protection selection
L8-05
Ph Loss In
Sel
Output openphase protection selection
L8-07
Ph Loss Out
Sel
L8-09
Ground protection selection
Ground Fault
Sel
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
4ADH 6-64
95 °C*
No
A
A
A
A
A
4AEH
6-65
0 to 3
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
4AFH
6-65
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Detects if input
current open-phase, power
supply voltage imbalance
or main circuit
electrostatic capacitor
deterioration occurs.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
4B1H
-
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Enabled
Output open-phase is detected
at less than 5% of Inverter
rated current.
When applied motor capacity
is small for Inverter capacity,
output open-phase may be
detected inadvertently or
open-phase may not be
detected. In this case, set to 0.
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
4B3H
-
0:Disabled
1:Enabled
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
4B5H
-
5-65
Name
Constant
Number
L8-10
L8-11
Display
Cooling fan
control delay
time
OL2
Chara@LSpd
L8-18
Soft CLA
selection
Soft CLA Sel
0 or 1
0
0 to
300
V/f
No
A
A
A
A
A
4B6H
-
60 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
4B7H
-
45 to
60
45 °C
No
A
A
A
A
A
4B8H
-
0: OL2 characteristics at low
speeds disabled.
1: OL2 characteristics at
low speeds enabled.
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
4BBH
-
0: Disable
1: Enable
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
4BFH
-
Set the time in seconds to
delay turning OFF the cooling
fan after the cooling fan OFF
command is received.
* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
5-66
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
Flux
Vector
temp
L8-15
Factory
Setting
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Ambient temperature
Set the ambient temperature.
OL2 characteristics
selection at
low speeds
Setting
Range
V/f
with
PG
Description
Cooling fan
Set the ON/OFF control for
control selec- the cooling fan.
tion
0: ON only when Inverter is
ON
FAN Control
1: ON whenever power is
Sel
ON
FAN OFF
TIM
L8-12
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
User Constant Tables
N: Special Adjustments
The following settings are made with the special adjustments constants (N constants): Hunting prevention and
speed feedback detection control.
Hunting Prevention Function: N1
User constants for hunting prevention are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Hunting-prevention function selection
N1-01
Hunt Prev
Select
Hunting-prevention gain
N1-02
Hunt Prev
Gain
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Hunting-prevention
function disabled
1: Hunting-prevention
function enabled
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when
the motor is operating with a
light load.
This function is enabled in V/
f control method only.
If high response is to be given
priority over vibration suppression, disable the huntingprevention function.
0 or 1
1
Set the hunting-prevention
gain multiplication factor.
Normally, there is no need to
make this setting.
Make the adjustments as follows:
• If vibration occurs with
light load, increase the setting.
• If the motor stalls, reduce
the setting.
If the setting is too large, the
voltage will be too suppressed
and the motor may stall.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
No
No
No
580H
6-36
No
A
A
No
No
No
581H
4-16
6-36
5-67
Speed Feedback Protection Control Functions: N2
User constants for speed feedback protection control functions are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Set the internal speed feedback detection control gain
using the multiplication function.
Normally, there is no need to
make this setting.
Adjust this constant as follows:
• If hunting occurs, increase
the set value.
• If response is low, decrease
the set value.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a
time, while checking the
response.
0.00 to
10.00
1.00
Set the time constant to
decide the rate of change in
the speed feedback detection
control.
0 to
2000
Set the time constant to
decide the amount of change
in the speed.
0 to
2000
Display
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) gain
N2-01
AFR Gain
N2-02
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) time
constant
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
A
No
No
584H
4-16
6-37
50 ms
No
No
No
A
No
No
585H
6-37
750 ms
No
No
No
A
No
No
586H
6-37
AFR Time
N2-03
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) time
constant 2
AFR Time 2
High-slip Braking: N3
User constants for high-slip braking are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
N3-01
Display
High-slip
braking
deceleration
frequency
width
HSB Down
Freq
High-slip
braking current limit
N3-02
HSB Current
5-68
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the frequency width for
deceleration during high-slip
braking as a percent, taking
the Maximum Frequency
(E1-04) as 100%.
1 to 20
5%
Sets the current limit for
deceleration during high-slip
braking as a percent, taking
the motor rated current as
100%. The resulting limit
must be 150% of the Inverter
rated current or less.
100 to
200
150%
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
No
No
No
588H
-
No
A
A
No
No
No
589H
-
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
N3-03
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Set in seconds the dwell time
for the output frequency for
FMIN (1.5 Hz) during V/f
control.
Effective only during deceleration for high-slip braking.
0.1 to
10.0
1.0 s
Set the OL time when the output frequency does not
change for some reason during deceleration for high-slip
braking.
30 to
1200
40 s
Display
High-slip
braking stop
dwell time
HSB Dwell
Time
N3-04
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
High-slip
braking OL
time
HSB OL
Time
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
No
No
No
58AH
-
No
A
A
No
No
No
58BH
-
Speed Estimation: N4
User constants for speed estimation are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
N4-07
Integral time
of speed estimator
SPD EST I
Time
N4-08
Proportional
gain of speed
estimator
SPD EST P
GAIN
N4-17
Torque
adjustment
gain
TRQ adjust
gain
N4-18
Feeder resistance adjustment gain
Feeder R gain
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the integral time of the
speed estimator for PI control.
0.000
to
9.999
0.060
ms
Set the proportional gain of
the speed estimator for PI
control.
0 to
1000
Set the torque adjustment
gain for low-speed power.
Set the gain for the feeder
resistance in the speed estimator.
Description
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
No
No
A
59AH
-
15
No
No
No
No
No
A
59BH
-
0.0 to
5.0
0.8
No
No
No
No
No
A
5A4H
-
0.90 to
1.30
1.00
No
No
No
No
No
A
5A5H
-
5-69
Feed Forward: N5
User constants for the feed forward control are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
N5-01
Description
Display
Feed forward
control selec- Select the feed forward control.
tion
0: Disabled
Feedfoward
1: Enabled
Sel
Motor acceleration time
N5-02
Control Methods
Factory
Setting
0 or 1
0*1
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
No
A
A
5B0H
-
No
No
No
No
A
A
5B1H
-
No
No
No
No
A
A
5B2H
-
Set the time required to
accelerate the motor at the
rated torque (T100) to the
rated speed (Nr).
J: GO2/4, P: Motor rated output
Motor Accel
Time
Setting
Range
Change
during
Operation
2π · J [kgm2] · Nr [r/min]
[s]
ta =
60 · T100 [N · m]
0.000
to
10.000
0.178 s
*2
However,
T100 =
N5-03
Feed forward
proportional
gain
Feedfoward
Gain
60
P [kW]
× 103 [N · m]
·
2π Nr [n/min]
Set the proportional gain for
feed forward control.
Speed reference response will
increase as the setting of N503 is increased.
0.00 to
100.00
1.0
* 1. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Flux vector control factory settings are given.)
* 2. The factory setting depends on the inverter capacity.
Digital Operator Constants: o
The following settings are made with the Digital Operator constants (o constants): Multi-function selections
and the copy function.
Monitor Select: o1
User constants for Digital Operator Displays are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Control Methods
Description
Factory
Setting
4 to 45
6
Yes
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
Monitor
selection
o1-01
5-70
Set the number of the monitor
item to be displayed in the
earliest 4 monitor items. (U1)
User Monitor The output monitor voltage
Sel
(factory setting) can be
changed.
Setting
Range
Change
during
Operation
A
500H
-
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
o1-02
Display
Control Methods
Description
Monitor
Sets the monitor item to be
selection after displayed when the power is
power up
turned on.
1: Frequency reference
2: Output frequency
Power-On
3: Output current
Monitor
4: The monitor item set for
o1-01
Frequency
units of reference setting
and monitor
o1-03
Display Scaling
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1 to 4
1
0 to
39999
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
501H
6132
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
502H
6132
0 or 1
0
No
No
No
No
A
A
503H
6132
0 to 5
3
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
504H
-
Sets the units that will be set
and displayed for the frequency reference and frequency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum
output frequency is
100%)
2 to 39:
min−1 units (Sets the motor
poles.)
40 to 39999:
User desired display
Set the desired values for
setting and display for the
max. output frequency.
Set 4-digit number
excluding the decimal
point.
Set the number of digits
below the decimal point
to display.
Example: When the max. output frequency value is 200.0,
set 12000
o1-04
o1-05
Setting unit
for frequency
Set the setting unit for freconstants
related to V/f quency reference-related constants.
characteris0: Hz
tics
1: min−1
V/f Display
Unit
LCD brightness adjustment
LCD Contrast
Set a smaller value to lighten
the LCD and a larger value
to darken the LCD (standard: 3).
5-71
Multi-function Selections: o2
User constants for Digital Operator key functions are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
o2-01
Display
LOCAL/
REMOTE
key enable/
disable
Local/
Remote Key
o2-02
STOP key
during control circuit
terminal
operation
Oper STOP
Key
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the Digital Operator
Local/Remote Key
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Switches
between the Digital
Operator and the constant
settings.)
0 or 1
1
Sets the Stop Key in the run
mode.
0: Disabled (When the run
command is issued from
and external terminal, the
Stop Key is disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even
during run.)
0 or 1
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
505H
6132
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
506H
6132
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
507H
6133
User constant initial
value
o2-03
Clears or stores user initial
values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records
the set constants as user
initial values.)
2: All clear (Clears all
recorded user initial
User Defaults
values)
When the set constants are
recorded as user initial values, 1110 will be set in A103.
kVA selection
o2-04
Inverter
Model #
Do not set.
0 to FF
0*
No
A
A
A
A
A
508H
-
Frequency
reference setting method
selection
When the frequency reference
is set on the Digital Operator
frequency reference monitor,
sets whether the Enter Key is
necessary.
0: Enter Key needed
1: Enter Key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter
accepts the frequency reference without Enter Key operation.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
509H
6133
Sets the operation when the
Digital Operator is disconnected.
0: Disabled (Operation
continues even if the
Digital Operator is
disconnected.)
1: Enabled (OPR is detected
at Digital Operator
disconnection. Inverter
output is cut off, and fault
contact is operated.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
50AH
-
o2-05
Operator
M.O.P.
Operation
selection
when digital
operator is
disconnected
o2-06
Oper Detection
5-72
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
o2-07
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0 to
65535
0 hr
0: Cumulative time when the
Inverter power is on. (All
time while the Inverter
power is on is
accumulated.)
1: Cumulative Inverter run
time. (Only Inverter
output time is
accumulated.)
0 or 1
Set the initial value of the fan
operation time using time
units.
Fan ON Time The operation time accumulates from the set value.
Set
Cumulative
operation
time setting
Sets the cumulative operation
time in hour units.
Operation time is calculated
Elapsed Time from the set values.
Set
o2-08
Elapsed Time
Run
o2-12
Description
Display
Cumulative
operation
time selection
o2-10
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
Fan operation time setting
Fault trace/
fault history
clear function
Fault Trace
Init
0: Disabled (U2 and U3 constants are on hold.)
1: Enabled (Initializes U2
and U3 constants.)
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
50BH
6133
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
50CH
-
0 to
65535
0 hr
No
A
A
A
A
A
50EH
6133
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
510H
-
* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
Copy Function: o3
User constants for the copy function are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Copy function selection
o3-01
o3-02
Copy Function Sel
Read permitted selection
Copy Allowable
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to
Operator)
2: COPY (Operator to
Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
0 to 3
0
0: Read prohibited
1: Read permitted
0 or 1
0
Description
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
515H
6135
No
A
A
A
A
A
516H
6135
5-73
T: Motor Autotuning
The following settings are made with the motor autotuning constants (T constants): Settings for autotuning.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Motor 1/2
selection
T1-00
Select Motor
T1-01
T1-02
T1-03
T1-06
T1-07
Motor output
power
Mtr Rated
Power
Motor rated
voltage
Motor rated
current
Motor base
frequency
Rated Frequency
Number of
motor poles
Number of
Poles
Motor base
speed
Rated Speed
T1-08
Number of
PG pulses
when turning
PG Pulses/
Rev
*
*
*
*
*
5-74
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Set the location where the
autotuned motor constants are
to be stored.
1: Motor 1
2: Motor 2
1 or 2
1
0 to 2
Set the autotuning mode.
0: Rotational autotuning
1: Stationary autotuning
2: Stationary autotuning for
Tuning Mode
line-to-line resistance
Sel
only
Rated Current
T1-05
Description
Autotuning
mode selection
Rated Voltage
T1-04
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
*1
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
700H
4-12
0
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
701H
4-9
4-12
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
702H
4-12
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
703H
4-12
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
704H
4-12
60.00
Hz
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
705H
4-12
4 poles
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
706H
4-12
min−1
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
707H
4-13
600
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
708H
4-13
Set the output power of the
motor in kilowatts.
0.00 to
650.00
0.40
kW
Set the rated voltage of the
motor in volts.
0 to
255.0*2
200.0 V
Set the rated current of the
motor in amps.
6.40 *4
Set the base frequency of the
motor in hertz.
400.0*5
Set the number of motor
poles.
2 to 48
poles
Set the base speed of the
0 to
24000
motor in min−1.
Set the number of pulses per
revolution for the PG being
used (pulse generator or
encoder) without any multiplication factor.
0.32 to
0 to
0 to
60000
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
with
PG
*2
1.90 A
*3
1750
Set T1-02 and T1-04 when 2 is set for T1-01. Only set value 2 is possible for V/f control or V/f control with PG.
These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double.
The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.)
The upper setting limit will be 150.0 Hz when C6-01 is set to 0.
User Constant Tables
U: Monitor Constants
The following settings are made with the monitor constants (U constants): Setting constants for monitoring in
drive mode.
Status Monitor Constants: U1
The constants used for monitoring status are listed in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
U1-01
U1-02
Display
Frequency
reference
Frequency
Ref
Output frequency
Output Freq
U1-03
U1-04
Output current
Output Current
Control
method
Control
Method
Control Methods
Description
U1-06
U1-07
Output Voltage
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
A
A
40H
Monitors the output frequency.*
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
A
A
41H
Monitors the output current.
10 V: Inverter rated output
current
(0 to +10 V, absolute value
output)
0.1 A
A
A
A
A
A
42H
Checks the current control
method.
(Cannot be output.)
-
A
A
A
A
A
43H
0.01
Hz
No
A
A
A
A
44H
0.1 V
A
A
A
A
A
45H
1V
A
A
A
A
A
46H
0.1
kW
A
A
A
A
A
47H
0.1%
No
No
A
A
A
48H
Monitors the detected
Motor Speed motor speed.*
Output voltage
Min.
Unit
Monitors/sets the frequency reference value.*
Motor speed
U1-05
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Monitors the output voltage reference value in the
Inverter.
DC bus voltage
Monitors the main DC
voltage in the Inverter.
DC Bus
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(0 to +10 V output)
10 V: 400 VDC (800 VDC)
(0 to +10 V output)
Voltage
U1-08
U1-09
Output
power
Output
kWatts
10 V: Inverter capacity
Monitors the output power (max. applicable motor
(internally detected value). capacity)
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
Torque referMonitor in internal torque
ence
reference value for vector
Torque Ref- control.
erence
10 V: Motor rated torque
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor).
5-75
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Control Methods
Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
-
A
A
A
A
A
49H
-
A
A
A
A
A
4AH
-
A
A
A
A
A
4BH
Min.
Unit
Input termi- Shows input ON/OFF status.
nal status
U1-10= 00000000
U1-10
Input Term
Sts
1: FWD command
(S1) is ON.
1: REV command
(S2) is ON.
1: Multi input 1
(S3) is ON.
1: Multi input 2
(Cannot be output.)
(S4) is ON.
1: Multi input 3
(S5) is ON.
1: Multi input 4
(S6) is ON.
1: Multi input 5
(S7) is ON.
1:Multi input 6
(S8) is ON.
Output ter- Shows output ON/OFF status.
minal status
U1-11
Output
Term Sts
Operation
status
U1-12
Int Ctl Sts 1
U1-11= 00000000
1: Multi-function
contact output 1
(M1-M2) is ON.
1: Multi-funtion
contact output 2
(Cannot be output.)
(P1) is ON.
1: Multi-funtion
contact output 3
(P2) is ON.
Not used (always 0).
1: Error output
(MA/AB-MC) is ON.
Inverter operating status.
U1-12= 00000000
1: Run
1: Zero speed
1: Reverse
1: Reset signal
input
(Cannot be output.)
1: Speed agree
1: Inverter
ready
1: Minor fault
1: Major fault
U1-13
U1-14
(Cannot be output.)
1
hr
A
A
A
A
A
4CH
Elapsed
Time
Monitors the total operating
time of the Inverter.
The initial value and the operating time/power ON time
selection can be set in o2-07
and o2-08.
Software
No. (flash
memory)
(Manufacturer’s ID number)
(Cannot be output.)
-
A
A
A
A
A
4DH
Cumulative
operation
time
FLASH ID
5-76
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
U1-15
Display
Terminal
A1 input
voltage
Term A1
Level
U1-16
Terminal
A2 input
voltage
Term A2
Level
U1-17
Terminal
A3 input
voltage
Term 16
Level
U1-18
Motor secondary current (Iq)
Mot SEC
Current
U1-19
Motor
exciting
current (Id)
Mot EXC
Current
U1-20
U1-22
U1-24
ASR Input
PID Feedback
DI-16 Reference
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
10 V: 100% (10 V)
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.1
%
A
A
A
A
A
4EH
Monitors the input voltage of
the multi-function analog
input.
An input of 10 V corresponds
to 100%.
10 V: 100% (10 V)
(0 to ±10 V possible)
0.1
%
A
A
A
A
A
4FH
Monitors the input voltage of
the multi-function analog
input.
An input of 10 V corresponds
to 100%.
10 V: 100% (10 V)
(0 to ±10 V possible)
0.1
%
A
A
A
A
A
050H
Monitors the calculated value
of the motor secondary current.
The motor rated secondary
current corresponds to 100%.
10 V: Motor rated
secondary current)
(0 to ±10 V output)
0.1
%
A
A
A
A
A
51H
10 V: Motor rated
secondary current)
(0 to ±10 V output)
0.1
%
No
No
A
A
A
52H
0.0
1Hz
A
A
A
A
A
53H
0.0
1%
No
A
No
A
A
54H
10 V: Motor rated
secondary current)
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.0
1%
No
A
No
A
A
55H
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.0
1%
A
A
A
A
A
57H
-
A
A
A
A
A
58H
Monitors the calculated value
of the motor excitation current.
The motor rated secondary
current corresponds to 100%.
Monitors the input to the speed
control loop.
10 V: Max. frequency
The maximum frequency cor- (0 to ± 10 V possible)
responds to 100%.
ASR output Monitors the output from the
speed control loop.
ASR OutThe motor rated secondary
put
current corresponds to 100%.
PID feedback value
Min.
Unit
Monitors the input voltage of
the voltage frequency reference. An input of 10 V corresponds to 100%.
Monitors the output frequency
after a soft start.
The frequency given does not 10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
include compensations, such
as slip compensation.
SFS Output The unit is set in o1-03.
DI-16H2
input status
U1-25
Description
Output frequency
after softstart
ASR input
U1-21
Control Methods
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Monitors the feedback value
when PID control is used.
The input for the max. frequency corresponds to 100%.
Monitors the reference value
from a DI-16H2 Digital Reference Card.
(Cannot be output.)
The value will be displayed in
binary or BCD depending on
user constant F3-01.
5-77
Name
Control Methods
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
0.1
V
No
No
A
A
A
59H
0.1
V
No
No
A
A
A
5AH
-
A
A
A
A
A
5BH
U1-32
ACR output of q axis Monitors the current control
10 V: 100%
output value for the motor sec(0 to ± 10 V possible)
ACR(q)
ondary current.
Output
0.1
%
No
No
A
A
A
5FH
U1-33
ACR output of d axis Monitors the current control
output value for the motor
ACR(d)
excitation current.
Output
0.1
%
No
No
A
A
A
60H
-
A
A
A
A
A
61H
1
No
No
No
A
No
62H
PID feedback volume
10 V: Max. frequency
Given as maximum frequency/
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
100%
0.0
1%
A
A
A
A
A
63H
PID control output
10 V: Max. frequency
Given as maximum frequency/
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
100%
0.0
1%
A
A
A
A
A
64H
PID command + PID command bias
Given as maximum frequency/
100%
0.0
1%
A
A
A
A
A
65H
-
A
A
A
A
A
66H
Constant
Number
U1-26
Display
Description
Output voltage referMonitors the Inverter internal
ence (Vq)
voltage reference for motor
Voltage Ref secondary current control.
(Vq)
U1-27
Output voltage referMonitors the Inverter internal
ence (Vd)
voltage reference for motor
Voltage Ref excitation current control.
(Vd)
U1-28
Software
No. (CPU)
CPU ID
U1-34
U1-35
OPE fault
constant
OPE
Detected
Zero servo
movement
pulses
Zero Servo
Pulse
U1-36
PID input
volume
PID Input
U1-37
PID output
volume
PID Output
U1-38
PID command
PID Setpoint
MEMOBUS
communications
error code
U1-39
Transmit
Err
5-78
(Manufacturer’s CPU software
(Cannot be output.)
No.)
10 V: 100%
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
Shows the first constant number where an OPE fault was
detected.
(Cannot be output.)
Shows the number of PG
pulses times 4 for the movement range when stopped at
zero.
10 V: Max. frequency
Shows MEMOBUS errors.
U1-40= 00000000
1: CRC error
1: Data length error
Not used (always 0).
1: Parity
error
1: Overrun
error
1: Framing
error
1: Timeout
Not used (always 0).
(Cannot be output.)
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
U1-40
U1-42
U1-43
Display
Estimated
motor flux
Mot Flux
EST
Motor flux
current
compensation
ASR output without
filter
U1-44
ASR Output w Fil
Feed forward control output
FF Cout
Output
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
1
hr
A
A
A
A
A
68H
Monitors the calculated value
of the motor flux. 100% is dis10 V: Rated motor flux
played for the rated motor
flux.
0.1
%
No
No
No
No
A
69H
Monitors motor flux current
10 V: Rated secondary curcompensation value. 100% is
rent of motor
displayed for the rated second(-10 V to 10 V)
ary current of the motor.
0.1
%
No
No
No
No
A
6AH
10 V: Rated secondary current of motor
(-10 V to 10 V)
0.0
1%
No
No
No
A
A
6BH
10 V: Rated secondary current of motor
(-10 V to 10 V)
0.0
1%
No
No
No
A
A
6CH
Description
Cooling fan
operating
Monitors the total operating
time
time of the cooling fan. The
FAN
time can be set in 02-10.
Elapsed
Time
Id Comp
Value
U1-45
Control Methods
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Monitors the output from the
speed control loop (i.e., the
primary filter input value).
100% is displayed for rated
secondary current of the
motor.
Monitors the output from feed
forward control. 100% is displayed for rated secondary
current of the motor.
(Cannot be output.)
Min.
Unit
5-79
Fault Trace: U2
User constants for error tracing are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
U2-01
U2-02
U2-03
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
-
A
A
A
A
A
80H
-
A
A
A
A
A
81H
The reference frequency when
the previous fault occurred.
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
A
A
82H
The output frequency when the
previous fault occurred.
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
A
A
83H
The output current when the previous fault occurred.
0.1 A
A
A
A
A
A
84H
The motor speed when the previ- (Cannot be output.)
ous fault occurred.
0.01
Hz
No
A
A
A
A
85H
The output reference voltage
when the previous fault occurred.
0.1 V
A
A
A
A
A
86H
1V
A
A
A
A
A
87H
0.1
kW
A
A
A
A
A
88H
0.1%
No
No
A
No
A
89H
The contents of the current fault.
Previous fault The contents of the error that
occurred just prior to the current
Last Fault
fault.
Display
Current fault
Current Fault
Reference
frequency at
fault
Output frequency at
fault
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
with
PG
Min.
Unit
Frequency
Ref
U2-04
Output Signal
Level During
Multi-Function
Analog Output
Description
Output Freq
U2-05
U2-06
Output current at fault
Output Current
Motor speed
at fault
Motor Speed
U2-07
Output voltage reference
at fault
Output Voltage
U2-08
U2-09
DC bus voltage at fault
The main current DC voltage
DC Bus Volt- when the previous fault occurred.
age
Output power
at fault
The output power when the previous fault occurred.
Output
kWatts
U2-10
5-80
Torque reference at fault
The reference torque when the
previous fault occurred. The
Torque Refer- motor rated torque corresponds
to 100%.
ence
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
U2-11
Display
Input terminal status at
fault
Input Term
Sts
U2-12
U2-14
Inverter Status
Cumulative
operation
time at fault
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
-
A
A
A
A
A
8AH
-
A
A
A
A
A
8BH
The operating status when the
previous fault occurred. The format is the same as for U1-12.
-
A
A
A
A
A
8CH
The operating time when the previous fault occurred.
1
hr
A
A
A
A
A
8DH
The input terminal status when
the previous fault occurred.
The format is the same as for U110.
Sts
U2-13
Control Methods
V/f
with
PG
Description
Output terminal status at
The output terminal status when
fault
the previous fault occurred. The
Output Term format is the same as for U1-11.
Operation
status at fault
Output Signal
Level During
Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
(Cannot be output.)
Elapsed time
Note The following errors are not included in the error trace: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
5-81
Fault History: U3
User constants for the error log are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
U3-01
Display
Most recent
fault
Last Fault
U3-02
U3-03
U3-04
U3-05
Second most
recent fault
Fault Message 2
Third most
recent fault
Fault Message 3
Fourth/oldest
fault
Fault Message 4
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
-
A
A
A
A
A
90H
The error contents of 2nd
previous fault.
-
A
A
A
A
A
91H
The error contents of 3rd
previous fault.
-
A
A
A
A
A
92H
The error contents of 4th
previous fault.
-
A
A
A
A
A
93H
1
hr
A
A
A
A
A
94H
1
hr
A
A
A
A
A
95H
1
hr
A
A
A
A
A
96H
1
hr
A
A
A
A
A
97H
The error contents of 1st
previous fault.
The total operating time
when the 1st previous fault
Elapsed Time occurred.
1
U3-06
U3-07
Accumulated
time of third
fault
U3-08
Accumulated
time of
fourth/oldest
fault
(Cannot be output.)
The total operating time
when the 2nd previous fault
Elapsed Time occurred.
2
The total operating time
when the 3rd previous fault
Elapsed Time occurred.
3
Elapsed Time
4
The total operating time
when the 4th previous fault
occurred.
Note The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
5-82
Open MEMO
BUS
-loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
with
PG
Min.
Unit
Description
Cumulative
operation
time at fault
Accumulated
time of second fault
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
User Constant Tables
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)
The factory settings of the following user constants will change if the control method (A1-02) is changed.
Name
Constant
Number
b3-01
b3-02
b8-02
b8-03
C3-01
C3-02
C4-02
Display
Speed search selection
SpdSrch at Start
Speed search operating current
SpdSrch Current
Energy-saving gain
Energy Save Gain
Energy-saving filter time constant
Energy Save F.T
Slip compensation gain
Slip Comp Gain
Slip compensation primary delay time
Slip Comp Time
Torque compensation primary delay time
constant
Factory Setting
V/f
Control
V/f with
PG
Openloop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
1
2
3
2
-
2
0 to 200
1%
120
-
100
-
10
0.0 to 10.0
0.1
-
-
0.7
1.0
0.7
0.0 to 10.00
0.01 s
-
-
0.50
0.01
0.50
0.0 to 2.5
0.1
0.0
-
1.0
1.0
1.0
0 to 10000
1 ms
2000
-
200
-
-
0 to 10000
1 ms
200
200
20
-
-
0.00 to 300.00
0.01
-
0.20
-
20.00
10.00
0.000 to 10.000
0.001 s
-
0.200
-
0.500
0.500
0.00 to 300.00
0.01
-
0.02
-
20.00
10.00
0.000 to 10.000
0.001
sec.
-
0.050
-
0.500
0.500
0.000 to 0.500
0.001
-
-
-
0.004
0.010
0 to 1000
1 ms
-
-
-
0
10
0.0 to 400.0
0.1 Hz
60.0
60.0
*3
*3
60.0
60.0
60.0
0.0 to 255.0
0.1 V
200.0
200.0
*3
*3
200.0
200.0
200.0
0.0 to 400.0
0.1 Hz
60.0
60.0
*3
*3
60.0
60.0
60.0
0.0 to 400.0
0.1 Hz
3.0
3.0
*3
*3
3.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 to 255.0
(0.0 to 510.0)
0.1 V
15.0
15.0
*3
*3
11.0
0.0
0.0
Setting Range
Unit
0 to 3
Torq Comp Time
C5-01
C5-02
C5-03
C5-04
C5-06
d5-02
ASR proportional (P) gain 1
ASR P Gain 1
ASR integral (I) time
ASR I Time 1
ASR proportional (P) gain 2
ASR P Gain 2
ASR integral (I) time 2
ASR I Time 2
ASR primary delay time
ASR Delay Time
Torque reference delay time
Torq Ref Filter
E1-04
E3-02
Max. output frequency (FMAX)
E1-05
E3-03
Max. voltage (VMAX)
Max Frequency
Max Voltage
E1-06
E3-04
Base frequency (FA)
E1-07
E3-05
Mid. output frequency (FB)
E1-08
E3-06
Base Frequency
Mid Frequency A
Mid. output frequency voltage (VC)*2
Mid Voltage A
5-83
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Unit
0.0 to 400.0
0.1 Hz
0.0 to 255.0
(0.0 to 510.0)
0.1 V
0.0 to 2.0
0, 1
Min Frequency
Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)*2
E1-10
E3-08
Min Voltage
Overspeed detection delay time
F1-09
PG Overspd Time
Feed forward control selection
N5-01
1.
2.
3.
4.
Setting Range
Min. output frequency (FMIN)
E1-09
E3-07
*
*
*
*
Factory Setting
Feedfoward Sel
Openloop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
0.5
0.0
0.3
2.0
0.0
1.0
1.0
-
0.0
0.0
-
-
0
1
V/f
Control
V/f with
PG
1.5
1.5
*3
*3
9.0
9.0
*3
*3
0.1 s
-
1
-
The settings will be 0.05 (Flux vector)/2.00 (Open-loop vector) for inverters of 55kW or larger.
The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
Settings vary as shown in the following tables depending on the Inverter capacity and E1-03.
The setting range is 0 to 66.0 for open-loop vector control 2.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 1.5 kW
Constant
Number
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
1
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
2
Flux
Vector
Control
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
Factory Setting
Unit
E1-03
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
E1-04
Hz
50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
D
E
E1-05
*
V
200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
200.0 200.0
200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
200.0
200.0 200.0
E1-06
Hz
50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
0.0
E1-07
Hz
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
0.0
E1-08
*
V
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
35.0
50.0
35.0
50.0
19.0
24.0
19.0
24.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
11.0
13.3
0.0
E1-09
Hz
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.5
0.3
0.0
E1-10
*
V
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
8.0
9.0
8.0
9.0
11.0
13.0
11.0
15.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
2.0
1.3
0.0
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
1
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
2
Flux
Vector
Control
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
120.0 180.0
F
* The setting shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 2.2 to 45 kW
Constant
Number
Factory Setting
Unit
E1-03
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
E1-04
Hz
50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
E1-05
*
V
200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
200.0 200.0
200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
200.0
200.0 200.0
E1-06
Hz
50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
0.0
E1-07
Hz
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
0.0
E1-08
*
V
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
35.0
50.0
35.0
50.0
18.0
23.0
18.0
23.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
11.0
13.3
0.0
E1-09
Hz
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.5
0.3
0.0
E1-10
*
V
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
6.0
7.0
6.0
7.0
9.0
11.0
9.0
13.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
2.0
1.3
0.0
* The setting shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
5-84
D
E
120.0 180.0
F
User Constant Tables
200 V Class Inverters of 55 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW
Constant
Number
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
1
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
2
Flux
Vector
Control
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
Factory Setting
Unit
E1-03
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
E1-04
Hz
50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
D
E
E1-05
*
V
200.0
200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
E1-06
Hz
50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
0.0
E1-07
Hz
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
0.0
E1-08
*
V
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
35.0
50.0
35.0
50.0
15.0
20.0
15.0
20.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
11.0
13.3
0.0
E1-09
Hz
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.5
0.3
0.0
E1-10
*
V
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
5.0
6.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
9.0
7.0
11.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
2.0
1.3
0.0
120.0 180.0
F
* The setting shown are for 200 V class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V class Inverters.
5-85
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
The factory settings of the following user constants will change if the Inverter capacity (o2-04) is changed.
200 V Class Inverters
Constant
Number
o2-04
Name
Unit
Inverter Capacity
kVA selection
kW
-
Factory Setting
0.4
0
0.75
1
1.5
2
2.2
3
3.7
4
5.5
5
7.5
6
11
7
15
8
b8-03
Energy-saving filter time
constant
s
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
-
288.20
223.70
169.40
156.80
122.90
94.75
72.69
70.44
63.13
-
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
-
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Carrier frequency selection
upper limit
-
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current
A
1.90
3.30
6.20
8.50
14.00
19.60
26.60
39.7
53.0
E2-02
(E4-02)
Motor rated slip
Hz
2.90
2.50
2.60
2.90
2.73
1.50
1.30
1.70
1.60
E2-03
(E4-03)
Motor no-load current
A
1.20
1.80
2.80
3.00
4.50
5.10
8.00
11.2
15.2
E2-05
(E4-05)
Motor line-to-line resistance
Ω
9.842
5.156
1.997
1.601
0.771
0.399
0.288
0.230
0.138
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor leak inductance
%
18.2
13.8
18.5
18.4
19.6
18.2
15.5
19.5
17.2
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque
compensation
W
14
26
53
77
112
172
262
245
272
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
s
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
L2-03
Min. baseblock (BB) time
s
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
s
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
°C
95
95
100
95
95
95
95
90
100
N5-02
Motor acceleration time
s
0.178
0.142
0.166
0.145
0.154
0.168
0.175
0.265
0.244
C6-02
C6-11
Carrier frequency selection*1
Carrier frequency selection
for open-loop vector control
0.50 (Open-loop vector control)
2*2
-
5-86
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
o2-04
Name
Unit
Inverter Capacity
kVA selection
kW
-
Factory Setting
18.5
9
22
A
30
B
37
C
45
D
55
E
75
F
90
10
110
11
b8-03
Energy-saving filter time
constant
s
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
-
57.87
51.79
46.27
38.16
35.78
31.35
23.10
20.65
18.12
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
-
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
C6-11
Carrier frequency selection
for open-loop vector control
-
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
Carrier frequency selection
upper limit
-
6
6
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current
A
65.8
77.2
105.0
131.0
160.0
190.0
260.0
260.0
260.0
E2-02
(E4-02)
Motor rated slip
Hz
1.67
1.70
1.80
1.33
1.60
1.43
1.39
1.39
1.39
E2-03
(E4-03)
Motor no-load current
A
15.7
18.5
21.9
38.2
44.0
45.6
72.0
72.0
72.0
E2-05
(E4-05)
Motor line-to-line resistance
Ω
0.101
0.079
0.064
0.039
0.030
0.022
0.023
0.023
0.023
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor leak inductance
%
20.1
19.5
20.8
18.8
20.2
20.5
20.0
20.0
20.0
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque
compensation
W
505
538
699
823
852
960
1200
1200
1200
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
s
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
L2-03
Min. baseblock (BB) time
s
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.7
1.7
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
s
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
°C
90
90
95
100
100
110
100
95
95
N5-02
Motor acceleration time
s
0.317
0.355
0.323
0.320
0.387
0.317
0.533
0.592
0.646
0.50 (Open-loop vector control)
2.00 (Open-loop vector control)
2*2
-
Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 7.5 kW.
* 1. The initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 0: Low noise PWM, 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier
frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 5.5 kW or more, the Inverter rated current will need to be reduced.
* 2. The initial settings for C6-11 are as follows: 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 4.0 kHz, 3: 6.0 kHz, 4: 8.0 kHz.
5-87
400 V Class Inverters
Constant
Number
o2-04
Name
Unit
Inverter Capacity
kVA selection
kW
-
b8-03
Energy-saving filter time
constant
s
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
-
576.40
447.40
338.80
313.60
-
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
-
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Carrier frequency selection upper limit
-
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current
A
1.00
1.60
3.10
4.20
7.00
7.00
9.80
13.30
19.9
26.5
E2-02
(E4-02)
Motor rated slip
Hz
2.90
2.60
2.50
3.00
2.70
2.70
1.50
1.30
1.70
1.60
E2-03
(E4-03)
Motor no-load current
A
0.60
0.80
1.40
1.50
2.30
2.30
2.60
4.00
5.6
7.6
E2-05
(E4-05)
Motor line-to-line resistance
Ω
6.495
3.333
3.333
1.595
1.152
0.922
0.550
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor leak inductance
%
18.2
14.3
18.3
18.7
19.3
19.3
18.2
15.5
19.6
17.2
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque
compensation
W
14
26
53
77
130
130
193
263
385
440
L2-02
Momentary power loss
ridethru time
s
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.8
0.8
1.0
2.0
2.0
L2-03
Min. baseblock (BB) time
s
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
s
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
C6-02
C6-11
Carrier frequency selection*1
Carrier frequency selection for open-loop vector
Factory Setting
0.4
20
0.75
21
1.5
22
2.2
23
3.7
24
4.0
25
5.5
26
7.5
27
11
28
15
29
0.50 (Open-loop vector control)
245.80 236.44 189.50 145.38 140.88 126.26
control 2*2
-
5-88
38.198 22.459 10.100
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
°C
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
90
95
95
N5-02
Motor acceleration time
s
0.178
0.142
0.166
0.145
0.154
0.154
0.168
0.175
0.265
0.244
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
o2-04
Name
Unit
Inverter Capacity
kVA selection
kW
-
Factory Setting
18.5
2A
22
2B
30
2C
37
2D
45
2E
b8-03
Energy-saving filter time
constant
s
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
-
115.74
103.58
92.54
76.32
71.56
-
3
3
3
3
3
-
3
3
3
3
3
Carrier frequency selection
upper limit
-
3
3
3
3
3
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current
A
32.9
38.6
52.3
65.6
79.7
E2-02
(E4-02)
Motor rated slip
Hz
1.67
1.70
1.80
1.33
1.60
E2-03
(E4-03)
Motor no-load current
A
7.8
9.2
10.9
19.1
22.0
E2-05
(E4-05)
Motor line-to-line resistance
Ω
0.403
0.316
0.269
0.155
0.122
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor leak inductance
%
20.1
23.5
20.7
18.8
19.9
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque
compensation
W
508
586
750
925
1125
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
s
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
L2-03
Min. baseblock (BB) time
s
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
s
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.0
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
°C
95
95
95
95
95
N5-02
Motor acceleration time
s
0.317
0.355
0.323
0.320
0.387
C6-02
C6-11
Carrier frequency selection*1
Carrier frequency selection
for open-loop vector control
0.50 (Open-loop vector control)
2*2
-
5-89
Constant
Number
o2-04
Name
Unit
Inverter Capacity
kVA selection
kW
-
Factory Setting
55
2F
75
30
90
31
110
32
132
33
160
34
b8-03
Energy-saving filter time
constant
s
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
-
67.20
46.20
38.91
36.23
32.79
30.13
-
2
2
F
F
1
1
-
2
2
1
1
1
1
Carrier frequency selection
upper limit
-
5.0
5.0
3.0
3.0
2.0
2.0
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current
A
95.0
130.0
156.0
190.0
223.0
270.0
E2-02
(E4-02)
Motor rated slip
Hz
1.46
1.39
1.40
1.40
1.38
1.35
E2-03
(E4-03)
Motor no-load current
A
24.0
36.0
40.0
49.0
58.0
70.0
E2-05
(E4-05)
Motor line-to-line resistance
Ω
0.088
0.092
0.056
0.046
0.035
0.029
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor leak inductance
%
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque
compensation
W
1260
1600
1760
2150
2350
2850
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
s
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
L2-03
Min. baseblock (BB) time
s
1.3
1.5
1.7
1.7
1.8
1.9
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
s
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
°C
100
105
105
120
115
115
N5-02
Motor acceleration time
s
0.317
0.533
0.592
0.646
0.673
0.777
C6-02
C6-11
Carrier frequency selection*1
Carrier frequency selection
for open-loop vector control
2.00 (Open-loop vector control)
2*2
-
Note Inverters with a capacity of 185 kW or more are under development.
* 1. The initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, 6: 15 kHz, and F: User-set (Initial setting for
400-V Inverters with a capacity of 90-kW or 110-kW: 3 kHz.).
* 2. The initial settings for C6-11 are as follows: 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 4.0 kHz, 3: 6.0 kHz, 4: 8.0 kHz.
5-90
Constant Settings by
Function
Frequency Reference ..................................................6-2
Run Command.............................................................6-7
Stopping Methods ........................................................6-9
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ..........6-15
Adjusting Frequency References...............................6-24
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) ..6-30
Improved Operating Efficiency...................................6-32
Machine Protection ....................................................6-38
Continuing Operation.................................................6-55
Inverter Protection .....................................................6-64
Input Terminal Functions............................................6-66
Monitor Constants......................................................6-76
Individual Functions ...................................................6-81
Digital Operator Functions ....................................... 6-132
Options ....................................................................6-142
Frequency Reference
This section explains how to input the frequency reference.
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source
Set constant b1-01 to select the frequency reference source.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Reference
selection
b1-01
H6-01
Reference
Source
Pulse train
input function selection
Pulse Input
Sel
H6-02
Pulse train
input scaling
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4
1
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
0 to 2
0
Set the number of pulses in hertz, taking
the reference to be 100%.
1000 to
1440 Hz
32000
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Openloop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
A
A
A
A
A
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
PI Scaling
Input the Reference Frequency from the Digital Operator
When b1-01 is set to 0, you can input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator.
Input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator's reference frequency setting display.
For details on setting the reference frequency, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes.
-DRIVE-DRIVE-
Rdy
Frequency
RefRef
Frequency
U1-01=
0 000.0
0Hz
U1-01=
0 0.0
0Hz
"0.00Hz"
Fig 6.1 Frequency Setting Display
6-2
Frequency Reference
Inputting the Frequency Reference Using Voltage (Analog Setting)
When b1-01 is set to 1, you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A1 (voltage input),
or control circuit terminal A2 (voltage or current input).
Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only
When inputting a voltage for the master speed frequency reference, input the voltage to control circuit terminal A1.
Inverter
+V Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA
A1 Master speed frequency
reference
(voltage input)
A2 Master speed frequency
reference
(current input)
A3 Auxiliary speed frequency
reference 1
AC Analog common
2 kΩ
Fig 6.2 Voltage Input for Master Speed Frequency Reference
When inputting a current for the master speed frequency reference, input the current to control circuit terminal
A2, input 0 V to terminal A1, set H3-08 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection) to 2
(current input), and set H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection) to 0 (add to terminal A1).
Inverter
4 to 20-mA input
+V Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA
Master speed frequency
A1
reference
(voltage input)
A2 Master speed frequency
reference
(current input)
A3 Auxiliary speed frequency
reference 1
AC Analog common
1
2
V
I
DIP switch
S1
Fig 6.3 Current Input for Master Speed Frequency Reference
Turn ON pin 2 of DIP switch SW1 (toward I), the voltage/current switch, when inputting a current to terminal
A2. Turn OFF pin 2 of DIP switch SW1 (toward V), the voltage/current switch, when inputting a voltage to terminal A2. Set H3-08 to the correct setting for the type of input signal being used.
IMPORTANT
Switch between 2 Step Speeds: Master/Auxiliary Speeds
When switching between the master and auxiliary speeds, connect the master speed frequency reference to
control circuit terminal A1 or A2 and connect the auxiliary speed frequency reference to terminal A3. The reference on terminal A1 or A2 will be used for the Inverter frequency reference when the multi-function input
allocated to multi-speed command 1 is OFF and the reference on terminal A3 will be used when it is ON.
When switching between the master and auxiliary speeds, set H3-05 (Multi-function analog input terminal
6-3
A3) to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference, 2nd step analog) and set on of the multi-function input terminals to
multi-step speed reference 1.
When inputting a current to terminal A2 for the master speed frequency reference, set H3-08 (Multi-function
analog input terminal A2 signal level selection) to 2 (current input), and set H3-09 (Multi-function analog
input terminal A2 function selection) to 0 (add to terminal A1).
Inverter
S5 Multi-step speed
reference 1
+V Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA
Master speed
A1 frequency reference
(voltage input)
2 kΩ
4 to 20 mA
2 kΩ
Master speed
A2 frequency reference
(current input)
A3 Auxiliary speed
frequency reference 1
AC Analog common
Fig 6.4 Switching between Master and Auxiliary Frequencies
Setting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Signals
When b1-01 is set to 4, the pulse train input to control circuit terminal RP is used as the frequency reference.
Set H6-01 (Pulse Train Input Function Selection) to 0 (frequency reference), and then set the 100% reference
pulse frequency to H6-02 (Pulse Train Input Scaling).
Inverter
Pulse Input Specifications
Low level voltage
0.0 to 0.8 V
High level voltage
3.5 to 13.2 V
Heavy duty
30 to 70%
Pulse frequency
0 to 32 kHz
32 kHz max.
3.5 to 13.2 V
Pulse input
RP(Pulse train input terminal)
AC (Analog common)
Fig 6.5 Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Input
6-4
Frequency Reference
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation
With Varispeed-G7 series Inverters, you can change the speed to a maximum of 17 steps, using 16 frequency
references, and one jog frequency reference.
The following example of a multi-function input terminal function shows a 9-step operation using multi-step
references 1 to 3 and jog frequency selection functions.
Related Constants
To switch frequency references, set multi-step speed references 1 to 3 and the jog reference selection in the
multi-function contact inputs.
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-10)
Terminal
Constant Number
Set Value
S5
H1-03
3
Multi-step speed reference 1 (Also used for master speed/auxiliary speed switching when
multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference).)
S6
H1-04
4
Multi-step speed reference 2
S7
H1-05
5
Multi-step speed reference 3
S8
H1-06
6
Jog frequency selection (given priority over multi-step speed reference)
Details
Combining Multi-Function References and Multi-Function Contact Inputs
You can change the selected frequency reference by combining the ON/OFF status of S4 to S7 (multi-function
contact input terminals) to set multi-step speed references 1 to 3 and the jog frequency selection. The following table shows the possible combinations.
TerminalS5
TerminalS6
TerminalS7
TerminalS8
Speed
Multi-step
Speed Reference 1
Multi-step
Speed Reference 2
Multi-step
Speed Reference 3
Jog Frequency Selection
1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 1 d1-01, master speed frequency
2
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 2 d1-02, auxiliary frequency 1
3
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 3 d1-03, auxiliary frequency 2
4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 4 d1-04
5
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Frequency reference 5 d1-05
6
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Frequency reference 6 d1-06
7
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Frequency reference 7 d1-07
8
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Frequency reference 8 d1-08
9
-
-
-
*
ON
Selected Frequency
Jog frequency d1-17
* Terminal S8's jog frequency selection is given priority over multi-step speed references.
6-5
Setting Precautions
When setting analog inputs to step 1 to step 3, observe the following precautions.
• When setting terminal A1's analog input to step 1, set b1-01 to 1, and when setting d1-01 (Frequency Ref-
erence 1) to step 1, set b1-01 to 0.
• When setting terminal A2's analog input to step 2, set H3-09 to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference). When
setting d1-02 (Frequency Reference 2) to step 2, set H3-09 to 1F (do not use analog inputs).
• When setting terminal A3's analog input to step 3, set H3-05 to 3 (auxiliary frequency reference 2). When
setting d1-03(Frequency Reference 3) to step 3, set H3-05 to 1F (Analog input not used).
Connection Example and Time Chart
The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit terminal connection example during a 9-step
operation.
Inverter
S1 Forward/stop
S2 Reverse/stop
S3 External fault
S4 Fault reset
S5 Multi-step speed reference 1
S6 Multi-step speed reference 2
S7 Multi-step speed reference 3
S8 Jog frequency
SC Sequence common
Fig 6.6 Control Circuit Terminal During 9-step Operation
Frequency
reference 8
Frequency
reference 7
Frequency
reference 6
Frequency
reference 5
Frequency
reference 4
Frequency
reference
Frequency reference 2: Auxiliary
speed frequency
Frequency reference 1: Master
speed
frequency
Frequency
reference 3
Jog frequency
Forward/stop
Multi-step speed
reference 1
Multi-step speed
reference 2
Multi-step speed
reference 3
Jog
frequency
selection
Fig 6.7 Multi-step speed reference/Jog Frequency Selection Time Chart
6-6
Run Command
Run Command
This section explains input methods for the run command.
Selecting the Run Command Source
Set constant b1-02 to select the source for the run command.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
b1-02
Display
Operation
method
selection
Run Source
Control Methods
Description
Set the run command input method
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence
input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3
1
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Openloop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Performing Operations Using a Digital Operator
When b1-02 is set to 0, you can perform Inverter operations using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP,
JOG, and FWD/REV). For details on the Digital Operator, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes.
Performing Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals
When b1-02 is set to 1, you can perform Inverter operations using the control circuit terminals.
Performing Operations Using a 2-wire Sequence
The factory setting is set to a 2-wire sequence. When control circuit terminal S1 is set to ON, forward operation will be performed, and when S1 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop. In the same way, when control circuit terminal S2 is set to ON, reverse operation will be performed, and when S2 is turned OFF, the Inverter
will stop.
Forward/stop
Inverter
Reverse/stop
Sequence common
Fig 6.8 2-wire Sequence Wiring Example
6-7
Performing Operations Using a 3-wire Sequence
When any constant from H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S12) is set to 0, terminals S1 and S2 are used for a 3-wire sequence, and the multi-function input terminal that has been set functions as a forward/reverse run command terminal.
When the Inverter is initialized for 3-wire sequence control with A1-03, multi-function input 3 becomes the
input terminal for the forward/reverse run command.
Stop
switch
(NC contact)
Operation switch
(NO contact)
Run command
(operates when ON)
Stop command
(stopped when ON)
Forward/reverse command
(multi-function input)
Sequence input common
Fig 6.9 3-wire Sequence Wiring Example
50 ms min.
Can be either ON or OFF
Run command
OFF
(stopped)
Stop command
Forward/reverse
command
OFF (forward)
ON (reverse)
Motor speed
Stop
Forward
Reverse
Stop
Forward
Fig 6.10 Three-wire Sequence Time Chart
Use a sequence that turns ON terminal S1 for 50 ms or longer for the run command. This will make the run
command self-holding in the Inverter.
INFO
6-8
Stopping Methods
Stopping Methods
This section explains methods of stopping the Inverter.
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Sent
There are four methods of stopping the Inverter when a stop command is sent:
• Deceleration to stop
• Coast to stop
• DC braking stop
• Coast to stop with timer
Set constant b1-03 to select the Inverter stopping method. A DC braking stop and coasting to a stop with a
timer cannot be set for flux vector control.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Stopping
method
selection
b1-03
Stopping
Method
Operation
selection
for setting
E1-09 or
less
b1-05
Zero-Speed
Oper
b2-01
Zero speed
level (DC
injection
braking
starting frequency)
DCInj Start
Freq
b2-02
DC injection braking current
DCInj Current
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3*
0
Used to set the method of operation
when the frequency reference input is
less than the minimum output frequency
(E1-09).
0: Run at frequency reference (E1-09 not
effective).
1: STOP (Frequencies below E1-09 in
the coast to stop state.)
2: Run at min. frequency.
(E1-09)
3: Run at zero speed (Frequencies below
E1-09 are zero)
0 to 3
Used to set the frequency which starts
DC injection braking in units of Hz when
deceleration to stop is selected.
When b2-01 is less than E1-09, E1-09
becomes the DC injection braking starting frequency.
Sets the DC injection braking current as a
percentage of the Inverter rated current.
Description
Select stopping method when stop command is sent.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC injection braking stop (Stops
faster than coast to stop, no
regenerative operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run
commands are disregarded during
deceleration.)
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Openloop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
0
No
No
No
No
A
No
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
0 to
100
50%
No
A
A
A
No
No
6-9
Name
Constant
Number
b2-03
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at start in units of 1 second.
Used to stop coasting motor and restart it.
When the set value is 0, DC injection
braking at start is not performed.
0.00
to
10.00
0.00 s
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at stop in units of 1 second.
Used to prevent coasting after the stop
command is input. When the set value is
0.00, DC injection braking at stop is not
DCInj
Time@Stop performed.
0.00
to
10.00
0.50 s
Display
DC injection braking time at
start
DCInj
Time@Start
b2-04
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
DC injection braking time at
stop
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Openloop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
* The setting range is 0 or 1 for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 2.
Deceleration to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 0, the motor decelerates to a stop according to the deceleration time that has been set. (Factory setting: C1-02 (Deceleration Time
1))
If the output frequency when decelerating to a stop falls below b2-01, the DC injection brake will be applied
using the DC current set in b2-02 only for the time set in b2-04.
For deceleration time settings, refer to page 6-16 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times.
Run command
ON
OFF
Output frequency
Decelerates to stop at
deceleration time
DC injection brake
DC injection brake time
when stopping (b2-04)
Fig 6.11 Deceleration to Stop
6-10
Stopping Methods
The operation after stopping depends on the setting of b1-05 when flux vector control is selected (A1-02 = 3).
Run command OFF
ON
OFF
Frequency reference
via analog input
E1-09
0
b1-05=0
(frequency reference)
Run command turns OFF
and zero speed control start
when motor speed drops to b2-01.
Zero speed
control
Injection brake
time at start
Baseblock b2-03
b1-05=1
(Coast)
b2-04
Injection brake
time at start
Baseblock
Zero speed
control
b2-03
b2-04
b1-05=2
(Run on E1-09) Injection brake
time at start
Baseblock
b1-05=3
(Zero speed)
Baseblock
Frequency reference drops to less
than E1-09 and zero speed control
starts when motor speed drops to
b2-01.
Baseblock
Run command turns OFF
and zero speed control start
when motor speed drops to b2-01.
Zero speed control
Baseblock
b2-04
Run command turns OFF
and zero speed control start
when motor speed drops to b2-01.
b2-03
Injection brake
time at start
Zero speed control
Baseblock b2-03
b2-04
Baseblock
Fig 6.12 Deceleration to Stop (for Flux Vector Control)
Coast to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 1, the Inverter output
voltage is interrupted. The motor coasts to a stop at the deceleration rate that counterbalances damage to the
machine and inertia including the load.
Run command
ON
OFF
Output frequency
Inverter output freqeuencty interrupted.
Fig 6.13 Coast to Stop
6-11
After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) has
elapsed.
INFO
DC Braking Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 2, a wait is made for
the time set in L2-03 (Minimum Baseblock (BB) Time) and then the DC injection brake current set in b2-02 is
sent to the motor to apply a DC injection brake to stop the motor. The DC injection brake time is determined
by the set value in b2-04 and the output frequency when the stop command is input.
DC injection brake time
Run command
ON
OFF
Output frequency
Inverter output voltage interrupted
DC injection brake
b2-04
Minimum baseblock
time (L2-03)
DC injection brake time
10%
Output frequency at
stop command input
100% (maximum output frequency)
Fig 6.14 DC Injection Braking (DB) Stop
Lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) when an overcurrent (OC) occurs during stopping.
INFO
Coast to Stop with Timer
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 3, the Inverter output
is interrupted to coast the motor to a stop. After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until
the time T has elapsed. The time T depends upon the output frequency when the stop command is input and
the deceleration time.
Run command
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Operation wait time T
Deceleration time
(e.g., C1-02)
Output
frequency
Inverter output voltage interrupted
Operation wait time T
Minimum baseblock
time (L2-03)
Output frequency at
stop command input
Minimum output frequency
Fig 6.15 Coast to Stop with Timer
6-12
100% (Maximum output frequency)
Stopping Methods
Using the DC Injection Brake
Set constant b2-03 to apply the DC injection brake voltage to the motor while it is coasting to a stop, to stop
the motor and then restart it.
Set b2-03 to 0 to disable the DC injection brake at start.
Set the DC injection brake current using b2-02. DC injection braking is used at startup for flux vector control
with the current set in E2-03 (Motor no-load current).
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
b2-02
DC injection
braking current
DCInj Current
DC injection
braking time at
start
b2-03
DCInj
Time@Start
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the
Inverter rated current.
0 to
100
50%
Used to set the time to perform
DC injection braking at start in
units of 1 second.
Used to stop coasting motor and
restart it. When the set value is 0,
DC injection braking at start is not
performed.
0.00
to
10.00
0.00 s
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
Inputting the DC Injection Brake Command from Control Circuit Terminals
If you set a multi-function contact input terminal (H1-) to 60 (DC injection brake command), you can
apply the DC injection brake to the motor by turning ON the terminal for which the DC injection brake command has been set when the Inverter is being stopped. DC injection braking is used at startup for flux vector
control.
The time chart for the DC injection brake is shown below.
DC injection brake command
FRUN
Output frequency
DC injection brake
E1-09
(DC injection braking at
startup is used for flux
vector control.)
b2-01
DC injection brake
(DC injection braking at
startup is used for flux
vector control.)
If you input the DC injection brake command from an external terminal, or if the run command
and jog command are input, the DC injection brake will be disabled, and operation will
resume.
Fig 6.16 DC Injection Brake Time Chart
6-13
Changing the DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 6 (DC injection brake current), you can change the DC
injection brake current level using the analog input.
At 10 V input (voltage) or 20 mA input (current), 100% of the Inverter rated current will be applied.
DC injection brake voltage level
Inverter rated current
Fig 6.17 DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input
Using an Emergency Stop
Set a multi-function input terminal (H1-) to 15 or 17 (emergency stop) to decelerate to a stop at the deceleration time set in C1-09. If inputting the emergency stop with an NO contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-) to 15, and if inputting the emergency stop with an NC contact, set the multi-function input
terminal (H1-) to 17.
After the emergency stop command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has
stopped. To cancel the emergency stop, turn OFF the run command and emergency stop command.
Related parameters
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Description
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
10.0 s
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
Emergency
stop time
C1-09
The deceleration time when the
multi-function input “Emergency
(fast) stop” is set to ON.
This function can be used a
Fast Stop Time stopped method when a fault has
been detected.
Setting
Range
0.0 to
6000.0*
* The acceleration and deceleration settings range varies depending on the setting in C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the acceleration/deceleration settings
range is 0.00 to 600.00 (seconds).
6-14
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
This section explains the acceleration and deceleration characteristics of the Inverter.
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
Acceleration time indicates the time taken for the output frequency to climb from 0% to 100%. Deceleration
time indicates the time taken for the output frequency to reduce to 0%. The factory setting of the acceleration
time is C1-01, and the factory setting of the deceleration time is C1-02.
Related Parameters
Name
Constant
Number
C1-01
Display
Acceleration
time 1
Accel Time 1
C1-02
Deceleration
time 1
Decel Time 1
C1-03
Acceleration
time 2
Accel Time 2
C1-04
Deceleration
time 2
Decel Time 2
C1-05
Acceleration
time 3
Accel Time 3
C1-06
Deceleration
time 3
Decel Time 3
C1-07
Acceleration
time 4
Accel Time 4
C1-08
Deceleration
time 4
Decel Time 4
C1-10
Accel/decel
time setting
unit
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Sets the acceleration time to
accelerate from 0 to the maximum
output frequency, in 1-second
units.
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Sets the deceleration time to
decelerate from the maximum
output frequency to 0, in 1-second
units.
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
The acceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/decel
time 1” is set to ON.
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
The deceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/decel
time 1” is set to ON.
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
The deceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/decel
time 2” is set to ON.
No
A
A
A
A
A
The acceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/decel
time 1” and “accel/decel time 2”
are set to ON.
No
A
A
A
A
A
The deceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/decel
time 1” and “accel/decel time 2”
are set to ON.
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
The acceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/decel
time 2” is set to ON.
0: 0.01-second units
1: 0.1-second units
0.0 to
6000.0*
0 or 1
10.0 s
1
Acc/Dec Units
6-15
Name
Constant
Number
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the frequency for automatic
acceleration/deceleration switching.
Below set frequency: Accel/decel
time 4
Above set frequency: Accel/decel
time 1
The multi-function input “accel/
decel time 1” or “accel/decel time
2” take priority.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
0.00 to
2.50
Display
Accel/decel
time switching frequency
C1-11
Acc/Dec SW
Freq
C2-01
Description
Setting
Range
S-curve characteristic time
at acceleration
start
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
SCrv Acc @
Start
C2-02
S-curve characteristic time
at acceleration
end
SCrv Acc @
End
C2-03
S-curve characteristic time
at deceleration
start
SCrv Dec @
Start
C2-04
S-curve characteristic time
at deceleration
end
All sections of the S-curve characteristic time are set in seconds
units.
When the S-curve characteristic
time is set, the accel/decel times
will increase by only half of the Scurve characteristic times at start
and end.
Run command
Output frequency ON
C2-02
C2-01
OFF
C2-03
C2-04
Time
SCrv Dec @
End
* The acceleration and deceleration settings range varies depending on the setting in C1-10. When C1-10 is set to 0, the acceleration/deceleration settings
range is 0.00 to 600.00 (seconds).
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Units
Set the acceleration/deceleration time units using C1-10. Constant C1-10 is set to 1 at the factory.
Set value
Details
0
The acceleration/deceleration time settings range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.01 s.
1
The acceleration/deceleration time settings range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.1 s.
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal
Commands
Using the Inverter, you can set four acceleration times and four deceleration times. When the multi-function
input terminals (H1-) are set to 7 (acceleration/deceleration time selection 1) and 1A (acceleration/deceleration time selection 2), you can switch the acceleration/deceleration time even during operation by combining the ON/OFF status of the terminals.
The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.
6-16
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Acceleration/DeceleraAcceleration/Deceleration Time Selection 1 Ter- tion Time Selection 2 Terminal
minal
Acceleration Time
Deceleration Time
OFF
OFF
C1-01
C1-02
ON
OFF
C1-03
C1-04
OFF
ON
C1-05
C1-06
ON
ON
C1-07
C1-08
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Automatically
Use this setting when you want to switch acceleration/deceleration time automatically using the set frequency.
When the output frequency reaches the set value in C1-11, the Inverter switches the acceleration/deceleration
time automatically as shown in the following diagram.
Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0 Hz. If C1-11 is set to 0.0 Hz, the function will be disabled.
Output frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration
time
switching frequency
(C1-11)
C1-07 rate C1-01 rate
C1-02 rate C1-08 rate
When output frequency ≥ C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 1 (C1-01, C1-02).
When output frequency < C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 4 (C1-07, C1-08).
Fig 6.18 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency
Adjusting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 5 (acceleration/deceleration time gain), you can adjust the
acceleration/deceleration time using terminal A2's input voltage.
The Inverter's acceleration time when the acceleration time has been set in C1-01 is as follows:
Acceleration time = C1-01 set value x acceleration/deceleration time gain
Acceleration/deceleration time gain (set value: 5)
(Acceleration/deceleration gain from 1 to
10 V) = 10 V/Input voltage (V) x 10 (%)
Fig 6.19 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Gain Using an Analog Input
6-17
Entering S-curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time
By performing acceleration and deceleration using an S-curve pattern, you can reduce shock when starting and
stopping the machine.
Using the Inverter, you can set an S-curve characteristic time for each of the following: Acceleration start
time, deceleration start time, acceleration end time, and deceleration end time.
INFO
Set the S-curve characteristic time to lengthen acceleration/deceleration time as follows:
Acceleration time = Selected acceleration time + (Acceleration start time S-curve characteristic time +
Acceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / 2
Deceleration time = Selected deceleration time + (Deceleration start time S-curve characteristic time +
Deceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / 2
Setting Example
The S-curve characteristic when switching operation (forward/reverse) is shown in the following diagram.
Forward
Reverse
C2-02
Output frequency
C2-03
C2-04
C2-01
C2-04
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
Fig 6.20 S-curve Characteristic during Operation Switching
6-18
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function)
The dwell function stores the output frequency when starting or stopping heavy loads. By temporarily storing
the output frequency, you can prevent the motor from stalling. When using the dwell function, you must select
a deceleration stop. Set b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) to 0.
Related Parameters
Constant
Number
b6-01
Name
Display
Description
Dwell frequency at
start
Dwell Ref
@Start
b6-02
b6-03
Dwell time
at start
Dwell frequency at
stop
Dwell time
at stop
Dwell Time
@Stop
b6-01 b6-03
b6-02
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
0.0 to
10.0
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
OFF
Output frequency
Dwell
Time@Start
Dwell Ref
@Stop
b6-04
Run command ON
Setting
Range
Time
b6-04
The dwell function is used to output
frequency temporarily when driving a
motor with a heavy load.
6-19
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration (Stall Prevention
During Acceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if a heavy load is placed
on the motor, or sudden rapid acceleration is performed.
If you set L3-01 to 1 (enabled) and the Inverter output current exceeds the -15% level of the set value in L302, the acceleration rate will begin to slow down. When L3-02 is exceeded, acceleration will stop.
If you set L3-01 to 2 (optimum adjustment), the motor current accelerates to the value set in L3-02. With this
setting, the acceleration time setting is ignored.
Related Parameters
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Stall prevention selection
during accel
L3-01
StallP Accel
Sel
6-20
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (Acceleration as set.
With a heavy load, the motor
may stall.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration stopped
when L3-02 level is exceeded.
Acceleration starts again when
the current is returned.)
2: Intelligent acceleration mode
(Using the L3-02 level as a
basis, acceleration is
automatically adjusted. Set
acceleration time is
disregarded.)
0 to 2
1
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
No
No
L3-02
Stall preven- Effective when L3-01 is set to 1 or
tion level dur- 2.
ing accel
Set as a percentage of Inverter rated
current.
StallP Accel Usually setting is not necessary. The
factory setting reduces the set valLvl
ues when the motor stalls.
0 to 200
150%
No
A
A
A
No
No
L3-03
Stall preven- Sets the lower limit for stall prevention limit dur- tion during acceleration, as a pering accel
centage of the Inverter rated current,
0 to 100
when operation is in the frequency
StallP CHP
range above E1-06.
Lvl
Usually setting is not necessary.
50%
No
A
A
A
No
No
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Time Chart
The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3-01 is set to 1.
Output current
Stall level during
acceleration
Time
Output frequency
Output frequency is controlled
to prevent the motor stalling.
Time
Fig 6.21 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration
Setting Precautions
• If the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity, or if the motor is operated using the fac-
tory settings, resulting in the motor stalling, lower the set value of L3-02.
• If using the motor in the constant output range, L3-02 will be automatically lowered to prevent stalling.
L3-03 is the limit value to prevent the stall prevention level in the constant output range from being
reduced more than necessary.
• Set the constants as a percent taking the inverter rated voltage to be 100%.
Stall prevention level during
acceleration
L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration)
L3-02 x L3-03 (Stall Prevention Limit during Acceleration)
E1-06
Base Frequency (FA)
Output frequency
Fig 6.22 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration
6-21
Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration (Stall Prevention During
Deceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Deceleration function makes the rate of deceleration more gentle to suppress
increases in DC bus voltage when the DC bus voltage exceeds the set value during motor deceleration.
This function automatically lengthens the deceleration time with respect to the bus voltage, even if the deceleration time has been set to a considerably small value.
If L3-04 is set to 1 or 2, when the main circuit DC voltage approaches the stall prevention level during deceleration, deceleration stops, and when deceleration falls below the level, is restarted. Using this operation,
deceleration time is automatically lengthened. If L3-04 is set to 1, deceleration time returns to the set value,
and if L3-04 is set to 2, deceleration is automatically adjusted to a faster deceleration time within the range of
the stall prevention level during deceleration.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Stall prevention selection
during decel
L3-04
StallP Decel
Sel
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If
deceleration time is too short, a
main circuit overvoltage may
result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is
stopped when the main circuit
voltage exceeds the overvoltage
level. Deceleration restarts when
voltage is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration mode
(Deceleration rate is
automatically adjusted so that in
Inverter can decelerate in the
shortest possible time. Set
deceleration time is
disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking Resistor
Unit)
When a braking option (Braking
Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit,
Braking Unit) is used, always set to
0 or 3.
0 to 3*
1
No
* The setting range is 0 to 2 for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 2.
6-22
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Setting Example
An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3-04 is set to 1 as shown below.
Output frequency
Deceleration time controlled to
prevent overvoltage
Time
Deceleration time
(set value)
Fig 6.23 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Operation
Setting Precautions
• The stall prevention level during deceleration differs depending on the Inverter capacity. Refer to the fol-
lowing table for details.
Inverter Capacity
200 V class
400 V class
Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration (V)
380
E1-01 ≥ 400 V
760
E1-01 < 400 V
660
• When using the braking option (braking resistor, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units), be sure to set
constant L3-04 to 0 or 3.
• To decelerate at a shorter time than the deceleration time set when L3-04 is set to 0 with the braking option
enabled, set L3-04 to 3.
• The setting of L3-04 is ignored for flux vector control or open-loop vector control 2.
6-23
Adjusting Frequency References
This section explains methods of adjusting frequency references.
Adjusting Analog Frequency References
Gain and bias are among the constants used to adjust analog inputs.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
H3-01
Display
Signal level
selection (terminal A1)
Term A1 Signal
H3-02
H3-03
H3-04
Gain (terminal
A1)
Terminal A1
Gain
Bias (terminal
A1)
Terminal A1
Bias
Signal level
selection (terminal A3)
Term A3 Signal
H3-05
Multi-function
analog input
(terminal A3)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
Sets the frequency when 10 V is
input, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
1000.0
Sets the frequency when 0 V is
input, as a percentage of the maximum frequency.
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
Sets the function.
0 to 1F
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
Sets the input gain (level) when
terminal 16 is 10V.
Set according to the 100% value
selected from H3-05.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
Sets the input gain (level) when
terminal 16 is 10V.
Set according to the 100% value
selected from H3-05.
-100.0 to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
0 to 2
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
Description
0: 0 to ±10V
[11-bit + polarity (positive/
negative) input]
1: 0 to ±10V
0: 0 to ±10V
[11-bit + polarity (positive/
negative) input]
1: 0 to ±10V
Terminal A3
Sel
H3-06
H3-07
Gain (terminal
A3)
Terminal A3
Gain
Bias (terminal
A3)
Terminal A3
Bias
0: Limit negative frequency
settings for gain and bias
settings to 0.
1: Do not limit negative
frequency settings for gain
and bias settings to 0 (i.e.,
allow reverse operation).
2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
Term A2 Signal Switch current and voltage input
using the switch on the control
panel.
Multi-function
analog input
terminal A2
signal level
selection
H3-08
6-24
Adjusting Frequency References
Name
Constant
Number
H3-09
Display
Multi-function
analog input
terminal A2
function selection
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Select multi-function analog input
function for terminal A2.
0 to 1F
0
Sets the input gain (level) when
terminal 14 is 10 V (20 mA).
Set according to the 100% value
for the function set for H3-09.
0.0 to
1000.0
Sets the input gain (level) when
terminal 14 is 0 V (4 mA).
Set according to the 100% value
for the function set for H3-09.
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
0.00 to
2.00
0.03
s
No
A
A
A
A
A
Terminal A2
Sel
H3-10
H3-11
H3-12
Gain (terminal
A2)
Terminal A2
Gain
Bias (terminal
A2)
Terminal A2
Bias
Analog input
filter time constant
Sets primary delay filter time constant in seconds for the two analog input terminal (A1 and A2).
Filter Avg Time Effective for noise control etc.
Adjusting Analog Frequency Reference Using Constants
The frequency reference is input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage and current.
If using frequency reference terminal A1 as an input terminal, perform adjustments using constants H3-02 and
H3-03. If using multi-function analog input terminal A2 as a frequency reference terminal, perform adjustments using H3-10 and H3-11.
Adjustment can be made using H3-06 and H3-07 when multi-function analog input terminal A3 is used as a
frequency reference terminal.
Frequency reference
Frequency reference
(H3-06)
Terminal A2 input
voltage (current)
Terminal A1 (A3)
input voltage
(H3-07)
Terminal A1, A3 input
Terminal A2 input
Fig 6.24 Terminals A1 and A2 Inputs
6-25
Adjusting Frequency Gain Using an Analog Input
When H3-09 or H3-05 is set to 1 (frequency gain), you can adjust the frequency gain using the analog input
terminal A2 or A3.
Frequency gain
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.25 Frequency Gain Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)
The frequency gain for terminal A1 is the sum of H3-02 and terminal A2 gain. For example, when H3-02 is set
to 100% and terminal A2 is set to 5 V, the terminal A1 frequency reference will be 50%.
Frequency reference
100%
H3-02
50%
Terminal A1 input voltage
0
10 V
Setting Precautions
H3-05 cannot be set to 0.
Adjusting Frequency Bias Using an Analog Input
When constant H3-09 or H3-05 is set to 0 (add to terminal A1), the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2 or
A3 input voltage is added to A1 as a bias.
Frequency bias
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2 or A3 input level
Fig 6.26 Frequency Bias Adjustment (Terminal A2 or A3 Input)
For example, if H3-02 is 100%, H3-03 is 0%, and terminal A2 is set to 1 V, the frequency reference from
terminal A1 when 0 V is input to A1 will be 10%.
6-26
Adjusting Frequency References
Frequency reference
H3-02
10%
Bias
Terminal A1 input voltage
0V
10 V
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function)
The jump frequency function operates the motor while avoiding resonance caused by characteristic frequencies in the machinery.
This function is effective in creating a frequency reference dead band.
During constant-speed operation, operation within the jump frequency range is prohibited. Smooth operation
still used during acceleration and deceleration, i.e., jumps are not performed.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
d3-01
Display
Jump frequency 1
Jump Freq 1
d3-02
Jump frequency 2
Jump Freq 2
d3-03
Jump frequency 3
Jump Freq 3
d3-04
Jump frequency width
Jump Bandwidth
Description
Setting
Range
Set the center values of the jump
frequencies in Hz.
This function is disabled by setting the jump frequency to 0 Hz.
Always ensure that the following
applies:
d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03
Operation in the jump frequency
range is prohibited but during
acceleration and deceleration,
speed changes smoothly without
jump.
0.0 to
400.0
Sets the jump frequency bandwidth in Hz.
The jump frequency will be the
jump frequency ± d3-04.
0.0 to
20.0
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 Hz
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
1.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
The relationship between the output frequency and the jump frequency reference is as follows:
6-27
Output frequency
Frequency reference descending
Jump frequency width d3-04
Frequency
reference
ascending
Jump
frequency
Jump
width d3-04
frequency
width d3-04
Jump frequency reference
Jump
frequency
3 (d3-03)
Jump
frequency
2 (d3-02)
Jump
frequency
1 (d3-01)
Fig 6.27 Jump Frequency
Setting Jump Frequency Reference Using an Analog Input
When constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) is set to A (jump frequency), you can change the jump frequency using the terminal A2 input level.
Jump frequency
Max. output frequency
E1-04
0V
(4 mA)
Multi-function analog input
10 V terminal A2 or A3 input level
(20 mA)
Fig 6.28 Jump Frequency Setting Using an Analog Input
Setting Precautions
• Set the jump frequency according to the following formula: d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03 > Analog input.
• When constants d3-01 to d3-03 are set to 0 Hz, the jump frequency function is disabled.
6-28
Adjusting Frequency References
Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs
The frequency reference can be adjusted when b1-01 (Reference Selection) is set to 4 (Pulse Train Input). Set
the pulse frequency in constant H6-02 to 100% reference, and then adjust the gain and bias accordingly using
H6-03 and H6-04.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
H6-01
Pulse train
input function selection
Pulse Input
Sel
H6-02
Pulse train
input scaling
PI Scaling
H6-03
H6-04
H6-05
Pulse train
input gain
Pulse Input
Gain
Pulse train
input bias
Pulse Input
Bias
Pulse train
input filter
time
PI Filter Time
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 2
0
Set the number of pulses in hertz,
taking the reference to be 100%.
1000 to
32000
Set the input gain level as a percent
when the pulse train set in H6-02 is
input.
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
1440 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
Set the input bias when the pulse
train is 0.
-100.0 to
100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
Set the pulse train input primary
delay filter time constant in seconds.
0.00 to
2.00
0.10
s
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
Description
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
The following diagram shows the method for adjusting the frequency reference using pulse inputs.
Gain and bias
Filter
RP
Cycle
measurement
Pulse
=0
H6-03
=1
1
1+sT
H6-04
H6-05
0%
100%
Master speed
frequency
PID feedback
PID target value
=2
H6-01
Scaling using H6-02
Fig 6.29 Frequency Reference Adjustments Using Pulse Train Inputs
6-29
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function)
This section explains how to limit the motor speed.
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency
If you do not want the motor to rotate above a given frequency, use constant d2-01.
Set the upper limit value of the Inverter output frequency as a percent, taking E1-04 (Maximum Output Frequency) to be 100%.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
d2-01
Display
Frequency reference upper
limit
Ref Upper
Limit
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the output frequency upper
limit as a percent, taking the max.
output frequency to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0%
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
Limiting Minimum Frequency
If you do not want the motor to rotate at below a given frequency, use constants d2-02 or d2-03.
There are two methods of limiting the minimum frequency, as follows:
• Adjust the minimum level for all frequencies.
• Adjust the minimum level for the master speed frequency (i.e., the lower levels of the jog frequency, multi-
step speed frequency, and auxiliary frequency will not be adjusted).
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
d2-02
Display
Frequency reference lower
limit
Ref Lower
Limit
d2-03
6-30
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the output frequency lower
limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
Master speed
reference lower Set the master speed reference
lower limit as a percent, taking
limit
the max. output frequency to be
Ref1 Lower
100%.
Limit
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function)
Adjusting Frequency Lower Limit Using an Analog Input
If you set constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multifunction Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 9 (output frequency lower level), you can adjust the
frequency lower level using the terminal A2 input level.
Output frequency lower level
Max. output frequency
E1-04
0V
(4 mA)
Multi-function analog input
10 V terminal A2 or A3 input level
(20 mA)
Fig 6.30 Output Frequency Lower Level for Multi-function Analog Input
If constant d2-02 and terminal A2 output frequency lower level have been set at the same time, the larger set
value will become the frequency lower limit.
INFO
6-31
Improved Operating Efficiency
This section explains functions for improving motor operating efficiency.
Reducing Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function)
When the load is large, the amount of motor slip also grows large and the motor speed decreases. The slip
compensation function controls the motor at a constant speed, regardless of changes in load. When the motor
is operating at the rated load, constant E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) × the frequency in constant C3-01 is added to
the output frequency.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Description
Factory
Setting
0.0 to
2.5
1.0*
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
A
No
A
A
A
No
A
No
A
No
No
Slip compensation gain
C3-01
Used to improve speed accuracy
when operating with a load.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust this constant at the following times.
Slip Comp Gain • When actual speed is low,
increase the set value.
• When actual speed is high,
decrease the set value.
Setting
Range
Change
during
Operation
Slip compensation primary
delay time
C3-02
Slip Comp
Time
C3-03
Slip compensation limit
Slip Comp
Limit
Slip compensation selection
during regeneration
C3-04
Slip Comp
Regen
C3-05
Output voltage
limit operation
selection
Output V limit
Slip compensation primary delay
time is set in ms units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust this constant at the following times.
• Reduce the setting when slip
compensation responsive is
slow.
• When speed is not stabilized,
increase the setting.
Sets the slip compensation limit
as a percentage of motor rated
slip.
0 to
10000
200 ms
*
0 to
250
200%
No
A
No
A
No
No
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When the slip compensation during regeneration function has
been activated, as regeneration
capacity increases momentarily, it
may be necessary to use a braking
option (braking resistor, Braking
Resistor Unit or Braking Unit.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
No
A
No
No
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (The motor flux will
be lowered automatically
when the output voltage
become saturated.)
0 or 1
0
No
No
No
A
A
A
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.)
6-32
Improved Operating Efficiency
Adjusting Slip Compensation Gain
You can switch the C3-01 constant settings as shown below by changing the control method.
• V/f control without PG: 0.0
• Open-loop vector control: 1.0
• Flux vector control: 1.0
Set C3-01 to 1.0 to compensate the rated slip set using the rated torque output status.
Adjust the slip compensation gain using the following procedure.
1. Set E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) and E2-03 (Motor No-load Current) correctly.
You can calculate the motor rated slip from the values on the motor nameplate using the following formula.
Amount of motor rated slip (Hz) = Motor rated frequency (Hz) - No. of rated rotations (min−1.) × No. of
motor poles / 120
Set the values for rated voltage, rated frequency, and no-load current in the motor unladen current. The
motor rated slip is set automatically in the vector control using autotuning.
2. In V/f control, set C3-01 to 1.0. Setting this constant to 0.0 disables slip compensation.
3. Apply a load, and measure the speed to adjust the slip compensation gain. Adjust the slip compensation
gain by 0.1 at a time. If the speed is less than the target value, increase the slip compensation gain, and if
the speed is greater than the target value, reduce the slip compensation gain.
For flux vector control, the slip compensation gain is used as the motor temperature compensation gain. When
the motor temperate increases, the motor’s internal constant increases, resulting in an increase in slip. If C3-01
is set, the amount of slip is adjusted as the temperature rises. Set C3-01 if the amount of torque varies with the
temperature when using torque control or a torque limit. The larger the value of C3-01, the larger the compensation.
Adjusting Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant
Set the slip compensation primary delay time constant in ms.
You can switch the factory settings as follows by changing the control method.
• V/f control without PG: 2000 ms
• Open-loop vector control: 200 ms
Normally, there is no need to make these settings. When the slip compensation response is low, lower the set
value. When the speed is unstable, increase the set value.
Adjusting Slip Compensation Limit
Set the upper limit for the slip compensation amount as a percent, taking the motor rated slip amount as 100%.
If the speed is lower than the target value but does not change even when you adjust the slip compensation
gain, the motor may have reached the slip compensation limit. Increase the limit, and check the speed again.
Make the settings, however, to make sure that the value of the slip compensation limit and reference frequency
does not exceed the tolerance of the machine.
The following diagram shows the slip compensation limit for the constant torque range and fixed output range.
6-33
Slip compensation limit
Output frequency
E1-06: Base frequency
E1-04: Maximum output frequency
Fig 6.31 Slip Compensation Limit
Selecting Slip Compensation Function During Regeneration
Set whether to enable or disable the slip compensation function during regeneration.
If the slip compensation function operates during regeneration, you might have to use the braking option
(braking resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, and Braking Unit) to momentarily increase the regenerative amount.
Selecting Output Voltage Limit Operation
If output voltage saturation occurs while the output voltage limit operation is disabled, the output current will
not change, but torque control accuracy will be lost. If torque control accuracy is required, change the settings
to enable the output voltage limit operation.
If the output voltage limit operation is enabled, motor magnetic flux current is controlled automatically, and
torque control accuracy is maintained to limit the output voltage references. Consequently, the output current
will increase by approximately 10% maximum (with rated load) compared with when the output voltage limit
operation is disabled, so check the Inverter current margin.
Setting Precautions
• If using the device at medium to low speed only, if the power supply voltage is 10% or more higher than
the motor rated voltage, or if the torque control accuracy at high speeds is insufficient, it is not necessary to
change the output voltage limit operation.
• If the power supply voltage is too low compared with the motor rated voltage, torque control accuracy may
be lost even if the output voltage limit operation is enabled.
Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Startup and Low-speed Operation (Torque Compensation)
The torque compensation function detects that the motor load has increased, and increases the output torque.
V/f control calculates and adjusts the motor primary loss voltage according to the output voltage (V), and
compensates for insufficient torque at startup and during low-speed operation. Calculate the compensation
voltage as follows: Motor primary voltage loss × constant C4-01.
Vector control separates the motor excitation current and the torque current by calculating the motor primary
current, and controlling each of the two separately.
Calculate the torque current as follows: Calculated torque reference × C4-01
6-34
Improved Operating Efficiency
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
C4-01
Display
Description
Torque comSets torque compensation gain as
pensation gain a ratio.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
• When the cable is long;
increase the set value.
• When the motor capacity is
smaller than the Inverter capacity (Max. applicable motor
capacity), increase the set values.
Torq Comp
• When the motor is oscillating,
Gain
decrease the set values.
Adjust the output current range at
minimum speed rotation so that it
does not exceed the Inverter rated
output current.
Do not alter the torque compensation gain from its default (1.00)
when using the open-loop vector
control method.
Torque compensation primary delay
time constant
C4-02
Torq Comp
Time
The torque compensation delay
time is set in ms units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
• When the motor is oscillating,
increase the set values.
• When the responsiveness of the
motor is low, decrease the set
values.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
0 to
10000
20 ms
*
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
A
A
A
No
No
No
A
A
A
No
No
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.)
Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain
Normally, there is no need to make this adjustment. Do not adjust the torque compensation gain when using
open-loop vector control.
Adjust the torque compensation gain using V/f control in the following circumstances.
• If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
• If the (maximum applicable) motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity, increase the set value.
• If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.
Adjust this constant so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated
output current range.
Adjusting the Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant
Set the torque compensation function primary delay in ms.
You can switch the factory settings as follows by changing the control method settings:
• V/f control without PG: 200 ms
• V/f control with PG: 200 ms
• Open-loop vector control: 20 ms
6-35
Normally, there is no need to make this setting. Adjust the constant as shown below.
• If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.
• If the motor response is low, decrease the set value.
Hunting-prevention Function
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load. This function can be used in V/f without PG and V/f with PG.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Hunting-prevention function
disabled
1: Hunting-prevention function
enabled
The hunting-prevention function
suppresses hunting when the
motor is operating with a light
load.
This function is enabled in V/f
control method only.
If high response is to be given priority over vibration suppression,
disable the hunting-prevention
function.
0 or 1
1
Set the hunting-prevention gain
multiplication factor.
Normally, there is no need to
make this setting.
Make the adjustments as follows:
• If vibration occurs with light
load, increase the setting.
Hunt Prev Gain • If the motor stalls, reduce the
setting.
If the setting is too large, the voltage will be too suppressed and the
motor may stall.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
Display
Hunting-prevention function selection
N1-01
Hunt Prev
Select
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
No
No
No
No
A
A
No
No
No
Hunting-prevention gain
N1-02
6-36
Improved Operating Efficiency
Stabilizing Speed (Speed Feedback Detection Function)
The speed feedback detection control (AFR) function measures the stability of the speed when a load is suddenly applied, by calculating the amount of fluctuation of the torque current feedback value, and compensating the output frequency with the amount of fluctuation.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Speed feedback detection
control (AFR)
gain
N2-01
AFR Gain
N2-02
Speed feedback detection
control (AFR)
time constant
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the internal speed feedback
detection control gain using the
multiplication function.
Normally, there is no need to
make this setting.
Adjust this constant as follows:
• If hunting occurs, increase the
set value.
• If response is low, decrease the
set value.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a
time, while checking the
response.
0.00 to
10.00
1.00
Set the time constant to decide the
rate of change in the speed feedback detection control.
0 to
2000
50 ms
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
No
A
No
No
No
No
No
A
No
No
AFR Time
6-37
Machine Protection
This section explains functions for protecting the machine.
Reducing Noise and Leakage Current
The switching frequency of the Inverter’s output transistor can be changed to reduce carrier noise and leakage
current from the motor.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
C6-02
Name
Display
Carrier frequency
selection
CarrierFreq
Sel
C6-03
Carrier
frequency
upper limit
CarrierFreq
Max
C6-04
Carrier
frequency
lower limit
Description
Setting
Range
Select carrier wave fixed pattern.
Select F to enable detailed settings using constants C6-03 to C6-05.
1 to F
Set the carrier frequency upper limit and
lower limit in kHz units.
The carrier frequency gain is set as follows:
With the vector control method, the upper
limit of the carrier frequency is fixed in C603.
Carrier frequency
CarrierFreq
Min
C6-05
Carrier frequency proportional
gain
CarrierFreq
Gain
C6-11
Carrier frequency
selection for
open-loop
vector control 2
Carrier Freq
Sel
*
*
*
*
*
6-38
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Factory
Setting
6
*2
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
Q
Q
Q
A
No *5
No
A
A
A
A
No
No
A
A
No
No
No
A
A
No
No
No
No
No
*5
No*5
No
*5
2.0 to
15.0
15.0
kHz
*3 *4
*2
0.4 to
15.0
15.0
kHz
*3 *4
*2
00 to
99
00
No
4
No
Output frequency x (C6-05) x K
Output
frequency
(Max. output frequency)
K is a coefficient that depends on the setting
of C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K = 2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1
Select the carrier frequency when open-loop
vector control 2 is used.
1: 2 kHz
2: 4 kHz
3: 6 kHz
4: 8 kHz
*4
1 to 4
The setting range depends on the control method of the Inverter.
The factory setting depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
This constant can be monitored or set only when 1 is set for C6-01 and F is set for C6-02.
Displayed in Quick Programming Mode when motor 2 is set for a multi-function input.
*5
Q
Machine Protection
Control Mode and Carrier Frequency Settings
Carrier frequency settings are restricted as listed in the following table according to the control mode selection.
Control Mode
V/f control with or without a PG
Open-loop vector control 1 or
Flux vector control
Open-loop vector control 2
Carrier Frequency
1: 2.0 kHz
2: 5.0 kHz
3: 8.0 kHz
4: 10.0 kHz
5: 12.5 kHz
6: 15.0 kHz
F: Any setting*
Detailed settings are available in C6-03, C6-04, and C6-05.
1: 2.0 kHz
2: 5.0 kHz
3: 8.0 kHz
4: 10.0 kHz
5: 12.5 kHz
6: 15.0 kHz
F: Any setting*
The upper limit of the carrier frequency is determined by C6-03.
1: 2.0 kHz
2: 4.0 kHz
3: 6.0 kHz
4: 8.0 kHz
* The upper limit of the carrier frequency depends on the Inverter capacity.
Carrier Frequency Setting Precautions
When selecting the carrier frequency, observe the following precautions.
• Adjust the carrier frequency according to the cases shown below.
If the wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long: Set the carrier frequency low. (Use the following
values as guidelines.)
Wiring Length
50 m or less
100 m or less
Over 100 m
C6-02 (carrier frequency
selection) setting
1 to 6 (15 kHz)
1 to 4 (10 kHz)
1 to 2 (5 kHz)
If speed and torque are inconsistent at low speeds: Set the carrier frequency low.
If leakage current from the Inverter is large: Set the carrier frequency low.
If metallic noise from the motor is large: Set the carrier frequency high.
• When using V/f control or V/f control with PG, you can vary the carrier frequency according to the output
frequency, as shown in the following diagram, by setting C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Upper Limit), C6-04
(Carrier Frequency Lower Limit), and C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain).
6-39
Carrier Frequency
C6-03
Output frequency × C6-05
× K*
C6-04
* K is the coefficient determined by the set
value in C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K=3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K=2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K=1
Output frequency
E1-04
Max. Output Frequency
Fig 6.32
• With vector control, the carrier frequency is fixed to the Carrier Frequency Upper Limit in C6-03 if user-
set or by the carrier frequency set in C6-02.
• To fix the carrier frequency, set C6-03 and C6-04 to the same value, or set C6-05 to 0.
• If the settings are as shown below, OPE11 (Constant setting error) will occur.
If Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain (C6-05) > 6 and C6-03 < C6-04.
• Depending on the carrier frequency setting, the Inverter’s overload level may be reduced. Even when the
overload current falls to below 150%, OL2 (Inverter overload) will be detected. The Inverter overload current reduction level is shown below.
Overload reduction level
100%
80%
200 V, 22 kW
200V級22kW
50%
10kHz
0
15kHz
Carrier frequency
Fig 6.33 Overload Reduction Level for V/f Control, V/f Control with PG, Open-loop Vector Control 1,
and Flux Vector Control
Overload reduction level
100%
87%
200 V, 30 to 75 kW
50%
0
4kHz
8kHz
Carrier frequency
Fig 6.34 Overload Reduction Level for Open-loop Vector Control 2
6-40
Machine Protection
Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function)
The motor torque limit function is enabled only with open-loop torque control.
In the open-loop vector control method, the user-set value is applied to the torque limit by calculating internally the torque output by the motor. Enable this function if you do not want a torque above a specified
amount to be applied to the load, or if you do not want a regeneration value above a specified amount to occur.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
L7-01
Name
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 300
200%
0 to 300
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
No
A
A
A
200%
No
No
No
A
A
A
0 to 300
200%
No
No
No
A
A
A
0 to 300
200%
No
No
No
A
A
A
Description
Forward
drive torque
limit
Control Methods
Torq Limit
Fwd
L7-02
Reverse
drive torque
limit
Sets the torque limit value as a percentage
of the motor rated torque.
Four individual regions can be set.
Torq Limit
Rev
L7-03
Forward
regenerative
torque limit
Output torque
Positive torque
Reverse
Regenerative
state
Torq Lmt
Fwd Rgn
L7-04
No. of
motor
rotations
Regenerative
state
Forward
Negative torque
Reverse
regenerative
torque limit
Torq Lmt
Rev Rgn
Multi-function Analog Input (H3-05, H3-09)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
Contents (100%)
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
10
Positive torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
11
Negative torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
12
Regenerative torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
15
Positive/negative torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note The forward torque limit is the limit value when the analog input signal generates forward torque. This torque limit setting is enabled even when the
analog input signal generates forward torque while the motor is operating (regeneration).
Setting the Torque Limit in Constants
Using L7-01 to L7-04, you can set individually four torque limits in the following directions: Forward drive,
reverse drive, forward regeneration, and reverse regeneration.
6-41
Set the Torque Limit Value Using an Analog Input
You can change the analog input level torque limit value by setting the torque limit in multi-function analog
input terminals A2 and A3.
The analog input terminal signal level is factory-set as follows:
Multi-function analog input terminal A2: 4 to 20 mA
Multi-function analog input terminal A3: 0 to 10
The following diagram shows the relationship between the torque limits.
Output torque
Positive
Positive/negative torque limits
Forward torque limit
Regenerative torque limit
No. of motor rotations
Forward operation
Reverse operation
Regenerative torque limit
Negative torque limit
Positive/negative torque limits
Negative
Fig 6.35 Torque Limit by Analog Input
Setting Torque Limits Using Constants and an Analog Input
The following block diagram shows the relationship between torque limit using constants and torque limit
using an analog input.
Multi-function analog input
Forward torque limit
Terminal (set value = 10)
A2 or A3
Negative torque limit
(set value = 11)
Regenerative torque limit
(set value = 12)
Positive/negative torque limit
(set value = 15)
Positive forward drive
torque
Reverse positive regenerative torque
Forward negative regenerative torque
Min: Minimum value priority circuit
Reverse
drive
reverse
torque
Forward torque limit
(L7-01)
Constants
Forward torque limit
Reverse torque limit
(L7-02)
Forward regenerative torque
limit (L7-03)
Reverse torque limit
Reverse regenerative torque
limit (L7-04)
Reverse regenerative
torque limit
Forward regenerative
torque limit
175% of Inverter rated current
Fig 6.36 Torque Limit Using Constants and an Analog Input
6-42
Machine Protection
Setting Precautions
• When the torque limit function is operating, control and compensation of the motor speed is disabled
because torque control is given priority.
• When using the torque limit to raise and lower loads, do not carelessly lower the torque limit value, as this
may result in the motor falling or slipping.
• Torque limits using an analog input are the upper limit value (during 10 V or 20 mA input) of 100% of the
motor rated torque. To make the torque limit value during 10 V or 20 mA input 150% of the rated torque,
set the input terminal gain to 150.0 (%). Adjust the gain for multi-function analog input terminal A2 using
H3-10 and for multi-function analog input terminal A3 using H3-06.
• The torque limit accuracy is ±5% at the output frequency of 10 Hz or above. When output frequency is less
than 10 Hz, accuracy is lowered.
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation
Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the Inverter's
output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed.
Stall prevention during operation is enabled only during V/f control. If the Inverter output current continues to
exceed the setting in constant L3-06 for 100 ms or longer, the motor speed is reduced. Set whether to enable or
disable deceleration time using constant L3-05. Set the deceleration time using C1-02 (Acceleration time 1) or
C1-04 (Acceleration Time 2).
If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3-06 - 2% (Inverter Rated Output Current), the motor
will accelerate again at the frequency set or the acceleration time set.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
L3-05
Display
Stall prevention selection
during running
StallP Run
Sel
L3-06
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (Runs as set. With a
heavy load, the motor may stall.)
1: Deceleration time 1 (the
deceleration time for the stall
prevention function is C1-02.)
2: Deceleration time 2 (the
deceleration time for the stall
prevention function is C1-04.)
0 to 2
1
30 to
200
160%
Stall preven- Effective when L3-05 is 1 or 2.
tion level dur- Set as a percentage of the Inverter
ing running
rated current.
Usually setting is not necessary.
StallP Run
The factory setting reduces the set
Level
values when the motor stalls.
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
No
No
No
No
A
A
No
No
No
6-43
Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 8 (stall prevention level during run), you can change the stall
level during operation by setting H3-10 (Gain (Terminal A2)) and H3-11 (Bias (Terminal A2)) or H3-06 (Gain
(Terminal A3)) and H3-07 (Bias (Terminal A3).
The stall prevention level during operation enabled is the multi-function analog input terminal A2 or A3 input
level or the set value in constant L3-06, whichever is the smaller.
Stall prevention level during operation
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2, A3 input level
(4 mA) (8.8 mA) (20 mA)
Fig 6.37 Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input
If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity or the motor stalls when operating at the factory settings, lower the stall prevention level during operation.
INFO
Detecting Motor Torque
If an excessive load is placed on the machinery (overtorque) or the load is suddenly lightened (undertorque),
you can output an alarm signal to multi-function output terminal M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, or P4-C4.
To use the overtorque/undertorque detection function, set B, 17, 18, 19 (overtorque/undertorque detection NO/
NC) in one of the following constants: H2-01 to H2-05 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, P2PC, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection).
The overtorque/undertorque detection level is the current level (Inverter rated output current 100%) in V/f
control, and the motor torque (motor rated torque 100%) in vector control.
6-44
Machine Protection
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Torque detection selection
1
L6-01
Torq Det 1
Sel
L6-02
L6-03
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Overtorque/undertorque
detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection only with
speed agreement; operation
continues after overtorque
(warning).
2: Overtorque detected
continuously during operation;
operation continues after
overtorque (warning).
3: Overtorque detection only with
speed agreement; output stopped
upon detection (protected
operation).
4: Overtorque detected
continuously during operation;
output stopped upon detection
(protected operation).
5: Undertorque detection only with
speed agreement; operation
continues after overtorque
(warning).
6: Undertorque detected
continuously during operation;
operation continues after
overtorque (warning).
7: Undertorque detection only with
speed agreement; output stopped
upon detection (protected
operation).
8: Undertorque detected
continuously during operation;
output stopped upon detection
(protected operation).
0 to 8
0
0 to 300
Torque detec- Open-loop vector control: Motor
tion level 1
rated torque is set as 100%.
V/f control: Inverter rated current is
Torq Det 1
set as 100%.
Lvl
Torque detection time 1
Sets the overtorque/undertorque
detection time in 1-second units.
Torq Det 1
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
150%
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.0 to
10.0
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
0 to 8
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
0 to
300
150%
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.0 to
10.0
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
Time
L6-04
Torque detection selection
2
Multi-function output for overtorque detection 1 is output to
multi-function contact output when
Torque detec- overtorque detection 1 NO or overtorque detection 1 NC is selected.
tion level 2
Multi-function output for overTorq Det 2
torque detection 2 is output to
Lvl
multi-function contact output when
overtorque detection 2 NO or overTorque detectorque detection 2 NC is selected.
tion time 2
Torq Det 2
Sel
L6-05
L6-06
Torq Det 2
Time
6-45
Multi-function Output (H2-01 to H2-05)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
B
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Overtorque/undertorque detection at ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
17
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
18
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact: Torque detection at ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
19
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
L6-01 and L6-04 Set Values and LCD Indications
The relationship between alarms displayed by the Digital Operator when overtorque or undertorque is
detected, and the set values in L6-01 and L6-04, is shown in the following table.
Set
Value
6-46
Function
0
Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.
1
LCD Indications
Overtorque/
Overtorque/
Undertorque Undertorque
Detection 1
Detection 2
-
-
Overtorque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after
overtorque (warning).
OL3 flashes
OL4 flashes
2
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
after overtorque (warning).
OL3 flashes
OL4 flashes
3
Overtorque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
OL3 lit
OL4 lit
4
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon
detection (protected operation).
OL3 lit
OL4 lit
5
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after
overtorque (warning).
UL3 flashes
UL4 flashes
6
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
after overtorque (warning).
UL3 flashes
UL4 flashes
7
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon
detection (protected operation).
UL3 lit
UL4 lit
8
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon
detection (protected operation).
UL3 lit
UL4 lit
Machine Protection
Setting Example
The following diagram shows the time chart for overtorque and undertorque detection.
• Overtorque Detection
Motor current (output torque)
*
*
L6-02 or L6-05
Overtorque detection 1 NO
or overtorque detection 2 NO
L6-03 or
L6-06
L6-03 or
L6-06
ON
ON
* Overtorque detection disabled band is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output
current (or motor rated torque).
• Undertorque Detection
Motor current (output torque)
*
L6-02 or L6-05
Undertorque detection 1 NO
or Undertorque detection 2 NO
L6-03
or
L6-06
ON
L6-03
or
L6-06
ON
* The undertorque detection disabled margin is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output
current (or motor rated torque)
6-47
Changing Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Analog Input
If you set constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multifunction Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 7 (overtorque/undertorque detection level), you can
change the overtorque/undertorque detection level.
If you change the overtorque/undertorque detection level using the multi-function analog input, only overtorque/undertorque detection level 1 will be enabled.
The following diagram shows the overtorque/undertorque detection level using an analog input.
Detection level
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2, A3 input level
(4 mA)
(20 mA)
Fig 6.38 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Level Using an Analog Input
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-05, H3-09)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
7
6-48
Function
Overtorque/undertorque detection
level
Contents (100%)
Motor rated torque for vector control
Inverter rated output current for V/f control
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Machine Protection
Motor Overload Protection
You can protect the motor from overload using the Inverter's built-in electronic thermal overload relay.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Motor rated
current
E2-01
Motor Rated
FLA
Motor 2 rated
current
E4-01
Motor Rated
FLA
Motor protection selection
L1-01
MOL Fault
Select
Motor protection time constant
L1-02
MOL Time
Const
Description
Sets the motor rated current in 1 A
units.
These set values will become the
reference values for motor protection, torque limits and torque control.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
Sets the motor rated current in 1 A
units.
These set values will become the
reference values for motor protection, torque limits and torque control.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.32 to
6.40
1.90 A
*2
0.32
to 6.40
*2
*1
1.90 A
*1
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
A
A
A
A
A
Sets whether the motor overload
function is enabled or disabled at
electric thermal overload relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor
protection
2: Inverter motor protection
3: Vector motor protection
In some applications when the
Inverter power supply is turned
off, the thermal value is reset, so
even if this constant is set to 1,
protection may not be effective.
When several motors are connected to one Inverter, set to 0 and
ensure that each motor is installed
with a protection device.
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Sets the electric thermal detection
time in seconds units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
The factory setting is 150% overload for one minute.
When the motor's overload resistance is known, also set the overload resistance protection time for
when the motor is hot started.
0.1 to
5.0
1.0 min
No
A
A
A
A
A
* 1. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
* 2. The settings range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
6-49
Multi-Function Outputs (H2-01 to H2-05)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
1F
Function
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection
level)
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Setting Motor Rated Current
Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in constants E2-01 (for motor 1) and E4-01 (for motor 2).
This set value is the electronic thermal base current.
Setting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics
Set the overload protection function in L1-01 according to the applicable motor.
The induction motor's cooling abilities differ according to the speed control range. Consequently, you must
select the electronic thermal protection characteristics to match the applicable motor's tolerance load characteristics.
The following table shows the motor type and tolerance load characteristics.
L1-01
Set
Value
Motor Type
Tolerance Load Characteristics
Torque (%)
3.7 kW max.
5.5 to 15 kW
18.5 kW min.
General-purpose
motor (standard
motor)
80% ED or Frame number Max.
30 min. speed of 200 LJ min.
50% ED or 30 min.
Continuous
Electronic Thermal
Operation (at 100%
Motor Load)
Rated rotation speed
= 100% speed
Short time 60 s.
1
Cooling Ability
Frame
number
Max.
speed of Frame number Max.
200 LJ
speed of 160 MJ to 160 LJ
min.
Frame number Max.
speed of 132 MJ
Use this motor for
operations using a
commercial power
supply. This motor
construction yields
best cooling effect
when operating at 50/
60 Hz.
When operating continuously at 50/60 Hz or less,
motor overload detection
(OL1) is detected. The
Inverter outputs the error
contact, and the motor
coasts to a stop.
This motor yields a
cooling effect even
when operating at
low speeds (approx.
6 Hz).
Operates continuously at 6
to 50/60 Hz.
Rotation speed (%)
2
Inverter motor
(constant torque)
(1:10)
Rated rotation speed
= 100% speed
Torque (%)
Short time 60
Continuous
Frame number Max.
speed of 200 LJ min.
Frame number Max. speed
of 160 MJ to 180 LJ
Frame number Max.
speed of 132 MJ
Rotation speed (%)
6-50
Machine Protection
L1-01
Set
Value
Motor Type
Tolerance Load Characteristics
3
Vector motor
(1:100)
Electronic Thermal
Operation (at 100%
Motor Load)
Rated rotation speed
= 100% speed
Torque (%)
Short time 60 s.
Cooling Ability
Continuous
Frame number
Max. speed of
200 LJ min.
Frame number Max.
speed of 160 MJ to 180 LJ
Frame number Max.
speed of 132 MJ
This motor yields a
cooling effect even
Operates continuously at
when operating at
0.6 to 60 Hz.
extremely low speeds
(approx. 0.6 Hz).
Rotation speed (%)
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time
Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02.
If, after operating the motor continuously at the rated current, a 150% overload is experienced, set the (hot
start) electronic thermal protection operation time. The factory setting is resistance to 150% for 60 seconds.
The following diagram shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation
time (L1-02 = 1.0 min., operation at 60 Hz, general-purpose motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 1)
Operating time (min.)
Cold start
Hot start
Motor current (%)
E2-01 is set to 100%
Fig 6.39 Motor Protection Operation Time
Setting Precautions
• If multiple motors are connected to one Inverter, set constant L1-01 to 0 (disabled). To protect the motor,
install a thermal relay in the motor power cable, and perform overload protection on each motor.
• With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the circuit cannot be protected even if this constant has been set to 1 (enabled), because the thermal value will be reset.
• To detect overloads in good time, set the set value in constant L1-02 to a low setting.
• When using a general-purpose motor (standard motor), the cooling ability will be lowered by f1/4 (fre-
quency). Consequently, the frequency may cause motor overload protection (OL1) to occur, even below
the rated current. If operating using the rated current at a low frequency, use a special motor.
6-51
Setting the Motor Overload Pre-Alarm
If the motor overload protection function is enabled (i.e., L1-01 is set to other than 0) and you set H2-01 to
H2-05 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection) to 1F
(motor overload OL1 pre-alarm), the motor overload pre-alarm will be enabled. If the electronic thermal value
reaches minimum 90% of the overload detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs
Perform motor overheating protection using the thermistor temperature resistance characteristics of the PTC
(Positive Temperature Coefficient) built into the windings of each motor phase.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Alarm operation selection
during motor
overheating
L1-03
MOL Thm
Input
L1-04
Motor overheating operation
selection
MOL Filter
Time
L1-05
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set H3-09 to E and select the operation when the input motor temperature (thermistor) input exceeds the
alarm detection level (1.17 V).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09.
3: Continue operation (H3 on the
Operator flashes).
0 to 3
3
Set H3-09 to E and select the operation when the motor temperature
(thermistor) input exceeds the operation detection level (2.34 V).
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09.
0 to 2
0.00 to
10.00
Motor temperature input Set H3-09 to E and set the primary
filter time
delay time constant for motor temconstant
perature (thermistor) inputs in seconds.
MOL Filter
Time
6-52
Description
Setting
Range
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
Machine Protection
PTC Thermistor Characteristics
The following diagram shows the characteristics of the PTC thermistor temperature to the resistance value.
Class F
150°C
Resistance (ohms)
Class H
180°C
1330
Tr: Temperature threshold value
550
Temperature
Tr
Tr+5
Fig 6.40 PTC Thermistor Temperature-Resistance Value Characteristics
Operation during Motor Overheating
Set the operation if the motor overheats in constants L1-03 and L1-04. Set the motor temperature input filter
time constant in L1-05. If the motor overheats, the OH3 and OH4 error codes will be displayed on the Digital
Operator.
Error Codes If the Motor Overheats
Error Code
Details
OH3
Inverter stops or continues to operate, according to the setting in L1-03.
OH4
Inverter stops according to the setting in L1-04.
By setting H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to E (Motor temperature input), you can detect alarm OH3 or
OH4 using the PTC temperature-resistance characteristics, and protect the motor. The terminal connections
are shown in the following diagram.
Inverter
Multi-function
contact output
Multi-function
contact input
Fault contact
output
Branch resistance
18 kΩ
P3
C3
PTC thermistor
Multi-function
PHC output
P4
C4
Fig 6.41 Mutual Connections During Motor Overheating Protection
6-53
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction
If you set motor reverse rotation prohibited, a reverse run command will not be accepted even if it is input.
Use this setting for applications in which reverse motor rotation can cause problems (e.g., fans, pumps, etc.)
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
b1-04
Prohibition of
reverse operation
Reverse Oper
6-54
Description
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
Continuing Operation
Continuing Operation
This section explains functions for continuing or automatically restarting Inverter operation even if an
error occurs.
Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored
Even if a temporary power loss occurs, you can restart the Inverter automatically after power is restored to
continue motor operation.
To restart the Inverter after power is restored, set L2-01 to 1 or 2.
If L2-01 is set to 1, when power is restored within the time set in L2-02, the Inverter will restart. If the time set
in L2-02 is exceeded, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.
If L2-01 is set to 2, when the main power supply is restored while the control power supply (i.e., power supply
to the control panel) is backed up, the Inverter will restart. Consequently, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will not be detected.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Momentary
power loss
detection
L2-01
PwrL Selection
L2-02
Momentary
power loss
ridethru time
Factory
Setting
0: Disabled (main circuit
undervoltage (UV) detection)
1: Enabled (Restarted when the
power returns within the time
for L2-02. When L2-02 is
exceeded, main circuit
undervoltage detection.)
2: Enabled while CPU is operating.
(Restarts when power returns
during control operations. Does
not detect main circuit
undervoltage.)
0 to 2
0
0 to 25.5
Sets the Inverter's minimum baseblock time in units of one second,
when the Inverter is restarted after
power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately 0.7
times the motor secondary circuit
time constant.
When an overcurrent or overvoltage
occurs when starting a speed search
or DC injection braking, increase
the set values.
0.1 to
5.0
0.2 s
Voltage
Sets the time required to return the
recovery time Inverter output voltage to normal
voltage at the completion of a speed
search, in units of one second.
PwrL V/F
Sets the time required to recover
Ramp t
from 0 V to the maximum voltage.
0.0 to
5.0
0.3 s
Min. baseblock time
L2-04
Setting
Range
Ridethrough time, when Momentary Power Loss Selection (L2-01)
is set to 1, in units of seconds.
PwrL Ridethru t
L2-03
Description
Change
during
Operation
PwrL Baseblock t
0.1 s
*
*1
*1
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
6-55
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Display
Undervoltage detection
level
L2-05
PUV Det
Level
Sets the main circuit undervoltage
(UV) detection level (main circuit
DC voltage) in V units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Insert an AC reactor in the Inverter
input side to lower the main circuit
undervoltage detection level.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
150 to
210
190 V
*2
*2
Change
during
Operation
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
* 1. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
* 2. These values are for a 200 V Class Inverter. For a 400 V Class Inverter, double the values.
Setting Precautions
• Error output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery.
• To continue Inverter operation after power has been restored, make settings so that run commands from the
control main circuit terminal are stored even while power is suspended.
• If the momentary power loss operation selection is set to 0 (Disabled), when the momentary power loss
exceeds 15 ms during operation, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.
Speed Search
The speed search function finds the actual speed of the motor that is rotating using inertia, and then starts
smoothly from that speed. When restoring power after a temporary power loss, the speed search function
switches connection from the commercial power supply, and then restarts the fan that is rotating using inertia.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3
2*1
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
No
A
Speed search Enables/disables the speed search
selection (cur- function for the run command and
rent detection sets the speed search method.
or speed cal0:Disabled, speed calculation
culation)
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
3: Enabled, current detection
b3-01
SpdSrch at
Start
Speed Calculation:
When the search is started, the
motor speed is calculated and
acceleration/deceleration is
performed from the calculated
speed to the specified frequency
(motor direction is also searched).
Current Detection:
The speed search is started from
the frequency when power was
momentarily lost and the
maximum frequency, and the
speed is detected at the search
current level.
6-56
Continuing Operation
Name
Constant
Number
Display
b3-02
Speed search
operating current (current
detection)
SpdSrch Current
b3-03
Speed search
deceleration
time (current
detection)
SpdSrch Dec
Time
b3-05
Speed search
wait time
(current detection or speed
calculation)
Search Delay
Min. baseblock time
L2-03
L2-04
PwrL Baseblock t
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage, taking the
Inverter rated current as 100%.
Not usually necessary to set. When
restarting is not possible with the
factory settings, reduce the value.
0 to
200
100%*1
Sets the output frequency deceleration time during speed search in 1second units.
Set the time for deceleration from
the maximum output frequency to
the minimum output frequency.
0.1 to
10.0
Sets the contactor operating delay
time when there is a contactor on
the output side of the Inverter.
When a speed search is performed
after recovering from a momentary
power loss, the search operation is
delayed by the time set here.
0.0 to
20.0
Sets the Inverter's minimum baseblock time in units of one second,
when the Inverter is restarted after
power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately 0.7
times the motor secondary circuit
time constant.
When an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs when starting a speed
search or DC injection braking,
increase the set values.
0.1 to
5.0
0.5 s
0.0 to
5.0
0.3 s
Voltage recov- Sets the time required to return the
ery time
Inverter output voltage to normal
voltage at the completion of a speed
search, in units of one second.
PwrL V/F
Sets the time required to recover
Ramp t
from 0 V to the maximum voltage.
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
No
A
No
A
2.0 s
No
A
No
A
No
No
0.2 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
*2
*2
* 1. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector control 1 factory settings are given.)
* 2. Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity. (The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-10)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
61
External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
62
External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
6-57
Setting Precautions
• When both external search commands 1 and 2 are set for the multi-function contact terminals, an OPE03
(invalid multi-function input selection) operation error may occur. Set either external search command 1 or
external search command 2.
• If speed search during startup is selected when using V/f control with PG, the Unit will start from the fre-
quency detected by PG.
• If performing speed search using external search commands, add an external sequence so that the period
when the run command and external search command are both ON is at the very least the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03).
• If the Inverter output is equipped with a contact, set the contact operation delay time in the Speed Search
Wait Time (b3-05). The factory setting is 0.2 s. When not using the contact, you can reduce the search time
by making the setting 0.0 s. After waiting for the speed search wait time, the Inverter starts the speed
search.
• Constant b3-02 is a current detection speed search (current detection level for search completion). When
the current falls below the detection level, the speed search is viewed as completed, and the motor accelerates or decelerates to the set frequency. If the motor cannot restart, lower the set value.
• If an overcurrent (OC) is detected when using speed search after recovery following a power loss, lengthen
the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03).
Application Precautions for Speed Searches Using Estimated Speed
• When using V/f control with or without a PG, always perform stationary autotuning for only line-to-line
resistance before using speed searches based on estimated speeds.
• When using open-loop vector control, always perform rotational autotuning before using speed searches
based on estimated speeds.
• If the cable length between the motor and Inverter is changed after autotuning has been performed, per-
form stationary autotuning for only line-to-line resistance again.
The motor will not operate when stationary autotuning or stationary autotuning only for line-to-line
resistance is performed.
IMPORTANT
6-58
Continuing Operation
Speed Search Selection
Set whether to enable or disable speed search at startup, and set the type of speed search (estimated speed or
current detection) using setting b3-01. To perform speed search when inputting the run command, set b3-01 to
1 or 3.
Search Name
Search Method
Estimated Speed
Current Detection
Estimates the motor speed when the search
starts, and accelerates and decelerates from the
estimated speed to the set frequency. You can
also search including direction of motor rotation.
Starts speed search from the frequency when
the temporary power loss was detected, or from
the highest frequency, and performs speed
detection at the current level during the search.
External search command 1 and external
External Speed Search search command 2 become the same operation,
Command
estimating the motor speed and starting the
search from the estimated speed.
Application Precautions
External speed search command 1:
Starts speed search from the maximum output
frequency.
External speed search command 2:
Starts speed search from the frequency reference set before the search command.
Cannot be used multi-motor drives, motors two
In control method without PG, the motor may
or more frames smaller than the Inverter capacaccelerate suddenly with light loads.
ity, and high-speed motors (130 Hz min.)
Estimated Speed Search
The time chart for estimated speed searches is shown below.
Search at Startup
The time chart for when speed search at startup and speed search to multi-function input terminals us shown
below.
OFF
ON
Set frequency
reference
Run command
Output frequency
Start using
speed detected
b3-02
Output current
1.0 s
* Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) × 0.7*
Note: If the stopping method is set to coast to stop, and the run command turns ON in a short time,
the operation may be the same as the search in case 2.
Fig 6.42 Speed Search at Startup (Estimated Speed)
6-59
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
• Loss Time Shorter Than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Start using
speed detected
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
Output current
10 ms
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75*1
*2
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency
immediately before the baseblock.
*2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the
minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Fig 6.43 Speed Search after Baseblock (When Estimated Speed: Loss Time Is Set in L2-03)
• Loss Time Longer Than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Start using speed detected
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
Output current
10 ms
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
Speed Search Wait Time
(b3-05)
Fig 6.44 Speed Search After Baseblock (Estimated Speed: Loss Time > L2-03)
Current Detection Speed Search
The time charts for current detection speed search is shown below.
Speed Search at Startup
The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command is selected is shown below.
6-60
Continuing Operation
OFF
Run command
ON
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Maximum output
frequency or
set frequency
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
b3-02
Output current
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
*
* Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time (b3-05).
Fig 6.45 Speed Search at Startup (Using Current Detection)
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
• Loss Time Shorter Than Minimum Baseblock Time
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Output frequency before power loss
Set frequency
Deceleration
reference
time set in b3-03
Output frequency
b3-02
speed search operating current
Output current
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency
immediately before baseblock.
*2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the minimum
Speed Search Wait Time (b2-03).
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) *1
*2
Fig 6.46 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time < L2-03)
• Loss Time Longer Than Minimum Baseblock Time
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Output frequency before power loss
Deceleration speed set in b3-03
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
b3-02
Speed search operating time
Output current
Speed search wait time (b3-05)
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
Fig 6.47 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time > L2-03)
6-61
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is
Lost
The frequency reference loss detection function continues operation using 80% speed of the frequency reference before loss when the frequency reference using an analog input is reduced 90% or more in 400 ms.
When the error signal during frequency reference loss is output externally, set H2-01 to H2-05 (multi-function
contact output terminal M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection) to C (frequency reference lost).
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
L4-05
Operation
when frequency reference is
missing
Ref Loss Sel
6-62
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Stop (Operation follows the
frequency reference.)
1: Operation at 80% speed
continues. (At 80% of speed
before the frequency reference
was lost)
Frequency reference is lost: Frequency reference dropped over 90%
in 400 ms.
0 or 1
0
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
Continuing Operation
Restarting Operation After Transient Error (Auto Restart Function)
If an Inverter error occurs during operation, the Inverter will perform self-diagnosis. If no error is detected, the
Inverter will automatically restart. This is called the auto restart function.
Set the number of auto restarts in constant L5-01.
The auto restart function can be applied to the following errors. If an error not listed below occurs, the protection function will operate and the auto restart function will not.
• OC (Overcurrent)
• RH (Braking resistor overheated)
• GF (Ground fault)
• RR (Braking transistor error)
• PUF (Fuse blown)
• OL1 (Motor overload)
• OV (Main circuit overvoltage)
• OL2 (Inverter overload)
• UV1 (Main Circuit Undervoltage, Main Circuit MC Operation Failure)*
• OH1 (Motor overheat)
• PF (Main circuit voltage fault)
• OL3 (Overtorque)
• LF (Output phase failure)
• OL4 (Overtorque)
* When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2 (continue operation during momentary power loss)
Auto Restart External Outputs
To output auto restart signals externally, set H2-01 to H2-05 (multi-function contact output terminals M1-M2,
M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection) to 1E (auto restart).
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
L5-01
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the number of auto restart
attempts.
Automatically restarts after a fault
and conducts a speed search from
the run frequency.
0 to 10
0
Sets whether a fault contact output
is activated during fault restart.
0: Not output (Fault contact is not
activated.)
1: Output (Fault contact is
activated.)
0 or 1
0
Description
Display
Number of
auto restart
attempts
Num of
Restarts
L5-02
Setting
Range
Auto restart
operation
selection
Restart Sel
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
Application Precautions
• The number of auto restarts count is reset under the following conditions:
After auto restart, normal operation has continued for 10 minutes.
After the protection operation has been performed, and the error has been verified, and an fault reset
has been input.
After the power supply is turned OFF, and then ON again.
• Do not use the auto restart function with variable loads.
6-63
Inverter Protection
This section explains the functions for protecting the Inverter and the braking resistor.
Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors
Perform overheating protection on Inverter-mounted braking resistors (Model: ERF-150WJ ).
When overheating in a mounted braking resistor is detected, an alarm RH (Mounted braking resistor overheating) is displayed on the Digital Operator, and the motor coasts to a stop.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
L8-01
Protect selection for internal
DB resistor
(Type ERF)
DB Resistor
Prot
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
0: Disabled (no overheating
protection)
1: Enabled (overheating
protection)
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
Multi-function Contact Outputs (H2-01 to H2-05)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
D
Function
Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault)
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
The most likely causes of RH (Mounted braking resistor overheating) being detected are that the deceleration
time is too short or that the motor regeneration energy is too large. In these cases, lengthen the deceleration
time or replace the Braking Resistor Unit with one with a higher breaking capacity.
INFO
6-64
Inverter Protection
Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels
The Inverter detects the temperature of the cooling fins using the thermistor, and protects the Inverter from
overheating. You can receive Inverter overheating pre-alarms in units of 10°C.
The following overheating pre-alarm warnings are available: Stopping the Inverter as error protection, and
continuing operation, with the alarm OH (Radiation fins overheating) on the Digital Operator flashing.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Overheat prealarm level
L8-02
OH Pre-Alarm
Lvl
Operation
selection after
overheat prealarm
L8-03
OH Pre-Alarm
Sel
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the detection temperature for
the Inverter overheat detection
pre-alarm in °C.
The pre-alarm detects when the
cooling fin temperature reaches
the set value.
50 to
130
95 °C*
Sets the operation for when the
Inverter overheat pre-alarm goes
ON.
0: Decelerate to stop in
deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time C109.
3: Continue operation (Monitor
display only.)
A fault will be given in setting 0
to 2 and a minor fault will be
given in setting 3.
0 to 3
3
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
6-65
Input Terminal Functions
This section explains input terminal functions, which set operating methods by switching functions for the
multi-function contact input terminals (S3 to S12).
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control
Circuit Terminals
You can switch the Inverter run command inputs and frequency reference inputs between local (i.e., Digital
Operator) and remote (input method using b1-01 and b1-02).
You can switch between local and remote by turning ON and OFF the terminals if an output from H1-01 to
H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection) has been set to 1 (local/remote
selection).
To set the control circuit terminals to remote, set b1-01 and b1-02 to 1 (Control circuit terminals).
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Reference
selection
b1-01
Reference
Source
Operation
method selection
b1-02
Run Source
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog
input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4
1
Set the run command input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
1
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
You can also perform local/remote switching using the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. When
the local/remote function has been set in the external terminals, the LOCAL/REMOTE Key function on the
Digital Operator will be disabled.
INFO
6-66
Input Terminal Functions
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands)
Set 8 or 9 (Baseblock command NO/NC) in one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input
terminal S3 to S12 function selection) to perform baseblock commands using the terminal's ON/OFF operation, and prohibit Inverter output using the baseblock commands.
Clear the baseblock command to restart the operating using speed search from frequency references from the
previous baseblock command input.
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-10)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
8
External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
9
External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Time Chart
The time chart when using baseblock commands is shown below.
Forward operation/Stop
Baseblock command
Input
Cleared
Frequency reference
Search from stored frequency reference
Output frequency
Coast to a stop
Fig 6.48 Baseblock Commands
If using baseblock commands with a variable load, do not frequently input baseblock commands during operation, as this may cause the motor to suddenly start coasting, and may result in the motor falling or slipping.
IMPORTANT
6-67
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold)
The acceleration/deceleration ramp hold function stops acceleration and deceleration, stores the output frequency at that point in time, and then continues operation.
Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection)
to A (acceleration/deceleration ramp hold) to stop acceleration and deceleration when the terminal is turned
ON and to store the output frequency at that point in time. Acceleration and deceleration will restart when the
terminal is turned OFF.
If d4-01 is set to 1 and the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command is input, the output frequency is
still stored even after the power supply is turned OFF.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets whether or not frequencies
on hold will be recorded.
0: Disabled (when operation is
stopped or the power is turned
on again starts at 0.)
1: Enabled (when operation is
stopped or the power is turned
on again starts at the previous
hold frequency.)
This function is available when
the multi-function inputs “accel/
decel Ramp Hold” or “up/down”
commands are set.
0 or 1
0
No
Display
Frequency reference hold
function selection
d4-01
MOP Ref
Memory
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
Time Chart
The time chart when using Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold commands is given below.
Power supply
Forward/Stop
Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold
Frequency reference
Output frequency
Hold
Hold
Fig 6.49 Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold
6-68
Input Terminal Functions
Application Precautions
• When d4-01 is set to 1, the output frequency on hold is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. If
performing operations using this frequency after the Inverter has also been turned OFF, input the run command with the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold turned ON.
• When d4-01 is set to 0 and a run command is input while the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold is
turned ON, the output frequency will be set to zero.
• If you input an Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command by error when decelerating during posi-
tioning, deceleration may be canceled.
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/
DOWN)
The UP and DOWN commands raise and lower Inverter frequency references by turning ON and OFF a multifunction contact input terminal S3 to S7.
To use this function, set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12
function selection) to 10 (UP command) and 11 (DOWN command). Be sure to allocate two terminals so that
the UP and DOWN commands can be used as a pair.
The output frequency depends on the acceleration and deceleration time. Be sure to set b1-02 (Run command
selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal).
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
d2-01
Display
Frequency reference upper
limit
Ref Upper
Limit
d2-02
Frequency reference lower
limit
Ref Lower
Limit
d2-03
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the output frequency upper
limit as a percent, taking the max.
output frequency to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0%
Sets the output frequency lower
limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0 to
110.0
Master speed
reference lower Set the master speed reference
lower limit as a percent, taking
limit
the max. output frequency to be
Ref1 Lower
100%.
Limit
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.0%
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.0%
No
A
A
A
A
A
Precautions
When setting and using UP and DOWN commands, observe the following precautions.
Setting Precautions
If multi-function input terminals S3 to S12 are set as follows, operation error OPE03 (Invalid multi-function
input selection) will occur:
• Only either the UP command or DOWN command has been set.
6-69
• UP/DOWN commands and Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold have been allocated at the same time.
Application Precautions
• Frequency outputs using UP/DOWN commands are limited by the frequency reference upper and lower
limits set in constants d2-01 to d2-03. Here, frequency references from analog frequency reference terminal A1 becomes the frequency reference lower limit. If using a combination of the frequency reference
from terminal A1 and the frequency reference lower limit set in either constant d2-02 or d2-03, the larger
lower limit will become the frequency reference lower limit.
• If inputting the run command when using UP/DOWN commands, the output frequency accelerates to the
frequency reference lower limit.
• When using UP/DOWN commands, multi-step operations are disabled.
• When d4-01 (Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection) is set to 1, the frequency reference held using
the UP/DOWN functions is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. When the power supply is
turned ON and the run command is input, the motor accelerates to the frequency reference that has been
stored. To reset (i.e., to 0 Hz) the stored frequency reference, turn ON the UP or DOWN command while
the run command is ON.
Connection Example and Time Chart
The time chart and settings example when the UP command is allocated to the multi-function contact input
terminal S3, and the DOWN command is allocated to terminal S4, are shown below.
Constant
Name
Set Value
H1-01
Multi-function input (terminal S3)
10
H1-02
Multi-function input (terminal S4)
11
Inverter
Forward
operation/Stop
Reverse
operation/Stop
Up command
Down command
0 to 10 V analog
signal
Sequence
common
Frequency
reference lower limit
Fig 6.50 Connection Example when UP/DOWN Commands Are Allocated
6-70
Input Terminal Functions
Output frequency
Upper limit
Accelerates to
lower limit
Same
frequency
Lower limit
Forward operation/stop
UP command
Reference
frequency reset
DOWN command
Frequency
matching signal*
Power supply
* The frequency matching signal turns ON when the motor is not accelerating/
decelerating while the run command is ON.
Fig 6.51 UP/DOWN Commands Time Chart
6-71
Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Frequencies in the Analog References (+/- Speed)
The +/- speed function increments or decrements the frequency set in analog frequency reference d4-02 (+/Speed Limit) using two contact signal inputs.
To use this function, set One of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact terminal inputs S3 to
S12 function selection) to 1C (Trim Control Increase command) and 1D (Trim Control Decrease command).
Be sure to allocate two terminals so that the Trim Control Increase command and Trim Control Decrease command can be used as a pair.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
d4-02
Description
Display
+ - Speed limits Set the frequency to be add to or
subtracted from the analog frequency reference as a percent,
taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
Trim Control
Enabled when the increase (+)
Lvl
speed command or decrease (-)
speed command is set for a multifunction input.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 100
10%
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
Trim Control Increase/Decrease Command and Frequency Reference
The frequency references using Trim Control Increase/Decrease command ON/OFF operations are shown
below.
Set Frequency
Reference
+ d4-02
Set Frequency
Reference
- d4-02
Trim Control Increase
Command Terminal
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Trim Control Decrease
Command Terminal
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Frequency Reference
Set Frequency Command
Application Precautions
• Trim Control Increase/Decrease command is enabled when speed reference > 0 and the speed reference is
from an analog input.
• When the analog frequency reference value - d4-02 < 0, the frequency reference is set to 0.
• If only the Trim Control Increase command or Trim Control Decrease command has been set for a multi-
function contact input terminal S3 to S12, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selected)
will occur.
6-72
Input Terminal Functions
Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing
When one of H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection) is set to 1E
(sample/hold analog frequency command), the analog frequency reference will be held from 100 ms after the
terminal is turned ON, and operation will continue thereafter at that frequency.
The analog value 100 ms after the command is turned ON is used as the frequency reference.
Sample/hold
command
Analog input
Frequency reference
Fig 6.52 Sample/Hold Analog Frequency
Precautions
When setting and executing sample and hold for analog frequency references, observe the following precautions.
Setting Precautions
When using sample/hold of analog frequency reference, you cannot use the following commands at the same
time. If these commands are used at the same time, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selection) will occur.
• Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command
• UP/DOWN command
• Trim Control Increase/Decrease command
Application Precautions
• When performing sample/hold of analog frequency references, be sure to store references of 100 ms mini-
mum. If the reference time is less than 100 ms, the frequency reference will not be held.
• The analog frequency reference that is held will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF.
Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card and Control Circuit Terminals
You can switch reference input between the Communications Option Card and the control circuit terminals.
Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection)
to 2 (Option/Inverter selection) to enable switching reference input using the terminal ON/OFF status when
the Inverter is stopped.
6-73
Setting Precautions
To switch command inputs between the Communications Option Card and the control circuit terminals, set the
following constants.
• Set b1-01 (Reference Selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal [analog input])
• Set b1-02 (Operation Method Selection to 1 (Control circuit terminal (sequence inputs])
• Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selec-
tion) to 2 (Option/Inverter selection).
Terminal Status
Frequency Reference and Run Command Selection
OFF
Inverter
(Can be operated from frequency reference or control circuit terminal from analog input terminal.)
ON
Communications Option Card
(Frequency reference and run command are enabled from communications Option Card.)
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands
(FJOG/RJOG)
The FJOG/RJOG command functions operate the Inverter using jog frequencies by using the terminal ON/
OFF operation. When using the FJOG/RJOG commands, there is no need to input the run command.
To use this function, set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12
function selection) to 12 (FJOG command) or 13 (RJOG command).
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
d1-17
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
The frequency reference when the
jog frequency reference selection, FJOG command, or RJOG
command is ON.
0 to
400.00
6.00 Hz
Yes
Display
Jog frequency
reference
Jog Reference
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-10)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
12
FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
13
RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Application Precautions
• Jog frequencies using FJOG and RJOG commands are given priority over other frequency references.
• When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500 ms or longer at the same time, the
Inverter stops according to the setting in b1-03 (stopping method selection).
6-74
Input Terminal Functions
Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the
Inverter (External Fault Function)
The external fault function performs the error contact output, and stops the Inverter operation if the Inverter
peripheral devices break down or an error occurs. The digital operator will display EFx (External fault [input
terminal Sx]). The x in EFx shows the terminal number of the terminal that input the external fault signal. For
example, if an external fault signal is input to terminal S3, EF3 will be displayed.
To use the external fault function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multifunction contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection).
Select the value to be set in H1-01 to H1-10 from a combination of any of the following three conditions.
• Signal input level from peripheral devices
• External fault detection method
• Operation during external fault detection
The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in H1.
Set
Value
20
Input Level
(See Note 1.)
NO Contact
Yes
21
22
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2D
2E
2F
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2B
2C
Yes
Yes
29
2A
Yes
Yes
27
28
Yes
Yes
25
26
Yes
Yes
23
24
NC Contact
Error Detection Method
Operation During Error Detection
(See Note 2.)
Detection
DecelerCoast to
EmerContinue
Constant
During
ate to Stop
Stop
gency Stop Operation
Detection
Operation
(Error)
(Error)
(Error)
(Warning)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note 1. Set the input level to detect errors using either signal ON or signal OFF. (NO contact: External fault when ON; NC contact: External fault when
OFF).
2. Set the detection method to detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation.
Constant detection: Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter.
Detection during operation: Detects only during Inverter operation.
6-75
Monitor Constants
This section explains the analog monitor and pulse monitor constants.
Using the Analog Monitor Constants
This section explains the analog monitor constants.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
H4-01
Display
Terminal FM
Gain
Bias (terminal FM)
H4-03
H4-04
Terminal FM
Bias
Terminal AM
Gain
Bias (terminal AM)
H4-06
6-76
Change
during
Operation
1 to 45
2
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage level gain.
Sets whether the monitor item output will be output in multiples of
10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration
function is available.
0.00 to
2.50
(0 to
1000.0)
Sets the multi-function analog output 1 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/down
parallel movement as a percentage
of 10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration
function is available.
Terminal AM
Bias
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
1.00
(100%)
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
-10.0 to
+10.0
(-100.0
to 100.0)
0.0%
(0.0%)
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1 to 45
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
Set the voltage level gain for multifunction analog output 2.
Set the number of multiples of 10 V
to be output as the 100% output for
the monitor items. The maximum
output from the terminal is 10 V. A
meter calibration function is available.
0.00 to
2.50
(0 to
1000.0)
0.50
(200%)
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Sets the multi-function analog output 2 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/down
parallel movement as a percentage
of 10 V.
The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration
function is available.
-10.0 to
+10.0
(0 to
1000.0)
0.0%
(0.0%)
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
Description
Monitor
Sets the number of the monitor item
selection (ter- to be output (U1-) from termiminal AM)
nal AM.
Terminal AM 4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot
be set. 29 to 31 and 41 are not used.
Sel
Gain (terminal AM)
H4-05
Factory
Setting
Monitor
Sets the number of the monitor item
selection (ter- to be output (U1-) from termiminal FM)
nal FM.
Terminal FM 4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot
be set. 29 to 31 and 41 are not used.
Sel
Gain (terminal FM)
H4-02
Setting
Range
Monitor Constants
Name
Constant
Number
H4-07
Display
Analog output 1 signal
level selection
AO Level
Select1
F4-01
F4-02
F4-03
F4-04
F4-05
F4-06
Channel 2
output monitor bias
AO Ch2 Bias
F4-07
Analog output signal
level for
channel 1
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
1 to 45
Control Methods
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1 to 45
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.00 to
2.50
0.50
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
Sets the channel 1 item bias to
100%/10 V when the analog monitor card is used.
-10.0 to
10.0
0.0
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
Sets the channel 2 item bias to
100%/10 V when the analog monitor card is used.
-10.0 to
10.0
0.0
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to +10 V
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to +10 V
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
Sets the signal output level for
multi-function output 1 (terminal
FM)
0: 0 to +10 V output
1: 0 to ±10 V output
Effective when the Analog Monitor
Card is used.
Monitor selection:
AO Ch1
Set the number of the monitor item
Select
to be output. (U1-)
Gain:
Channel 1
Set the multiple of 10 V for outputgain
ting monitor items.
AO Ch1 Gain 4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot
be set. 29 to 31 and 41 are not used.
Channel 2
When the AO-12 Analog Monitor
monitor
Card is used, outputs of ± 10 V are
selection
possible. To output ± 10 V, set F4AO Ch2
07 or F4-08 to 1. When the AO-08
Select
Analog Monitor Card is used, only
outputs of 0 to +10 V are possible.
Channel 2
A meter calibration function is
gain
available.
AO Ch2 Gain
AO Ch1 Bias
Factory
Setting
V/f
Description
Channel 1
monitor
selection
Channel 1
output monitor bias
Setting
Range
AO Opt
Level Sel
F4-08
Analog output signal
level for
channel 2
AO Opt
Level Sel
Selecting Analog Monitor Items
The digital operator monitor items (U1- [status monitor]) are output from multi-function analog output
terminals FM-AC and AM-AC. Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants, and set the values for the part of U1 (status monitor).
Alternatively, you can output monitor items (U1- [status monitor]) from analog output option terminal
channels 1 and 2 on analog monitor cards AO-08 and AO-12. Refer to the table of constants, and set the values.
6-77
Adjusting the Analog Monitor Items
Adjust the output voltage for multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC using the gain and
bias in H4-02, H4-03, H4-05, and H4-06. Also, adjust the output voltage for output channels 1 and 2 of Analog Output Option Cards AO-08 and AO-12 using the gain and bias in F4-02, F4-04, and F4-06.
Adjusting the Meter
Display the data setting display for the gain and bias constants corresponding to the output channel of the
Inverter Unit and the AO Option Card while the Inverter is stopped to output the following voltages to the analog monitor terminal, to enable meter adjusting while the Inverter is stopped.
10 V/100% monitor output × output gain + output bias
Output voltage
Gain x 10 V
Bias x 10/100 V
Monitor item
Fig 6.53 Monitor Output Adjustment
Switching Analog Monitor Signal Levels
Monitor items corresponding to 0 to ±10 V output 0 to 10 V signals when the monitor value is positive (+),
and 0 to -10 V signals when the monitor value is negative (-). For monitor items corresponding to 0 to ±10 V,
refer to Chapter 5 User Constants.
You can select the signal levels separately for multi-function analog output terminals and analog output option
terminals.
INFO
6-78
Monitor Constants
Using Pulse Train Monitor Contents
This section explains pulse monitor constants.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
H6-06
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Select the pulse train monitor output
items (value of the part of U1).
There are two types of monitor
items: Speed-related items and PIDrelated items.
1, 2, 5,
20, 24,
36
2
Set the number of pulses output
when speed is 100% in hertz.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to
make the pulse train monitor output
synchronously to the output frequency.
0 to
32000
1440 Hz
Display
Pulse train
monitor
selection
Pulse Output
Sel
H6-07
Description
Setting
Range
Pulse train
monitor scaling
PO Scaling
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
Selecting Pulse Monitor Items
Output digital operator monitor items (U1- [status monitor]) from pulse monitor terminal MP-SC. Refer
to Chapter 5 User Constants, and set the part of U1- (Status monitor). The possible monitor selections are limited as follows: U1-01, 02, 05, 20, 24, 36.
Adjusting the Pulse Monitor Items
Adjust the pulse frequency output from pulse monitor terminal MP-SC. Set the pulse frequency output when
100% frequency is output to H6-07.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to output the frequency synchronous with the Inverter's U-phase output.
Application Precautions
When using a pulse monitor constant, connect a peripheral device according to the following load conditions.
If the load conditions are different, there is a risk of characteristic insufficiency or damage to the machinery.
Using a Sourcing Output
Output Voltage
(Isolated)
VRL (V)
Load Impedance (kΩ)
+5 V min.
1.5 kΩ min.
+8 V min.
3.5 kΩ min.
+10 V min.
10 kΩ min.
Load impedance
MP
VRL
AC
6-79
External power supply
Using a Sinking Input
External Power
Supply (V)
12 VDC±10%,
15 VDC±10%
Sink Current (mA)
16 mA Max
Load impedance
MP
Sinking current
AC
6-80
Individual Functions
Individual Functions
This section explains the individual functions used in special applications.
Using MEMOBUS Communications
You can perform serial communications with MEMOCON-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs) or similar devices using the MEMOBUS protocol.
MEMOBUS Communications Configuration
MEMOBUS communications are configured using 1 master (PLC) and a maximum of 31 slaves. Serial communications between master and slave are normally started by the master, and the slave responds.
The master performs signal communications with one slave at a time. Consequently, you must set the address
of each slave beforehand, so the master can perform signal communications using that address. Slaves receiving commands from the master perform the specified function, and send a response to the master.
MEMOCON-series PLC
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
RS-485 connections
example
Fig 6.54 Example of Connections between PLC and Inverter
Communications Specifications
The MEMOBUS communications specifications are shown in the following table.
Item
Specifications
Interface
RS-422, RS-485
Communications Cycle
Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Communications Parameters
Baud rate:
Select from 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, and 19,200 bps.
Data length:
8 bits fixed
Parity:
Select from even, odd, or none.
Stop bits:
1 bit fixed
Communications Protocol
MEMOBUS (RTU mode only)
Number of Connectable Units
31 units max. (when using RS-485)
6-81
Communications Connection Terminal
MEMOBUS communications use the following terminals: S+, S-, R+, and R-. Set the terminating resistance
by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 for the last Inverter only, as seen from the PLC.
S+
+
-
SRS-422A
or RS-485
R+
R-
S1
O
F
F
1
2
OFF
ON
Terminating
resistance
Switch
1
Terminating resistance (1/2 W, 110 Ohms)
Fig 6.55 Communications Connection Terminal
IMPORTANT
1. Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables.
2. Use shielded cables for the communications cables, connect the shield cover to the Inverter earth terminal,
and arrange the terminals so that the other end is not connected to prevent operating errors due to noise.
3. When using RS-485 communications, connect S+ to R+, and S- to R-, on the Inverter exterior.
R+
S+
Procedure for Communicating with the PLC
Use the following procedure to perform communications with the PLC.
1. Turn OFF the power supply turned and connect the communications cable between the PLC and the
Inverter.
2. Turn ON the power supply.
3. Set the required communications constants (H5-01 to H5-07) using the Digital Operator.
4. Turn OFF the power supply, and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared.
5. Turn ON the power supply once again.
6. Perform communications with the PLC.
Set the timer on the master to monitor response time from the slave. Set the master so that if the slave does
not respond to the master within the set time, the same command message will be sent from the master
again.
INFO
6-82
Individual Functions
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Reference
selection
b1-01
Reference
Source
Operation
method selection
b1-02
Run Source
H5-01
Station
address
Serial Comm
Adr
Communication speed
selection
H5-02
Serial Baud
Rate
H5-03
Communication parity
selection
Serial Com
Sel
H5-04
Stopping
method after
communication error
Serial Fault
Sel
H5-05
H5-06
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Set the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog
input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4
1
Set the run command input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
0 to 3
Set the Inverter's node address.
Transmit
WaitTIM
RTS Control
Sel
*
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
1F
No
A
A
A
A
A
0 to 4
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
Set the parity for 6CN MEMOBUS
communications.
0: No parity
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
Set the stopping method for communications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using
deceleration time in C1-02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using
deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
0 to 3
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
Set the time from the Inverter
receiving data to when the Inverter
starts to send.
5 to 65
5 ms
No
A
A
A
A
A
Select to enable or disable RTS
control.
0: Disabled (RTS is always ON)
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only
when sending)
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
Set whether or not a communications timeout is to be detected as a
communications error.
0: Do not detect.
Serial Flt Dtct 1: Detect
Send wait
time
0 to 20
Control Methods
Set the baud rate for 6CN MEMOBUS communications.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
Communication error
detection
selection
RTS control
ON/OFF
H5-07
Description
Change
during
Operation
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
6-83
MEMOBUS communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1-01 and b102.
• Monitoring operation status from the PLC
• Setting and reading constants
• Resetting errors
• Inputting multi-function commands
An OR operation is performed between the multi-function commands input from the PLC and commands
input from multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7.
Message Format
In MEMOBUS communications, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below, and the length of data packets is
changed by the command (function) contents.
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
The space between messages must support the following.
PLC to Inverter
Command message
Inverter to PLC
Response message
PLC to Inverter
Command message
Time (Seconds)
24 bits long
H5-06 24 bits long
setting
5 ms min.
Fig 6.56 Message Spacing
Slave Address
Set the Inverter address from 0 to 32. If you set 0, commands from the master will be broadcast (i.e., the
Inverter will not return responses).
Function Code
The function code specifies commands. There are three function codes, as shown below.
Function Code
(Hexadecimal)
Function
Command Message
Response Message
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
03H
Read storage register contents
8
8
7
37
08H
Loopback test
8
8
8
8
10H
Write multiple storage registers
11
41
8
8
Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address (test code for a loopback address) and
the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.
6-84
Individual Functions
Error Check
Errors are detected during communications using CRC-16. Perform calculations using the following method.
1. The factory setting for CRC-16 communications is usually 0, but when using the MEMOBUS system, set
the factory setting to 1 (i.e., set all 16 bits to 1).
2. Calculate CRC-16 using MSB as slave address LSB, and LSB as the MSB of the final data.
3. Also calculate CRC-16 for response messages from the slaves, and compare them to the CRC-16 in the
response messages.
MEMOBUS Message Example
An example of MEMOBUS command/response messages is given below.
Reading Storage Register Contents
Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities whose addresses are consecutive, starting
from a specified address. The contents of the storage register are separated into higher place 8 bits and lower
place 8 bits, and comprise the data within response messages in address order.
The following table shows message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and
frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter.
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Command Message
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address
02H
Slave Address
02H
Slave Address
02H
Function Code
03H
Function Code
03H
Function Code
83H
Start
Address
Quantity
CRC-16
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
20H
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
04H
Higher
place
45H
Lower
place
F0H
Data quantity
Lead storage register
Next storage register
Next storage register
Next storage register
CRC-16
08H
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
65H
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
00H
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
00H
Higher
place
01H
Lower
place
F4H
Higher
place
AFH
Lower
place
82H
Error code
CRC-16
03H
Higher
place
F1H
Lower
place
31H
6-85
Loopback Test
The loopback test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to
check the communications between the master and slave. You can set user-defined test code and data values.
The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 Inverter.
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Command Message
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave address
01H
Slave address
01H
Slave address
01H
Function code
08H
Function code
08H
Function code
89H
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Higher
place
00H
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
00H
Lower
place
00H
Higher
place
A5H
Higher
place
A5H
Lower
place
37H
Lower
place
37H
Higher
place
DAH
Higher
place
DAH
Lower
place
8DH
Lower
place
8DH
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Error Code
CRC-16
01H
Higher
place
86H
Lower
place
50H
Writing to Multiple Storage Registers
Write the specified data to each specified storage register from the specified addresses. The written data must
be in the following order in the command message: Higher place 8 bits, then lower place 8 bits, in storage register address order.
The following table shows an example of a message when forward operation has been set at a frequency reference of 60.0 Hz in the slave 1 Inverter by the PLC.
Command Message
Slave Address
Function Code
Start
Address
Quantity
01H
10H
Higher
place
Lower
place
Higher
place
Lower
place
No. of data
Lead data
Next data
CRC-16
6-86
Higher
place
Lower
place
Higher
place
Lower
place
Higher
place
Lower
place
00H
01H
00H
02H
04H
00H
01H
02H
58H
63H
39H
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave Address
01H
Function Code
10H
Higher
00H
place
Start
Address
Lower
01H
place
Higher
00H
place
Quantity
Lower
02H
place
Higher
10H
place
CRC-16
Lower
08H
place
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address
01H
Function Code
90H
Error code
CRC-16
Higher
place
Lower
place
02H
CDH
C1H
Individual Functions
Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2. Handle
response messages in the same way.
INFO
Data Tables
The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monitor data, and broadcast
data.
Reference Data
The reference data table is shown below. You can both read and write reference data.
Register No.
0000H
Contents
Not used
Frequency reference
Bit 0
Run/stop command
1: Run 0: Stop
Bit 1
Forward/reverse operation 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bit 2
External fault
1: Error (EFO)
Bit 3
Fault reset
1: Reset command
Bit 4
ComNet
Bit 5
ComCtrl
Bit 6
Multi-function input command 3
0001H
Bit 7
Multi-function input command 4
Bit 8
Multi-function input command 5
Bit 9
Multi-function input command 6
Bit A
Multi-function input command 7
Bit B
Multi-function input command 8
Bit C
Multi-function input command 9
Bit D
Multi-function input command 10
Bit E
Multi-function input command 11
Bit F
Multi-function input command 12
0002H
Frequency reference (Set units using constant o1-03)
0003H
Not used
0004H
Torque reference
0005H
Torque compensation
0006H
PID target value
0007H
Analog output 1 setting (-11 V/-1540 to 10 V/1540)
0008H
Analog output 2 setting (-11 V/-1540 to 11 V/1540)
Multi-function contact output setting
Bit 0
Contact output (terminal M1-M2)
1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1
Contact output (terminal M3-M4)
1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2
Contact output (terminal M5-M6)
1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 3
PHC3(Contact P3-C3)
1: ON 0: OFF
0009H
Bit 4
PHC4(Contact P4-C4)
1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 5
Not used
Bit 6
Set error contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7. 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7
Error contact (terminal MA-MC)
1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 8 to F Not used
000AH to 000EH Not used
6-87
Register No.
000FH
Contents
Reference selection settings
Bit 0
Not used
Bit 1
Use MEMOBUS 0006H PID target value
Bits 2 to B Not used
C
Broadcast data terminal S5 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
D
Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
E
Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
F
Broadcast data terminal S8 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Note Write 0 to all unused bits. Also, do not write data to reserved registers.
Monitor Data
The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.
Register No.
0020H
0021H
Contents
Inverter status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bits A and B
Error details
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
0022H
0023H
0024H
0025H
0026H
0027H
0028H
6-88
Operation 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation 0: Forward operation
Inverter startup complete 1: Completed 2: Not completed
Error 1: Error
Data setting error 1: Error
Multi-function contact output 1 (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function contact output 2 (terminal M3 - M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function contact output 3 (terminal M5 - M6) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function PHC output 3 (terminal P3 - C3) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function PHC output 4 (terminal P4 - C4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Not used
Overcurrent (OC) Ground fault (GF)
Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Inverter overload (OL2)
Inverter overheat (OH1, OH2)
Injection brake transistor resistance overheat (rr, rH)
Fuse blown (PUF)
PID feedback reference lost (FbL)
External fault (EF, EFO)
Hardware error (CPF)
Motor overload (OL1), overtorque 1 (OL3) detected, or overtorque 2 (OL4) detected
PG broken wire detected (PGO), Overspeed (OS), Speed deviation (DEV)
Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2), inrush prevention circuit error (UV3), power loss
SPO output phase open, SPI output phase open
MEMOBUS communications error (CE)
Operator disconnected (OPR)
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Data link status
Bit 0
Writing data
Bit 1
Not used
Bit 2
Not used
Bit 3
Upper and lower limit errors
Bit 4
Data integrity error
Bits 5 to F
Not used
Frequency reference (U1-01)
Output frequency (U1-02)
Output voltage reference (U1-06)
Output current (U1-03)
Output power (U1-08)
Torque reference (U1-09)
Individual Functions
Register No.
0029H
002AH
002BH
002CH
002DH
002EH - 0030H
0031H
0032H
0033H
0034H - 0037H
0038H
0039H
003AH
003BH
003CH
Contents
Not used
Not used
Sequence input status
Bit 0
1: Control circuit terminal S1 ON
Bit 1
1: Control circuit terminal S2 ON
Bit 2
1: Control circuit terminal S3 ON
Bit 3
1: Control circuit terminal S4 ON
Bit 4
1: Control circuit terminal S5 ON
Bit 5
1: Control circuit terminal S6 ON
Bit 6
1: Control circuit terminal S7 ON
Bit 7
1: Control circuit terminal S8 ON
Bit 8
1: Control circuit terminal S9 ON
Bit 9
1: Control circuit terminal S10 ON
Bit A
1: Control circuit terminal S11 ON
Bit B
1: Control circuit terminal S12 ON
Bits C to F
Not used
Inverter status
Bit 0
Operation
1: Operating
Bit 1
Zero speed
1: Zero speed
Bit 2
Frequency matching
1: Matched
Bit 3
User-defined speed matching
1: Matched
Bit 4
Frequency detection 1
Bit 5
Frequency detection 2
Bit 6
Inverter startup completed
1: Startup completed
Bit 7
Low voltage detection
1: Detected
Bit 8
Baseblock
1: Inverter output baseblock
Bit 9
Frequency reference mode
1: Not communications 0: Communications
Bit A
Run command mode
1: Not communications 0: Communications
Bit B
Overtorque detection
1: Detected
Bit C
Frequency reference lost
1: Lost
Bit D
Retrying error
1: Retrying
Bit E
Error (including MEMOBUS communications time-out) 1:Error occurred
Bit F
MEMOBUS communications time-out 1: Timed out
Multi-function contact output status
Bit 0
Multi-function contact output 1 (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1
Multi-function contact output 2 (terminal M3 - M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2
Multi-function contact output 3 (terminal M5 - M6) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 3
Multi-function PHC output 3 (terminal P3 - C3) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 4
Multi-function PHC output 4 (terminal P4 - C4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 5 to F
Not used
Not used
Main circuit DC voltage
Torque monitor
Output power (U1-08)
Not used
PID feedback quantity (Input equivalent to 100%/Max. output frequency; 10/1%; without sign)
PID input quantity (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
PID output quantity (±100%/±Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
CPU software number
Flash software number
6-89
Register No.
Contents
Communications error details
Bit 0
CRC error
Bit 1
Invalid data length
Bit 2
Not used
Bit 3
Parity error
Bit 4
Overrun error
Bit 5
Framing error
Bit 6
Time-out
Bits 7 to F
Not used
kVA setting
Control method
003DH
003EH
003FH
Note Communications error details are stored until an fault reset is input (you can also reset while the Unit is operating).
Broadcast Data
The following table shows the broadcast data. You can also write this data.
Register
Address
Contents
Operation signal
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bits 2 and 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bits 6 to B
Bit C
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Frequency reference
0001H
0002H
Run command 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Reverse operation command 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Not used
External fault 1: Error (set using H1-01)
Fault reset 1: Reset command (set using H1-02)
Not used
Multi-function contact input terminal S5 input
Multi-function contact input terminal S6 input
Multi-function contact input terminal S7 input
Multi-function contact input terminal S8 input
30000/100%
Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously.
ENTER Command
When writing constants to the Inverter from the PLC using MEMOBUS communications, the constants are
temporarily stored in the constant data area in the Inverter. To enable these constants in the constant data area,
use the ENTER command.
There are two types of ENTER commands: ENTER commands that enable constant data in RAM, and
ENTER commands that write data to EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the Inverter at the same time as
enabling data in RAM.
The following table shows the ENTER command data. ENTER command data can only be written.
The ENTER command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0910H.
Register No.
0900H
Write constant data to EEPROM
0910H
Constant data is not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.
INFO
6-90
Contents
The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the Inverter is 100 thousand. Do not frequently execute ENTER commands (0900H) written to EEPROM.
The ENTER command registers are write-only. Consequently, if reading these registers, the register address
will become invalid (Error code: 02H).
Individual Functions
Error Codes
The following table shows MEMOBUS communications error codes.
Error Code
Contents
01H
Function code error
A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 10H has been set by the PLC.
02H
Invalid register number error
• The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere.
• With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0000H, 0001H, or 0002H has been set.
03H
Invalid quantity error
• The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range 1 to 16.
• In write mode, the number of data packets in the message is not No. of packets x 2.
21H
Data setting error
• A simple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing constants.
• When writing constants, the constant setting is invalid.
22H
Write mode error
• Attempting to write constants from the PLC during operation.
• Attempting to write via ENTER commands from the PLC during operation.
• Attempting to write constants other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or 02-04 when warning alarm
CPF03 (defective EEPROM) has occurred.
• Attempting to write read-only data.
23H
Writing during main circuit undervoltage (UV) error
• Writing constants from the PLC during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
• Writing via ENTER commands from the PLC during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
24H
Writing error during constants processing
Attempting to write constants from the PLC while processing constants in the Inverter.
Slave Not Responding
In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function. If the slave address specified in the command
message is 0, all slaves execute the write function, but do not return response messages to the master.
• When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
• When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Inverter do not agree.
• When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceeds 24 bits.
• When the command message data length is invalid.
Application Precautions
Set a timer in the master to monitor response time from the slaves. Make the setting so that if no response is
sent to the master from the slave within the set time, the same command message is sent again from the master.
6-91
Self-Diagnosis
The Inverter has a built-in function for self-diagnosing the operations of serial communications interface circuits. This function is called the self-diagnosis function. The self-diagnosis function connects the communications parts of the send and receive terminals, receives the data sent by the Inverter, and checks if
communications are being performed normally.
Perform the self-diagnosis function using the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter, and set 67 (communications test mode) in constant H1-05 (Terminal S7 Function Selection).
2. Turn OFF the power supply to the Inverter.
3. Perform wiring according to the following diagram while the power supply is turned OFF.
4. Turn ON the terminating resistance. (Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1.)
5. Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter again.
SC
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
Fig 6.57 Details of Communications Terminals
“Pass” will be displayed if self-diagnosis is completed without an error occurring.
If an error occurs, a CE (MEMOBUS communications error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator,
the error contact output will be turned ON, and the Inverter operation ready signal will be turned OFF.
6-92
Individual Functions
Using the Timer Function
Multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S7 can be designated as timer function input terminals, and multifunction output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and M5-M6 can be designated as timer function output terminals.
By setting the delay time, you can erase chattering from the sensors and switches.
• Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12) to 18 (timer
function input).
• Set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, and P4-C4 func-
tion selection) to 12 (timer function output).
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the timer function output
ON-delay time (dead band) for
the timer function input, in 1-second units.
Enabled when a timer function is
set in H1- or H2-.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s
Timer function Sets the timer function output
OFF-delay time OFF-delay time (dead band) for
the timer function input, in 1-second units.
Delay-OFF
Enabled when a timer function is
Timer
set in H1- or H2-.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s
Display
Timer function
ON-delay time
b4-01
b4-02
Delay-ON
Timer
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
Setting Example
When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set in b4-01, the timer output function is
turned ON. When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set in b4-02, the timer output
function is turned OFF. An example of timer function operation is given in the following diagram.
Timer function input
Timer function output
Fig 6.58 Timer Function Operation Example
6-93
Using PID Control
PID control is a method of making the feedback value (detection value) match the set target value. By combining proportional control (P), integral control (I), and derivative control (D), you can even control targets
(machinery) with play time.
The characteristics of the PID control operations are given below.
P control
Outputs the amount of operation proportional to the deviation. You cannot, however, set the
deviation to zero using P control alone.
I control
Outputs the amount of operation that integrates the deviation. Used for matching feedback
value to the target value. I control is not suited, however, to rapid variations.
D control
Outputs the amount of operation derived from the deviation. Can respond promptly to rapid
variations.
PID Control Operation
To understand the differences between each PID control operation (P, I, and D, the variation in the amount of
operation (output frequency) is as shown in the following diagram when the deviation (i.e., the difference
between the target value and feedback value) is fixed.
Deviation
Time
PID control
Amount of operation
I control
D control
P control
Time
Fig 6.59 PID Control Operation
PID Control Applications
The following table shows examples of PID control applications using the Inverter.
Application
6-94
Control Details
Example of Sensor Used
• Feeds back machinery speed information, and matches speed to the target value.
Speed Con• Inputs speed information from other machinery as the target value, and performs
trol
synchronous control using the actual speed feedback.
Tachometer generator
Pressure
Control
Feeds back pressure information, and performs constant pressure control.
Pressure sensor
Flow Rate
Control
Feeds back flow rate information, and controls the flow rate highly accurately.
Flow rate sensor
Temperature Control
Feeds back temperature information, and performs temperature adjustment control
by rotating the fan.
• Thermocouple
• Thermistor
Individual Functions
Related Constants
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Deviation is Dcontrolled.)
2: Enabled (Feedback value is Dcontrolled.)
3: PID control enabled
(frequency reference + PID
output, D control of deviation)
4: PID control enabled
(frequency reference + PID
output, D control of feedback
value).
0 to 4
0
Sets P-control proportional gain
as a percentage.
P-control is not performed when
the setting is 0.00.
0.00
to
25.00
b5-03
Integral (I) time Sets I-control integral time in 1second units.
I-control is not performed when
PID I Time
the setting is 0.0.
b5-04
Integral (I) limit Sets the I-control limit as a percentage of the maximum output
PID I Limit
frequency.
Constant
Number
Display
PID control
mode selection
b5-01
PID Mode
b5-02
Proportional
gain (P)
PID Gain
b5-05
Derivative (D)
time
PID D Time
PID limit
b5-06
b5-07
PID Limit
PID offset
adjustment
PID Offset
b5-08
PID primary
delay time constant
PID Delay
Time
b5-09
PID output
characteristics
selection
Output Level
Sel
b5-10
PID output gain
Output Gain
PID reverse
output selection
b5-11
Output Rev Sel
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
1.00
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
0.0 to
360.0
1.0 s
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
Sets D-control derivative time in
1-second units.
D-control is not performed when
the setting is 0.00.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
Sets the limit after PID-control as
a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
Sets the offset after PID-control
as a percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
Sets the time constant for low
pass filter for PID-control outputs
in 1-second units.
Not usually necessary to set.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
Select forward/reverse for PID
output.
0: PID output is forward.
1: PID output is reverse
(highlights the output code)
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
Sets output gain.
0.0 to
25.0
1.0
No
A
A
A
A
A
0: 0 limit when PID output is
negative.
1: Reverses when PID output is
negative.
0 limit when reverse prohibit is
selected using b1-04.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
6-95
Name
Constant
Number
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 2
0
0 to 100
Fb los Det Lvl
Sets the PID feedback loss detection level as a percent units, with
the maximum output frequency at
100%.
PID feedback
command loss
detection time
Sets the PID feedback loss detection level in s units.
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
0%
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.0 to
25.5
1.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
b5-15
PID sleep function operation
Set the PID sleep function start
level
level as a frequency.
PID Sleep
Level
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
b5-16
PID sleep operation delay time Set the delay time until the PID
sleep function starts in seconds.
PID Sleep Time
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
Description
Display
Selection of
PID feedback
command loss
detection
0: No detection of loss of PID
feedback.
1: Detection of loss of PID
feedback.
Operation continues during
detection, with the
malfunctioning contact not
operating.
2: Detection of loss of PID
feedback.
Coasts to stop during
detection, and fault contact
operates.
b5-12
Fb los Det Sel
b5-13
b5-14
PID feedback
command loss
detection level
Fb los Det Time
b5-17
Accel/decel
time for PID
reference
Set the accel/decel time for PID
reference in seconds.
PID SFS Time
H6-01
Pulse train
input function
selection
Pulse Input Sel
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
Name
Constant
Number
U1-24
U1-36
Display
PID feedback value
PID Feedback
PID input
volume
PID Input
U1-37
PID output
volume
PID Output
6-96
Control Methods
Description
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output
Min.
Unit
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Monitors the feedback value
when PID control is used.
10 V: Max. frequency
The input for the max. frequency (0 to ± 10 V possible)
corresponds to 100%.
0.01
%
A
A
A
A
A
PID feedback volume
Given as maximum frequency/
100%
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.01
%
A
A
A
A
A
PID control output
Given as maximum frequency/
100%
10 V: Max. frequency
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.01
%
A
A
A
A
A
Individual Functions
Name
Constant
Number
U1-38
Control Methods
Description
Display
PID command
PID command + PID command
bias
Given as maximum frequency/
PID Setpoint 100%
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output
Min.
Unit
10 V: Max. frequency
0.01
%
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-10)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
19
PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
30
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped during
PID control)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
31
PID control integral hold (ON: Hold)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
34
PID soft starter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
35
PID input characteristics switch
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-05, H3-09)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
Contents (100%)
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
B
PID feedback
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C
PID target value
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PID Control Methods
There are four PID control methods. Select the method by setting constant b5-01.
Set Value
Control Method
1
PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the difference between PID
target value and feedback value.
2
PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the PID feedback value.
3
PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the
difference between PID target value and feedback value.
4
PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the
PID feedback value.
6-97
PID Input Methods
Enable PID control using constant b5-01, and set the PID target value and PID feedback value.
PID Target Value Input Methods
Select the PID control target value input method according to the setting in b1-01 (Reference Selection).
Normally, the frequency reference selected in b1-01 is the PID target value, but you can also set the PID target
value as shown in the following table.
PID Target Input Method
Setting Conditions
Multi-Function Analog Terminal A2 Input
Set H3-05 or H3-09 to C (PID target value). Also, be sure to set H6-01 (pulse train input
function selection) to 1 (PID feedback value).
MEMOBUS register 0006H
Set MEMOBUS bit 1 in register address 000FH to 1 to be able to use register number
0006H as the PID target value.
Pulse train input
Set H6-01 to 2 (PID target value).
PID Feedback Input Methods
Select one of the following PID control feedback input methods.
Input Method
Setting Conditions
Multi-function analog input
Set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to B (PID feedback).
Pulse train input
Set H6-01 to 1 (PID feedback).
Adjust PID target value and PID feedback value using the following items.
• Analog input: Adjust using the analog input terminal gain and bias.
• Pulse train input: Adjust using pulse train scaling, pulse train input gain, and pulse train input bias.
INFO
PID Adjustment Methods
Use the following procedure to adjust PID while performing PID control and measuring the response waveform.
1. Set b5-01 (PID Control Mode Selection) to 1 or 2 (PID control enabled).
2. Increase b5-02 (Proportional Gain (P)) to within a range that does not vibrate.
3. Reduce b5-03 (Integral (I) time) to within a range that does not vibrate.
4. Increase b5-05 (Derivative (D) time) to within a range that does not vibrate.
6-98
Individual Functions
PID Fine Adjustment Methods
This section explains the fine adjustment of PID after setting the PID control constants.
Suppressing Overshoot
If overshoot occurs, reduce derivative time (D), and increase integral time (I).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition
To rapidly stabilize the control even if overshoot occurs, reduce integral time (I), and lengthen derivative time
(D).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Suppressing Long-cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time (I) set value, the integral operation is too strong.
Lengthen the integral time (I) to suppress the vibration.
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
6-99
Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs when the vibration cycle is short, and the cycle is almost identical to the derivative time (D)
set value, the differential operation is too strong. Shorten the derivative time (D) to suppress the vibration.
If vibration continues even when the derivative time (D) is set to 0.00 (D control disabled), reduce the proportional gain (P), or increase the PID primary delay time constant.
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Setting Precautions
• In PID control, the b5-04 constant is used to prevent the calculated integral control value from exceeding a
specified amount. When the load varies rapidly, Inverter response is delayed, and the machine may be
damaged or the motor may stall. In this case, reduce the set value to speed up Inverter response.
• The b5-06 constant is used to prevent the arithmetic operation following the PID control calculation from
exceeding a specified amount. Set taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
• The b5-07 constant is used to adjust PID control offset. Set in increments of 0.1%, taking the maximum
output frequency to be 100%.
• Set the low pass filter time constant for the PID control output in b5-08. Enable this constant to prevent
machinery resonance from occurring when machinery adhesive abrasion is great, or rigidity is poor. In this
case, set the constant to be greater than the resonance frequency cycle. Increase this time constant to
reduce Inverter responsiveness.
• Using b5-09, you can invert the PID output polarity. Consequently, if you increase the PID target value,
you can apply this constant to applications to lower the Inverter output frequency.
• Using b5-10, you can apply gain to the PID control output. Enable this constant to adjust the amount of
compensation if adding PID control output to the frequency reference as compensation.
• When PID control output is negative, you can use constant b5-11 to invert the Inverter. When b1-04 (Pro-
hibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (enabled), however, PID output limit is 0.
• With the Inverter, by setting an independent acceleration/deceleration time in constant b5-17, you can
increase or decrease the PID target value using the acceleration/deceleration time. The acceleration/
deceleration function (constant C1) used normally, however, is allocated after PID control, so depending
on the settings, resonance with PID control and hunting in the machinery may occur. If this happens,
reduce constant C1 until hunting does not occur, and maintain the acceleration/deceleration time using b517. Also, you can disable the set value in b5-17 from the external terminals during operation using multifunction input set value 34 (PID soft starter).
6-100
Z -1
+
−
H6-01=2
+
+
H6-01=1
b5-01=1,3
Proportional
gain (P)
b5-02
P
-1
Select multi-function inputs
PID input characteristics
−
+
PID OFF
b5-01=3,4
b5-01=1,2
b5-01=0
Z-1
+
−
1
T
Z -1
Derivative
time
b5-05
b5-01=1,3
+
+
Integral (I) time
I limit
b5-03
Store integral using
multi-function inputs
PID command (U1-38)
+
PID ON
b5-01=2,4
+
+
+
Integral rset using
multi-function inputs
Multi-function input PID control cancel
signal is ON. PID is OFF under the
following conditions:
b5-01 = 0
During JDG command input
Frequency reference
(U1-01)
PID input volume
(U1-36)
Set bit 1 of MEMOBUS
register 0FH to 1
H3-05 or
H3-09=B
0
PID SFS Cancel
b5-17
1
Frequency reference
using multi-step command
Set PID target value in
multi-function analog input
0
1
2
3,4
b5-01=2,4
b5-03
Pulse input terminal RP
Frequency reference
terminal A3 PID feedback
Terminal A2 or A3 PID
target value
MEMOBUS communications
register 06 H PID target value
Pulse input terminal RP
D1-16
D1-02
D1-01
Terminal A1
Serial Com
Option Card
b1-01
PID limit
b5-06
PID Limit
+
−
+
Lower limit
-(Fmaxx109%)
Uppwer limit
Fmax x109%
−1
T
+
+
1
Output frequency
+
PID offset
adjustment (b5-07)
-1
+
PID output
gain (b5-10)
PID output monitor
(U1-37)
1
Select PID output
characteristics selection
(b5-09)
Z -1
0
Lower limit 0
Upper limit
Fmax x109%
PID primary delay
time constant
b5-08
b5-11=1
b5-11=0
Enable/disable reverse operation
when PI output is negative
Individual Functions
PID Control Block
The following diagram shows the PID control block in the Inverter.
Fig 6.60 PID Control Block
6-101
PID Feedback Loss Detection
When performing PID control, be sure to use the PID feedback loss detection function. If PID feedback is lost,
the Inverter output frequency may accelerate to the maximum output frequency.
When setting b5-12 to 1 and the status of the PID feedback value detection level in b5-13 is insufficient and
continues for the time set in b5-14, an FbL (PID feedback reference lost) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator and Inverter operation will continue.
When b5-12 is set to 2, an FbL (PID feedback reference lost) error alarm will be displayed on the Digital
Operator, the error contact will operate, and Inverter operation will be stopped.
The time chart for PID feedback loss detection (set b5-12 to 2) is shown below.
PID feedback value
Loss detection
level
(b5-13)
Time
No FbL
detection
Loss detection time
(b5-14)
FbL detection
Loss detection time
(b5-14)
Fig 6.61 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart
PID Sleep
The PID sleep function stops the Inverter when the PID sleep function delay time continues while the PID
control target value is at an insufficient level to operate the PID sleep function. When the PID sleep delay time
continues and the PID control target value is above the PID sleep function operation level, Inverter operation
will automatically resume.
When PID control is disabled, the PID sleep function is also disabled. When using the PID sleep function,
select decelerate to stop or coast to stop as the stopping method.
The PID sleep time chart is shown below.
PID target value
Sleep operation
level b5-15
Sleep operation
delay time
Sleep operation
delay time
b5-16
Internal run command
External run command
Operating
Operation
b5-16
Stopped
Run command has been input
Operation status output
Fig 6.62 PID Sleep Time Chart
6-102
Individual Functions
Energy-saving
To perform energy saving, set b8-01 (Energy Saving Mode Selection) to 1. Energy-saving control can be performed using both V/f control and open-loop vector control. The constants to be adjusted are different for
each. In V/f control, adjust b8-04 to b8-06, and in vector control, adjust b8-02 and b8-03.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
b8-01
b8-02
b8-03
Display
Energy-saving
mode selection
Energy Save
Sel
Energy-saving
gain
Energy Save
Gain
Energy-saving
filter time constant
Energy Save
F.T
Energy-saving
coefficient
b8-04
b8-05
Energy Save
COEF
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Select whether to enable or disable energy-saving control.
0: Disable
1: Enable
0 or 1
0
Set the energy-saving gain with
the open-loop vector control
method.
0.0 to
10.0
0.7
Set the energy-saving filter time
constant with the open-loop vector control method.
0.00 to
10.0
0.50 s
0.0 to
Description
Set the maximum motor efficiency value.
Set the motor rated capacity in
E2-11, and adjust the value by 5%
at a time until output power
reaches a minimum value.
Power detection
filter time con- Set the time constant for output
stant
power detection.
655.00
0 to
2000
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
*3
*4
No
A
A
No
No
No
20 ms
No
A
A
No
No
No
0%
No
A
A
No
No
No
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
*1
*2
kW Filter Time
Search operation voltage
limiter
b8-06
Search V Limit
E2-02
E2-11
Set the limit value of the voltage
control range during search operation.
Perform search operation to optimize operations using minute
0 to 100
variations in voltage using
energy-saving control. Set to 0 to
disable the search operation.
100% is the motor base voltage.
Motor rated slip Sets the motor rated slip in Hz
units.
These set values will become the
reference values for slip compenMotor Rated
sation.
Slip
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
Motor rated
output
Mtr Rated
Power
Set the rated output of the motor
in units of 0.01 kW.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
0.00 to
20.00
2.90 Hz
0.00 to
650.00
0.40
*4
*3
* 1. The factory setting is 1.0 when using V/f control with PG.
* 2. The factory setting is 2.00 s when Inverter capacity is 55 kW min. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.)
* 3. The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the constants.
6-103
* 4. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity.
Adjusting Energy-saving Control
The method of adjustment during energy-saving control operations differs depending on the control method.
Refer to the following when making adjustments.
V/f Control
In V/f control method, the voltage for optimum motor efficiency is calculated and becomes the output voltage
reference.
• b8-04 (Energy-saving Coefficient) is set at the factory for motor use applied to the Inverter. If the motor
capacity differs from the motor applied to the Inverter, set the motor capacity in E2-11 (Motor Rated Output). Also, adjust the output voltage in steps of 5 until it reaches minimum. The larger the energy-saving
coefficient, the greater the output voltage.
• To improve response when the load fluctuates, reduce the power detection filter time constant b8-05. If b8-
05 is set too small, however, motor rotations when the load is light may become unstable.
• Motor efficiency varies due to temperature fluctuations and differences in motor characteristics. Conse-
quently, control motor efficiency online to optimize efficiency by causing minute variations in voltage
using the search operation. Constant b8-06 (Search Operation Voltage Limiter) controls the range that control the voltage using the search operation. For 200 V Class Inverters, set the range to 100%/200 V, and for
400 V Class Inverters, set the range to 100%/400 V. Set to 0 to disable the search operation.
Vector Control
In vector control method, control the slip frequency so that motor efficiency is maximized.
• Taking the motor rated slip for the base frequency as optimum slip, calculate the optimum slip for motor
efficiency for each frequency. In vector control, be sure to perform autotuning, and set the motor rated slip.
• If the motor performs hunting when using energy-saving control in vector control, reduce the set value in
b8-02 (Energy-saving Gain), or increase the set value in b8-03 (Energy-saving Filter Time Constant).
6-104
Individual Functions
Setting Motor Constants
In vector control method, the motor constants are set automatically using autotuning. If autotuning does not
complete normally, set them manually.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Motor rated
current
E2-01
E2-02
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
Motor Rated
FLA
E2-07
Motor no-load
current
No-Load Current
Number of
motor poles
Number of
Poles
Motor line-toline resistance
Term Resistance
Leak Inductance
Motor iron saturation coefficient 1
Saturation
Comp1
E2-08
Motor iron saturation coefficient 2
Saturation
Comp2
E2-10
Sets the motor rated current in 1 A
units.
These set values will become the
reference values for motor protection, torque limits and torque control.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
Motor rated slip Sets the motor rated slip in Hz
units.
These set values will become the
reference values for slip compenMotor Rated
sation.
Slip
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
Motor leak
inductance
E2-06
Description
Sets the motor no-load current in
1 A units.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.32 to
6.40
1.90 A
*2
0.00 to
20.00
0.00 to
1.89
*3
*1
2.90 Hz
*1
1.20 A
*1
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
Sets the number of motor poles.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
2 to 48
4 poles
No
No
Q
No
Q
Q
Sets the motor phase-to-phase
resistance in Ω units.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
0.000
to
65.000
9.842 Ω
No
A
A
A
A
A
Sets the voltage drop due to motor
leakage inductance as a percentage of the motor rated voltage.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
0.0 to
40.0
No
No
No
A
A
A
Sets the motor iron saturation
coefficient at 50% of magnetic
flux.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
0.00 to
0.50
0.50
No
No
No
A
A
A
Sets the motor iron saturation
coefficient at 75% of magnetic
flux.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
0.00 to
0.75
0.75
No
No
No
A
A
A
No
A
A
No
No
No
Motor iron loss
for torque compensation
Sets motor iron loss in W units.
Tcomp Iron
Loss
0 to
65535
*1
18.2%
*1
14 W
*1
* 1. The factory settings depend on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
* 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
* 3. The setting range depends on Inverter capacity (the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW).
6-105
Manual Motor Constant Setting Methods
The motor constants settings methods are given below. Make (enter) settings referring to the motor test report.
Motor Rated Voltage Setting
Set E2-01 to the rated current on the motor nameplate.
Motor Rated Slip Setting
Set E2-02 to the motor rated slip calculated from the number of rated rotations on the motor nameplate.
Amount of motor rated slip = Motor rated frequency (Hz) - No. of rated rotations (min−1) x No. of motor
poles/120.
Motor No-Load Current Setting
Set E2-03 to the motor no-load current using the rated voltage and rated frequency. The motor no-load current
is not normally written on the motor nameplate. Consult the motor manufacturer.
Factory setting is the no-load current value for a standard Yaskawa 4-pole motor.
Number of Motor Poles Setting
E2-04 is displayed only when V/f control method with PG is selected. Set the number of motor poles (number
of poles) as written on the motor nameplate.
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting
E2-05 is set automatically when performing motor line-to-line resistance autotuning. When you cannot perform tuning, consult the motor manufacturer for the line-to-line resistance value. Calculate the resistance from the line-to-line resistance value in the motor test report using the following formula, and then make the setting accordingly.
• E-type isolation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 75°C of test report] × 0.92 (Ω)
• B-type isolation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 75°C of test report] × 0.92 (Ω)
• F-type isolation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 115°C of test report] × 0.87 (Ω)
Motor Leak Inductance Setting
Set the amount of voltage drop due to motor leak inductance in E2-06 using the percentage over the motor
rated voltage. Make this setting when the high-speed motor inductance is small. If the inductance is not written on the motor nameplate, consult the motor manufacturer.
Motor Iron Saturation Coefficients 1 and 2 Settings
E2-07 and E2-08 are set automatically using autotuning.
Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Setting
E2-10 is displayed only when in V/f control method. To increase the torque compensation accuracy when in
V/f control method, set the motor iron loss in Watts.
Motor Mechanical Loss
When using flux vector control, adjust mechanical loss in the following cases. (There is normally no reason to
make this adjustment.) The mechanical loss setting is used to compensate the torque.
• There is excessive torque loss from the motor bearings.
• There is excessive torque loss from a fan, pump, etc.
6-106
Individual Functions
Setting the V/f Pattern
In V/f control method, you can set the Inverter input voltage and the V/f pattern as the need arises.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
E1-01
E1-03
E1-04
Name
Display
Description
Input voltage setting
Set the Inverter input voltage in 1 volt.
This setting is used as a reference value
Input Voltage in protection functions.
V/f pattern
selection
V/F Selection
0 to E: Select from the 15 preset
patterns.
F: Custom user-set patterns (Applicable
for settings E1-04 to E1-10.)
Max. output
frequency
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
Mid Voltage
A
E1-09
E1-10
Output voltage (V)
Min. output
frequency
Min
Frequency
Min. output
frequency
voltage
Min Voltage
F
40.0 to
60.0 Hz
0.0 to
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/f characteristics in a straight
line, set the same values for E1-07 and
E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-08
will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies
are set in the following manner:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07
(FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
*1
0 to F
400.0*5
Mid. output
frequency
Mid. output
frequency
voltage
200 V
*1
*1
Base
Frequency
Mid
Frequency A
155 to
255
0.0 to
255.0
Max Voltage
Base
frequency
Factory
Setting
400.0*5
Max
Frequency
Max. voltage
E1-05
Setting
Range
*2
200.0 V
*1*2
60.0 Hz
*2
0.0 to
400.0
3.0 Hz
0.0 to
11.0 V
255.0 *1
0.0 to
400.0*5
0.0 to
255.0
*1
*2
*1 *2
0.5 Hz
*2
2.0 V
*1 *2
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
Q
Q
No
No
No
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
A
A
A
No
No
No
A
A
A
No
No
No
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
No
A
A
A
No
No
6-107
Constant
Number
E1-11
E1-12
E1-13
*
*
*
*
*
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Name
Description
Display
Mid. output
frequency 2
Factory
Setting
0.0 to
0.0 Hz
400.0*5
Mid
Frequency B
Mid. output
frequency
voltage 2
Setting
Range
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the output
range. Normally, this setting is not
required.
0.0 to
255.0
Mid Voltage
B
*1
Base voltage
0.0 to
255.0
Base Voltage
*3
0.0 V
*3
0.0 V
*4
*1
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
Q
Q
Q
These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Open-loop vector control factory settings are given.)
The contents of constants E1-11 and E1-12 are ignored when set to 0.00.
E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
The setting range is 0 to 66.0 for open-loop vector control 2.
Setting Inverter Input Voltage
Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1-01 to match the power supply voltage. This set value will be the
standard value for the protection function and similar functions.
Setting V/f Pattern
Set the V/f pattern in E1-03 when using V/f control (with or without a PG). There are two methods of setting
the V/f pattern: Select one of the 15 pattern types (set value: 0 to E) that have been set beforehand, or set a
user-defined V/f pattern (set value: F).
The factory setting for E1-03 is F. The contents of E1-03 when factory-set to F are the same as when E1-03 is
set to 1.
To select one of the existing patterns, refer to the following table.
Characteristic
Constant Torque
Characteristic
Variable torque
characteristic
6-108
Application
This pattern is used in general applications.
Used when the load torque is fixed, regardless of rotation speed, for linear transport
systems.
This pattern is used for loads with torque
proportional to two or three times the rotation speed, such as fans and pumps.
Set
Value
Specifications
0
50 Hz specifications
1 (F)
60 Hz specifications
2
60 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
50 Hz
3
72 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
4
50 Hz specifications,× 3 decrement
5
50 Hz specifications, × 2 decrement
6
60 Hz specifications, × 3 decrement
7
60 Hz specifications, × 2 decrement
Individual Functions
Characteristic
High Startup
Torque (See
Note)*
Fixed Output
Operation
Application
Select the high startup torque V/f pattern
only in the following cases.
• The wiring distance between Inverter and
motor is large (approx. 150 m min.)
• A large torque is required at startup (elevator loads, etc.)
• An AC reactor is inserted in the Inverter
input or output.
• You are operating a motor that is less
than optimum.
This pattern is used for frequencies of 60
Hz or higher. A fixed voltage is applied.
Set
Value
Specifications
8
50 Hz specifications, medium startup
torque
9
50 Hz specifications, large startup torque
A
60 Hz specifications, medium startup
torque
B
60 Hz specifications, large startup torque
C
90 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
D
120 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
E
180 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
* The torque is protected by the fully automatic torque boost function, so normally there is no need to use this pattern.
When you select these patterns, the values of constants E1-04 to E1-10 are changed automatically. There are
three types of values for E1-04 to E1-10, depending on the Inverter capacity.
• 0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f pattern
• 2.2 to 45 kW V/f pattern
• 55 to 300 kW V/f pattern
The characteristics diagrams for each are shown in the following pages.
6-109
0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by
2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0
50 Hz
Set Value 1
60 Hz
(Initial value of set value F)
Set Value 2
60 Hz
Set Value 3
72 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value 6
60 Hz
Set Value 7
60 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value A
60 Hz
Set Value B
60 Hz
Set Value E
180 Hz
• Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4
50 Hz
Set Value 5
• High startup torque (Set value 8: to b)
Set Value 8
50 Hz
Set Value 9
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C
6-110
90 Hz
Set Value D
120 Hz
Individual Functions
2.2 to 45 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by
2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0
50 Hz
Set Value 1
60 Hz
Set Value 2
60 Hz
Set Value 3
72 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value 6
60 Hz
Set Value 7
60 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value A
60 Hz
Set Value B
60 Hz
Set Value E
180 Hz
(Initial value of set value F)
• Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4
50 Hz
Set Value 5
• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to b)
Set Value 8
50 Hz
Set Value 9
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C
90 Hz
Set Value D
120 Hz
6-111
55 to 300 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by
2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0
50 Hz
Set Value 1
60 Hz
Set Value 2
60 Hz
Set Value 3
72 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value 6
60 Hz
Set Value 7
60 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value A
60 Hz
Set Value B
60 Hz
Set Value E
180 Hz
(Initial value of set value F)
• Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4
50 Hz
Set Value 5
• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to b)
Set Value 8
50 Hz
Set Value 9
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C
6-112
90 Hz
Set Value D
120 Hz
Individual Functions
When E1-03 is set to F (User-defined V/f pattern), you can set constants E1-04 to E1-10. If E1-03 is set to
anything other than F, you can only refer to constants E1-04 to E1-10. If the V/f characteristics are linear, set
E1-07 and E1-09 to the same value. In this case, E1-08 will be ignored.
Output voltage (V)
E1-05
(VMAX)
E1-13
(V Base)
E1-08
(VC)
E1-10
(VMIN)
E1-09
(FMIN)
E1-07
(FB)
E1-06
(FA)
E1-04
(FMAX)
Frequency (Hz)
Fig 6.63 User-Set V/f Pattern
Setting Precautions
When the setting is to user-defined V/f pattern, beware of the following points.
• When changing control method, constants E1-07 to E1-10 will change to the factory settings for that
control method.
• Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
6-113
Torque Control
With flux vector control or open-loop vector control 2, the motor's output torque can be controlled by a torque
reference from an analog input. Set d5-01 to 1 to control torque.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Speed control (C5-01 to C507)
1: 0 to -10 V, no lower limit
To use the function for switching
between speed and torque control,
set to 0 and set the multi-function
input to “speed/torque control
change.”
0 or 1
0
Set the torque reference filter primary delay time in ms units.
This function can be used to
adjust the noise of the torque control signal or the responsiveness
with the host controller. When
oscillation occurs during torque
control, increase the set value.
0 to
1000
Set the speed limit command
method for the torque control
mode.
1: The analog input limit from a
frequency reference
Speed Limit Sel
2: Limited by d5-04 constant setting values.
Display
Torque control
selection
d5-01
Torq Control
Sel
Torque
reference delay
time
d5-02
Torq Ref Filter
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
No
No
A
A
0 ms*
No
No
No
No
A
A
1 or 2
1
No
No
No
No
A
A
-120 to
+120
0%
No
No
No
No
A
A
0 to 120
10%
No
No
No
No
A
A
Speed limit
selection
d5-03
Speed limit
d5-04
d5-05
6-114
Speed Lmt
Value
Set the speed limit during torque
control as a percentage of the
maximum output frequency.
This function is enabled when d503 is set to 2. Directions are as
follows:
+: Run command direction
-: Opposite of run command
Speed limit bias Set the speed limit bias as a percentage of the maximum output
frequency.
Bias is applied to the specified
Speed Lmt Bias speed limit. It can be used to
adjust the margin for the speed
limit.
Individual Functions
Name
Constant
Number
d5-06
H3-04
Display
Signal level
selection (terminal A3)
Multi-function
analog input
(terminal A3)
Terminal A3
Sel
H3-06
H3-07
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to
1000
0 ms
0 or 1
Select from the functions listed in
the following table. Refer to the
next page.
Gain (terminal
A3)
Terminal A3
Gain
Bias (terminal
A3)
Terminal A3
Bias
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
No
No
A
A
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
0 to 1F
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
Sets the input gain (level) when
terminal 16 is 10 V.
Set according to the 100% value
selected from H3-05.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
Sets the input gain (level) when
terminal 16 is 0 V.
Set according to the 100% value
selected from H3-05.
-100.0 to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
0 to 2
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
0 to 1F
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
Description
Speed/torque
Set the delay time from inputting
control
the multi-function input “speed/
switching timer torque control change” (from ON
to OFF or OFF to ON) until the
control is actually changed in ms
units.
This function is enabled when the
multi-function input “speed/
torque control change” is set. In
Ref Hold Time the speed/torque control switching timer, the analog inputs hold
the values of when the “speed/
torque control change” changes.
Always be sure to allow time for
this process to finish completely.
Term A3 Signal
H3-05
Setting
Range
0: 0 to ±10 V
[11-bit + polarity (positive/
negative) input]
1: 0 to ±10 V
0: Limit negative frequency settings for gain and bias settings
to 0.
1: Do not limit negative frequency settings for gain and
bias settings to 0 (i.e., allow
reverse operation).
2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
Term A2 Signal Switch current and voltage input
using the switch on the control
panel.
Multi-function
analog input
terminal A2
signal level
selection
H3-08
H3-09
Multi-function
analog input
terminal A2
function selection
Select multi-function analog input
function for terminal A2. Refer to
the next table.
Terminal A2
Sel
Gain (terminal
A2)
H3-10
Terminal A2
Gain
Sets the input gain (level) when
terminal 14 is 10 V (20 mA).
Set according to the 100% value
for the function set for H3-09.
6-115
Name
Constant
Number
Bias (terminal
A2)
H3-11
Description
Display
Terminal A2
Bias
Sets the input gain (level) when
terminal 14 is 0 V (4 mA).
Set according to the 100% value
for the function set for H3-09.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
* Factory settings will change if the control mode is changed.
Multi-function Contact Input Functions (H1-01 to H1-10)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
71
Speed/torque control change (ON: Torque control)
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
78
Polarity reverse command for external torque reference
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Multi-function Contact Output Functions (H2-01 to H2-05)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
32
Function
Speed control circuit operating for torque control (except when stopped).
The external torque reference will be limited if torque control is selected.
Output when the motor is rotating at the speed limit.
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Multi-function Analog Inputs (H3-05, H3-09)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
0
Add to terminal A1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
13
Torque reference/torque limit at speed control
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
14
Torque compensation
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Monitor Function
Name
Constant
Number
U1-09
6-116
Display
Torque reference
Control Methods
Description
Monitor in internal torque
reference value for vector
Torque Refer- control.
ence
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output
Min.
Unit
10 V: Motor rated torque
(0 to ± 10 V possible)
0.1%
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
A
A
A
Individual Functions
Inputting Torque References and Torque Reference Directions
The torque reference can be changed according to an analog input by setting H3-09 (Multi-function analog
input terminal A2 selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function analog input terminal A3 selection) to 13 (torque reference) or 14 (torque compensation). The torque reference input methods are listed in the following table.
Torque Reference Input
Method
Reference Location
Between A3 and AC
Selection
Method
H3-04 = 1
H3-05 = 13
Set H3-04 to 0 for a 0 to 10-V torque reference.
To switch the torque reference between
positive and negative torque, set a multifunction analog input to 78.
H3-08 = 1
H3-09 = 13
Set H3-08 to 0 for a 0 to 10-V torque reference.
To switch the torque reference between
positive and negative torque, set a multifunction analog input to 78.
The input can be used for torque compensation by setting H3-09 to 14.
Voltage input (0 to ±10 V)
Between A2 and AC
(Turn OFF pin 2 of
SW1.)
Remarks
Current input (4 to 20 mA)
Between A2 and AC
(Turn ON pin 2 of
SW1.)
H3-08 = 2
H3-09 = 13
To switch the torque reference between
positive and negative torque, set a multifunction analog input to 78.
The input can be used for torque compensation by setting H3-09 to 14.
Option Card (AI-14B)
(0 to ±10 V)
F2-01 = 0
Between TC2 and TC4 H3-08 = 1
H3-09 = 13
The input can be used for torque compensation by setting H3-05 to 14.
The direction of the torque output from the motor will be determined by the sign of the analog signal input. It
does not depend on the direction of the run command. The direction of torque will be as follows:
• Positive analog reference: Torque reference for forward motor rotation (counterclockwise as viewed from
the motor output axis).
• Negative analog reference: Torque reference for reverse motor rotation (clockwise as viewed from the
motor output axis).
Application Precautions
If the analog signal input level is 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA, a forward torque reference will not be applied. To
apply reverse torque, use an input level of -10 V to 10 V or switch the direction using a multi-function input
set to 78 (polarity reverse command for external torque reference).
6-117
Torque compensation
from analog input
Torque reference
from analog input
Torque primary delay
filter
d5-02
+
Speed limit from analog
input from terminal A1
1
+
Speed limit
d5-04
−
Priority
circuit
Speed controller
(ASR)
Internal torque
reference
Torque limit
+
+
Refer to torque limit setting
via constants and analog input
2
d5-03
Speed limit bias
d5-05
Speed limiter
Speed feedback
Fig 6.64 Torque Control Block Diagram
Speed Limiter and Priority Circuit (Speed Limit Function)
If the external torque reference and load are not balanced during torque control, the motor will accelerate in
either the forward or reverse direction. The speed limit function is used to limit the speed to a specified value
and it consists of the speed limiter circuit and priority circuit. The speed limit circuit
Application Precautions
There are two ways to set a speed limit: using an input from an analog input terminal and setting a speed limit
in d5-04. The inputs methods for a speed limit are listed in the following table.
Speed Limit Input Method
Location of Reference
Constant Settings
Set in d5-04
d5-03 = 2
Between A1 and AC
b1-01 = 1
H3-01 = 1
Voltage input (0 to ±10 V)
6-118
Remarks
Set H3-01 to 0 if the speed limit is always
to be positive.
Between A2 and AC
b1-01 = 0
H3-08 = 1
H3-09 = 1
The value will be added to the value input
on A1 to determine the speed limit.
Set H3-03 to 0 if the speed limit input on
A2 is always to be positive.
Turn OFF (V side) pin 2 of DIP switch S1
on the terminal board.
Current input (4 to 20 mA)
Between A2 and AC
b1-01 = 0
H3-08 = 2
H3-09 = 1
The value will be added to the value input
on A1 to determine the speed limit.
Turn ON (I side) pin 2 of DIP switch S1
on the terminal board.
Option Card (AI-4B)
(0 to ±10 V)
b1-01 = 3
Between TC1 and TC4
F2-01 = 0
If H3-09 is set to 0, the sum of the input
between TC2 and TC4 will be added the
input between TC1 and TC4 to determine
the speed limit.
Individual Functions
The direction in which speed is controlled is determined by the sign of the speed limit signal and the direction
of the run command.
• Positive voltage applied: The speed in the forward direction will be limited for forward operation.
IMPORTANT
• Negative voltage applied: The speed in the reverse direction will be limited for reverse operation.
If the direction of motor rotation and the command direction are not the same, speed will be limited to 0 as
long as b5-05 is set to 0.
Speed Limit Bias Setting
The speed limit bias can be set to limit both the forward and reverse speed to the same value. This differs from
the operation of the speed limit setting. To use the speed limit bias, set d5-04 to 0 and set the bias in d5-05 as a
percentage of the maximum output frequency.
To set 50% forward and reverse speed limits, set the speed limit setting to 0 (d5-03 = 2, d5-04 = 0, and d5-05
= 50). The range of torque control will be from -50% to 50% of the maximum output speed.
When using both the speed limit and the speed limit bias, the range of torque control will be positive and negative speed limits with the speed limit bias added to each.
The range of torque control when the forward speed limit is 50% and the speed limit bias is 10% is shown in
the following figure. This figure does not take the priority circuit into account.
Positive torque
Speed limit bias
d5-05
Forward
operation
Reverse
operation
Forward speed limit
50%
Negative torque
Fig 6.65 Speed Limit Bias Setting
Torque Limit Operation Examples
Operation examples will be described separately for winding operation, in which the speed and motor torque
are in the same directions, and rewinding operation, in which the speed and motor torque are in opposite directions.
Winding Operation
In a winding operation, the line (speed) and torque generated by the motor are in the same direction. For the
winding operation, both the speed limit and the torque reference input are positive. The motor will accelerate
when the torque reference input is larger than the load and will decelerate when it is smaller than the load. If
the motor turns faster than the speed limit, a negative compensation value is output from the speed limiter circuit. When the speed then drops below the speed limit, a positive compensation value is output. The torque
compensation is proportional to the ASR proportional gain. When the sum of the torque reference and the
torque compensation output by the speed limiter is the same as the actual load, the motor will stop accelerating
and run at a constant speed.
6-119
Rewinding Operation
In a rewinding operation, the line (speed) and torque generated by the motor are in the opposite directions. (In
this example, we’ll assume that the line speed is positive and the torque reference input is negative.) For the
rewinding operation, the speed limit is positive and the torque reference input is negative. If the motor turns
faster than the speed limit, a negative compensation value is output from the speed limiter circuit. If the motor
is rotating in reverse, a negative compensation value is output. If the speed is 0 or is below the speed limit, a 0
compensation value is output. In this way, the output from the speed limiter is used to maintain the motor
speed between 0 and the speed limit. When the sum of the torque reference and the torque compensation output by the speed limiter is the same as the actual load, the motor will stop accelerating and run at a constant
speed.
Winding Operation
Rewinding Operation
N
M
Normal Rotation
Direction
T
X
Line direction
Configuration
T
Forward
X
N
Line direction
M
Motor
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
Torque Reference
Polarity (TREF)
Speed Limit Polarity (SLIM)
Torque
limit
Torque
limit
Torque
Torque
Torque
limit
Torque
limit
Torque
SLIM
-(d5-05)
Generated Torque
0
-(d5-05)
SLIM
(d5-05)
0
Speed
Torque
TREF
TREF
Speed
0
Speed
SLIM
0
Speed
SLIM
TREF
TREF
Torque
limit
TREF(%)
C5-01
Torque
limit
(d5-05)
Torque
limit
Torque
limit
TREF(%)
C5-01
TREF(%)
C5-01
d5-05(%)
The smaller
of these
TREF(%)
C5-01
d5-05(%)
The smaller
of these
Torque Reference Adjustment
Consider the following information when adjusting the torque.
Torque Reference Delay Time: d5-02
The time constant of the primary filter in the torque reference section can be adjusted. This constant is used to
eliminate noise in the torque reference signal and adjust the responsiveness to the host controller. Increase the
setting if oscillation occurs during torque control.
Setting the Torque Compensation
Set multi-function analog input A2 or A3 to torque compensation (setting 14). When the amount of torque loss
for mechanical loss or other factor at the load is input to one of these terminals, it is added to the torque reference to compensate for the loss. The direction of torque will be as follows:
• Positive voltage (current): Torque compensation reference for forward motor rotation (counterclockwise as
viewed from the motor output axis).
6-120
Individual Functions
• Negative voltage: Torque compensation reference for reverse motor rotation (clockwise as viewed from
the motor output axis).
Since the polarity of the voltage input determines the direction, only forward torque compensation can be
input when the 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA signal level has been selected. If you want to input reverse torque compensation, be sure to select the 0 to ±10 V signal level.
Speed/Torque Control Switching Function
It is possible to switch between speed control and torque control when one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01
to H1-10) is set to 71 (Speed/Torque Control Change). Speed control is performed when the input is OFF and
torque control is performed when the input is ON. Set d5-01 to switch speed/torque control.
Setting the Speed/Torque Control Switching Timer
The delay between a change in the speed/control switching function input (ON to OFF or OFF to ON) and the
corresponding change in the control mode can be set in d5-06. During the timer delay, the value of the 3 analog inputs will retain the values they had when the ON/OFF status of speed/torque control switching signal
was changed. Use this delay to complete any changes required in external signals.
Application Precautions
• The frequency reference (during speed control) is set in b1-01. The speed limit during torque control is set
in d5-03.
• If the torque reference has been assigned to a multi-function analog input, terminal A2, or terminal A3, the
input function changes when the control mode is switched between torque control and speed control.
During speed control: The analog input terminal is used as the torque limit input.
During torque control: The analog input terminal is used as the torque reference input.
• When the run command turns OFF, the control method when stopped will be for speed control. Even from
the torque control mode, the system will automatically change to speed control and decelerate to a stop
when the run command turns OFF.
• When A1-02 (control method selection) is set to 3 (flux vector control), the speed/torque change command
(a setting of 71) can be set for a multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-10) to switch between speed and torque
control during operation. An example is shown below.
Terminal No.
User Constant No.
Factory Setting
Setting
8
H1-06
8
71
Speed/torque control change
b1-01
1
1
Frequency reference selection
(terminals A1, A2)
C5-03
1
1
Speed limit (terminals A1, A2)
H3-05
0
13
Torque reference/torque limit
A1
A3
Function
6-121
A timing chart for switching between speed and torque control is shown in the following figure.
CLOSED
CLOSED
OPEN
Speed/torque change signal
(terminal S8 input)
OPEN
Run
Run command
Stop
Control mode
Speed
Torque
Speed
Torque
Speed limit
Speed limit
Terminal A1 input
Terminal A3 input
Speed (decel to stop)
Speed
reference
Speed
reference
Torque limit
Torque limit
Torque
reference
Torque
reference
Fig 6.66 Speed/Torque Control Switching Time Chart.
Speed Control (ASR) Structure
Speed control (ASR) during vector control adjusts the torque reference so that the deviation between the
speed reference and the estimated speed (PG feedback or speed estimator) is 0. Speed control (ASR) during V/
f control with a PG adjusts the output frequency so that the deviation between the speed reference and the estimated speed (PG feedback or speed estimator) is 0. The following block diagram shows the structure of the
speed control for vector or V/f control with a PG.
Torque limits
C5-0, C5-03
Frequency
reference
+
+
−
I
limit
I
Torque reference
Primary
filter
P
+
C5-06
L7-01 to L7-04
Detected speed
Estimated speed
C5-08
C5-02, C5-04
Speed Control Block Diagram for Vector Control
Output frequency
+
Frequency
reference
+
Limit
Detected speed
−
+
Change
rate
limiter
+
P
+
I
C5-01
C5-03
C5-05
C5-02, C5-04
Speed Control Block Diagram for V/f Control with a PG
Fig 6.67 Speed Control Block Diagrams
6-122
Individual Functions
Related Constants
Constant
Number
C5-01
C5-02
Name
ASR proportional gain 1
ASR P Gain
1
ASR integral (I) time
1
ASR I Time
1
C5-03
C5-04
ASR proportional gain 2
ASR P Gain
2
ASR limit
C5-06
ASR Limit
ASR primary delay
time
ASR Delay
Time
C5-07
ASR switching frequency
ASR Gain
SW Freq
C5-08
Sets the proportional gain of the speed loop
(ASR.)
Sets the integral time of the speed loop
(ASR) in 1-second units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Set to change the rotational speed gain.
ASR integral (I) limit
ASR I Limit
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
No
A
No
A
A
Yes
No
A
No
A
A
Yes
No
A
No
A
A
Yes
No
A
No
A
A
No
No
A
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A
A*1
0.0
No
No
No
No
A
A
400
No
No
No
No
A
A
20.00
0.000
to
10.000
0.00 to
300.00
*2
Control Methods
V/f
with
PG
0.00 to
300.00
*2
Change
during
Operation
V/f
Factory
Setting
*1
0.500
s*1
20.00
*1
P, I
P=C5-01
I=C5-02
ASR integral (I) time
2
ASR I Time
2
C5-05
Description
Display
Setting
Range
P=C5-03
I=C5-04
0
E1-04
Motor speed (Hz)
0.000
to
10.000
Sets the upper limit for the compensation
frequency for the speed control loop (ASR)
to a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
20.0
Sets the filter time constant, the time from
the speed loop to the torque command output, in units of 1-second.
Usually setting is not necessary.
0.000
to
0.500
Set the frequency for switching between
Proportion Gain 1, 2 and Integral Time 1, 2
in Hz units.
Speed control (ASR) proportional gain
switching for a multi-function input takes
priority.
0.0 to
400.0
Set the upper limit of the speed control loop
integral as a percentage of the value at the
0 to 400
rated load.
0.500
s*1
5.0%
0.004
*1
* 1. When the control method is changed, the Inverter reverts to factory settings. (Refer to section on constants with factory setting that depend on the control mode.)
* 2. The setting range is 1.00 to 3.00 for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 2.
Multi-function Contact Input Functions (H1-01 to H1-10)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
D
Function
Speed control disable setting for V/f control with PG
OFF: Use speed control V/f control with PG
ON: Do not use speed control for V/f control with PG
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
Yes
No
No
No
6-123
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
E
Speed control integral reset
Enables switching between PI and P control for the speed control loop.
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
77
Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (switching between C5-01 and C5-03)
OFF: Use proportional gain in C5-01
ON: Use proportional gain in C5-03
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Speed Control (ASR) Gain Adjustment for Vector Control
Use the following procedure to adjust C5-01 and C5-03 with the mechanical system and actual load connected.
At zero-speed, increase C5-01
(ASR P Gain 1) until there is no oscillation.
At zero-speed, decrease C5-02
(ASR I Time 1) until there is no oscillation.
Does oscillation develop when the motor
operates at the maximum normal operating
speed?
YES
Decrease C5-01 (ASR P Gain 1).
NO
Adjustment completed.
(When there is higher-level position control,
adjust the position loop gain so that
overshooting/undershooting doesn’t occur.)
Increase C5-02 (ASR I Time 1).
Fine Adjustments
When you want even finer gain adjustment, adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform. Constant settings like those shown in the following table will be necessary to monitor the speed waveform.
Constant
No.
Name
Setting
H4-01
Multi-function analog output 1 terminal FM monitor selection
2
H4-02
Multi-function analog output 1 terminal FM output gain
1.00
H4-03
Multi-function analog output 1 terminal FM bias
0.0
H4-04
Multi-function analog output 2 terminal AM monitor selection
H4-05
Multi-function analog output 2 terminal AM output gain
1.00
H4-06
Multi-function analog output 2 terminal AM bias selection
0.00
H4-07
Multi-function analog output 1 terminal signal level selection
1
H4-08
Multi-function analog output 2 terminal signal level selection
1
5
Explanation
Settings that allow multi-function analog output 1 to be used
to monitor the output frequency.
Settings that allow multi-function analog output 2 to be used
to monitor the motor speed.
Settings that allow a 0 to ±10 V
signal range to be monitored.
The multi-function analog outputs have the following functions with these constant settings.
• Multi-function analog output 1 (terminal FM): Outputs Inverter's output frequency (0 to ±10 V).
• Multi-function analog output 2 (terminal AM): Outputs actual motor speed (0 to ±10 V).
6-124
Individual Functions
Terminal AC is the multi-function analog output common.
We recommend monitoring both the output frequency and the motor speed to monitor the response delay or
deviations from the reference value, as shown in the following diagram.
Adjusting ASR Proportional Gain 1 (C5-01)
This gain setting adjusts the responsiveness of the speed control (ASR). The responsiveness is increased when
this setting is increased. Usually this setting is higher for larger loads. Oscillation will occur if this setting is
increased too much.
The following diagram shows the type of changes that can occur in the response when the ASR proportional
gain is changed.
Motor speed
The proportional gain is high.
(Oscillation occurs when the gain is too high.)
The proportional gain is low.
Time
Fig 6.68 Responsiveness for Proportional Gain
Adjusting ASR Integral Time 1 (C5-02)
This constant sets the speed control (ASR) integral time.
Lengthening the integral time lowers the responsiveness, and weakens the resistance to external influences.
Oscillation will occur if this setting is too short. The following diagram shows the type of changes that can
occur in the response when the ASR integral time is changed.
Motor speed
Short integral time
Long integral time
Time
Fig 6.69 Responsiveness for Integral Time
6-125
Different Gain Settings for Low-speed and High-speed
Switch between low-speed and high-speed gain when oscillation occurs because of resonance with the
mechanical system at low speed or high speed. The proportional gain P and integral time I can be switched
according to the motor speed, as shown below.
P = C5-01
I = C5-02
P, I
P = C5-03
I = C5-04
C5-07
0
(Low speed)
Motor speed (Hz)
If C5-07 is set to 0, P = C5-01 and I = C5-02.
Fig 6.70 Low-speed and High-speed Gain Settings
Setting the Gain Switching Frequency (C5-07)
Set the switching frequency to about 80% of the motor operating frequency or the frequency at which oscillation occurs.
Low-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-03, C5-04)
Connect the actual load and adjust these constants at zero-speed. Increase C5-03 (ASR proportional gain 2)
until there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-04 (ASR integral time 2) until there is no oscillation.
High-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-01, C5-02)
Adjust these constants at normal operating speed. Increase C5-01 (ASR proportional gain 1) until there is no
oscillation. Decrease C5-02 (ASR integral time 1) until there is no oscillation. Refer to Fine Adjustments on
page 6 - 124 for details on making fine adjustments of high-speed operation.
ASR Proportional Gain Switch Setting
When one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 to H1-10) is set to 77, the input can be used to switch between
C5-01 (proportional gain 1) and C5-03 (proportional gain 2). Proportional gain 2 is used when the multi-function input is ON. This input has higher priority than the ASR switching frequency set in C5-07.
ON
ASR Gain Switch signal
(a multi-function input)
OFF
Proportional gain
determined
by motor speed.
Proportional gain (P)
C5-03 gain setting
C5-02
C5-02
The gain is changed linearly in integral time 1 (C5-02).
Fig 6.71 ASR Proportional Gain Switch
6-126
Individual Functions
Gain Adjustment for Speed Control during V/f Control with PG
When using V/f control with PG, set the proportional gain (P) and the integral time (I) at E1-09 (minimum output frequency) and E1-04 (maximum output frequency). Fig 6.72 Speed Control Gain Integral Time Adjustment for V/f Control with PG shows how the proportional gain and integral time change in linear fashion based
on the speed.
P and I setting
P = C5-01
I = C5-02
P = C5-03
I = C5-04
0
E1-09
Min. output frequency
Motor speed (Hz)
E1-04
Max. output frequency
Fig 6.72 Speed Control Gain Integral Time Adjustment for V/f Control with PG
Gain Adjustments at Minimum Output Frequency
Operate the motor at the minimum output frequency. Increase C5-03 (ASR proportional gain 2) to a level
where there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-04 (ASR integral time 2) to a level where there is no oscillation.
Monitor the Inverter's output current and verify that it is less than 50% of the Inverter rated current. If the output current exceeds 50% of the Inverter's rated current, decrease C5-03 and increase C5-04.
Gain Adjustments at Maximum Output Frequency
Operate the motor at the maximum output frequency. Increase C5-01 (ASR proportional gain 1) to a level
where there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-02 (ASR integral time 1) to a level where there is no oscillation.
Fine Adjustments
When you want even finer gain adjustment, adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform. The adjustment method is the same as that for vector control.
Enable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration (by setting F1-07 to 1) when you want the
motor speed to closely follow the frequency reference during acceleration and deceleration. Reduce the setting
of C5-01 if overshooting occurs during acceleration, and reduce the setting of C5-03 and increase the setting
of C5-04 if undershooting occurs when stopping. If overshooting and undershooting cannot be eliminated by
adjusting only the gain, reduce the value of C5-05 speed control and reduce the limit of the frequency reference compensation value.
Droop Control Function
Droop control is a function that allows the user to set the amount of motor slip.
When a single load is operated with two motors (such as in a crane conveyor), a high-resistance motor is normally used. This is to use torque characteristics that exhibit proportion movements due to changes in the secondary resistor to maintain torque balance with the load and overall speed balance with the load.
If droop control is used, a high-resistance motor characteristics can be set for a general-purpose motor.
6-127
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Display
Factory
Setting
0.0 to
100.0
0.0
0.03 to
2.00
0.05 s
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
No
No
No
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
Droop control
gain
b7-01
b7-02
Sets the slip as a percentage of
maximum frequency when the
maximum output frequency is
specified and the rated torque
occurs.
Droop Quantity Droop-control is not performed
when the setting is 0.0.
Setting
Range
Change
during
Operation
Droop control
delay time
Droop Delay
Time
Droop control responsiveness
constant
When hunting or oscillation
occurs, increase the value.
Setting Precautions
• Droop control is disabled if b7-01 is set to 0.0.
• Set b7-01 to the amount of slip as the percentage of slip when the maximum output frequency is input and
the rated torque is generated.
• Constant b7-02 is used to adjust the responsiveness of droop control. Increase this setting if oscillation or
hunting occur.
Setting the Droop Control Gain
Set the droop control gain as the speed reduction at a 100% motor torque, as a percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
Torque
b7-01
100%
Speed
0
Speed reference
Fig 6.73 Droop Control Gain
Zero-servo Function
The zero-servo function holds the motor when the motor is stopped in what is call a zero-servo status. This
function can be used to stop the motor even with an external force acts on the motor or the analog reference
input is offset.
6-128
Individual Functions
The zero-servo function is enabled when one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 to H1-10) is set to 72 (zero
servo command). If the zero servo command is ON when the frequency (speed) reference falls below the zero
speed level, a zero-servo status is implemented.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
b2-01
Zero speed
level (DC injection braking
starting frequency)
DCInj Start
Freq
b9-01
Description
Used to set the frequency which
starts DC injection braking in
units of Hz when deceleration to
stop is selected.
When b2-01 is less than E1-09,
E1-09 becomes the DC injection
braking starting frequency.
(For flux vector control, zerospeed control from B2-01)
Zero-servo gain Adjust the strength of the zeroservo lock.
Enabled when the zero-servo
command is set for a multi-function input. When the zero-servo
command has been input and the
frequency reference drop below
Zero Servo
excitation level (b2-01), a posiGain
tion control loop is created and
the motor stops. Increasing the
zero-servo gain in turn increases
the strength of the lock. Increasing it by too much will cause
oscillation.
Zero-servo
completion
width
b9-02
Zero Servo
Count
Sets the output width of the Plock completion signal.
Enabled when the “zero-servo
completion (end)” is set for a
multi-function input. The zeroservo completion signal is ON
when the current position is
within the range (the zero-servo
position + zero-servo completion
width.)
Set the allowable position displacement from the zero-servo
position to 4 times the pulse rate
of the PG (pulse generator,
encoder) in use.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 Hz
0 to 100
0 to
16383
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
5
No
No
No
No
A
No
10
No
No
No
No
A
No
Multi-function Contact Input Functions (H1-01 to H1-10)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
72
Function
Zero-servo command (ON: Zero-servo)
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
No
Yes
No
6-129
Multi-function Contact Output Functions (H2-01 to H2-03)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
33
Function
Zero-servo end
ON: Current position is within zero-servo start position ± the zero-servo end width.
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
No
Yes
No
To output the zero-servo status externally, assign the Zero Servo End signal (setting 33) to one of the multifunction outputs (H2-01 to H2-03).
Monitor Function
Name
Constant
Number
U1-35
Control Methods
Description
Display
Zero-servo
movement
pulses
Zero Servo
Pulse
Shows the number of PG pulses
times 4 for the movement range
when stopped at zero.
Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output
(Cannot be output.)
Min.
Unit
1
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
No
A
No
Time Chart
A time chart for the zero servo function is given in Fig 6.74 Time Chart for Zero Servo.
ON
Run command
OFF
ON
Zero servo command
OFF
Frequency (speed) reference
Excitation level
b2-01
Motor speed
Zero Servo End signal
Zero-servo status
Fig 6.74 Time Chart for Zero Servo
Application Precautions
• Be sure to leave the run command input ON. If the run command is turned OFF, the output will be inter-
rupted and the zero-servo function will become ineffective.
6-130
Individual Functions
• The holding force of the zero-servo is adjusted in b9-01. The holding force will increase if the value of the
setting is increased, but oscillation and hunting will occur if the setting is too large. Adjust b9-01 after
adjusting the speed control gain.
• The zero-servo detection width is set as the allowable position offset from the zero-servo start position. Set
4 times the number of pulses from the PG.
• The Zero Servo End signal will go OFF when the zero servo command is turned OFF.
Do not lock the servo for extended periods of time at 100% when using the zero servo function. Inverter
errors may result. Extended periods of servo lock can be achieved by ensuring that the current during the servolock is 50% or less or by increasing the Inverter capacity.
IMPORTANT
6-131
Digital Operator Functions
This section explains the Digital Operator functions.
Setting Digital Operator Functions
You can set Digital Operator-related constants such as selecting the Digital Operator display, multi-function
selections, and copy functions.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
o1-02
Display
Description
Monitor selec- Sets the monitor item to be distion after power played when the power is turned
up
on.
1: Frequency reference
2: Output frequency
Power-On
3: Output current
Monitor
4: The monitor item set for o1-01
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1 to 4
1
0 to
39999
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
0 or 1
0
No
No
No
No
A
A
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
Frequency units Sets the units that will be set and
of reference set- displayed for the frequency referting and moni- ence and frequency monitor.
tor
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum
output frequency is 100%)
2 to 39:
o1-03
Display Scaling
min−1 units (Sets the motor
poles.)
40 to 39999:
User desired display
Set the desired values for setting
and display for the max. output
frequency.
Set 4-digit number
excluding the decimal
point.
Set the number of digits
below the decimal point
to display.
Example: When the max. output
frequency value is 200.0, set
12000
o1-04
o2-01
Setting unit for
frequency constants related to Set the setting unit for frequency
V/f characteris- reference-related constants.
0: Hz
tics
1: min−1
V/f Display
Unit
LOCAL/
REMOTE key
enable/disable
Local/Remote
Key
6-132
Sets the Digital Operator Local/
Remote Key
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Switches between
the Digital Operator and the
constant settings.)
Digital Operator Functions
Name
Constant
Number
o2-02
STOP key during control circuit terminal
operation
User constant
initial value
o2-03
User Defaults
Frequency reference setting
method selection
o2-05
Operator
M.O.P.
Cumulative
operation time
setting
Elapsed Time
Set
o2-10
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the Stop Key in the run
mode.
0: Disabled (When the run
command is issued from and
external terminal, the Stop
Key is disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even
during run.)
0 or 1
1
Clears or stores user initial values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records the
set constants as user initial
values.)
2: All clear (Clears all recorded
user initial values)
When the set constants are
recorded as user initial values,
1110 will be set in A1-03.
0 to 2
When the frequency reference is
set on the Digital Operator frequency reference monitor, sets
whether the Enter Key is necessary.
0: Enter Key needed
1: Enter Key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter
accepts the frequency reference
without Enter Key operation.
Fan operation
time setting
Fan ON Time
Set
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
Sets the cumulative operation
time in hour units.
Operation time is calculated from
the set values.
0 to
65535
0 hr
No
A
A
A
A
A
Set the initial value of the fan
operation time using time units.
The operation time accumulates
from the set value.
0 to
65535
0 hr
No
A
A
A
A
A
Description
Display
Oper STOP
Key
o2-07
Setting
Range
Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units
Set the Digital Operator frequency reference and display units using constant o1-03. You can change the units
for the following constants using o1-03.
• U1-01 (Frequency Reference)
• U1-02 (Output Frequency)
• U1-05 (Motor Speed)
• U1-20 (Output Frequency after Soft Start)
• d1-01 to d1-17 (Frequency references)
Switching Monitors when the Power Supply Is ON
Using constant o1-02, select the monitor item (U1- [status monitor]) to be displayed on the Digital Operator when the power supply is turned ON. For monitors that can be displayed, refer to U1- in Chapter 5
User Constants.
6-133
Setting Precautions
If selecting monitor constants other than U1-01 (Frequency Reference), U1-02 (Output Frequency), and U103 (Output Current), first select the monitor items to be displayed in o1-01, and then set o1-02 to 4.
Disabling the STOP Key
If b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1, 2, or 3, the stop command from the STOP Key on the Digital
Operator is an emergency stop command.
Set o2-02 to 0 to disable emergency stop commands from the STOP Key on the Digital Operator.
Disabling the LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Set o2-01 to 0 to disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. You cannot switch Inverter reference inputs set using reference inputs from the Digital Operator, b1-01 (Reference Selection), or b1-02
(Operation Method Selection).
Initializing Changed Constant Values
You can save to the Inverter constant set values that you have changed as constant initial values. Change the
set values from the Inverter factory settings, and then set o2-03 to 1.
Set A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110 to initialize the Inverter constants using the user-set initial values in memory. To
clear the user-set initial values in memory, set o2-03 to 2.
Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the
Enter Key
Use this function when inputting frequency references from the Digital Operator. When o2-05 is set to 1, you
can increment and decrement the frequency reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without using the Enter
Key.
For example, enter the Run command using a 0 Hz reference, and then continuously press the UP Key to
increment the frequency reference by 0.01 Hz only for the first 0.5 s, and then by 0.01 Hz every 80 ms for 3 s
thereafter. Press and hold down the UP Key for 3 s minimum to reach the maximum output frequency 10 s
after that. The frequency reference that has been set will be stored in memory 5 s after the UP or DOWN Keys
are released.
Clearing Cumulative Operation Time
Set the cumulative operation time initial value in time units in constant o2-07. Set o2-07 to 0 to clear U1-13
(inverter Operating Time).
Clearing Inverter Cooling Fan Operation Time
Set the fan operation time initial value in time units in constant o2-10. Set o2-10 to 0 to clear U1-40 (Cooling
Fan Operating Time).
6-134
Digital Operator Functions
Copying Constants
The Digital Operator can perform the following three functions using the built-in EEPROM (non-volatile
memory).
• Store Inverter constant set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
• Write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
• Compare constant set values stored in the Digital Operator with Inverter constants (VERIFY)
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
o3-01
o3-02
Display
Copy function
selection
Copy Function
Sel
Read permitted
selection
Copy Allowable
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to Operator)
2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
0 to 3
0
0: Read prohibited
1: Read permitted
0 or 1
0
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
6-135
Storing Inverter Set Values in the Digital Operator (READ)
To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator, make the settings using the following method.
Table 6.1 READ Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Explanation
-ADV-
1
** Main Menu **
Programming
Press the Menu Key, and select advanced programming mode.
-ADV-
Initialization
2
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the constants monitor display.
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
-ADV-
COPY Function
3
o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment Key and Decrement
Key.
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel
4
o3-01= 0
*0*
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the constants setting display.
COPY SELECT
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel
5
o3-01= 1
*0*
Change the set value to 1 using the Increment Key.
-ADV-
READ
6
INV→OP READING
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The READ function will start.
-ADV-
7
READ
READ COMPLETE
If the READ function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator.
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel
8
o3 - 01=0
*0*
The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
COPY SELECT
An error may occur while saving to memory. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display
and return to the o3-01 display.
Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display
Meaning
PRE
READ IMPOSSIBLE
You are attempting to set o3-01 to 1 while o3-02 is set to 0.
IFE
READ DATA ERROR
6-136
Read data length mismatch or read data error.
Digital Operator Functions
Error Display
Meaning
RDE
Tried to write constants to EEPROM on the Digital Operator, but unable to perform write
operation.
DATA ERROR
Select READ Permitted
Prevent overwriting the data stored in EEPROM in the Digital Operator by mistake. With o3-02 set to 0, if you
set o3-01 to 1, and perform the write operation, PrE will be displayed on the Digital Operator, and the write
operation will be stopped.
Writing Constant Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
To write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter, make the settings using the following method.
Table 6.2 COPY Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Explanation
-ADV-
1
** Main Menu **
Programming
Press the MENU Key, and select advanced programming mode.
-ADV-
Initialization
2
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the constants monitor display.
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
-ADV-
COPY Function
3
o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment Key and Decrement
Key.
-ADV-
4
Copy Funtion Sel
o3-01= 0
*0*
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the constants setting display.
COPY SELECT
-ADV-
5
Copy Funtion Sel
o3-01= 2
*0*
Change the set value to 2 using the Increment Key.
OP→INV WRITE
-ADV-
COPY
6
OP→INV COPYING
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The COPY function will start.
-ADV-
7
COPY
COPY COMPLETE
If the COPY function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator.
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel
8
o3 - 01=0
*0*
The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
COPY SELECT
6-137
During the copy operation, errors may occur. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display
and return to the 03-01 display.
Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator
Copy Function.)
Error Display
Meaning
CPE
Inverter product code and Inverter software number are different.
ID UNMATCH
VAE
Inverter capacity with which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter capacity stored in
the Digital Operator are different.
INV. KVA UNMATC
CRE
The Inverter control method in which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter control
method stored in the Digital Operator are different.
CONTROL UNMATCH
CYE
Comparison between the constant written to the Inverter and the constant in the Digital
Operator shows they are different.
COPY ERROR
CSE
After copying has ended, comparison between the sum value of the Inverter constant area
and the sum value of the Digital Operator constant area shows they are different.
SUM CHECK ERROR
Comparing Inverter Constants and Digital Operator Constant Set Values (VERIFY)
To compare Inverter constants and Digital Operator constant set values, make the settings using the following
method.
Table 6.3 VERIFY Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Explanation
-ADV-
1
** Main Menu **
Programming
Press the MENU Key. and select advanced programming mode.
-ADV-
Initialization
2
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the constants monitor display.
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
-ADV-
COPY Function
3
o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment Key and Decrement
Key.
-ADV-
4
Copy Funtion Sel
o3-01= 0
*0*
COPY SELECT
6-138
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the function setting display.
Digital Operator Functions
Table 6.3 VERIFY Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Explanation
-ADV-
5
Copy Funtion Sel
o3-01= 3
Change the set value to 3 using the Increment Key.
*0*
-ADV-
6
VERIFY
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The VERIFY function will
start.
DATA VERIFYING
-ADV-
VERIFY
7
If the VERIFY function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator.
VERIFY COMPLETE
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel
8
o3 - 01=0
The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
*0*
COPY SELECT
An error may occur during the comparison. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display
and return to the o3-01 display. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7
Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display
VYE
VERIFY ERROR
Meaning
Verify error (Settings in the Digital Operator and the Inverter do not match).
Application Precautions
When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter and the
Digital Operator.
• Inverter product and type
• Inverter capacity and voltage
• Software number
• Control method
Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator
If you set A1-01 to 0, you can refer to and set the A1 and A2 constant groups, and refer to drive mode, using
the Digital Operator.
If you set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) to 1B (write constants permitted), you can write constants from the digital operator when the terminal
that has been set is ON. When the set terminal is OFF, writing constants other than the frequency reference is
prohibited. You can, however, reference constants.
6-139
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Used to set the constant access
level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring
drive mode and setting A1-01
and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in A2-01
to A2-32 can be read and set.)
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read and set
in both quick programming
mode and advanced
programming (A) mode.)
0 to 2
2
Yes
Display
Constant
access level
A1-01
Access Level
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
Setting a Password
When a password is set in A1-05, if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, you cannot refer to or
change the settings of constants A1-01 to A1-03, or A2-01 to A2-32.
You can prohibit the setting and referencing of all constants except A1-00 by using the password function in
combination with setting A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only).
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Constant
access level
A1-01
Access Level
Password
A1-04
6-140
Enter Password
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Used to set the constant access
level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring
drive mode and setting A1-01
and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in A2-01
to A2-32 can be read and set.)
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read and set
in both quick programming
mode and advanced
programming (A) mode.)
0 to 2
2
Password input when a password
has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects some
constants of the initialize mode.
If the password is changed, A1-01
to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32
constants can no longer be
changed. (Programming mode
constants can be changed.)
0 to
9999
0
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
A
A
A
Digital Operator Functions
Name
Constant
Number
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Used to set a four digit number as
the password.
This constant is not usually displayed. When the Password (A104) is displayed, hold down the
RESET Key and press the Menu
Key and the password will be displayed.
0 to
9999
0
No
Display
Password setting
A1-05
Description
Setting
Range
Select Password
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
Setting Precautions
Constant A1-05 cannot be displayed using normal key operations. To display A1-05, hold down the RESET
Key and press the MENU Key while A1-04 is displayed.
Displaying User-set Constants Only
You can set and refer to constants necessary to the Inverter only, using the A2 constants (user-set constants)
and A1-01 (Constants Access Level).
Set the number of the constant to which you want to refer in A2-01 to A2-32, and then set A1-01 to 1. You can
set and refer to constants set in A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32 only, using advanced programming mode.
Related Constants
Constant
Number
Name
User setting
constants
A2-01 to
A2-32 User Param 1
to 32
Description
Setting
Range
Used to set the constant numbers
that can be set/read. Maximum
32.
Effective when the Constant
b1-01 to
Access Level (A1-01) is set to
o3-02
User Program (1). Constants set
in constants A2-01 to A2-32 can
be set/read in programming mode.
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
-
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
6-141
Options
This section explains the Inverter option functions.
Performing Speed Control with PG
This section explains functions with V/f control with PG.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the number of PG (pulse generator or encoder) pulses.
Sets the number of pulses per
motor revolution.
0 to
60000
600
Sets the PG disconnection stopping method.
0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration
stop using Deceleration Time
1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
using the deceleration time in
C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect
the motor or machinery, do not
normally make this setting.)
0 to 3
Operation
Sets the stopping method when an
selection at
overspeed (OS) fault occurs.
overspeed (OS) 0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration
stop using Deceleration Time
1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
PG Overspeed
using the deceleration time in
Sel
C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect
the motor or machinery, do not
normally make this setting.)
Display
PG constant
F1-01
PG Pulses/Rev
Operation
selection at PG
open circuit
(PGO)
F1-02
PG Fdbk Loss
Sel
F1-03
Operation
selection at
deviation
F1-04
PG Deviation
Sel
PG rotation
F1-05
6-142
PG Rotation Sel
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
Q
No
Q
No
1
No
No
A
No
A
No
0 to 3
1
No
No
A
No
A
A
Sets the stopping method when a
speed deviation (DEV) fault
occurs.
0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration
stop using Deceleration Time
1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
using the deceleration time in
C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV is
displayed and operation
continued.)
0 to 3
3
No
No
A
No
A
A
0: Phase A leads with forward
run command. (Phase B leads
with reverse run command.)
1: Phase B leads with forward
run command. (Phase A leads
with reverse run command.)
0 or 1
0
No
No
A
No
A
No
Options
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1 to 132
1
0 or 1
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
A
No
A
No
0
No
No
A
No
No
No
0 to 120
115%
No
No
A
No
A
A
0.0 to
2.0
0.0 s*
No
No
A
No
A
A
0 to 50
10%
No
No
A
No
A
A
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 s
No
No
A
No
A
A
0
No
No
A
No
No
No
0
No
No
A
No
No
No
2.0 s
No
No
A
No
A
No
PG division rate Sets the division ratio for the PG
(PG pulse mon- speed control card pulse output.
itor)
Division ratio = (1+ n) /m (n=0 or
1 m=1 to 32)
F1-06
PG Output
Ratio
Integral value
during accel/
decel enable/
disable
F1-07
PG Ramp PI/I
Sel
F1-08
F1-09
Overspeed
detection level
PG Overspd
Level
Overspeed
detection delay
time
PG Overspd
Time
F1-10
F1-11
F1-12
F1-13
F1-14
This constant is only effective
when a PG-B2 is used.
The possible division ratio settings are: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤ 1.
Sets integral control during acceleration/deceleration to either
enabled or disabled.
0: Disabled (The integral
function isn't used while
accelerating or decelerating; it
is used at constant speeds.)
1: Enabled (The integral function
is used at all times.)
Sets the overspeed detection
method.
Frequencies above that set for F108 (set as a percentage of the
maximum output frequency) that
continue to exceed this frequency
for the time set in F1-09 are
detected as overspeed faults.
Excessive
speed deviation Sets the speed deviation detection
detection level method.
Any speed deviation above the
PG Deviate
F1-10 set level (set as a percentLevel
age of the maximum output frequency) that continues for the
Excessive
speed deviation time set in F1-11 is detected as a
detection delay speed deviation.
Speed deviation is the difference
time
between actual motor speed and
PG Deviate
the reference command speed.
Time
Number of PG
gear teeth 1
PG # Gear
Teeth1
Number of PG
gear teeth 2
PG # Gear
Teeth2
PG open-circuit detection
time
PGO Detect
Time
Sets the number of teeth on the
gears if there are gears between
the PG and the motor.
0 to
1000
A gear ratio of 1 will be used if
either of these constants is set to
0.
Used to set the PG disconnection
detection time. PGO will be
detected if the detection time continues beyond the set time.
0.0 to
10.0
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. (Flux vector control factory settings are given.)
6-143
Using PG Speed Control Card
There are four types of PG Speed Control Card that can be used in V/f control with PG.
• PG-A2: A-phase (single) pulse input, compatible with open collector or complimentary outputs.
• PG-B2: A/B-phase pulse input, compatible with complimentary outputs.
• PG-D2: A-phase (single) pulse input, compatible with line drivers.
• PG-X2: A/B/Z-phase pulse input, compatible with line drivers.
There are two types of PG Speed Control Cards that can be used for flux vector control.
• PG-B2: A/B phase pulse inputs, complementary outputs
• PG-X2: A/B/Z phase pulse inputs, line driver outputs
For the connection diagram, refer to page 2-32.
Setting Number of PG Pulses
Set the number of PG (Pulse Generator/Encoder) pulses in pulses/rotation. Set the number of A-phase or Bphase pulses per 1 motor rotation in F1-01.
Matching PG Rotation Direction and Motor Rotation Direction
Constant F1-05 matches the PG rotation direction and the motor rotation direction. If the motor is rotating forwards, set whether it is A-phase driven or B-phase driven. Make this setting when using PG-B2 or PG-X2.
Inverter
Motor
PG (encoder)
Forward
command
Pulse output
A-phase driven when set value = 0
B-phase driven when set value = 1
A-phase
A-phase
B-phase
B-phase
Example: Forward rotation of standard Yaskawa motor (PG used: Samtack (KK))
Forward
command
Motor output axis rotates
counter-clockwise during Inverter forward command.
Rotation
(CCW)
A-phase
B-phase
Yaskawa standard PG used is A-phase driven (CCW) when motor rotation is forward.
Fig 6.75 PG Rotation Direction Setting
Generally, PG is A-phase driven when rotation is clockwise (CW) see from the input axis. Also, motor rotation is counter-clockwise (CCW) seen from the output side when forward commands are output. Consequently, when motor rotation is forward, PG is normally A-phase driven when a load is applied, and B-phase
driven when a load is not applied.
6-144
Options
Setting Number of Gear Teeth Between PG and Motor
Set the number of PG gear teeth in F1-12 and F1-13. If there are gears between the motor and PG, you can
operate the motor by setting the number of gear teeth.
When the number of gear teeth has been set, the number of motor rotations within the Inverter is calculated
using the following formula.
No. of motor rotations (min−1.) = No. of input pulses from PC × 60 / F1-01 × F1-13 (No. of gear teeth on load
side) / F1-12 (No. of gear teeth on motor side)
Matching Motor Speed During Acceleration and Deceleration to Frequency Reference
You can select whether to enable or disable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration when using
flux vector control.
To match the motor speed as closely as possible to the frequency reference even during acceleration and deceleration, set F1-07 to 1.
If F1-01 is set to 1, overshoot or undershoot may occur easily immediately after acceleration and deceleration. To minimize the possibility of overshoot or undershoot occurring, set F1-01 to 0.
IMPORTANT
Setting PG Pulse Monitor Output Dividing Ratio
This function is enabled only when using PG speed control card PG-B2. Set the dividing ratio for the PG pulse
monitor output. The set value is expressed as n for the higher place digit, and m for the lower place 2 digits.
The dividing ratio is calculated as follows:
Dividing ratio = (1 + n)/m (Setting range) n: 0 or 1, m: 1 to 32
F1-06 =
n
m
The dividing ratio can be set within the following range: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤ 1. For example, if the dividing ratio is
1/2 (set value 2), half of the number of pulses from the PG are monitor outputs.
Detecting PG Open Circuit
Select the stopping method when PG cable disconnected is detected and the PG open circuit (PGO) detection
time.
When the Inverter is operating with the frequency reference set to 1% minimum (except when operating on
direct current), if the speed feedback from PG is greater than the time setting in F1-14, PGO is detected.
Detecting Motor Overspeed
An error is detected when the number of motor rotations exceeds the regulated limit. An overspeed (OS) is
detected when a frequency that exceeds the set value in F1-08 continues for longer than the time set in F1-09.
After detecting an overspeed (OS), the Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-03.
Detecting Speed Difference between the Motor and Speed Reference
An error is detected when the speed deviation (i.e., the difference between the designated speed and the actual
motor speed) is too great. Speed deviation (DEV) is detected after a speed agreement is detected and when the
speed reference and actual workpiece speed are within the setting of L4-02, if a speed deviation great than the
set value in F1-10 continues for longer than the time set in F1-11. After a speed deviation is detected, the
Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-04.
6-145
Using Digital Output Cards
There are two types of Inverter digital output cards:
• DO-02C
Relay contact output (DPDT contact)
• DO-08
6 photocoupler output channels (shared commons)
2 (independent) relay contact output channels (NC contact)
Inverter
control
panel 3CN
+24 V
TD
Inverter
control
panel 3CN
NC NO
3CN
NC NO
Photocoupler TD5
CH1
TD6
CH2
TD7
3CN
CH3
TD8
CH4
3
TD9
CH5
4
TD10
TD11
TD1
TD2
TD3
TD4
1
2
CH1
5
CH2
6
Relay contact
DO-02C Digital Output Card
Photocoupler
CH6
COM (0 V common)
CH7
Relay contact
CH8
DO-08 Digital Output Card
Fig 6.76 Digital Output Cards
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
F5-01
Display
Channel 1 output selection
DO Ch1 Select
F5-02
Channel 2 output selection
DO Ch2 Select
F5-03
Channel 3 output selection
DO Ch3 Select
F5-04
Channel 4 output selection
DO Ch4 Select
F5-05
Channel 5 output selection
DO Ch5 Select
F5-06
Channel 6 output selection
DO Ch6 Select
6-146
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Effective when a Digital Output
Card (DO-02 or DO-08) is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
0 to 37
0
Effective when a Digital Output
Card (DO-02 or DO-08) is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
0 to 37
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
0 to 37
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
0 to 37
4
No
A
A
A
A
A
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
0 to 37
6
No
A
A
A
A
A
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
0 to 37
37
No
A
A
A
A
A
Options
Name
Constant
Number
Change
during
Operation
0 to 37
0F
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
0 to 37
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the output mode.
0: 8-channel individual outputs
1: Binary code output
2: Output according to
F5-01 to F5-08 settings.
0 to 2
Description
F5-07
DO Ch7 Select
Channel 8 output selection
DO Ch8 Select
DO-08 output
mode selection
F5-09
Factory
Setting
Display
Channel 7 output selection
F5-08
Setting
Range
DO-08 Selection
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Card is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
0F
No
A
A
A
A
A
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
Setting Output Items for the DO-02C Digital Output Card
If using DO-02C Digital Output Card, set the output items using F5-01 and F5-02.
Setting Output Items for the DO-08 Digital Output Card
If using DO-08 Digital Output Card, select one of the following three output modes according to the setting in
F5-09.
F5-09 Set to 0
Set Value
0: 8 separate
outputs
Terminal
Number
Output Details
TD5-TD11
Overcurrent (SC, OC, GF)
TD6-TD11
Overvoltage (OV)
TD7-TD11
Inverter overload (OL2)
TD8-TD11
Fuse blown (PUF)
TD9-TD11
Overspeed (OS)
TD10-TD11
Inverter overheated (OH1) or motor overload (OL1)
TD1-TD2
Zero speed detected
TD3-TD4
Speed agreement
6-147
F5-09 Set to 1
Set Value
1: Binary code
output
Terminal
Number
Output Details
TD5-TD11
bit 0
TD6-TD11
bit 1
TD7-TD11
bit 2
TD8-TD11
bit 3
TD9-TD11
Zero speed detected
TD10-TD11
Speed agreement
TD1-TD2
Operating
TD3-TD4
Minor fault
Encoded output
(Refer to table below)
The following table shows the code outputs.
Bits 3, 2, 1,
and 0
Output Details
Bits 3, 2, 1,
and 0
Output Details
0000
No error
1000
External fault (EFxx)
0001
Overcurrent (SC, OC, GF)
1001
Controller error (CPFxx)
0010
Overvoltage (OV)
1010
Motor overload (OL1)
0011
Inverter overload (OL2)
1011
Not used
0100
Inverter overheated (OH, OH1)
1100
Power loss (UV1, UV2, or UV3)
0101
Overspeed (OS)
1101
Speed deviation (DEV)
0110
Fuse blown (PUF)
1110
PG open circuit (PGO)
0111
Dynamic braking resistor (RH)
Injection brake transistor error (RR)
1111
Not used
F5-09 Set to 2
Output depends on the settings in F5-01 to F5-08.
Using an Analog Reference Card
When using a AI-14B or A1-14U Analog Reference Card, set constant b1-01 (Reference selection) to 3
(Option Card).
AI-14B provides 3 channels of bi-polar inputs with 14-bit A/D conversion accuracy (and a sign bit). The function of each channel is determined by the setting of F2-01.
AI-14U provides 2 channels of bi-polar inputs with 14-bit A/D conversion accuracy. Channel 1 is a voltage
input and channel 2 is a current input. The sum of channels 1 and 2 is a frequency input. F2-01 does not need
to be set for the AI-14U.
6-148
Options
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
F2-01
Description
Display
Bi-polar or uni- Sets the functions for channel 1 to
polar input
3 that are effective when the AIselection
14B Analog Reference Card is
used.
0: 3-channel individual (Channel 1: terminal A1, Channel 2:
terminal A2, Channel 3: terminal A3)
1: 3-channel addition (Addition
AI-14 Input Sel
values are the frequency reference)
When set to 0, select 1 for b1-01.
In this case the multi-function
input “Option/Inverter selection”
cannot be used.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
Setting Precautions
Always set b1-01 (Reference selection) to 1 (control circuit terminal) when using the AI-14B for three channels of independent inputs. When this is done, H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact inputs) cannot be set to
2 (Option/Inverter selection).
Using a Digital Reference Card
When using a DI-08 or DI-16H2 Digital Reference Card, set b1-01 (Reference selection) to 3 (Option Card).
The DI-16H2 can be used to set a frequency using a 16-bit digital reference. The DI-08 can be used to set a
frequency using a 8-bit digital reference.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Digital input
option
F3-01
DI Input
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the Digital Reference Card
input method.
0: BCD 1% unit
1: BCD 0.1% unit
2: BCD 0.01% unit
3: BCD 1 Hz unit
4: BCD 0.1 Hz unit
5: BCD 0.01 Hz unit
6: BCD special setting (5-digit
input)
7: Binary input
6 is only effective when the DI16H2 is used.
When o1-03 is set to 2 or higher,
the input will be BCD, and the
units will change to the o1-03 setting.
0 to 7
0
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
6-149
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to
39999
0
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
Frequency units Sets the units that will be set and
of reference set- displayed for the frequency referting and moni- ence and frequency monitor.
tor
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum
output frequency is 100%)
2 to 39:
o1-03
Display Scaling
min−1 units (Sets the motor
poles.)
40 to 39999:
User desired display
Set the desired values for setting
and display for the max. output
frequency.
Set 4-digit number
excluding the decimal
point.
Set the number of digits
below the decimal point
to display.
Example: When the max. output
frequency value is 200.0, set
12000
Selecting Input Terminal Functions for the DI-16H2 Digital Reference Card
The frequency reference from the DI-16H2 Card is determined by the setting of F3-01 and the 12/16-bit
switch on the Option card. The possible settings are listed in the following table.
6-150
Options
Terminal
TC1
TC2
Pin No.
12-bit Binary 16-bit Binary
with Sign
with Sign
F3-01 = 7
F3-01 = 7
S1: 12 bit
S1: 16 bit
3-digit BCD with
Sign
F3-01 = 0 to 5
S1: 12 bit
4-digit BCD with 4-digit BCD withSign
out Sign
F3-01 = 0 to 5
F3-01 = 6
S1: 16 bit
S1: 16 bit
1
1
Bit 1 (20)
Bit 1 (20)
1
2
Bit 1 (21)
Bit 1 (21)
2
3
Bit 1 (22)
Bit 1 (22)
4
4
Bit 1 (23)
Bit 1 (23)
8
8
1
5
Bit 1 (24)
Bit 1 (24)
1
1
2
5
5
BDC digit 1
(0 to 9)
2
4
BDC digit 1
(0 to 9)
4
Bit 1 (2 )
Bit 1 (2 )
2
7
Bit 1 (26)
Bit 1 (26)
4
8
Bit 1 (27)
Bit 1 (27)
8
8
1
9
Bit 1 (28)
Bit 1 (28)
1
1
2
2
4
9
9
10
Bit 1 (2 )
Bit 1 (2 )
2
1
Bit 1
(210)
(210)
4
2
Bit 1 (211)
Bit 1 (211)
8
3
-
Bit 1 (212)
4
Bit 1
BDC digit 3
(0 to 9)
4
4
BDC digit 2
(0 to 9)
BDC digit 3
(0 to 9)
4
-
1
2
-
13)
Bit 1 (2
-
2
5
-
Bit 1 (214)
-
4
6
-
Bit 1 (215)
-
8
Sign signal (0: Forward, 1: Reverse)
8
SET (read) signal (1: Read)
9
Input signal common (0 V)
TC3
BDC digit 3
(0 to 9)
8
1
7
BDC digit 2
(0 to 9)
8
8
BDC digit 4
(0 to 9)
BDC digit 1
(2 to 9)
8
6
BDC digit 2
(0 to 9)
2
2
4
BDC digit 4
(0 to 9)
8
1
2
BDC digit 5
(0 to 3)
Shield wire connection terminal
Application Precautions
• The maximum frequency (100% speed) reference will be used when the binary input is set (setting: 6 or 7)
and all bits are 1.
• Setting F3-01 to 6 is valid only when the D1-16H2 is used. Using this setting, a frequency from 0.00 to
399.8 Hz can be set in BCD. The sign bit is used as a data bit, so only positive (plus) data can be set. Also,
the digit starts from 0, so the minimum setting is 0.02 Hz.
Selecting the Input Terminal Function for a DI-08 Digital Reference Card
The frequency reference from a DI-08 Card is determined by the setting of F3-01, as shown in the following
table.
6-151
Terminal
TC
Pin No.
8-bit Binary with Sign
F3-01 = 7
2-digit BCD with Sign
F3-01 = 0 to 5
1
Bit 1 (20)
1
2
Bit 1 (21)
2
2
3
Bit 1 (2 )
4
4
Bit 1 (23)
8
5
Bit 1 (24)
1
6
Bit 1 (25)
2
6
7
Bit 1 (2 )
4
8
Bit 1 (27)
8
9
Sign signal
10
SET (read) signal
11
Reference common signal (0 V)
BDC digit 1
(0 to 9)
BDC digit 2
(0 to 15)
Application Precautions
The DI-08 will not function if F3-01 is set to 6
Selecting the Digital Reference
The range of the digital references is determined by the combination of the settings of o1-03 and F3-01. The
information monitored in U1-01 (Frequency reference) will also change.
DI-16H2 Reference Ranges
When using the DI-16H2, the following ranges can be set depending on the settings of the constants.
o1-03 F3-01
0
1
2
0 or 1
3
4
5
6
7
6-152
Switch
S1
Reference Input Mode
Reference Setting
Range
12 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 1%
-110 to 110%
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 1%
-110 to 110%
12 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 0.1%
-110.0 to 110.0%
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 0.1%
-110.0 to 110.0%
12 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 0.01%
-15.99 to 15.99%
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 0.01%
-110.0 to 110.0%
12 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 1 Hz
-400 to 400 Hz
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 1 Hz
-400 to 400 Hz
12 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 0.1 Hz
-159.9 to 159.9 Hz
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 0.1 Hz
-400.0 to 400.0 Hz
12 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 0.01 Hz
-15.99 to 15.99 Hz
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 0.01 Hz
-159.99 to 159.99 Hz
16 bits
5-digit BCD without sign, 0.01 Hz
000.00 to 399.98 Hz
12 bits
12-bit binary with sign, 100%/4095
-4095 to 4095
16 bits
16-bit binary with sign, 100%/30000
-33000 to 33000
U1-01 Monitor Unit
o1-03 = 0 o1-03 = 1
0.01 Hz
0.01%
Options
o1-03 F3-01
2 to 39
40 to
39999
10000
x=1
to 3
Switch
S1
Reference Input Mode
Reference Setting
Range
U1-01 Monitor Unit
o1-03 = 0 o1-03 = 1
12 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 1 rpm
-1599 to 1599 rpm
1 rpm
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 1 rpm
-15999 to 15999 rpm
1 rpm
-
12 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 100%/(1- to 4digit setting of o1-03)
-4095 to 4095
-
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 100%/(1- to 4digit setting of o1-03)
-10999 to 10999
(when o1-03 = 9999)
-
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 100%/10000
-11000 to 11000
-
5th digit of o1-03 setting:
X = 0, unit: 1
X = 1, unit: 0.1
X = 2, unit: 0.01
X = 3, unit: 0.001
DI-08 Reference Ranges
When using the DI-08, the following ranges can be set depending on the settings of the constants.
F3-01
Reference Input Mode
Reference Setting Range
0
2-digit BCD with sign, 1%
-110 to 110%
1
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.1%
-15.9 to 15.9%
2
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.01%
-1.59 to 1.59%
3
2-digit BCD with sign, 1 Hz
-159 to 159 Hz
4
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.1 Hz
-15.9 to 15.9 Hz
5
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.01 Hz
-1.59 to 1.59 Hz
6
7
U1-01 Monitor Unit
o1-03 = 0
o1-03 = 1
0.01 Hz
0.01%
12-bit binary with sign, 100%/
4095
-255 to 255
6-153
6-154
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasure for the Inverter and motor problems and countermeasures.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ...........................7-2
Troubleshooting .........................................................7-17
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the alarm functions of the Inverter. The alarm functions include fault detection,
alarm detection, operation error detection, and autotuning error detection.
Fault Detection
When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault contact output operates, and the Inverter output is shut OFF causing
the motor to coast to a stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults, and the selected stopping
method will be used with these faults.) A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator.
When a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the fault.
Use one of the following methods to reset the fault after restarting the Inverter:
• Set a multi-function contact input (H1-01 to H1-05) to 14 (Fault Reset) and turn ON the fault reset signal.
• Press the RESET Key on the Digital Operator.
• Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again.
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing
Display
Meaning
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
• A short-circuit or ground fault
occurred at the Inverter output. (A
short or ground fault can be caused
by motor burn damage, worn insuOvercurrent
lation, or a damaged cable.)
OC
The Inverter output current exceeded • The load is too large or the accelera- Reset the fault after correcting its
Over Curthe overcurrent detection level. (200%
tion/deceleration time is too short. cause.
rent
of rated current)
• A special-purpose motor or motor
with a capacity too large for the
Inverter is being used.
• A magnetic switch was switched at
the Inverter output.
GF
Ground
Fault
Ground Fault
The ground fault current at the
Inverter output exceeded approximately 50% of the Inverter rated output current.
PUF
Main IBGT Fuse Blown
Fuse
The fuse in the main circuit is blown.
Blown
Main Circuit Overvoltage
OV
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded
DC Bus the overvoltage detection level.
Fuse Open 200 V class: Approx. 410 V
400 V class: Approx. 820 V
7-2
A ground fault occurred at the Inverter
output. (A ground fault can be caused Reset the fault after correcting its
by motor burn damage, worn insula- cause.
tion, or a damaged cable.)
The output transistor has failed
because of a short-circuit or ground
fault at the Inverter output.
Check whether there is a short-circuit
between the following terminals. A
short-circuit will damage the output
transistor:
B1 ( 3) ←→ U, V, W
←→ U, V, W
Replace the Inverter after correcting the cause.
The deceleration time is too short and Increase the deceleration time or
the regenerative energy from the
connect a braking resistor (or
motor is too large.
Braking Resistor Unit).
The power supply voltage is too high.
Decrease the voltage so it's within
specifications.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The main circuit DC voltage is below
UV1
the Undervoltage Detection Level
DC Bus
(L2-05).
Undervolt
200 V class: Approx. 190 V
400 V class: Approx. 380 V
UV2
Control Power Fault
CTL PS The control power supply voltage
Undervolt dropped.
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
• An open-phase occurred with the
input power supply.
• A momentary power loss occurred.
Reset the fault after correcting its
• The wiring terminals for the input
cause.
power supply are loose.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input
power supply are too large.
-
• Try turning the power supply
off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
continues to occur.
-
• Try turning the power supply
off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
continues to occur.
UV3
MC
Answerback
Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault
A fault occurred in the surge prevention circuit.
PF
Input Pha
Loss
• An open-phase occurred in the input
power supply.
Main Circuit Voltage Fault
• A momentary power loss occurred.
The main circuit DC voltage oscillates • The wiring terminals for the input
Reset the fault after correcting its
unusually (not when regenerating).
power supply are loose.
cause.
This fault is detected when L8-05 is
• The voltage fluctuations in the input
set to “Enabled.”
power supply are too large.
• The voltage balance between phases
is bad.
Output Open-phase
LF
An open-phase occurred at the
Output Pha Inverter output.
Loss
This fault is detected when L8-07 is
set to “Enabled.”
OH
(OH1)
Heatsnk
Overtemp
(Heatsnk
MAX
Temp)
• There is a broken wire in the output
cable.
Reset the fault after correcting its
• There is a broken wire in the motor
cause.
winding.
• The output terminals are loose.
The motor being used has a capacity
less than 5% of the Inverter's maximum motor capacity.
Check the motor and Inverter
capacity.
The ambient temperature is too high. Install a cooling unit.
Cooling Fin Overheating
The temperature of the Inverter's cool- There is a heat source nearby.
Remove the heat source.
ing fins exceeded the setting in L8-02
or 105°C.
The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact
Inverter's Cooling Fan Stopped
our sales representative.)
The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.
(18.5 kW or higher)
Motor Overheating Alarm
OH3
The Inverter will stop or will continue
Motor
The motor has overheated.
to operate according to the setting of
Overheat 1
L1-03.
OH4
Motor Overheating Fault
Motor
The Inverter will stop according to the The motor has overheated.
Overheat 2 setting of L1-04.
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the Motor Rated Current
(E2-01).
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the Motor Rated Current
(E2-01).
7-3
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
RH
DynBrk
Resistor
Installed Braking Resistor Overheating
Braking resistor protection function
set in L8-01 has operated.
RR
DynBrk
Transistr
Internal Braking Transistor Fault
The braking transistor is not operating
properly.
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
•
The deceleration time is too short and
the regenerative energy from the
•
motor is too large.
-
Reduce the load, increase the
deceleration time, or reduce the
motor speed.
Change to a Braking Resistor
Unit.
• Try turning the power supply
off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
continues to occur.
The load is too heavy. The acceleraCheck the size of the load and the
tion time, deceleration time, and cycle length of the acceleration, decelertime are too short.
ation, and cycle times.
Motor Overload
OL1
The motor overload protection funcMotor
The V/f characteristics voltage is too
tion has operated based on the internal
Overloaded
high.
electronic thermal value.
The Motor Rated Current (E2-01) is
incorrect.
The load is too heavy. The acceleration time, deceleration time and cycle
time are too short.
Inverter Overload
OL2
The Inverter overload protection funcInv OverThe V/f characteristics voltage is too
tion has operated based on the internal
loaded
high.
electronic thermal value.
The Inverter capacity is too low.
Overtorque Detected 1
OL3
There has been a current greater than
Overtorque
the setting in L6-02 for longer than the
Det 1
setting in L6-03.
Overtorque Detected 2
OL4
There has been a current greater than
Overtorque
the setting in L6-05 for longer than the
Det 2
setting in L6-06.
OL7
HSB-OL
High-slip Braking OL
The output frequency did not change
for longer than the time set in N3-04.
Undertorque Detected 1
UL3
There has been a current less than the
Undertorq
setting in L6-02 for longer than the
Det 1
setting in L6-03.
7-4
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the Motor Rated Current
(E2-01).
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Replace the Inverter with one that
has a larger capacity.
-
• Make sure that the settings in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the
overtorque.
-
• Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in
L6-06 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the
overtorque.
The inertia returned to the load is too
large.
• Make sure the load is an inertial
load.
• Set the system so that the deceleration time that does not produce 0 V is 120 s or less.
-
• Make sure that the settings in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the
overtorque.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Undertorque Detected 2
UL4
There has been a current less than the
Undertorq
setting in L6-05 for longer than the
Det 2
setting in L6-06.
Overspeed
OS
The speed has been greater than the
Overspeed
setting in F1-08 for longer than the
Det
setting in F1-09.
PGO
PG Open
PG Disconnection Detected
PG pulses were input when the
Inverter was outputting a frequency.
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
-
• Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in
L6-06 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the
overtorque.
Overshooting/Undershooting are
occurring.
Adjust the gain again.
The reference speed is too high.
Check the reference circuit and
reference gain.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren't Check the settings in F1-08 and
appropriate.
F1-09.
There is a break in the PG wiring.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
The PG is wired incorrectly.
Fix the wiring.
Power isn't being supplied to the PG.
Supply power to the PG properly.
The load is too heavy.
DEV
Speed
Deviation
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been greater
than the setting in F1-10 for longer
than the setting in F1-11.
The load is locked.
Check the mechanical system.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 aren't Check the settings in F1-10 and
appropriate.
F1-11.
Control Fault
The torque limit was reached continuMotor constant settings are not corously for 3 seconds or longer during a
rect.
deceleration stop during open-loop
vector control 1.
FBL
Feedback
Loss
Reduce the load.
The acceleration time and deceleration Lengthen the acceleration time
time are too short.
and deceleration time.
-
CF
Out of
Control
Check for open circuit when using
brake (motor).
Check for open circuit when using
brake (motor).
• Check the motor constants.
• Perform autotuning.
• Perform autotuning.
• Input the run command after the
motor stops.
Motor constant settings are not corAn error occurred in the speed estima• Set b3-01 (Speed search selecrect.
tion calculation for open-loop vector
tion) to 1 or 3 (speed search
Run command was received when the
control 2.
enabled at startup).
motor was coasting.
• Refer to Precautions When
Using Open-loop Vector Control 2 on page 10-4.
PID Feedback Reference Lost
A PID feedback reference loss was
detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PID feedback input was less than b5-13 (PID
feedback loss detection level) for
longer than the time set in b5-14 (PID
feedback loss detection time).
-
-
7-5
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
EF0
External fault input from CommuniOpt Extercations Option Card
nal Flt
EF3
Ext Fault
S3
External fault (Input terminal 3)
EF4
Ext Fault
S4
External fault (Input terminal 4)
EF5
Ext Fault
S5
External fault (Input terminal 5)
EF6
Ext Fault
S6
External fault (Input terminal 6)
EF7
Ext Fault
S7
External fault (Input terminal 7)
EF8
Ext Fault
S8
External fault (Input terminal 8)
EF9
Ext Fault
S9
External fault (Input terminal 9)
EF10
Ext Fault
S10
External fault (Input terminal 10)
EF11
Ext Fault
S11
External fault (Input terminal 11)
EF12
Ext Fault
S12
External fault (Input terminal 12)
SVE
Zero Servo Fault
Zero Servo The rotation position moved during
Fault
zero servo operation.
7-6
OPR
Oper Disconnect
Digital Operator Connection Fault
The connection to the Digital Operator
was broken during operation for a
RUN command from the Digital
Operator.
CE
Memobus
Com Err
MEMOBUS Communications Error
A normal reception was not possible
for 2 s or longer after control data was
received once.
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
-
Check the Communications
Option Card and communications
signals.
An “external fault” was input from a
multi-function input terminal.
• Reset external fault inputs to the
multi-function inputs.
• Remove the cause of the external fault.
The torque limit is too small.
Increase the limit.
The load torque is too large.
Reduce the load torque.
-
Check for signal noise.
-
Check the connection to the Digital Operator.
-
Check the communications
devices and communications signals.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
BUS
Option
Com Err
Option Communications Error
A communications error was detected
during a run command or while setting
a frequency reference from a Communications Option Card.
-
E-15
SI-F/G
Com Err
SI-F/G Communications Error
Detected
A communications error was detected
when a run command or frequency
reference was set from an Option Card
and continuous operation was set for
the E-15 operation selection.
-
E-10
SI-F/G Option Card CPU Failure
SI-F/G
SI-F/G Option Card operation failed.
CPU down
CPF00
CPF
Digital Operator Communications
Error 1
Communications with the Digital
Operator were not established within 5
seconds after the power was turned
on.
CPU External RAM Fault
CPF01
CPF01
Digital Operator Communications
Error 2
After communications were established, there was a communications
error with the Digital Operator for
more than 2 seconds.
CPF02
BB Circuit Baseblock circuit error
Err
CPF03
EEPROM EEPROM error
Error
CPF04
Internal
A/D Err
CPU internal A/D converter error
CPF05
External
A/D Err
CPU internal A/D converter error
CPF06
Option
error
Probable Causes
Check the communications
devices and communications signals.
Check the communications signals.
Digital Operator connection is faulty.
Disconnect and then reconnect the
Digital Operator.
Inverter control circuit is faulty.
Replace the Inverter.
The Digital Operator's connector isn't
connected properly.
Disconnect the Digital Operator
and then connect it again.
The Inverter's control circuits are
faulty.
Replace the Inverter.
-
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
The control circuits were destroyed.
Replace the Inverter.
The Digital Operator isn't connected
properly.
Disconnect the Digital Operator
and then connect it again.
The Inverter's control circuits are
faulty.
Replace the Inverter.
The control circuit is damaged.
The control circuit is damaged.
The control circuit is damaged.
Option Card connection error
Corrective Actions
-
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
The control circuit is damaged.
Replace the Inverter.
The Option Card is not connected
properly.
Turn off the power and insert the
Card again.
The Inverter or Option Card is faulty.
Replace the Option Card or the
Inverter.
7-7
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
CPF07
RAM-Err
Meaning
ASIC internal RAM fault
The control circuit is damaged.
CPF08
WAT-Err
Watchdog timer fault
CPF09
CPU-Err
CPU-ASIC mutual diagnosis fault
CPF10
ASIC-Err
ASIC version fault
CPF20
Option
A/D error
Probable Causes
The control circuit is damaged.
Communications Option Card A/D
converter error
-
Corrective Actions
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
The control circuit is damaged.
Replace the Inverter.
The Inverter control circuit is faulty
Replace the Inverter.
The Option Card is not connected
properly.
Turn off the power and insert the
Card again.
The Option Card's A/D converter is
faulty.
Replace the Communications
Option Card.
Communications Option Card fault.
Replace the Option Card.
CPF21
Communications Option Card self
Option
diagnostic error
CPU down
7-8
CPF22
Option
Type Err
Communications Option Card
model code error
CPF23
Option
DPRAM
Err
Communications Option Card
DPRAM error
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Alarm Detection
Alarms are detected as a type of Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault contact output. The
system will automatically returned to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed.
The Digital Operator display flashes and the alarm is output from the multi-function outputs (H2-01 to H203).
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.
Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing
Display
Meaning
Forward/Reverse Run Commands
Input Together
(blinking)
Both the forward and reverse run comExternal
mands have been ON for more than
Fault
0.5 s.
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
-
Check the sequence of the forward and
reverse run commands.
Since the rotational direction is
unknown, the motor will be decelerated to a stop when this minor fault
occurs.
EF
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The following conditions occurred
when there was no Run signal.
UV
• The main circuit DC voltage was
(blinking)
below the Undervoltage Detection See causes for UV1, UV2, and UV3
DC Bus
Level Setting (L2-05).
faults in the previous table.
Under• The surge current limiting contactor
volt
opened.
• The control power supply voltage
when below the CUV level.
See corrective actions for UV1, UV2,
and UV3 faults in the previous table.
Main Circuit Overvoltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded
(blinking)
Decrease the voltage so it's within
the overvoltage detection level.
The power supply voltage is too high.
DC Bus
specifications.
200 V class: Approx. 400 V
Overvolt
400 V class: Approx. 800 V
OV
The ambient temperature is too high.
OH
(blinking)
Heatsink
Overtemp
Install a cooling unit.
Cooling Fin Overheating
There is a heat source nearby.
Remove the heat source
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fins exceeded the setting in L8-02.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact your
The Inverter cooling fan has stopped.
Yaskawa representative.)
Inverter Overheating Pre-alarm
An OH2 alarm signal (Inverter over(blinking)
heating alarm signal) was input from a
Over
multi-function input terminal (S3 to
Heat 2
S7).
OH2
OH3
(blinking)
Motor
Overheat 1
OL3
(blinking)
Overtorque
Det 1
-
Motor overheating
E was set for H3-09 and the motor
The motor has overheated.
temperature thermistor input exceeded
the alarm detection level.
Overtorque 1
There has been a current greater than
the setting in L6-02 for longer than the
setting in L6-03.
-
Clear the multi-function input terminal's overheating alarm input.
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the motor temperature input on
terminals A1 and A2.
• Make sure that the settings in L6-02
and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and
correct the cause of the overtorque.
7-9
Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
OL4
(blinking)
Overtorque
Det 2
Meaning
Overtorque 2
There has been a current greater than
the setting in L6-05 for longer than the
setting in L6-06.
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
-
• Make sure that the current setting in
L6-05 and time setting in L6-06 are
appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and
correct the cause of the overtorque.
-
• Make sure that the settings in L6-02
and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and
correct the cause of the overtorque.
-
• Make sure that the current setting in
L6-05 and time setting in L6-06 are
appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and
correct the cause of the overtorque.
UL3
Undertorque 1
There has been a current less than the
Undersetting in L6-02 for longer than the
torq Det
setting in L6-03.
1
(blinking)
UL4
Undertorque 2
There has been a current less than the
Undersetting in L6-05 for longer than the
torq Det
setting in L6-06.
2
(blinking)
OS
(blinking)
Overspeed
Det
Overspeed
The speed has been greater than the
setting in F1-08 for longer than the
setting in F1-09.
Overshooting/undershooting are
occurring.
Adjust the gain again.
The reference speed is too high.
Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren't
Check the settings in F1-08 and F1-09.
appropriate.
There is a break in the PG wiring.
The PG is disconnected
(blinking) The Inverter is outputting a frequency, The PG is wired incorrectly.
PG Open but PG pulses aren't being input.
Power isn't being supplied to the PG.
PGO
DEV
(blinking)
Speed
Deviation
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been greater
than the setting in F1-10 for longer
than the setting in F1-11.
External fault detected for CommuEF0
nications Card other than SI-K2
Opt
Continuing operation was specified
External
for EF0 (F6-03 = 3)and an external
Flt
fault was input from the Option Card.
7-10
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
Fix the wiring.
Supply power to the PG properly.
The load is too large.
Reduce the load.
The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short.
Lengthen the acceleration time and
deceleration time.
The load is locked.
Check the mechanical system.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 aren't
Check the settings in F1-10 and F1-11.
appropriate.
-
Remove the cause of the external fault.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
EF3
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S3
External fault (Input terminal S3)
EF4
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S4
External fault (Input terminal S4)
EF5
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S5
External fault (Input terminal S5)
EF6
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S6
External fault (Input terminal S6)
EF7
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S7
External fault (Input terminal S7)
An external fault was input from a
multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
EF8
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S8
External fault (Input terminal S8)
• Reset external fault inputs to the
multi-function inputs.
• Remove the cause of the external
fault.
EF9
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S9
External fault (Input terminal S9)
EF10
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S10
External fault (Input terminal S10)
EF11
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S11
External fault (Input terminal S11)
EF12
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S12
External fault (Input terminal S12)
PID Feedback Reference Lost
A PID feedback reference loss was
(blinking) detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PID feedFeed- back input was less than b5-13 (PID
back
feedback loss detection level) for
Loss
longer than the time set in b5-14 (PID
feedback loss detection time).
FBL
-
-
CE
MEMOBUS Communications Error
Normal reception was not possible for
MEMO2 s or longer after received control
BUS
data.
Com Err
(blinking)
-
Check the communications devices
and signals.
7-11
Table 7.2 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Option Card Communications
Error
(blinking) A communications error occurred in a
Option mode where the run command or a
Com Err frequency reference is set from an
Communications Option Card.
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
BUS
-
Check the communications devices
and signals.
Communications on Standby
Control data was not normally
received when power was turned ON.
-
Check the communications devices
and signals.
SI-F/G Communications Error
Detected
E-15
A communications error was detected
SI-F/G when a run command or frequency
Com Err reference was set from an Option Card
and continuous operation was set for
the E-15 operation selection.
-
Check the communications signals.
CALL
(blinking)
Com
Call
7-12
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Operation Errors
An operation error will occur if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two constant settings. It
won't be possible to start the Inverter until the constants have been set correctly. (The alarm output and fault
contact outputs will not operate either.)
When an operation error has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the
errors.
Table 7.3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings
Display
OPE01
kVA Selection
Meaning
Incorrect settings
Incorrect Inverter
capacity setting
The Inverter capacity setting doesn't match the Unit. (Contact your Yaskawa representative.)
Constant setting range
error
The constant setting is outside of the valid setting range. When this error is displayed, press the ENTER Key to display U1-34 (OPE fault constant).
OPE03
Terminal
Multi-function input
selection error
One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function input (H1-01 to H110) settings:
• The same setting has been selected for two or more multi-function inputs.
• An up or down command was selected independently. (They must be used
together.)
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) and Accel/Decel Ramp Hold (A) were
selected at the same time.
• Speed Search 1 (61, maximum output frequency) and Speed Search 2 (62. set frequency) were selected at the same time.
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) were selected while PID Control Mode
Selection (b5-01) was enabled.
• Positive and negative speed commands have not been set at the same time.
• The emergency stop command NO and NC have been set at the same time.
OPE05
Sequence
Select
Option Card selection
error
The Option Card was selected as the frequency reference source by setting b1-01 to
3, but an Option Card isn't connected (C option).
OPE02
Limit
OPE06
Control method selecPG Opt Misstion error
ing
OPE07
Analog
Selection
Multi-function analog
input selection error
V/f control with PG feedback was selected by setting A1-02 to 1, but a PG Speed
Control Card isn't connected.
The same setting has been selected for the analog input selection and the PID function selection.
• H3-09 = B and H6-01 = 1
• H3-09 = C and H6-01 = 2
b1-01 (Reference Selection) is set to 4 (pulse input) and H6-01 (Pulse Train Input
Function Selection) is set to a value other than 0 (frequency reference).
OPE08
A setting has been made that is not required in the current control method. Ex.: A
Constant selection error function used only with open-loop vector control was selected for V/f control. When
this error is displayed, press the ENTER Key to display U1-34 (OPE fault constant).
OPE09
PID control selection
error
The following settings have been made at the same time.
• b5-01 (PID Control Mode Selection) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b5-15 (PID Sleep Function Operation Level) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) has been set to 2 or 3.
OPE10
V/f Ptrn Set- V/f data setting error
ting
Constants E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, and E1-09 do not satisfy the following conditions:
• E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
• E3-02 (FMAX) ≥ E3-04 (FA) > E3-05 (FB) ≥ E3-07 (FMIN)
7-13
Table 7.3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings (Continued)
Display
7-14
Meaning
Incorrect settings
OPE11
Carr Freq/
On-Delay
Constant setting error
One of the following constant setting errors exists.
• C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Gain) > 6, the Carrier Frequency Lower Limit (C6-04)
> the Carrier Frequency Gain(C6-05)
• Upper/lower limit error in C6-03 to 05.
• C6-01 is 0 and C6-02 is 2 to E.
• C6-01 is 1 and C6-02 is 7 to E.
ERR
EEPROM
R/W Err
EEPROM write error
A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM.
• Try turning the power supply off and on again.
• Try setting the constants again.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Errors During Autotuning
The errors that can occur during autotuning are given in the following table. If an error is detected, the motor
will coast to a stop and an error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. The error contact output and
alarm output will not function.
Table 7.4 Errors During Autotuning
Display
Meaning
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
Data Invalid
Motor data error
There is an error in the data input for
autotuning.
There is an error in the relationship
• Check the input data.
between the motor output and the motor
• Check the capacity of the Inverter and
rated current.
motor.
The is an error between the no-load cur• Check the motor rated current and norent setting and the input motor rated
load current.
current (when autotuning for only lineto-line resistance is performed for vector
control).
Minor Fault
Alarm
A minor fault occurred during autotuning (xxx).
STOP key
STOP key input
The STOP Key was pressed to cancel
autotuning.
Resistance
Line-to-line resistance error
No-Load Current
Rated Slip
Accelerate
Motor Speed
Autotuning was not completed in the
specified time.
No-load current error The results of autotuning has exceeded
the setting range for a user constant.
Rated slip error
• Check the input data.
• Check motor wiring.
• If the motor is connected to the
machine, disconnect it.
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
Acceleration error
• Increase L7-01 and L7-02 (Reverse
The motor did not accelerate in the spec(detected only for
Torque Limits) if they are low.
ified time.
rotational autotuning)
• If the motor is connected to the
machine, disconnect it.
Motor speed error
The torque reference was too high
(detected only for
(100%) during acceleration (for openrotational autotuning)
loop vector control only).
The current flow exceeded the motor
rated current.
I-det. Circuit
• Check the input data.
• Check wiring and the machine.
• Check the load.
Current detection
error
The detected current sign was the opposite of what it should be.
• If the motor is connected to the
machine, disconnect it.
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
• Check the input data (particularly the
number of PG pulses and the number
of motor poles).
Check the current detection circuit,
motor wiring, current detector, and
installation methods.
There is a phase fault for U, V, or W.
Leak Inductance
Leakage inductance
error
Autotuning was not completed in the
specified time.
Check motor wiring.
V/f Over Setting
V/f settings excessive*
The torque reference exceeded 100%
and the no-load torque exceeded 70%
during autotuning.
• Check and correct the settings.
• Disconnect the load from the motor.
7-15
Table 7.4 Errors During Autotuning (Continued)
Display
Saturation
Rated FLA Alm
Meaning
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
Motor core saturation error (detected
only for rotational
autotuning)*
The results of autotuning has exceeded • Check the input data.
the setting range for a user constant so a • Check motor wiring.
temporary setting was made for the
• If the motor is connected to the
motor core saturation coefficient.
machine, disconnect it.
Rated current setting
alarm*
The rated current is set high.
Check the input data (particularly the
motor output current and motor rated
current).
* Displayed after autotuning has been completed.
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function
The errors that can occur when using the copy function from the Digital Operator are given in the following
table. An error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. If a Digital Operator key is pressed when an
error code is being displayed, the display will be cleared and 03-01 will be displayed. The error contact output
and alarm output will not function.
Table 7.5 Errors during Copy Function
Function
Read
Copy
Verify
7-16
Display
Meaning
Probable causes
PRE
Digital Operator
READ
write-protected
IMPOSSIBLE
o3-01 was set to 1 to write a constant
when the Digital Operator was writeprotected (o3-02 = 0).
IFE
READ DATA
ERROR
The read data length does not agree.
Illegal read data
The write data is incorrect.
Corrective Actions
Set o3-02 to 1 to enable writing constants with the Digital Operator.
Repeat the read.
Check the Digital Operator cable.
Replace the Digital Operator.
RDE
Illegal write status
DATA ERROR
A low Inverter voltage has been
An attempted write of a constant to
detected.
EEPROM on the Digital Writer failed. Repeat the read.
Replace the Digital Operator.
CPE
ID not matched
ID UNMATCH
The Inverter product code or software Use the copy function for the same
number is different.
product code and software number.
VAE
INV. KVA
UNMATCH
Inverter capacity
matched
The capacity of the Inverter being
copied and the capacity in the Digital
Operator are different.
Use the copy function for the same
Inverter capacity.
CRE
CONTROL
UNMATCH
Control method
matched
The control method of the Inverter
being copied and the control method
in the Digital Operator are different.
Use the copy function for the same
control method.
CYE
Verify error
COPY ERROR
The constant written to the Inverter
was compared with the constant in the
Retry the copy.
Digital Operator and they were different.
CSE
SUM CHECK Checksum error
ERROR
The checksum in the Inverter constant
area was compared with the checksum
Retry the copy.
in the Digital Operator constant area
and they were different.
VYE
VERIFY
ERROR
Verify error
The Digital Operator and Inverter setRetry the copy and verify again.
tings do not agree.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Due to constant setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as
expected when the system is started up. If that should occur, use this section as a reference and apply the
appropriate measures.
If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to Protective and Diagnostic Functions.
If Constant Constants Cannot Be Set
Use the following information if an Inverter constant cannot be set.
The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement Keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible.
The Inverter is operating (drive mode).
There are some constants that cannot be set during operation. Turn the Inverter off and then make the settings.
Constant write enable is input.
This occurs when “constant write enable” (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function input terminal (H1-01 to
H1-10). If the constant write enable input is OFF, the constants cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set the
constants.
Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)
If the constant A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) numbers are different, the constants for the
initialize mode cannot be changed. Reset the password.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Reset/Select Key and
the Menu Key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then reset the password. (Input the reset password
in constant A1-04.)
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.
The set value for the constant is wrong. Refer to Operation Errors in this chapter and correct the setting.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.
This is a Digital Operator communications error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the
Inverter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator and then re-install it.
7-17
If the Motor Does Not Operate
Use the following information if the motor does not operate.
The motor does not operate when the RUN Key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
The following causes are possible.
If the Inverter is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the Menu Key to display the drive mode, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER Key. “-Rdy-” will be displayed
when drive mode is entered.
IMPORTANT
The operation method setting is wrong.
If constant b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1 (control circuit terminal), the motor will not operate
when the Run Key is pressed. Either press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key* to switch to Digital Operator operation or set b1-02 to 0 (Digital Operator).
The LOCAL/REMOTE Key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 2. It is enabled
when the drive mode is entered.
INFO
The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter
will not operate.
Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is input, then the
frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.
The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
The following causes are possible.
The Inverter is not in drive mode.
If the Inverter is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the MENU Key to
display the drive mode, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER Key. “-Rdy-” will be displayed when drive mode is entered.
7-18
Troubleshooting
The operation method selection is wrong.
If constant b1-02 (reference selection) is set to 0 (Digital Operator), the motor will not operate when an external operation signal is input. Set b1-02 to 1 (control circuit terminal) and try again.
Similarly, the motor will also not operate if the LOCAL/REMOTE Key has been pressed to switch to Digital
Operator operation. In that case press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key* again to return to the original setting.
The LOCAL/REMOTE Key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 2. It is enabled
when the drive mode is entered.
INFO
A 3-wire sequence is in effect.
The input method for a 3-wire sequence is different than when operating by forward/stop and reverse/stop (2wire sequence). When 3-wire sequence is set, the motor will not operate even when an input terminal suitable
for forward run/stop and reverse run/stop is turned ON.
When using a 3-wire sequence, refer to the timing chart and input the proper signals.
When using a 2-wire sequence, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-01 through H1-10, terminals S3 to
S11) to a value other than 0.
The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter
will not operate. Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If multi-function analog inputs H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Selection) and H3-09
(Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection) are set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current)
is input, then the frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value
are correct.
The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.
The load may be too heavy. The Inverter has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost function, but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too heavy.
Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The motor only rotates in one direction.
“Reverse run prohibited” is selected. If b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (reverse run prohibited), the Inverter will not receive reverse run commands. To use both forward and reverse operation, set
b1-04 to 0.
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed
If the motor operates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring is faulty. When the Inverter T1(U),
T2(V), and T3(W) are properly connected to the motor T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W), the motor operates in a forward direction when a forward run command is executed. The forward direction depends on the manufacturer
and the motor type, so be sure to check the specifications.
The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U, V, and W.
7-19
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow
Use the following information is the motor does not output torque or if acceleration is too slow.
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in constants L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit. This
can cause the torque to be insufficient, or the acceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value
set for the torque limit is suitable.
If torque limits have been set for the multi-function analog input (H3-05 or H3-09 = 10 to 12 or 15), check to
be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.
If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will be
too long. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during running is too low.
If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the speed will drop before outputting torque. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
Autotuning has not been performed for vector control
Vector control will not be perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately for the
motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection
(A1-02) to V/f control (0 or 1).
If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference
Use the following information if the motor operates higher than the reference.
The analog frequency reference bias setting is wrong (the gain setting is wrong).
The frequency reference bias set in constant H3-03 is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that
the set value is suitable.
A signal is being input to the frequency reference (current) terminal A1.
When 1F (frequency reference) is set for constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function
Selection), a frequency corresponding to the terminal A2 input voltage (current) is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable.
If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision
If speed control accuracy is low for the slip compensation function, the slip compensation limit has been
reached. With the slip compensation function, compensation cannot be carried out beyond the slip compensation limit set in constant C3-03. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
7-20
Troubleshooting
If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in Openloop Vector Control Mode
The motor's rated voltage is high.
The Inverter's maximum output voltage is determined by its input voltage. (For example, if 200 VAC is input,
then the maximum output voltage will be 200 VAC.) If, as a result of vector control, the output voltage reference value exceeds the Inverter output voltage maximum value, the speed control accuracy will decrease. Use
a motor with a low rated voltage (i.e., a special motor for use with vector control), or change to flux vector
control.
If Motor Deceleration is Slow
Use the following information when the motor deceleration is slow.
The deceleration time is long even when braking resistor is connected.
The following causes are possible.
“Stall prevention during deceleration enabled” is set.
When braking resistor is connected, set constant L3-04 (Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration) to 0
(disabled) or 3 (with braking resistor). When this constant is set to 1 (enabled, the factory setting), braking
resistor does not fully function.
The deceleration time setting is too long.
Check the deceleration time setting (constants C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08).
Motor torque is insufficient.
If the constants are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, then the motor's power is limited. Consider
increasing the motor capacity.
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in constants L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit. This
can cause the deceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable.
If torque limits have been set for the multi-function analog input terminal A2 Function H3-09 (set value: 10 to
12 or 15), check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
If the Vertical-axis Load Drops When Brake is Applied
The sequence is incorrect. The Inverter goes into DC injection braking status for 0.5 seconds after deceleration
is completed. (This is the factory-set default.)
To ensure that the brake holds, set frequency detection 2 (H2-01 = 5) for the multi-function contact output terminals (M1 and Mw) so that the contacts will turn OFF when the output frequency is greater than L4-01 (3.0
to 5.0 Hz). (The contacts will turn ON below L4-01.)
There is hysteresis in frequency detection 2 (i.e., a frequency detection width, L4-02 = 2.0 Hz). Change the
setting to approximately 0.5 Hz if there are drops during stop. Do not use the multi-function contact output run
signal (H2-01 = 0) for the brake ON/OFF signal.
7-21
If the Motor Overheats
Take the following steps if the motor overheats.
The load is too big.
If the motor load is too heavy and the motor is used with the effective torque exceeding the motor's rated
torque, the motor will overheat. Some motor rating are given for short period performance and are not continuous ratings. Reduce the load amount by either lightening the load or lengthening the acceleration/deceleration time. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The ambient temperature is too high.
The motor rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will burn
out if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating
temperature is exceeded. Lower the motor's ambient temperature to within the acceptable ambient operating
temperature range.
The withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient.
When the motor is connected to the Inverter output, a surge is generated between the Inverter switching and
the motor coil. Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Inverter's input power supply voltage
(i.e., 1,200 V for 400 V class). Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor phases that
is greater than the maximum surge voltage. In particular, when using a 400 V class Inverter, use a special
motor for Inverters.
Autotuning has not been performed for vector control
Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning, or set the motor
constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection (A1-02) to V/f control (0
or 1).
If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio
If noise is generated by Inverter switching, implement the following countermeasures:
• Change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to
some extent by reducing the amount of internal switching.
• Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply input area.
• Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply output area.
• Use metal tubing. Electric waves can be shielded by metal, so encase the Inverter with metal (steel).
• Ground the Inverter and motor.
• Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring.
7-22
Troubleshooting
If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run
The Inverter performs internal switching, so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may cause the
ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a
high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit, with an operating time of
0.1 s or more), or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with Inverters). It will also help to some extent to change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the
carrier frequency. In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.
If There is Mechanical Oscillation
Use the following information when there is mechanical oscillation.
The machinery is making unusual sounds.
The following causes are possible.
There may be resonance between the mechanical system's characteristic frequency and the
carrier frequency.
If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is oscillating with a high-pitched whine, it may
indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with constants
C6-02 to C6-05.
There may be resonance between a machine's characteristic frequency and the output frequency of the Inverter.
To prevent this from occurring, either use the jump frequency functions in constants d3-01 to d3-04 or install
rubber padding on the motor base to reduce oscillation.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with open-loop vector control 1.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting constants C4-02
(torque compensation time constant), C2-01 (S-curve Characteristic Time at Acceleration Start), and C3-02
(Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time
setting.
Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately for the
motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the control method selection (A102) to V/f control (0 or 1).
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f control.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting constants C4-02
(Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant), N1-02 (Hunting Prevention Gain), and C3-02 (Slip
Compensation Primary Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f w/PG control.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the various types of speed control loop (ASR) gain.
If the oscillation cannot be eliminated in this way, set the hunting prevention selection (constant N1-01) to 0
(disabled) and then try adjusting the gain again.
7-23
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with flux vector control.
The gain adjustment is insufficient. Adjust the various gains for speed control (ASR). If the oscillation points
overlap with those of the machine and cannot be eliminated, increase the primary delay time constant for
speed control (ASR) in C5-06 and then readjust the gains.
If autotuning is not performed, proper performance cannot be achieved for vector control. Perform autotuning
or set the motor constants according to calculations.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with PID control.
If there is oscillation or hunting during PID control, check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P, I,
and D constants. (Refer to page 6-97.)
Autotuning has not been performed with vector control.
Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately for the
motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection
(A1-02) to V/f control.
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped
If the motor rotates even when the Inverter output is stopped, the DC injection braking is insufficient. If the
motor continues operating at low speed, without completely stopping, and after a deceleration stop has been
executed, it means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating enough. Adjust the DC injection braking
as follows:
• Increase the constant b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current) setting.
• Increase the constant b2-04 (DC Injection Braking (initial excitation) Time at Stop) setting.
If 0 V is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls
Generation of 0 V (main circuit voltage) and stalling can occur if the fan is turning when it is started. The DC
injection braking is insufficient when starting.
This can be prevented by slowing fan rotation by DC injection braking before starting the fan. Increase the
constant b2-03 (DC injection braking time (initial excitation) at start) setting.
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference
Use the following information if the output frequency does not rise to the frequency reference.
The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.
When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency
range. Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency (constants d3-01 to d3-03) and Jump Frequency Width (constant d3-04) settings are suitable.
7-24
Troubleshooting
The frequency reference upper limit has been reached.
The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula:
Maximum Output Frequency (E1-04) × Frequency Reference Upper Limit (d2-01) / 100
Check to be sure that the constant E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.
7-25
7-26
Maintenance and
Inspection
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter
Maintenance and Inspection........................................8-2
Maintenance and Inspection
Outline of Maintenance
The maintenance period of the Inverter is as follows:
Maintenance Period: Within 18 months of shipping from the factory or within 12 months of being delivered to
the final user, whichever comes first.
Daily Inspection
Check the following items with the system in operation.
• The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.
• There should be no abnormal heat generation.
• The ambient temperature should not be too high.
• The output current value shown on the monitor displays should not be higher than normal.
• The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally.
Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
Always turn OFF the power supply before beginning inspection. Confirm that the LCD and LED indicators on
the front cover have all turned OFF, and then wait until at least five minutes has elapsed before beginning the
inspection. Be sure not to touch terminals right after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in
electric shock.
Table 8.1 Periodic Inspections
Item
Inspection
External terminals,
Are all screws and bolts tight?
mounting bolts, connecAre connectors tight?
tors, etc.
Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
Reconnect the loose connectors.
Are the fins dirty or dusty?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
PCBs
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
the PCBs?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Cooling fan
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or
has the total operating time exceeded
Replace the cooling fan.
20,000 hours?
Power elements
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
the elements?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
Smoothing capacitor
Are there any irregularities, such as discoloration or odor?
Replace the capacitor or Inverter.
Cooling fins
8-2
Corrective Procedure
Maintenance and Inspection
Periodic Maintenance of Parts
The Inverter is configured of many parts, and these parts must be operating properly in order to make full use
of the Inverter functions.
Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage conditions. In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, it is necessary to perform
period inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
Periodic inspection standards vary depending the Inverter's installation environment and usage conditions.
The Inverter's maintenance periods are noted below. Keep them as reference.
Table 8.2 Part Replacement Guidelines
Part
Cooling fan
Smoothing capacitor
Breaker relays
Standard Replacement Period
2 to 3 years
5 years
-
Replacement Method
Replace with new part.
Replace with new part. (Determine need by
inspection.)
Determine need by inspection.
Fuses
10 years
Replace with new part.
Aluminum capacitors on PCBs
5 years
Replace with new board. (Determine need by
inspection.)
Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature:Yearly average of 30°C
Load factor: 80% max.
Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day
8-3
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 15 kW or Less
A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter.
If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter, the cooling fan can be replaced
without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and when pull the fan out in
the direction of arrow 2.
2. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the relay connector.
3. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides and remove the fan cover from the fan.
A ir flo w d ir e c t io n
Fig 8.1 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 15 kW or Less)
Mounting the Cooling Fan
1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction indicated by the arrows above
faces into the Inverter.
2. Connect the relay connector securely and place the relay connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the Inverter. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on
the Inverter.
8-4
Maintenance and Inspection
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or More
A cooling fan is attached to the top panel inside the Inverter.
The cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove the controller bracket to which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the controller.
3. Remove the cooling fan power cable connector (CN26 and CN27) from the gate driver positioned at the
back of the controller.
4. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
5. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow faces the top of the Inverter.
Air flow direction
Controller bracket
Fan cover
Controller
Connector
Gate driver
Fig 8.2 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 18.5 kW or More)
8-5
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card
The control circuit terminal card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the cables.
Always confirm that the charge indicator is not lit before removing or mounting the control circuit terminal
card.
IMPORTANT
Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
1. Remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
2. Remove the connecting line connectors connected to FE and NC on the control circuit terminal card.
3. Loosen the mounting screws (1) on the left and right sides of the control terminals until they are free. (It is
not necessary to remove these screws completely. They are self-rising.)
4. Pull the terminal card out sideways (in direction 2) with the screws sticking out from the card.
Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card
Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card.
Confirm that the terminal circuit card and the controller properly meet at connector CN5 before pressing in on
the card.
The connector pins may be bent if the card is forced into place, possibly preventing correct Inverter operation.
1
1
Removing and Mounting the
Control Circuit Terminal Card
FE NC
2
Fig 8.3 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
8-6
Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter and specifications for options and
peripheral devices.
Standard Inverter Specifications .................................. 9-2
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices .......9-5
Standard Inverter Specifications
The standard Inverter specifications are listed by capacity in the following tables.
Specifications by Model
Specifications are given by model in the following tables.
200V Class
Table 9.1 200 V Class Inverters
Model Number CIMR-G7C Power supply characteristics
Output ratings
Max. applicable motor output
(kW)
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
2090
2110
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
1.2
2.3
3.0
4.6
6.9
10
13
19
25
30
37
50
61
70
85
110
140
160
3.2
6
8
12
18
27
34
49
66
80
96
130
3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240 VAC
(Proportional to input voltage.)
160
183
224
300
358
415
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Frequencies supported up to 400 Hz using constant setting
3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz*2
+ 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluctuation
Measures for
power supply
harmonics
DC reactor
12-phase rectification
±5%
Optional
Built in
Not possible
Possible*3
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's
rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. The voltage of the cooling fan for 200 V Class Inverters of 30 kW is three-phase, 200, 208, or 220 V at 50 Hz or 200, 208, 220, or 230 V at 60 Hz.
* 3. A 3-wire transformer is required on the power supply for 12-phase rectification.
9-2
Standard Inverter Specifications
400 V Class
Table 9.2 400 V Class Inverters
Model Number CIMR-G7C Power supply characteristics
Output ratings
Max. applicable motor output
(kW) *1
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
41P5
42P2
43P7
45P5
47P5
4011
4015
4018
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
1.4
2.6
3.7
4.7
6.9
11
16
21
26
32
1.8
3.4
34
42
4.8
6.2
9
15
21
27
3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
Frequencies supported up to 400 Hz using constant setting
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Allowable voltage fluctuation
+ 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluctuation
±5%
DC reactor
12-phase rectification
Model Number CIMR-G7C Max. applicable motor output
(kW)*1
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Output ratings
40P7
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Measures for
power supply
harmonics
Power supply characteristics
40P4
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Max. voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Optional
Built in
Not possible
Possible*2
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
4075
4090
4110
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
185
220
300
74
98
130
150
180
210
230
280
340
460
97
128
165
195
240
270
302
370
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
450
605
40
50
61
52
65
80
Frequencies supported up to 400 Hz using constant setting
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Allowable voltage fluctuation
+ 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluctuation
±5%
Measures for
power supply
harmonics
DC reactor
12-phase rectification
Built in
Possible*2
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's
rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. A 3-wire transformer (optional) is required on the power supply for 12-phase rectification.
9-3
Common Specifications
The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters.
Table 9.3 Common Specifications
Model Number
CIMR-G7C Control method
Torque characteristics
Speed control range
Speed control accuracy
Speed control response
Torque limits
Torque accuracy
Control characteristics
Frequency control range
Frequency accuracy (temperature characteristics)
1:200 (Open-loop vector control 2), 1:1000 (Flux vector control)*1
±0.2% (Open-loop vector control, 25°C ± 10°C), ±0.02% (Flux vector control, 25°C ± 10°C)
10 Hz (Open-loop vector control 2), 30 Hz (Flux vector control)
Provided for vector control only (4 quadrant steps can be changed by constant settings.)
±5%
0.01 to 400 Hz*3
Digital references: ± 0.01% (-10°C to +40°C)
Analog references: ±0.1% (25°C ±10°C)
Digital references: 0.01 Hz, Analog references: 0.03 Hz/60 Hz (11 bit with no sign)
Output frequency resolution
0.001 Hz
Overload capacity and
maximum current*2
150% of rated output current per minute, 200% for 5 s
Frequency setting signal
-10 to 10 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, pulse train
Acceleration/Deceleration time
0.01 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
Main control functions
Approximately 20% (Approximately 125% with Braking Resistor option, braking transformer built into 200 V and 400 V Class
Inverters for 15 kW or less.)*2
Restarting for momentary power loss, speed searches, overtorque detection, torque limits, 17-speed control (maximum), acceleration/deceleration time changes, S-curve acceleration/deceleration, 3-wire sequence, autotuning (rotational or stationary), dwell
functions, cooling fan ON/OFF control, slip compensation, torque compensation, jump frequencies, upper and lower limits for
frequency references, DC braking for starting and stopping, high-slip braking, PID control (with sleep function), energy-saving
control, MEMOBUS communications (RS-485/422, 19.2 kbps maximum), fault reset, function copying, droop control, torque
control, speed/torque control switching, etc.
Motor protection
Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
Instantaneous overcurrent
protection
Stops at approx. 200% of rated output current.
Fuse blown protection
Overload protection
Protective functions
150%/0.3 Hz (Open-loop vector control 2), 150%/0 min−1 (Flux vector control)*1
Frequency setting resolution
Braking torque
Stops for fuse blown.
150% of rated output current per minute, 200% for 5 s
Overvoltage protection
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 410 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 820 V.
Undervoltage protection
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 190 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380 V.
Momentary power loss
ridethrough
Stops for 15 ms or more.
By selecting the momentary power loss method, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
Cooling fin overheating
Stall prevention
Grounding protection
Charge indicator
Ambient operating temperature
Environment
Specification
Sine wave PWM
Flux vector control, open-loop vector control 1 or 2, V/f control without PG, V/f control with PG (switched by constant setting)
Ambient operating humidity
Storage temperature
Application site
Protection by thermistor.
Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, or running.
Protection by electronic circuits.
Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
-10°C to 40°C (Enclosed wall-mounted type)
10°C to 45°C (Open chassis type)
95% max. (with no condensation)
- 20°C to + 60°C (short-term temperature during transportation)
Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
Altitude
1000 m max.
Vibration
Tolerance for vibration frequency less than 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s2 max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s2 max
* 1. Rotational autotuning must be performed to ensure obtaining the specifications given for flux vector control and open-loop vector control 1 and 2.
* 2. When connecting a Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit, set L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration) to 0 (disabled). Stopping may not be possible in the specified deceleration time if this function is not disabled.
* 3. The maximum output frequency for open-loop vector control 2 is 60 Hz.
9-4
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
The following options and peripheral devices can be used for the Inverter. Select them according to the
application.
Table 9.4 Options and Peripheral Devices
Purpose
Name
Protect Inverter wiring
MCCB or Ground
Fault Interrupter*1
NF
Always connect a breaker to the power supply line to protect Inverter wiring. Use a ground fault interrupter suitable
for high frequencies.
Prevents burning when
a Braking Resistor is
used.
Magnetic Contactor
HI-J
Install to prevent the braking resistor from burning out
when one is used. Always attach a surge absorber to the
coil.
Contains switching
surge
Surge Absorber
DCR2-
Absorbs surge from the magnetic contactor and control
relays. Connect surge absorbers to all magnetic contactors
and relays near the Inverter.
Isolates I/O signals
Isolator
DGP
Isolates the I/O signals of the Inverter and is effective
against inductive noise.
DC Reactor
AC Reactor
UZDA-
UZBA-
Used to improve the input power factor of the Inverter. All
Inverters of 18.5 kW or higher contain built-in DC reactors. These are optional for Inverters of 15 kW or less.
Install DC and AC reactors for applications with a large
power supply capacity (600 kVA or higher).
Input Noise Filter
(Single phase) LNFB-
(3 phase) LNFD-HF
Reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power
supply line and to reduce noise flowing from the inverter
into the power supply line. Connect as close to the
Inverter as possible.
Improve the input
power factor of the
Inverter
Reduce the affects of
radio and control device
noise
Finemet zerophase reactor to
reduce radio
noise*2
Model (Code)
F6045GB
(FIL001098)
F11080GB
(FIL001097)
Descriptions
Reduces noise from the line that sneaks into the Inverter
input power system. Insert as close to the Inverter as possible.
Can be use on both the input side and output side.
Output Noise Filter
LF-o
Reduces noise generated by the Inverter. Connect as close
to the Inverter as possible.
Braking Resistor
ERF-150WJ
(R00)
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to
reduce deceleration time (use rate: 3% ED).
Braking Resistor
Unit
LKEB-
(75600-K0)
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to
reduce deceleration time (use rate: 10% ED).
Braking Unit
CDBR-
(72600-R0)
Used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the deceleration time of the motor.
VS Operator
(small plastic
Operator)
JVOP-95•
(73041-0905X-)
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control to be performed by analog references from a
remote location (50 m max.).
Frequency counter specifications: 60/120 Hz, 90/180Hz
VS Operator
(Standard steelplate Operator)
JVOP-96•
(73041-0906X-)
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control to be performed by analog references from a
remote location (50 m max.).
Frequency counter specifications: 75 Hz, 150 Hz, 220 Hz
Digital Operator
Connection Cable
1 m cable: (72606WV001)
3 m cable: (72606WV003)
Extension cable to use a Digital Operator remotely.
Cable length: 1 m or 3 m
Controls an Inverter
system
VS System Module
JGSM-
A system controller that can be match to the automatic
control system to produce an optimum system configuration.
Provides Inverter
momentary power loss
recovery time
Momentary Power
Loss Recovery
Unit
P000
(73600-P000)
Handles momentary power losses for the control power
supply for models 2.2 kW or less (maintains power for
2 s).
Frequency Meter
DCF-6A
Frequency Setter
RV30YN20S (2 kΩ)
Frequency Setter
Knob
CM-3S
Output Voltmeter
SCF-12NH
Measures the output voltage externally and designed for
use with a PWM Inverter.
2 kΩ (ETX003270)
20 kΩ (ETX003120)
Connected to the control circuit terminals to input a frequency reference.
(RH000850)
Calibrates the scale of frequency meters and ammeters.
Enable stopping the
machine in a set time
Operates the Inverter
externally
Set/monitor frequencies and voltages externally.
Variable Resistor
Board for FreCorrect frequency refer- quency Reference
ence input, frequency
Frequency Meter
meter, ammeter scales
Scale Correction
Resistor
Power supply
MCCB or
ground fault
interrupter
Magnetic
contactor
AC reactor to
improve power
factor
Zero phase
reactor
Braking
resistor
Input-line
noise filter
DC
reactor
Inverter
VS Operator
Frequency
meter
Ground
Output-line
noise filter
Motor
Ground
Devices to set or monitor frequencies externally.
* 1. Use a ground fault interrupter with a current sensitivity of 200 mA minimum and an operating time of 0.1 s minimum to prevent operating errors. The interrupter
must be suitable for high-frequency operation.
Example: NV series by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation (manufactured in or after 1988)
EG, SG series by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (manufactured in or after 1984)
* 2. The finement zero-phase reactor is manufactured by Hitachi Metals.
9-5
The following Option Cards are available
Table 9.5 Option Cards
Type
Name
TO-C73630.13
73600C002X
Enables high-precision, high-resolution setting of analog
speed references.
• Input signal ranges: 0 to ±10 V (20 kΩ)
4 to 20 mA (500 Ω), 3 channels
• Input resolution:
13-bit + sign (1/8192)
TO-C73630.14
73600C003X
Enables 8-bit digital setting of speed references.
• Input signal: 8-bit binary
2-digit BCD + sign signal + set signal
• Input voltage: +24 V (isolated)
• Input current: 8 mA
TO-C73630.15
73600C016X
Enables 16-bit digital setting of speed references.
• Input signal: 16-bit binary
4-digit BCD + sign signal + set signal
• Input voltage: +24 V (isolated)
• Input current: 8 mA
With 16-bit/12-bit switch.
TO-C73640.7
73600D001X
Converts analog signals to monitor the Inverter's output status
(output frequency, output current, etc.) to absolute values and
outputs them.
• Output resolution: 8 bits (1/256)
• Output voltage: 0 to +10 V (not insulated)
• Output channels: 2 channels
TO-C73630.21
73600D002X
Output analog signals to monitor the Inverter's output status
(output frequency, output current, etc.).
• Output resolution: 11 bits (1/2048) + sign
• Output voltage: -10 to +10 V (not insulated)
• Output channels: 2 channels
TO-C73630.22
Digital Output Card
DO-08
73600D004X
Outputs isolated digital signals to monitor the Inverters operating status (alarm signals, zero speed detection, etc.)
Output form: Photocoupler output, 6 channels
(48 V, 50 mA max.)
Relay contact outputs, 2 channels
(250 VAC: 1 A max., 30VDC: 1 A max.)
TO-C73630.24
2C-Relay
Output Card
DO-02C
73600D007X
Provides two multi-function outputs (DPDT relay contacts) in
addition to those provided by the Inverter.
TO-C73640.8
Speed
(Frequency)
Reference
Digital ReferOption
ence Card
Cards
DI-08
9-6
Document
Number
73600C001X
Analog Reference Card
AI-14B
Digital Reference Card
DI-16H2
Analog Monitor Card
AO-08
Monitoring
Optional
Cards
Function
Enables high-precision, high-resolution setting of analog
speed references.
• Input signal ranges: 0 to 10 V (20 kΩ), 1 channel
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 1 channel
• Input resolution:
14-bit (1/16384)
Analog Reference Card
AI-14U
Built-in
(connect to
connector)
Code Number
Analog Monitor Card
AO-12
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
Table 9.5 Option Cards (Continued)
Type
Name
PG-A2
Built-in
(connect to
connector)
PG
Speed
Control
Cards
PG-B2
PG-D2
PG-X2
Code Number
Function
Document
Number
73600A012X
Used for V/f with PG control. Speed feedback is performed
using the PG attached to the motor to compensate for speed
fluctuations caused by slipping.
• A-phase pulse (single pulse) input (voltage, complementary, open-collector input)
• Maximum input frequency: 32767 Hz
• Pulse monitor output: +12 V, 20 mA
(PG power supply output: +12 V, 200 mA max.)
TO-C73640.1
73600A013X
• Used for V/f control.
• A-, B-phase input (complimentary input)
• Maximum input frequency: 32767 Hz
• Pulse monitor output: Open-collector
(PG power supply output: +12 V, 200 mA max.)
TO-C73640.2
73600A014X
• Differential input.
• A-phase pulse (differential pulse) input, for V/f control
• Maximum input frequency: 300 kHz
• Input: Conforms to RS-422
• Pulse monitor output: RS-422
(PG power supply output: +5 or +12 V, 200 mA max.)
TO-C73640.3
73600A015X
•
•
•
•
A-, B-, Z-phase pulse (differential pulse) input
Maximum input frequency: 300 kHz
Input: Conforms to RS-422
Pulse monitor output: RS-422
(PG power supply output: +5 or +12 V, 200 mA max.)
TO-C73640.4
9-7
Table 9.5 Option Cards (Continued)
Type
Built-in Com(conmuninected cations
to con- Option
nector) Cards
* Under development.
9-8
Name
Code Number
Function
Document
Number
DeviceNet
Communications Interface Card
SI-N
73600C021X
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using DeviceNet communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
ProfiBus-DP
Communications Interface Card
SI-P
73600C022X
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using ProfiBus-DP communications to start/stop Inverter
operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants
(output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
*
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using InterBus-S communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
*
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using CANopen communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
ControlNet
Communications Interface Card
SI-U
*
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using ControlNet communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
CC-Link
Communications Interface Card
SI-C
73600C032X
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using CC-Link communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
InterBus-S
Communications Interface Card
SI-R
CANopen
Communications Interface Card
SI-S
Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor, and peripheral devices and also provides lists of constants.
Varispeed G7 Control Modes.....................................10-2
Inverter Application Precautions ................................ 10-7
Motor Application Precautions .................................10-10
Conformance to CE Markings..................................10-12
User Constants ........................................................10-19
Varispeed G7 Control Modes
Details of the Varispeed G7-Series Inverter control modes and their features are provided in this section.
Control Modes and Features
Varispeed G7-Series Inverters support the following five control modes, allowing the selection of a control
mode to suit the required purpose. Table 10.1 provides an overview of the control modes and their features.
Table 10.1 Overview and Features of Control Modes
Control Mode
Constant Setting
Basic Control
Main Applications
PG Speed Control Card
(Option)
Basic
Performance
V/f Control with
PG
Open-loop Vector Control 1
Flux Vector Control
Open-loop Vector Control 2
A1-02 = 0
A1-02 = 1
A1-02 = 2
(factory setting)
A1-02 = 3
A1-02 = 4
Current vector
control with a PG
Current vector
control without a
PG using a highperformance magnetic flux and
speed estimator
(software)
Voltage/frequency
fixed ratio control
Voltage/frequency
with speed comfixed ratio control
pensation using a
PG
Current vector
control without a
PG
Variable speed
control, particuApplications
larly for control of
requiring highmultiple motors
precision speed
with a single
control using a PG
Inverter and for
on the machine
replacing existing
side
Inverters
Very high-performance control
Variable speed
Very high-perfor- without a PG on
control, applicamance control
the motor side
tions requiring
with a PG on the
(such as simple
high performance
motor side (simservodrives,
without a PG on
ple servodrives, torque control, and
the motor side,
high-precision
torque limiting),
and for replacing
speed control,
and function appliopen-loop vector
torque control, and cations between
control of the pretorque limiting)
flux vector and
vious VS-616G5.
open-loop vector 1
control.
Not required.
Required (PG-A2
or PG-D2).
Not required.
Required (PG-B2
or PG-X2).
Not required.
Speed Control
Range*1
1:40
1:40
1:100
1:1000
1:200*13
Speed Control
Accuracy*2
±2 to 3%
±0.03%
±0.2%
±0.02%
±0.2%
Speed
Response*3
Approx. 1 Hz
Approx. 1 Hz
5 Hz
40 Hz
10 Hz
Maximum
Output Frequency
400 Hz
400 Hz
400 Hz
400 Hz
60 Hz*13
150%/3 Hz
150%/3 Hz
150%/1 Hz
150%/0 min−1
150%/0.3 Hz
Starting
Torque*4
10-2
V/f Control without PG
Varispeed G7 Control Modes
Table 10.1 Overview and Features of Control Modes
Control Mode
Autotuning
Torque Limiting*5
Torque Control*6
Application
Functions
V/f Control without PG
V/f Control with
PG
Open-loop Vector Control 1
Flux Vector Control
Open-loop Vector Control 2
Line-to-line resistance (Normally
not required.)
Rotational autotuning, stationary
Line-to-line resisautotuning, statance (Normally
tionary autotuning
not required.)
for line-to-line
resistance only
Rotational autotuning, stationary
autotuning, sta5
ionary autotuning
for line-to-line
resistance only
Rotational autotuning, stationary
autotuning, stationary autotuning
for line-to-line
resistance only
Yes
Yes (except below
minimum frequency and during reverse
rotation)
No
Yes
Yes (except below
minimum frequency and during reverse
rotation)
Yes (Except below
minimum frequency and during reverse
rotation)
No
No
No
No
Yes (except during acceleration/
deceleration,
below minimum
frequency, or during reverse rotation)
Droop Control*7
No
No
No
Yes (except for
0 min−1 and during reverse rotation)
Zero-servo
Control*8
No
No
No
Yes
No
Speed Estimation (Detection)
Instantaneous
Speed
Search*9
Yes (speed and
rotation direction
estimation)
Yes (speed detection and rotation
direction estimation)
Yes (speed and
rotation direction
estimation)
Yes (speed and
rotation direction
detection)
Yes (speed and
rotation direction
estimation)
Automatic
Energy-saving Control*10
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
High-slip
Braking*11
Yes
Yes
(Under development)
(Under development)
(Under development)
Feed Forward Control*12
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
* 1. The variable speed control range. (For continuous operation, the motor's temperature rise must be considered.)
* 2. The speed deviation in relation to the maximum speed with a rated load and when the load is stable. (For open-loop vector control 1 and 2, the motor temperature
must be 25 °C ± 10 °C.)
* 3. The speed response guidelines indicating the extent of the motor's actual speed gain in proportion to the speed reference, which changes in a sinusoidal wave
form, within a range where motor torque does not become saturated.
* 4. A guideline for the motor torque that can be generated when started at a low speed and its output frequency (rotations) at that time.
* 5. This function limits the maximum motor torque to protect the machine and the load.
* 6. This function directly controls the amount of torque being generated at the motor and its rotation direction, e.g., to control force.
* 7. This function controls the amount of motor slip that occurs to prevent mechanical shock, when replacing a torque motor, etc.
* 8. This function performs simple positioning control (servo lock), without using an external positioning control device.
* 9. This function instantaneously estimates (or detects) the speed and rotation direction of a coasting motor, and quickly starts it without subjecting it to shock.
* 10.This function automatically adjusts the voltage applied to the motor to optimize the motor's efficiency with light loads.
* 11.This function improves the deceleration time without using a braking resistor by making the motor winding absorb regenerative power. As a standard, this function is effective with a motor running on 160 kW or less with a high-inertia load.
* 12.This function enables proportional gain in relation to changes in the speed reference, even for low rigidity (corresponds to the servo's model gain control).
* 13.Set the maximum output frequency (E1-04) for open-loop vector control 2 to a value not exceeding 60 Hz. Use within a speed control range of 1:10 for torque
control on the regenerative side.
10-3
Application Function Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the application functions.
• Perform rotational autotuning during trial operation whenever it is possible to separate the motor and
machine. To achieve the characteristics of vector control described in Table 10.1, the control must be
adjusted within a range that the machine will not vibrate after rotational autotuning has been performed.
• With vector control, the motor and Inverter must be connected 1:1. Vector control is not possible when
multiple motors are connected to a single Inverter. Select an Inverter capacity so the rated motor current is
50% to 100% of the rated Inverter current.
• For estimated speed searching, the motor and Inverter must be connected 1:1. The speed search must be
performed at a frequency of 130 Hz or less and with a motor with the same number of frames as or one
frame less than the Inverter capacity.
• During high-slip braking, motor loss increases, so use a high-slip braking frequency of 5% ED or less, and
a braking time of 90 seconds or less. Once high-slip braking has started, the motor cannot be restarted until
it has stopped.
• Feed forward control is a function that improves the proportional gain of the motor speed in relation to the
change in the speed reference. Adjust the response to interference loads using the speed controller (ASR)
constants.
• The torque limit function will not operate during acceleration or deceleration (during soft start transition)
when using a control mode such as open-loop vector control 1. Even if the motor speed drops due to torque
limiting while set to a fixed speed, the speed will not fall below the minimum frequency and the motor will
not slip into reverse rotation. These conditions also apply to open-loop vector control 2 and other application functions.
Precautions When Using Open-loop Vector Control 2
Using open-loop vector control 2 (A1-02=4) gives a higher level of control than conventional open-loop vector control (A1-02=2). When using open-loop vector control 2, pay attention to the points listed below. For a
comparison with other control modes, refer to Table 10.1 Overview and Features of Control Modes.
General Precautions
• The maximum possible setting for the maximum output frequency (E1-04) is 60 Hz.
• Be sure to perform autotuning. Refer to the precautions given under Autotuning in Chapter 4 Trial Opera-
tion.
Precaution on Regeneration
With speed control, in the low speed range (approx. 6 Hz max.), the speed increases for large regenerative
loads, and it may not be possible to maintain speed accuracy. Examples are given below for forward rotation at frequencies of 0.3, 1, 3, 6, and 60 Hz.
10-4
Varispeed G7 Control Modes
Load torque (%)
200
Driving torque
100
Speed (Hz)
0
1
3
6
60
0.3
-100
Regenerative torque
-200
With torque control, operate within a speed control range of 1:10 on the regenerative side.
Precautions on Setting Constants
If the constants are not set properly, performance may be adversely affected.
• If there is a possibility of starting with the motor already rotating, enable the speed search function (b3-
01=1).
• When lowering a torque limit (L7-
), set it to as high a value as possible within the range allowed by
the system.
• If torque limit acceleration is performed, or if the motor slips at the torque limit causing a CF (control
fault), increase N4-08 (proportional gain of speed estimator) in steps of 5 until acceleration and deceleration are performed smoothly. When N4-08 is increased, the torque reference (U1-09) may oscillate. If so,
increase C5-06 (ASR primary delay time) by about 0.050 s.
Precaution on Torque Accuracy
To ensure torque accuracy within the speed control range of 1:10 when the motor is operated by itself at
the minimum frequency and the torque reference (U1-09) is higher than in the medium- and high-speed
ranges, increase the setting of the torque adjustment gain (N4-17) and adjust the torque reference so that it
is about the same as that in the medium and high speed ranges.
Control Modes and Applications
Application examples for the Inverter control modes are provided here.
V/f Control without PG (A1-02 = 0)
V/f control without a PG is suitable for applications where multiple motors are operated with a single Inverter,
such as with multi-motor drives.
10-5
(Thermal relay)
M1
Inverter
M2
M3
Fig 10.1
V/f Control with PG (A1-02 = 1)
V/f control with a PG enables precise control of machine line speed. Speed control using the speed feedback
of the machine shaft is possible in this mode.
Conveyor
Inverter
M
PG
PG Speed Control Card
(PG-A2 or PG-D2)
Fig 10.2
Flux Vector Control (A1-02 = 2 or 4)
Flux vector control enables the use of high-performance drives without a speed detector. PG (pulse generator)
wiring is not required.
Inverter
M
Fig 10.3
Vector Control with PG (A1-02 = 3)
Vector control with a PG is suitable for applications using high-precision drives with PG feedback. High-precision positioning, zero-speed control, and torque control are possible with this mode.
Inverter
M
PG
PG Speed Control Card
(PG-B2 or PG-X2)
Fig 10.4
10-6
Inverter Application Precautions
Inverter Application Precautions
This section provides precautions for selecting, installing, setting, and handling Inverters.
Selection
Observe the following precautions in selecting an Inverter.
Installing Reactors
A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity
power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a phase capacitor. Excessive peak current can
destroy the convertor section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor (optional) to improve the power supply power factor.
DC reactors are built into 200 V class Inverters of 18.5 to 110 kW and 400 V class Inverters of 18.5 to 300 kW.
If a thyristor convertor, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or
AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.
Power supply
capacity (kVA)
DC or AC reactor
Required
DC or AC reactor
Not required
Inverter capacity (kVA)
Fig 10.5
Inverter Capacity
When connecting special motors or multiple motors in parallel to an Inverter, select the Inverter capacity so
that the rated output current of the Inverter is 1.1 times the sum of all the motor rated currents.
Initial Torque
The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted by the overload current ratings of the
Inverter that is driving the motor. The torque characteristics are generally less than those required when starting using a normal commercial power supply. If a large initial torque is required, select an Inverter with a
somewhat larger capacity or increase the capacity of both the motor and the inverter.
Emergency Stop
Although the Inverter's protective functions will stop operation when a fault occurs, the motor will not stop
immediately. Always provide mechanical stop and protection mechanisms on equipment requiring an emergency stop.
Options
Terminals B1, B2, , 1, 2, 3 are for connecting only the options specifically provided by Yaskawa.
Never connect any other devices to these terminals.
10-7
Installation
Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter.
Installation in Enclosures
Either install the Inverter in a clean location not subject to oil mist, airborne matter, dust, and other contaminants, or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel
space so that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not go beyond the allowable temperature. Do not
install the Inverter on wood or other combustible materials.
Installation Direction
Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other horizontal surface.
Settings
Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter.
Upper Limits
The Digital Operator can be used to set high-speed operation up to a maximum of 400 Hz (depends on the carrier frequency). Incorrect settings can be dangerous. Use the maximum frequency setting functions to set
upper limits. (The maximum output frequency is factory-set to 60 Hz.)
DC Injection Braking
The motor can overheat if the DC injection braking voltage or braking time is set to a large value.
Acceleration/Deceleration Times
The motor's acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load
torque, and the load's inertial moment (GD2/4). If the stall prevention functions are activated during acceleration or deceleration, increase the acceleration or deceleration time. The stall prevention functions will increase
the acceleration or deceleration time by the amount of time the stall prevention function is active.
To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter.
10-8
Inverter Application Precautions
Handling
Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter.
Wiring Check
The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V, or W.
Check wring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and sequences carefully.
Magnetic Contactor Installation
Do not start and stop operation frequently with a magnetic contactor installed on the power supply line. Doing
so can cause the Inverter to malfunction. Do not turn the Inverter ON and OFF with a magnetic contactor more
than one time every 30 minutes.
Maintenance and Inspections
After turn OFF the main circuit power supply, always confirm that the CHARGE indicator is not lit before
performing maintenance or inspections. The voltage remaining in the capacitor may cause electric shock.
10-9
Motor Application Precautions
This section provides precautions for motor application.
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor
When a standard motor is operated with the Inverter, power loss is slightly higher than when operated with a
commercial power supply. Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard
motor.
Low Speed Ranges
Cooling effects diminish in the low-speed range, resulting in an increase in the motor temperature. Therefore,
the motor torque should be reduced in the low-speed range whenever using a motor not made by Yaskawa. If
100% torque is required continuously at low speed, consider using a special inverter or vector motor.
Installation Withstand Voltage
If the input voltage is high (440 V or higher) or the wiring distance is long, the motor insulation voltage must
be considered. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
High-speed Operation
When using the motor at a high speed (60 Hz or more), problems may arise in dynamic balance and bearing
durability. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
Torque Characteristics
The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the Inverter than when operated with a commercial power supply. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the
motor to set a proper V/f pattern.
Vibration
The Inverter uses a high carrier PWM to reduce motor vibration. (A constant can be set to select low carrier,
PWM modulation control as well.) When the motor is operated with the Inverter, motor vibration is almost the
same as when operated with a commercial power supply.
Motor vibration may, however, become greater in the following cases.
Resonance with the Natural Frequency of the Mechanical System
Take special care when a machine that has been operated at a constant speed is to be operated in variable speed
mode. If resonance occurs, install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base or use the frequency jump function
to skip any frequency resonating the machine.
Imbalanced Rotor
Take special care when the motor is operated at a higher speed (60 Hz or more).
Noise
Noise varies with the carrier frequency. At high carrier frequencies, the noise is almost the same when the
motor is operated with a commercial power supply. Motor noise, however, becomes louder when the motor is
operated at a speed higher than the rated speed (60 Hz).
10-10
Motor Application Precautions
Using the Inverter for Special Motors
Observe the following precautions when using a special motor.
Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select, therefore, an
appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used. Before changing the
number of poles, always make sure that the motor has stopped. Otherwise, the overvoltage protective or overcurrent protective mechanism will be actuated, resulting in an error.
Submersible Motor
The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always select
an Inverter by checking its rated output current. When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long, use
a cable thick enough to connect the motor and Inverter to prevent motor torque reduction.
Explosion-proof Motor
When an explosion-proof motor is to be used, it must be subject to an explosion-proof test in conjunction with
the Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosion-proof motor is to be operated with the Inverter.
Since the Inverter itself is, however, not explosion-proof, always install it in a safe place.
Gearmotor
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer.
In particular, continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in burning. If
the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 60 Hz, consult with the manufacturer.
Synchronous Motor
A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control. If a group of synchronous motors is individually
turned ON and OFF, synchronism may be lost.
Single-phase Motor
Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase motor. The motor should be replaced with a 3-phase motor.
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains)
If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will
be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission mechanism will
make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at a speed higher
than 60 Hz.
10-11
Conformance to CE Markings
Points regarding conformance to CE markings are given below.
CE Markings
CE markings indicate conformance to safety and environmental standards that apply to business transactions
(including production, imports, and sales) in Europe. There are unified European standards for mechanical
products (Machine Directive), electrical products (Low Voltage Directive), and electrical noise (EMC Directive). CE markings are required for business transactions in Europe (including production, imports, and sales).
The Varispeed G7-Series Inverters bear CE markings indicating conformance to the Low Voltage Directive
and the EMC Directive.
• Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC
93/68/EEC
• EMC Directive:
89/336/EEC
92/31/EEC
93/68/EEC
Machinery and installations that incorporate the Inverter are also subject to CE markings. It is ultimately the
responsibility of customers making products incorporating the Inverter to attach CE markings to the finished
products. The customer must confirm that the finished products (machines or installations) conform to the
European Standards.
Requirements for Conformance to CE Markings
Low Voltage Directive
Varispeed G7-Series Inverters satisfy testing for conformance to the Low Voltage Directive under the conditions described in European Standard EN50178.
Requirements for Conformance to the Low Voltage Directive
Varispeed G7-Series Inverters must satisfy the following conditions in order to conform to the Low Voltage
Directive.
• It must be used under conditions corresponding to overvoltage category 3 or less and pollution degree 2 or
less as specified in IEC664.
• Input fuses:
For details on selecting fuses, refer to Table 10.2 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples.
• With Inverters CIMR-G7C2018 to 2110 and CIMR-G7C4018 to 4300, an enclosure preventing foreign
matter from entering from the top or front sides is required (IP4X or higher: panel installation).
10-12
Conformance to CE Markings
Input Fuses
In order to conform to the Low Voltage Directive, fuses must be provided for inputs. Use UL-compatible input
fuses with ratings higher than the voltages and currents, and fusing I2t specifications within the ranges shown
in the table below.
Table 10.2 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples
Voltage
Class
200 V
class
Selection Requirements
Input Fuse (Examples)
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-G7C
Voltage
(V)
Current
(A)
Fusing I2t
(A2sec)
20P4
240
10
12 to 25
A60Q12-2
FERRAZ
600 V
12 A
17
20P7
240
15
23 to 55
CR2LS-20/UL
FUJI
250 V
20 A
27
21P5
240
20
34 to 98
CR2LS-30/UL
FUJI
250 V
30 A
60
22P2
240
30
82 to 220
CR2LS-50/UL
FUJI
250 V
50 A
200
23P7
240
40
220 to 610
CR2LS-75/UL
FUJI
250 V
75 A
560
25P5
240
50
290 to 1300
CR2LS-75/UL
FUJI
250 V
75 A
560
27P5
240
60
450 to 5000
CR2LS-100/UL
FUJI
250 V
100 A
810
2011
240
90
1200 to 7200
CR2L-125/UL
FUJI
250 V
125 A
1570
2015
240
120
1800 to 7200
CR2L-150/UL
FUJI
250 V
150 A
2260
2018
240
140
870 to 16200
CR2L-150/UL
FUJI
250 V
150 A
2260
2022
240
160
1500 to 23000
CR2L-200/UL
FUJI
250 V
200 A
4010
2030
240
220
2100 to 19000
CR2L-260/UL
FUJI
250 V
260 A
7320
2037
240
270
2700 to 55000
CR2L-300/UL
FUJI
250 V
300 A
9630
2045
240
300
4000 to 55000
CR2L-300/UL
FUJI
250 V
300 A
9630
2055
240
370
7100 to 64000
CR2L-400/UL
FUJI
250 V
400 A
24000
2075
240
500
11000 to 64000
CR2L-500/UL
FUJI
250 V
500 A
40000
2090
240
600
13000 to 83000
CR2L-600/UL
FUJI
250 V
600 A
52000
2110
240
700
13000 to 83000
A50P700-4
FERRAZ
500 V
700 A
49000
Model Number Manufacturer Ratings
Fusing
I2t
(A2sec)
10-13
Table 10.2 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples
Voltage
Class
400 V
class
10-14
Selection Requirements
Input Fuse (Examples)
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-G7C
Voltage
(V)
Current
(A)
Fusing I2t
(A2sec)
40P4
480
5
16 to 660
CR6L-20/UL
FUJI
600 V
20 A
26
40P7
480
10
19 to 660
CR6L-20/UL
FUJI
600 V
20 A
26
41P5
480
10
46 to 660
CR6L-30/UL
FUJI
600 V
30 A
59
42P2
480
15
78 to 660
CR6L-50/UL
FUJI
600 V
50 A
317
43P7
480
20
110 to 660
CR6L-50/UL
FUJI
600 V
50 A
317
44P0
480
25
220 to 660
CR6L-50/UL
FUJI
600 V
50 A
317
45P5
480
30
240 to 900
CR6L-50/UL
FUJI
600 V
50 A
317
47P5
480
40
320 to 900
CR6L-75/UL
FUJI
600 V
75 A
564
4011
480
50
1000 to 1800
CR6L-100/UL
FUJI
600 V
100 A
1022
4015
480
60
1500 to 4100
CR6L-150/UL
FUJI
600 V
150 A
3070
4018
480
70
530 to 5800
CR6L-150/UL
FUJI
600 V
150 A
3070
4022
480
90
1130 to 5800
CR6L-150/UL
FUJI
600 V
150 A
3070
4030
480
110
1700 to 5800
CR6L-150/UL
FUJI
600 V
150 A
3070
4037
480
140
2000 to 13000
CR6L-200/UL
FUJI
600 V
200 A
5200
4045
480
160
3000 to 13000
CR6L-200/UL
FUJI
600 V
200 A
5200
4055
480
220
6800 to 55000
CR6L-300/UL
FUJI
600 V
300 A
17700
4075
480
300
3800 to 55000
CR6L-300/UL
FUJI
600 V
300 A
17700
4090
480
330
12000 to 23000
A70P400-4
FERRAZ
700 V
400 A
19000
4110
480
400
18000 to 64000
A70P450-4
FERRAZ
700 V
400 A
24000
4132
480
450
28000 to 250000
A70P600-4
FERRAZ
700 V
600 A
43000
4160
480
540
40000 to 250000
A70P700-4
FERRAZ
700 V
700 A
59000
4185
480
750
63000 to 400000
A70P900-4
FERRAZ
700 V
900 A
97000
4220
480
750
63000 to 400000
A70P1000-4
FERRAZ
700 V
900 A
97000
4300
480
1000
94000 to 920000
A70P1000-4
FERRAZ
700 V
1000 A
120000
Model Number Manufacturer Ratings
Fusing
I2t
(A2sec)
Conformance to CE Markings
EMC Directive
Varispeed G7-Series Inverters satisfy testing for conformance to the EMC Directive under the conditions
described in European Standard EN61800-3.
Installation Method
In order to ensure that the machinery or installation incorporating the Inverter conforms to the EMC Directive,
perform installation according to the method below.
• Install a noise filter that conforms to European Standards on the input side. (Refer to Table 10.3 EMC
Noise Filters).
• Use a shielded line or metal piping for wiring between the Inverter and Motor. Make the wiring as short as
possible.
• To suppress harmonics, install a DC reactor in CIMR-G7C20P4, 20P7, 40P4, and 40P7 models. (Refer to
Table 10.4 DC Reactors for Suppressing Harmonics.)
L1 L2L3PE
Remove the paint on the ground side.
Inputs
Inverter
Filter
Outputs
L1L2L3 T1T2T3
Wiring length:
40 cm max.
Metallic plate
Wiring length: 20 m max.
Remove the paint on the ground side.
IM
Fig 10.6 Installation Method for Filter and Inverter (CIMR-G7C20P4 to 2018, 40P4 to 4018)
10-15
L1 L2L3 PE
Inputs
Remove the paint on the ground side.
Inverter
Filter
Outputs
L1L2L3 T1T2T3
Wiring length:
40 cm max.
Metallic plate
Wiring length: 20 m max.
Remove the paint on the ground side.
IM
Fig 10.7 Installation Method for Filter and Inverter (CIMR-G7C2022 to 2110, 4022 to 4300)
10-16
Conformance to CE Markings
Table 10.3 EMC Noise Filters
Voltage
Class
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-G7C
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
Noise Filter (Made by Schaffner)
Model Number
Rated Current (A)
Weight (kg)
Dimensions
FS 5972-10-07
10
1.1
141 x 330 x 46
FS 5972-18-07
18
1.3
141 x 330 x 46
FS 5972-35-07
35
1.4
141 x 330 x 46
FS 5972-60-07
60
3
206 x 355 x 60
FS 5972-100-07
100
4.9
236 x 408 x 80
FS 5972-120-35
120
4.3
90 x 366 x 180
FS 5972-180-40
180
6
120 x 451 x 170
FS 5972-300-37
300
11
130 x 610 x 240
FS 5972-300-37
360
11
130 x 610 x 240
FS 5972-300-37
450
11
130 x 610 x 240
2011
200 V
class
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
2090
2110
10-17
Table 10.3 EMC Noise Filters
Voltage
Class
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-G7C
Noise Filter (Made by Schaffner)
Model Number
Rated Current (A)
Weight (kg)
Dimensions
Under development
---
---
---
Under development
---
---
---
Under development
---
---
---
Under development
---
---
---
Under development
---
---
---
Under development
---
---
---
Under development
---
---
---
Under development
---
---
---
4132
Under development
---
---
---
4160
Under development
---
---
---
4185
Under development
---
---
---
4220
Under development
---
---
---
4300
Under development
---
---
---
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
4011
4015
4018
400 V
class
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
4075
4090
4110
Table 10.4 DC Reactors for Suppressing Harmonics
Voltage Class
200 V class
400 V class
10-18
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-G7C
20P4
20P7
40P4
40P7
DC Reactor
Model Number
Manufacturer
Ratings
Code Number
UZDA-B
YASKAWA
5.4 A 8 mH
X010084
UZDA-B
YASKAWA
3.2 A 28 mH
X010052
User Constants
User Constants
Factory settings are given in the following table. These setting are for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW set
to factory set control method (open-loop vector control).
Table 10.5 User Constants
No.
Name
A1-00
Language selection for digital
operator display
A1-01
Constant access level
A1-02
Control method selection
A1-03
Factory
Setting
Setting
No.
1*1
b5-11
2
b5-12
2*1
b5-13
Initialize
0
b5-14
Password
Password setting
0
0
b5-15
b5-16
User setting constants
-
b5-17
1
1
0
0
b2-02
Reference selection
Operation method selection
Stopping method selection
Prohibition of reverse operation
Operation selection for setting E109 or less
Read sequence input twice
Operation selection after switching
to remote mode
Run command selection in programming modes
Zero speed level (DC injection
braking starting frequency)
DC injection braking current
b2-03
b2-04
Name
PID reverse output selection
Factory
Setting
0
b6-01
b6-02
b6-03
b6-04
Selection of PID feedback command loss detection
PID feedback command loss detection level
PID feedback command loss detection time
PID sleep function operation level
PID sleep operation delay time
Acceleration/deceleration time for
PID reference
Dwell frequency at start
Dwell time at start
Dwell frequency at stop
Dwell time at stop
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
b7-01
Droop control gain
0.0
1
b7-02
Droop control delay time
0.05
0
b8-01
Energy-saving mode selection
0
b8-02
Energy-saving gain
0.7*4
0.5
b8-03
Energy-saving filter time constant
0.50*5
50
b8-04
DC injection braking time at start
0.00
b8-05
20
0.50
b8-06
0
b9-01
Zero-servo gain
5
b3-01
b3-02
b3-03
b3-05
b4-01
b4-02
b5-01
b5-02
b5-03
b5-04
b5-05
DC injection braking time at stop
Magnetic flux compensation volume
Speed search selection
Speed search operating current
Speed search deceleration time
Speed search wait time
Timer function ON-delay time
Timer function OFF-delay time
PID control mode selection
Proportional gain (P)
Integral (I) time
Integral (I) limit
Derivative (D) time
Energy-saving coefficient
Power detection filter time constant
Search operation voltage limiter
2*2 *3
100*2
2.0
0.2
0.0
0.0
0
1.00
1.0
100.0
0.00
b9-02
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05
C1-06
C1-07
C1-08
C1-09
C1-10
b5-06
PID limit
100.0
C1-11
b5-07
PID offset adjustment
0.0
C2-01
b5-08
PID primary delay time constant
0.00
C2-02
b5-09
PID output characteristics selection
0
C2-03
b5-10
PID output gain
1.0
C2-04
Zero-servo completion width
Acceleration time 1
Deceleration time 1
Acceleration time 2
Deceleration time 2
Acceleration time 3
Deceleration time 3
Acceleration time 4
Deceleration time 4
Emergency stop time
Accel/decel time setting unit
Accel/decel time switching frequency
S-curve characteristic time at
acceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at
acceleration end
S-curve characteristic time at
deceleration start
S-curve characteristic time at
deceleration end
A1-04
A1-05
A2-01 to
A2-32
b1-01
b1-02
b1-03
b1-04
b1-05
b1-06
b1-07
b1-08
b2-01
b2-08
Setting
0
0
1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
*6
0
10
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
1
0.0
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.00
10-19
Table 10.5 User Constants (Continued)
No.
Factory
Setting
Setting
d3-01
Jump frequency 1
Factory
Setting
0.0
d3-02
Jump frequency 2
0.0
d3-03
Jump frequency 3
0.0
d3-04
Jump frequency width
1.0
No.
C4-03
C4-04
C4-05
C5-01
Slip compensation gain
1.0*3
Slip compensation primary delay
200*2
time
Slip compensation limit
200
Slip compensation selection during
0
regeneration
Output voltage limit operation
0
selection
Torque compensation gain
1.00
Torque compensation primary
20*2*3
delay time constant
Forward starting torque
0.0
Reverse starting torque
0.0
Starting torque time constant
10
ASR proportional gain 1
20.00
C5-02
ASR integral (I) time 1
0.500
d5-06
C5-03
C5-04
C5-05
C5-06
C5-07
C5-08
C6-02
ASR proportional gain 2
ASR integral (I) time 2
ASR limit
ASR primary delay time
ASR switching frequency
ASR integral (I) limit
Carrier frequency selection
20.00
0.500
5.0
0.004
0.0
400
6*6
C6-03
Carrier Frequency Upper Limit
C6-04
d1-01
d1-02
d1-03
d1-04
d1-05
d1-06
d1-07
d1-08
d1-09
d1-10
d1-11
d1-12
d1-13
d1-14
Carrier Frequency Lower Limit
Carrier Frequency Proportional
Gain
Carrier frequency for open-loop
vector control 2
Frequency reference 1
Frequency reference 2
Frequency reference 3
Frequency reference 4
Frequency reference 5
Frequency reference 6
Frequency reference 7
Frequency reference 8
Frequency reference 9
Frequency reference 10
Frequency reference 11
Frequency reference 12
Frequency reference 13
Frequency reference 14
d1-15
C3-01
C3-02
C3-03
C3-04
Name
d4-02
Frequency reference hold function
selection
+ - Speed limits
10
d5-01
Torque control selection
0
d5-02
d5-03
d5-04
d5-05
0
1
0
10
d6-01
d6-02
d6-03
d6-05
E1-01
E1-03
E1-04
Torque reference delay time
Speed limit selection
Speed limit
Speed limit bias
Speed/torque control switching
timer
Field weakening level
Field frequency
Field forcing function selection
AφR time constant
Input voltage setting
V/f pattern selection
Max. output frequency
15.0*6
E1-05
Max. voltage
15.0*6
E1-06
Base frequency
60.0*2
00
E1-07
Mid. output frequency
3.0*2
4
E1-08
Mid. output frequency voltage
15.0*2 *7
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
E1-09
E1-10
E1-11
E1-12
E1-13
E2-01
E2-02
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
E2-06
E2-07
E2-08
E2-09
1.5*2
9.0*2 *7
0.0*9
0.0*9
0.0*10
1.90*6
2.90*6
1.20*6
4
9.842*6
18.2*6
0.50
0.75
0.0
Frequency reference 15
0.00
E2-10
d1-16
d1-17
Frequency reference 16
Jog frequency reference
0.00
6.00
E2-11
E3-01
d2-01
Frequency reference upper limit
100.0
E3-02
d2-02
Frequency reference lower limit
0.0
E3-03
d2-03
Master speed reference lower limit
0.0
E3-04
Min. output frequency
Min. output frequency voltage
Mid. output frequency 2
Mid. output frequency voltage 2
Base voltage
Motor rated current
Motor rated slip
Motor no-load current
Number of motor poles
Motor line-to-line resistance
Motor leak inductance
Motor iron saturation coefficient 1
Motor iron saturation coefficient 2
Motor mechanical loss
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
Motor rated output
Motor 2 control method selection
Motor 2 max. output frequency
(FMAX)
Motor 2 max. voltage (VMAX)
Motor 2 max. voltage frequency
(FA)
C3-05
C4-01
C4-02
C6-05
C6-11
10-20
Name
d4-01
0
0
80
0.0
0
1.00
200*7
F
60.0
200.0
*2 *7
14*4
0.40*4
2
60.0*2
200.0*2
60.0
Setting
User Constants
Table 10.5 User Constants (Continued)
No.
Name
E4-05
E4-06
Motor 2 mid. output frequency 1
(FB)
Motor 2 mid. output frequency
voltage 1 (VC)
Motor 2 min. output frequency
(FMIN)
Motor 2 min. output frequency
voltage (VMIN)
Motor 2 rated current
Motor 2 rated slip
Motor 2 no-load current
Motor 2 number of poles (number
of poles)
Motor 2 line-to-line resistance
Motor 2 leak inductance
E4-07
Motor 2 rated capacity
F1-01
PG constant
F1-02
Factory
Setting
Setting
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
3.0 *2
F4-08
Analog output signal level for
channel 2
0
11.0 *7
F5-01
Channel 1 output selection
0
0.5 *2
F5-02
Channel 2 output selection
1
2.0 *7
F5-03
Channel 3 output selection
2
1.90 *6
2.90 *6
1.20 *6
F5-04
F5-05
F5-06
Channel 4 output selection
Channel 5 output selection
Channel 6 output selection
4
6
37
4
F5-07
Channel 7 output selection
0F
9.842
18.2*6
F5-08
F5-09
0F
0
0.40*6
F6-01
600
F6-02
Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO)
1
F6-03
F1-03
Operation selection at overspeed
(OS)
1
F6-04
F1-04
Operation selection at deviation
3
F6-06
F1-05
PG rotation
PG division rate (PG pulse monitor)
Integral value during accel/decel
enable/disable
Overspeed detection level
Overspeed detection delay time
Excessive speed deviation detection level
Excessive speed deviation detection delay time
Number of PG gear teeth 1
Number of PG gear teeth 2
PG open-circuit detection time
Bi-polar or uni-polar input selection
0
H1-01
Channel 8 output selection
DO-08 output mode selection
Operation selection after communications error
Input level of external fault from
Communications Option Card
Stopping method for external fault
from Communications Option
Card
Trace sampling from Communications Option Card
Torque reference/torque limit
selection from optical option
Terminal S3 function selection
1
H1-02
Terminal S4 function selection
14
0
H1-03
Terminal S5 function selection
3 (0)*8
115
0.0
H1-04
H1-05
Terminal S6 function selection
Terminal S7 function selection
4 (3)*8
6 (4)*8
10
H1-06
Terminal S8 function selection
8 (6)
0.5
H1-07
Terminal S9 function selection
5
0
0
2.0
H1-08
H1-09
H1-10
32
7
15
0
H2-01
Terminal S10 function selection
Terminal S11 function selection
Terminal S12 function selection
Terminal M1-M2 function selection (contact)
Terminal M3-M4 function selection (open collector)
Terminal M5-M6 function selection (open collector)
Terminal P3 function selection
(open-collector)
Terminal P4 function selection
(open-collector)
Signal level selection (terminal
A1)
Gain (terminal A1)
Bias (terminal A1)
Signal level selection (terminal
A3)
E3-05
E3-06
E3-07
E3-08
E4-01
E4-02
E4-03
E4-04
F1-06
F1-07
F1-08
F1-09
F1-10
F1-11
F1-12
F1-13
F1-14
F2-01
*6
F3-01
Digital input option
0
H2-02
F4-01
Channel 1 monitor selection
2
H2-03
F4-02
Channel 1 gain
1.00
H2-04
F4-03
Channel 2 monitor selection
3
H2-05
F4-04
Channel 2 gain
0.50
H3-01
F4-05
F4-06
Channel 1 output monitor bias
Channel 2 output monitor bias
Analog output signal level for
channel 1
0.0
0.0
H3-02
H3-03
0
H3-04
F4-07
Setting
1
0
1
0
1
24
0
1
2
6
5
0
0
100.0
0
10-21
Table 10.5 User Constants (Continued)
No.
H3-05
H3-06
H3-07
H3-08
Factory
Setting
Multi-function analog input (termi2
nal A3)
Gain (terminal A3)
100.0
Bias (terminal A3)
0.0
Multi-function analog input termi2
nal A2 function selection
Multi-function analog input termi0
nal A2 signal level selection
Setting
No.
Name
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
L2-05
L2-06
Undervoltage detection level
KEB deceleration time
L2-07
Momentary recovery time
Factory
Setting
0.3
190*7
0.0
0*11
H3-10
Gain (terminal A2)
100.0
L3-01
H3-11
H3-12
Bias (terminal A2)
Analog input filter time constant
0.0
0.03
L3-02
L3-03
H4-01
Monitor selection (terminal FM)
2
L3-04
H4-02
Gain (terminal FM)
1.00
L3-05
H4-03
Bias (terminal FM)
0.0
L3-06
H4-04
H4-05
Monitor selection (terminal AM)
Gain (terminal AM)
3
0.50
L4-01
L4-02
H4-06
Bias (terminal AM)
0.0
L4-03
0
L4-04
0
L4-05
1F
3
0
L5-01
L5-02
L6-01
Frequency reduction gain at KEB
start
Stall prevention selection during
accel
Stall prevention level during accel
Stall prevention limit during accel
Stall prevention selection during
decel
Stall prevention selection during
running
Stall prevention level during running
Speed agreement detection level
Speed agreement detection width
Speed agreement detection level
(+/-)
Speed agreement detection width
(+/-)
Operation when frequency reference is missing
Number of auto restart attempts
Auto restart operation selection
Torque detection selection 1
3
L6-02
Torque detection level 1
150
1
L6-03
Torque detection time 1
0.1
5
1
0
1440
100.0
0.0
0.10
L6-04
L6-05
L6-06
L7-01
L7-02
L7-03
L7-04
0
150
0.1
200
200
200
200
2
L8-01
Torque detection selection 2
Torque detection level 2
Torque detection time 2
Forward drive torque limit
Reverse drive torque limit
Forward regenerative torque limit
Reverse regenerative torque limit
Protect selection for internal DB
resistor (Type ERF)
Overheat pre-alarm level
Operation selection after overheat
pre-alarm
Input open-phase protection selection
Output open-phase protection
selection
H3-09
L2-08
100
1
150
50
1
1
160
0.0
2.0
0.0
H5-06
H5-07
H6-01
H6-02
H6-03
H6-04
H6-05
Analog output 1 signal level selection
Analog output 2 signal level selection
Station address
Communication speed selection
Communication parity selection
Stopping method after communication error
Communication error detection
selection
Send wait time
RTS control ON/OFF
Pulse train input function selection
Pulse train input scaling
Pulse train input gain
Pulse train input bias
Pulse train input filter time
H6-06
Pulse train monitor selection
H6-07
Pulse train monitor scaling
1440
L8-02
L1-01
Motor protection selection
1
L8-03
L1-02
Motor protection time constant
1.0
L8-05
3
L8-07
1
L8-09
Ground protection selection
1
0.20
L8-10
Cooling fan control selection
0
0
L8-11
Cooling fan control delay time
60
L8-12
Ambient temperature
45
L8-15
OL2 characteristics selection at
low speeds
1
H4-07
H4-08
H5-01
H5-02
H5-03
H5-04
H5-05
L1-03
L1-04
L1-05
L2-01
L2-02
L2-03
10-22
Name
Alarm operation selection during
motor overheating
Motor overheating operation selection
Motor temperature input filter time
constant
Momentary power loss detection
Momentary power loss ridethru
time
Min. baseblock time
*6
0.1
0.5
2.0
0
0
0
0
0
95
3
0
0
Setting
User Constants
Table 10.5 User Constants (Continued)
No.
L8-18
N1-01
N1-02
N2-01
N2-02
N2-03
N3-01
Soft CLA selection
Hunting-prevention function selection
Hunting-prevention gain
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) gain
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) time constant
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) time constant 2
High-slip braking deceleration frequency width
Factory
Setting
Setting
No.
o2-01
1
o2-02
1.00
o2-03
LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable
STOP key during control circuit
terminal operation
User constant initial value
1.00
o2-04
kVA selection
50
o2-05
750
o2-06
5
o2-07
0
0
0
Read permitted selection
0
0.8
1.00
0
0.178
1.0
6
1
T1-00
T1-01
T1-02
T1-03
T1-04
T1-05
T1-06
Motor 1/2 selection
Autotuning mode selection
Motor output power
Motor rated voltage
Motor rated current
Motor base frequency
Number of motor poles
0
T1-07
Motor base speed
1750
0
T1-08
PG pulses per revolution for teaching
600
1.0
o2-10
N3-04
High-slip braking OL time
40
o2-12
N4-07
Integral time of speed estimator
Proportional gain of speed estimator
Torque adjustment gain
Feeder resistance adjustment gain
Feed forward control selection
Motor acceleration time
0.100
o1-05
0*6
o3-02
High-slip braking stop dwell time
o1-04
0
15
N3-03
o1-03
1
0
o2-08
Feed forward proportional gain
Cumulative operation time setting
Setting
1
o3-01
150
Monitor selection
Monitor selection after power up
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
Setting unit for frequency constants related to V/f characteristics
LCD brightness adjustment
Frequency reference setting
method selection
Operation selection when digital
operator is disconnected
Factory
Setting
Cumulative operation time selection
Fan operation time setting
Fault trace/fault history clear function
Copy function selection
High-slip braking current limit
N4-17
N4-18
N5-01
N5-02
N5-03
o1-01
o1-02
Name
1
N3-02
N4-08
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Name
0
0
0
1
0
0.40
200.0*7
1.90*6
60.00
4
3
1. Not initialized. (Japanese standard specifications: A1-01 = 1, A1-02 = 2)
2. The factory setting will change if the control method is changed. The factory settings given above are for V/f without PG control.
3. Factory setting depends on the control method (A1-02).
4. For V/f with PG control: 1.0
5. For Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW or more: 2.00
6. Setting range and initial setting depend on Inverter capacity.
7. Setting for 200 V class Inverters. For 400 V class Inverters, double the value.
8. Factory setting in the parentheses is for 3-wire sequence.
9. The contents is ignored if the setting is 0.0.
10.E1-13 will have the same value as E1-05 after autotuning.
11.If the set value is 0, acceleration will be to the speeds for the acceleration times (C1-01 to C1-08)
12.The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output. (The value given is for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW.)
10-23
10-24
Index
Symbols
control method selection error, 7-13
control power fault, 7-3
+/- speed, 6-72
cooling fin overheating, 7-3
CPF00 CPF, 7-7
Numerics
CPF01 CPF01, 7-7
CPU internal A/D converter error, 7-7
2-wire sequence, 6-7
CPU-ASIC mutual diagnosis fault, 7-8
3-wire sequence, 6-8
crimp terminals, 2-6, 2-20, 2-36
A
D
AC reactor, 2-15
daily inspection, 8-2
acceleration and deceleration times, 6-15
DC reactor, 2-15
advanced programming mode, 3-4, 3-9
detecting motor overspeed, 6-145
ASIC internal RAM fault, 7-8
detecting motor torque, 6-44
ASIC version fault, 7-8
detecting PG open circuit, 6-145
auto restart, 6-63
DEV Speed Deviation, 7-10
autotuning, 4-9
digital operator, 3-2
autotuning mode, 3-4, 3-13
digital operator communications error 1, 7-7
digital operator communications error 2, 7-7
B
digital operator connection fault, 7-6
digital output cards, 6-146
baseblock circuit error, 7-7
drive mode, 3-4, 3-6
braking resistor, 2-19
dwell function, 6-19
braking resistor unit, 2-19
BUS Option Com Err, 7-7, 7-12
E
C
EEPROM error, 7-7
EEPROM write error, 7-14
CALL Com Call, 7-12
EF External Fault, 7-9
CE MEMOBUS Com Err, 7-11
EF0 Opt External Flt, 7-6, 7-10
CE Memobus Com Err, 7-6
emergency stop, 6-14
CF out of control, 7-5
enclosed wall-mounted type, 1-4
circuit breaker, 2-14
ERR EEPROM R/W Err, 7-14
common specifications, 9-4
excessive speed deviation, 7-5, 7-10
communications on standby, 7-12
external fault function, 6-75
communications option card A/D converter error, 7-8
communications option card DPRAM error, 7-8
F
communications option card model code error, 7-8
communications option card self diagnostic error, 7-8
FBL Feedback Loss, 7-5, 7-11
constant selection error, 7-13
FJOG, 6-74
constant setting error, 7-14
forward/reverse run commands input together, 7-9
constant setting range error, 7-13
frequency reference, 6-2, 6-24
control circuit terminals, 2-20
fuse blown, 7-2
control fault, 7-5
control method, 4-8
Index-1
Index
G
motor overload, 7-4
motor protection operation time, 6-51
ground fault, 7-2
mounting dimensions, 1-7
ground fault interrupter, 2-14
multi-function analog input, 6-41
ground wiring, 2-18
multi-function analog input selection error, 7-13
multi-function input selection error, 7-13
H
multi-speed operation, 6-5
high-slip braking OL, 7-4
N
hunting-prevention function, 6-36
noise filter, 2-15
I
no-load operation, 4-14
number of gear teeth between PG and motor, 6-145
incorrect inverter capacity setting, 7-13
number of PG pulses, 6-144
inductive noise, 2-17
inrush prevention circuit fault, 7-3
O
installation site, 1-9
installed braking resistor overheating, 7-4
OH Heatsink Overtemp, 7-9
internal braking transistor fault, 7-4
OH2 Over Heat 2, 7-9
inverter input voltage, 6-108
OH3 Motor Overheat 1, 7-9
inverter overload, 7-4
OL3 Overtorque Det 1, 7-9
inverter’s cooling fan stopped, 7-3
OL4 Overtorque Det 2, 7-10
OPE01 kVA Selection, 7-13
J
OPE011 Carr Freq/On-Delay, 7-14
OPE02 Limit, 7-13
jump frequency function, 6-27
OPE03 Terminal, 7-13
OPE05 Sequence Select, 7-13
L
OPE06 PG Opt Missing, 7-13
OPE07 Analog Selection, 7-13
limiting motor rotation direction, 6-54
OPE08, 7-13
loaded operation, 4-14
OPE09, 7-13
OPE10 V/f Ptrn Setting, 7-13
M
open chassis type, 1-4
open-loop vector control, 4-9
magnetic contactor, 2-15
operation errors, 7-13
main circuit overvoltage, 7-2
OPR Oper Disconnect, 7-6
main circuit undervoltage, 7-3, 7-9
option card communications error, 7-12
main circuit voltage fault, 7-3
option card connection error, 7-7
maintenance and inspection, 8-1
option card selection error, 7-13
MEMOBUS communications, 6-81
option communications error, 7-7
MEMOBUS communications error, 7-6, 7-11
OS Overspeed Det, 7-10
modes, 3-4
output open-phase, 7-3
motor constants, 6-105
OV DC Bus Overvolt, 7-9
motor overheating, 7-9
overcurrent, 7-2
motor overheating alarm, 7-3
overspeed, 7-5, 7-10
motor overheating fault, 7-3
Index-2
Index
overtorque 2, 7-10
switching motors when the power supply is ON, 6-133
overtorque detected 1, 7-4
overtorque detected 2, 7-4
T
terminal block, 2-5
P
thermal overload relay, 2-17
password, 4-15, 6-140
tightening torque, 2-36
periodic inspection, 8-2
timer function, 6-93
periodic maintenance of parts, 8-3
torque compensation, 6-34
PG (encoder) pulses, 2-37
torque limit function, 6-41
PG disconnection, 7-10
trial operation, 4-1
PG disconnection detected, 7-5
troubleshooting, 7-1, 7-17
PG pulse monitor output dividing ratio, 6-145
PG rotation direction, 6-144
U
PG speed control card, 6-144
PG speed control cards, 2-29
UL3 Undertorq Det 1, 7-10
PGO PG Open, 7-10
UL4 Undertorq Det 2, 7-10
PID control, 6-94
undertorque 1, 7-10
PID control selection error, 7-13
undertorque 2, 7-10
PID feedback reference lost, 7-5, 7-11
undertorque detected 1, 7-4
power ON, 4-3
undertorque detected 2, 7-5
user constant access levels, 4-15
UV DC Bus Undervolt, 7-9
Q
quick programming mode, 3-4, 3-7
V
V/f control, 4-8
R
V/f control with PG, 4-8
radio interference, 2-18
V/f pattern, 6-107, 6-108
rated current, 6-50
verify mode, 3-4, 3-12
RJOG, 6-74
run command, 6-7
W
watchdog timer fault, 7-8
S
wire size, 2-20
S-curve characteristics, 6-18
wiring, 2-1
slip compensation function, 6-32
speed control with PG, 6-142
stabilizing speed, 6-37
stall prevention function, 6-20, 6-22, 6-44
standard connection diagrams, 2-13
standard inverter specifications, 9-2
stopping methods, 6-9
straight solderless terminals, 2-21, 2-36
surge absorber, 2-15
Index-3
">